To open the menu

please click on the icon

near the top left
of this page.
///
\\\
To find keywords
Enter the word in the “Find”
Or “Search” box at the top.
 MASSEY FERGUSON
2 2 1 0 - 2 2 2 0 - 2 2 3 0

r-\ <°

3J®
@
M

Workshop manual
P/N° 3662238M1

MASSEY FERGUSON
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chap. 1 INTRODUCTION

Chap. 2 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Chap. 3 ENGINE

Chap. 4 CLUTCH

Chap. 5 TRANSMISSION

CHap. 6 4WD FRONT AXLE

Chap. 7 POWER TAKE-OFF

Chap. 8 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Chap. 9 ELECTRONIC POWER LIFT

Chap. 10CAB

Chap. 11 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Chap. 12 SPECIAL TOOLS

MASSEY FERGUSON
PRE-SALE SERVICE
42042 FABBRICO (RE) ITALY
 INTRODUCTION

CHAP.1

INDEX

Sect. 1 Reading the manual. .................................................................. 1-3

1-1 Introduction ..................................................................... 1-4
1-2 Strutture of the manual ................................................... 1-4

Sect. 2 Tractor identification and technical specifications. ............... 1-5

2-1 Tractor identification ........................................................ 1-6
2-2 Weights and dimensions................................................. 1-7
2-3 Engine specifications ...................................................... 1-8
2-4 Clutch specifications ....................................................... 1-9
2-5 Transmission specifications .......................................... 1-10
2-6 Power take-off specifications ........................................ 1-11
2-7 Assale a 2 RM .............................................................. 1-11
2-8 4WD front axle specifications (Dana)........................... 1-12
2-9 Specifications of 4WD front axle with bevel gear pairs ........ 1-13

Sect. 3 Working in safety. ..................................................................... 1-17

3-1 Essential rules for accident prevention ........................ 1-18
3-2 Danger decals ............................................................... 1-24
3-3 Replacing tractor parts ................................................. 1-26
3-4 Safe use of the tractor .................................................. 1-26

Sect. 4 Pre-delivery inspections and maintenance. ......................... 1-29

4-1 General information ...................................................... 1-30
4-2 Inspections before delivery ........................................... 1-30
4-3 Routine maintenance guide.......................................... 1-31

1-1
 INTRODUCTION

CHAP.1

Sect. 5 Conversion tables..................................................................... 1-33

5-1 Length ........................................................................... 1-34
5-2 Area ............................................................................... 1-37
5-3 Volume .......................................................................... 1-38
5-4 Weight ........................................................................... 1-41
5-5 Pressure ........................................................................ 1-43
5-6 Moment of rotation ........................................................ 1-45
5-7 Temperature .................................................................. 1-47

Sect. 6 Types of Loctite for fixing and sealing. ................................. 1-49

Sect. 7 Table of bolt driving torques. .................................................. 1-51

1-2
 INTRODUCTION

CHAP. 1

Reading the manual

INDEX

Sect.1 Reading the manual

1-1 Introduction ..................................................................... 1-4

1-2 Structure of the manual .................................................. 1-4

1-3
 INTRODUCTION

Sect.1 - Reading the manual

1-1 Introduction
The purpose of this manual is to provide the owner
and user of Massey Ferguson 2210 - 2220 - 2230
tractors with clear instructions on how to split the tractor
parts.
It is designed for use by the workshop head since it
does not give details about the demounting, remoun-
ting and adjustment operations for all the assemblies,
but just for those that require particular knowledge or
recommendations.

Before reading the manual, it is essential to read

sect.3: WORKING IN SAFETY in order to prevent errors
or mistakes that could jeopardize the safety of the
technicians in the workshop.

The information in this manual was up to date at the

time of publication. Massey Ferguson reserves the ri-
ght to make modifications without being obliged to give
notice.
Please contact your area dealer or the importer if di-
screpancies are discovered or for any other require-
ment.

1.2 Structure of the manual

The manual is divided into chapters (chap.) and each
chapter into sections (sect.). Page numbering begins
with 1 for each chapter with the number of the chap-
ter itself alongside.

Example: 5-7 indicates page 7 of chapter 5.

Numbering of the figures also begins with 1 in each

chapter with the chapter number alongside.

Example: Fig. 73-5, indicates figure 73 of chapter 5.

The tools required for all the demounting, remounting

and adjustment operations are listed at the end of each
chapter or important section. Not all the tools listed at
the end of the chapter or section are, however, men-
tioned in the text, just those considered essential for
correct demounting, remounting and adjustment of the
assembly in question.
The constructional drawings of all the tools described
in the various chapters or sections are listed in chap-
ter 12 to allow the dealer to provide his workshop with
all those considered of importance.

1-4
 INTRODUCTION

CHAP. 1

Tractor identification and technical specifications

INDEX

Sect.2 Tractor identification and technical specifications

2-1 Tractor identification ........................................................ 1-6

2-2 Weights and dimensions................................................. 1-7
2-3 Engine specifications ...................................................... 1-8
2-4 Clutch specifications ....................................................... 1-9
2-5 Transmission specifications .......................................... 1-10
2-6 Power take-off specifications ........................................ 1-11
2-7 4WD front axle specifications ....................................... 1-12
2-8 Hydraulic circuit specifications ..................................... 1-13

1-5
 INTRODUCTION

*
Sect. 2 - Tractor identifi
2-1 Tractor identificatio
n
cation / technical specifications
*33

a serial number stamped

The tractor is identified by Hi
nsmission housing and on
on the rear part of the tra
the bonnet. The engine als
o has its own serial
e block.
nu m-
m
ber stamped on the engin
ng
icient service when orderi
To ensure a quick and eff i
technical specification or s
spare parts or asking for d en gi-
state the chassis an I,
other information, always
ne serial number. PTA /V,'
Fig.1-1
. c
........................................ mi
Chassis serial number .... PKa=
.... .... ................................... A -Engine serial number
e ser ial nu mb er ....
Engin (engine block)
mber
.... ... B - Ch assis type and serial nu
ial nu mb er .... .... .... .... ............................ r cor e)
Cab ser (on front radiato
.... .... ..
................................
Type of tractor ................
.
........................................
Owner / Operator ............
.
ss ....................................
Dealer's or Agent's addre
........................................
........................................
.......................................
Delivery date .................... Vi
........................................ £
Warranty expiry date ........

a
Type of tractor and chas
Fig.2-1

sis serial number

(lower dashboard panel).

JT= L\T\
ri
X3
<s
n
-t

X
®
C'
f

o t® m’x3 Fig.4-1
i-L
Fig.3-1 3 er
Cab type and serial numb
of the front axle
Type and serial number (on rear cab piller).
(on axle housing).
1-6
 INTRODUCTION

Tractor identification and technical specifications

2-2 Weights and 2
2?
dimensions
L
/ /1
/•

?> n
'81
i
y
A /

X -i

XX
/\
D u mi
<* B
«- E
F
J
« C Fig.5-1
* G

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS MASSEY FERGUSON 2210 MASSEY FERGUSON 2220 MASSEY FERGUSON 2230

2WD 4WD 2WD 4WD 2WD 4WD

With tyres:
- Front 750-16 320/70 R20 7.50-16 320/70 R24 7.50-16 320/70 R24
- Rear 14.9 R28 420/70 R28 14.9 R28 480/80 R30 14.9 R30 480/70 R30

WEIGHTS

In running order,
with cab without ballast Kg 2350 2470 2350 2550 2350 2550
with front / rear ballast Kg 2850 3000 2880 3080 2880 3080

DIMENSIONS

A - Height at cab mm 2360 2425 2360 2445 2360 2445

B - Wheelbase mm 2006 2006 - 2154 - 2154
C - Maximum length
- without front ballast mm 3650 3605 - 3708 - 3708
- with front ballast mm 3915 3915 - 4017 - 4017
D - Ground clearance:
- under tow hook mm 250 395 270 455 270 455
- under front axle mm - 445 - 415 - 415
E - Rear track (see tables) mm 1354-1866 1338-1850 1562-1962 1562-1962 1562-1962 1562-1962
F - Front track (see tables) mm 1320-1620 1436-1696 1320-1620 1562-1962 1320-1620 1562-1962
G - Maximum width:
- front axle mm 2245 2270 2348 2348 2348 2348
- rear axle mm 1732 1755 - 1549 - 1549

1-7
 INTRODUCTION

Tractor identification and technical specifications

SHERPA SPECIFICATIONS MASSEY FERGUSON 2210 MASSEY FERGUSON 2220 MASSEY FERGUSON 2230

With tyres: Front 280/70-R20 300/70-R20 260/80 R20

- Rear 14.9 - R28 420/70-R28 380/70-R28

WEIGHTS

In running order, with cab without ballast Kg 2430 2500 2500

with front / rear ballast Kg 2960 3030 3030

DIMENSIONS

A - Height at cab mm 2354 2385 2385

B - Min/max width mm 1732/2244 1777/2286 1777/2286
C - Ground clearance mm 335 345 345
D - Wheelbase mm 1996 2123 2123
E - Max length (with 2 ballasts) mm 3904 3904 3904
F - Tracks: Front min/max mm 1325/1675 1325/1675 1325/1675
- Rear min/max mm 1354/1866 1354/1866 1354/1866

2-3 Engine specifications

ENGINE MASSEY FERGUSON 2210 MASSEY FERGUSON 2220 MASSEY FERGUSON 2230

Type: Perkins diesel, a iniezione diretta

Model 903,27 1004,40 1004,42
Aspiration Naturale Naturale Naturale
Number of cylinders 3 4 4
Bore mm 95 100 103
Stroke mm 127 127 127
Swept volume liters 2.7 3,99 4,233
Compression ratio 17,25:1 17.25:1 17.25:1
Power(DIN 700200) HP/kW 54/39.7 66/48.6 73/54
Max. speed under load RPM 2300 2200 2200
Max. speed with no load RPM 2475 2375 2310
Max. torque (DIN 70020) Nm 193,1 - 282
Max. torque speed RPM 1350 - 1400
Idling rate RPM 750 750 750

VALVE GEAR

Type Overhead valves controlled by tappets

tappet gap with engine cold:
- Intake (mm) 0.20 0.20 0.20
- Exhaust (mm) 0.45 0.45 0.45

FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel pump AC-DELCO AC-DELCO AC-DELCO

Injection pump ROTARY LUCAS DP 202 ROTARY LUCAS DP 202 ROTARY LUCAS DP 202
Filter on injection pump delivery CAV CAV CAV
Injection order 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-3-4-2
Injectors PERKINS PERKINS PERKINS
Injector pressure setting (bar) 296 296 290
Cold starting device Thermostarter
Air filter Dry, with two elements removable for maintenance
1 1

1-8
 INTRODUCTION

Tractor identification and technical specifications

2-4 Clutch specifications
Manufacturer Luk (Omg)

Type Single-plate (with hydraulic PTO)

Double-plate (with mechanical PTO)

Dimensions 11" (280 mm.) Single-plate (Massey Ferguson 2210-2220)

11" (245/280 mm.) Double-plate (Massey Ferguson 2210-2220)
12" (304.8 mm.) Single-plate (Massey Ferguson 2230)
12"/11 (304.8/880 mm.) Double-plate (Massey Ferguson 2230)

Material Gearshift plate with 5 cerametallic plaques

Organic PTO plate

2-5 Transmission specifications

Manufacturer Massey Ferguson

Gearbox
Speeds Four synchronized speeds with infinitely meshed
helical gears
Type of reduction ranges Three forward ranges (Slow-Normal-Fast)
Creeper (7.333 reduction).
Reverse shuttle Synchronized on gearbox input
Number of speeds 12 forward and 12 reverse speeds with standard gearbox
15 forward and 15 reverse speeds with optional
24 forward and 24 reverse speeds with creeper
30 forward and 30 reverse speeds with optional gearbox
48/60 forward and 48/60 reverse speeds with Hi-Lo

Rear axle
Bevel gear pair 9/41 with helical toothing, Gleason type
Final reduction Straight-tooth type with 10/51 or 11/49 ratios (Massey Ferguson 2210)
or 11/62 ratio (Massey Ferguson 2220-2230)
Total reduction ratio 23.23 or 20.29
Type of Differential With two planetaries
Differential lock With mechanical or electrohydraulic control,
mechanically engaged
Disengaged by means of the brakes (electrohydraulic control)

Rear brakes
Type Oil cooled multiple-plate type
Number of friction disks 8 (4 each side)
Friction disk material Graphitized resin
Disk diameter 166x110 mm
Total braking area 1900 cm2
Diameter of braking cylinder 25.4 mm
Parking brake Mechanical, engaged by a hand lever

Rear brakes (4WD axle)

Type Oil colled multiple plate
Number of friction disks 8 (2 each side)
Friction disk material Graphitized resin
Disk diameter 143x91 mm
Total braking area 764.5 cm2

1-9
 INTRODUCTION

Tractor identification and technical specifications

Massey Ferguson 2220-2230 Speed in kph with 2200 RPM engine rate. Gearbox: 4 gears = 30 kph; 5 gears = 40 kph
Hi-Lo Inserito Hi-Lo Disinserito

Option Range Gear 14.9R30 16.9R28 16.9R24 14.9R30 16.9R28 16.9R24

480/70R30 540/65R28 480/70R30 540/65R28
1 0.18 0.17 0.16 0.22 0.21 0.19
4 2
3
4
0.24
0.35
0.46
0.23
0.33
0.45
0.21
0.31
0.41
0.29
0.42
0.56
0.28
0.40
0.54
0.26
0.37
1.50

*
Slow 5 0.62 0.60 0.55 0.74 0.71 0.66
1 0.49 0.47 0.43 0.58 0.56 0.52

i
CREEPER

2 0.65 0.63 0.58 0.78 0.75 0.70

3 0.93 0.90 0.83 1.12 1.08 1.00
4 1.25 1.20 1.11 1.49 1.44 1.33
Normal 5 1.66 1.60 1.48 1.99 1.92 1.77
1 1.33 1.29 1.19 1.60 1.54 1.42
2 1.79 1.72 1.59 2.14 2.06 1.91
3 2.55 2.46 2.28 3.06 2.95 2.73
4 3.41 3.28 3.04 4.08 3.93 3.64
Fast 5 4.54 4.37 4.05 5.43 5.24 4.85
FORWARD SPEEDS

1 1.34 1.29 1.20 1.61 1.55 1.43

2 1.80 1.73 1.60 2.15 2.08 1.92
3 2.57 2.48 2.29 3.08 2.96 2.74
4 3.43 3.30 3.06 4.10 3.95 3.66
Slow 5 4.56 4.40 4.07 5.46 5.27 4.87
STANDARD SPEEDS

1 3.59 3.46 3.20 4.30 4.15 3.84

i
Normal
2
3
4
5
4.81
6.87
9.16
12.20
4.64
6.62
8.83
11.76
4.29
6.13
8.17
10.88
5.77
8.23
10.97
14.61
5.56
7.93
10.58
14.08
5.14
7.34
9.79
13.03
1 9.81 9.46 8.75 11.75 11.32 10.48
2 13.14 12.67 11.72 15.74 15.17 14.04
3 18.75 18.07 16.72 22.45 21.64 20.03
4 25.01 24.11 22.31 29.95 28.87 26.72
Fast 5 33.30 32.10 29.71 39.88 38.44 35.57
1 0.18 0.17 0.16 0.22 0.21 0.19

X4 Slow
2
3
4
5
0.24
0.35
0.47
0.62
0.24
1.34
0.45
0.60
0.22
1.31
0.42
0.56
0.29
1.42
0.56
0.75
0.28
0.40
0.54
0.72
0.26
0.37
0.50
0.67
1 0.49 0.47 0.44 0.59 0.57 0.53
CREEPER

i
Normal
2
3
4
5
0.56
0.94
1.26
1.68
0.64
0.91
1.21
1.62
0.59
0.84
1.12
1.50
0.79
1.13
1.51
2.01
0.76
1.09
1.45
1.94
0.70
1.01
1.34
1.79
1 1.35 1.30 1.20 1.61 1.56 1.44
2 1.81 1.74 1.61 2.16 2.09 1.93
3 2.58 2.49 2.30 3.09 2.98 2.76
4 3.44 3.32 3.07 4.12 3.98 3.68
Fast 5 4.59 4.42 4.09 5.49 5.29 4.90
REVERSE SHUTTLE

1 1.36 1.31 1.21 1.62 1.57 1.45

2 1.82 1.75 1.62 2.18 2.10 1.94
3 2.60 2.50 2.31 3.11 3.00 2.77
4 3.46 3.34 3.09 4.15 4.00 3.70
Slow 5 4.61 4.44 4.11 5.52 5.32 4.92
STANDARD SPEEDS

1 3.63 3.50 3.24 4.35 4.19 3.88

i
Normal
2
3
4
5
4.87
6.94
9.26
12.33
4.69
6.69
8.93
11.88
4.34
6.19
8.26
11.00
5.83
8.32
11.09
14.76
5.62
8.02
10.69
14.23
5.20
7.42
9.89
13.17
1 9.91 9.56 8.84 11.87 11.44 10.59
2 13.28 12.80 11.85 15.91 15.33 14.19
3 18.95 18.27 16.90 22.69 21.87 20.24
4 25.28 24.37 22.55 30.27 29.18 27.00
Fast 5 33.66 32.45 30.02 40.30 38.85 35.95

1 - 10
 INTRODUCTION

Tractor identification and technical specifications

2-6 Power take-off specifications

Type: Independent

Type of clutch: Mechanical with two speeds 540/750 or 540/1000 RPM

Electrohydraulic with 2 or 4 speeds engaged by a hydraulic clutch

and with electrohydraulic control

PTO output shaft In compliance with Asae standards13/8 (34.9 mm) with 6 splines

PTO speed 2 speeds

- 540 RPM with engine at 2070 RPM

- 540 ECO RPM with engine at 1373 RPM (on request). (4-speed hydraulic PTO).
- 540 ECO RPM with engine at 1339 RPM (on request). (2-speed PTO).
- 1000 RPM with engine at 2107 RPM (on request, instead of the 540 ECO RPM PTO).
- PTO proportional to ground speed; PTO shaft turns per wheel turn:
- 15.09 (Rear final drives 10 / 51) or 13.188 (Rear final drives 11 / 49).
- 540 RPM PTO with drive reversal with engine at 2061 RPM
- (on request in certain markets only).

2-7 2WD axle

Type: Boxed and swivelling around the central pivot

N° tracks 4 1320

Min. track width 1320 mm

1420
Max. track width 1620 mm
—
LJI t;

1520
Track width increases 100 mm

Max. turning angle 55°

1620
Max. angle of oscillation 12° z

1 - 11
 INTRODUCTION

Tractor identification and technical specifications

2-8 4WD (Dana) front axle specifications
Type of axle In spheroidal cast iron, oscillating with central pivot

Type of reductions
Standard axle with central pinion and ring gear (Massey Ferguson 2210-2220):39/8
Standard axle withcentral pinion and ring gear (Massey Ferguson 2230):53/13
Sherpa axle with central pinion and ring gear (Massey Ferguson 2210-2220):41/9
Sherpa axle with central pinion and ring gear (Massey Ferguson 2210-2220):51/13
Standard axle with dropped final drive (Massey Ferguson 2210-2220):47/11
Sperpa axle dropped final drive 4.6

Clutch control Mechanical with hand lever or electrohydraulic

Ratio between front and rear axle 1.430 with 4 WD

2.500 with Fast Run

Type of hydraulic clutch Hydraulic clutch for 4 WD with oil-cooled disks

electrohydraulic control with 1:1 input/output ratio
Hydraulic clutch with oil-cooled disks for Fast Run
with automatic engagement when the steering angle
exceeds 35°.
Input/output ratio 1:1.78

Max. steering angle 55°

Max. angle swing 8°

Turning radius 3054 mm.

1 - 12
 INTRODUCTION

Tractor identification and technical specifications

2-9 Technical specifications of 4WD front axle with bevel gear pairs
Type of axle In spheroidal cast iron swivelling around a
central pivot

Type of reductions Central pinion and ring gear 14/32

20/26 and 18/41 double bevel drive
and 3.333 epicyclic final drive

Clutch control Mechanical with hand lever or electrohydraulic

Ratio between front and rear axle 1.430 with 4WD

2.543 with Fast Run

Type of hydraulic clutch Hydraulic clutch for 4WD with oil-cooled disks,
electrohydraulic control and 1:1 input/output ratio
Hydraulic clutch with oil-cooled discs for Fast Run
with automatic engagement when the steering an-
gle exceeds 35°.
1:1.78 input/output ratio

Max. steering angle 52°

Max. axle swing 8°

Turning radius 3054 mm.

1 - 13
 INTRODUCTION

Tractor identification and technical specifications

2-10 Hydraulic circuit specifications
PUMP
Type Double gear type (in tandem)
Make Bosch.
Model A - 510 - 845 - 262
Pump / engine RPM ratio 1: 1.25
5
Max. operating pressure 180 ± bar0

Max. flow at engine rate 30 l.

Max. flow at engine rate 23.6 L
Position front side to left of engine
Drive Timing system gears
Quantity of hydraulic oil / transmission 35 l.
Type of oil transfluid AS/B.

FILTERS
Type (on the intake) With single washable metal gauze cartridge
filtering degree 40 micron
Type (on the delivery) with single replaceable paper cartridge
filtering degree 15/20 micron

STEERING SYSTEM
System Power steering system
Make Danfoss
Type Orbitrol ospc 70 4 W.D. Orbitrol ospc 50 2 W.D.
4 WD nominal cylinder 70 cc. per rev.
2 WD nominal cylinder 50 cc. per rev.

5
Calibrating valve 155 ± (built into the valve system block)
0

Antishock valve calibration 205 bar (built into the valve system block)

Steering cylinder Quantity 1

Type double-acting, balanced
Make Massey Ferguson
dimensions 32 x 48 x 242 /2 mm.
pump delivery 27.3 l. / min. at 2600 RPM engine rate
steering wheel turns 2 turns to the right
steering wheel turns 1.75 turns to the left
steering wheel diameter 360 mm.

HYDRAULIC POWER PACK

Make Comatrol
Type Electrohydraulic
Low pressure calibrating valve 18 bar
Cooling circuit calibrating valve 5 bar
Compensating valve Modular
Forced lubrication valve 1.5 bar
Oil outlet towards the transmission Spray lubrication
Uses BLc - PTO/FRn - STr - DTi
Type of engagement Electrohydraulic

1 - 14
 INTRODUCTION

Tractor identification and technical specifications

AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVES
Make Salami
Operation Standard-Single / double acting, hydraulic, with “Kick out”
automatic release
Type Open center with “Push - Pull” quick couplings

5
Calibrating valve 180 ± bar0

Max. flow rate 35 l. / min.

Max. quantity 3 elements
Connection to circuit in series
Position at rear

HYDRAULIC MECHANICAL POWER LIFT

Make Mita / Massey Ferguson
Operating mode position / draft control
intermix - float mode lowering adjustment

Hydraulic system with open-center

Standard cylinder single-acting
Dimensions ø 90 x 116 stroke
Supplementary cylinders 2 single-acting types
dimensions ø 40 x 220 stroke
5
Calibrating valve 180 ± bar0

5
Antishock valve 200 ± bar0

LIFTING CAPACITY
Standard 2100 Kg.
With 2 supplementary cylinders 3400 Kg.
lower links Class 1 and 2
third point with hydraulic ram (optional)

1 - 15
 INTRODUCTION

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

1 - 16
 INTRODUCTION

CHAP. 1

Working in safety

INDEX

Sect. 3 Working in safety

3-1 Essential rules for prevention ....................................... 1-18

3-2 Safety decals ................................................................ 1-24
3-3 Replacing tractor parts ................................................. 1-26
3-4 Safe use of the tractor .................................................. 1-26

1 - 17
 INTRODUCTION

Sect.3 - Working in safety

3-1 Essential rules
for prevention
The structures, systems and equipment in repair
shops must conform to the current laws governing
labour safety in order to safeguard the health and
safety of each worker.
Although they are obviously only partial, the regula-
tions given in this section inform the workers about
the dangers they may encounter on the job.
Always bear your safety and that of others in mind
whenever you work on a machine, whichever type it
may be.
To work in complete safety, it is essential to know the
nature of the job, to correctly use the tools and mate-
rials required and to rely on your common sense

To prevent accidents, it is important to:

- BEHAVE correctly and act with caution;

- Pay ATTENTION and keep your actions under

control;

- Comply with the REGULATIONS and rules of

behaviour of a general character.

To

work
in
SAFETY
always think before acting

1 - 18
 INTRODUCTION

Working in safety
A - Rules of a general character Always wear protective clothing (goggles - visors -
gloves - footwear, etc.).
Preliminary instructions
- always comply with the instructions received from
superiors;

- always comply with the indications on the stickers

and signs;

- never use machines or systems without authoriza-

tion and never carry out operations and manoeu-
vres that are the competence of others;

- use the safety devices and other means of protec-

tion with care;
© # @
- inform your superiors if the safety and protective
means and devices are defective or about any dan-
ger conditions of which you may become aware;

- never remove or modify the safety devices and other

means of protection without having been authori-
zed to do so;
- Let your superiors know immediately about any
accidents you have had or about which you may
have become aware;
- keep your place of work clean and orderly. Keep
the floor clear of any materials that are not strictly
required for the job in hand and prevent greasy or
oily substances from being spilt (clean them up with
absorbent paper if this should occur).
Work clothes
- Do not wear loose clothing that can become cau-
ght up in moving parts or garments that are not ti-
ght at the cuffs;
- do not wear necklaces, rings, bracelets and simi-
lar;
- do not clean the garments with inflammable or har-
mful substances, or using compressed air;
Machines and systems
- Before beginning work, make sure that the guards
and screens are in place, in a good condition and
that the safety devices are functional;
- check the operation of any exhaust or ventilating
systems installed;
- never remove the guards or safety devices from
the machine unless this is strictly necessary and
after having been authorized to do so by your su-
periors, who will also indicate the precautions that
must be taken;
- the protections and safety devices must be fitted
back in place and be re-activated as soon as the
reasons for their having been temporarily removed
have ceased;
- it is forbidden to clean, oil or grease moving parts
of machines and systems by hand.
- it is forbidden to adjust or work on moving parts.

- do not wear sandals, slippers, clogs or shoes with

high heels.

1 - 19
 INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
Lifting and carrying
By hand
- do not bend your back to lift loads;
- hold the load safely where it is easy to get a good
grip;
- do not carry loads with greasy or oily hands;
- hand trucks without drawbars should be pushed,
not pulled;
- never deposit loads near stairs, fire-fighting sy-
stems, first-aid means or places of transit.
On vehicles
- comply with the capacity limits and regulate your
speed according to the road conditions, the load,
and the braking distance;
- make sure the loads are well harnessed and faste-
ned;
- avoid passing with hanging loads in places where
dropping could cause a danger hazard. If this is
inevitable, indicate when the manoeuvre is made
or have all bystanders move out of the area.
Internal circulation
People
- use the correct and authorized routes
(pedestrian crossings, gangways and similar);
- do not run;
- do not walk or stand under hanging loads or in pla-
ces where loads could drop;
- do not ride on means of transport or lifting equip-
ment designed for handling materials alone.
1 - 20
Vehicles
- proceed at a moderate speed and with due care,
depending on the road conditions. Comply with the
farm/company rules and with the road signs.
Electricity
- do not make electrical connections with makeshift
means and never ever insert the ends of wet con-
ductors into sockets;
- disconnect plugs from sockets by holding the outer
casing, never by pulling the electric cable;
- avoid twisting the cables;
- frequently check the insulating material of con-
ductors and electrical equipment and make sure
that it is in a good condition;
- point out any damage to electrical equipment and
systems, with particular reference to the condition
of the ground conductors;
- do not open cabinets or containers housing electri-
cal equipment or carry out work inside unless you
are trained and authorized to do so;
- watch out for overhead electric lines when approa-
ching or working in their vicinity.
Fire outbreaks
In departments or processes where there may be a
danger of fire outbreaks owing to the presence or use
of inflammable substances:
- it is forbidden to smoke;
- it is forbidden to use equipment with naked flames
or to handle glowing materials;
- do not place inflammable materials near heat sour-
ces;
- do not store materials in front of extinguishers or
fire hydrants;.
 INTRODUCTION

Working in safety
Dangerous substances and preparations GUIDE TO CHOOSING THE RIGHT EXTINGUISHER
EXTINGUISHING AGENT
TYPE OF FIRE WATER SPECIAL
POWDER CO2 FOAM
Take the following precautions when using dangerous POWDERS

chemical products (fire, explosion, irritation, caustic A

5)
burning, scalding, intoxication:
YES YES YES YES NO Only for small fires.
- only keep receptacles containing dangerous pro- Ordinary solid
fuels
Does not extinguish
the embers

ducts open for the time strictly required for their

use; B
- do not use or transfer dangerous products into con-
M NO YES YES YES NO
Unless suitable
equipment is used
tainers that are not designed for this use, or into Inflammable liquids

those without indications as to their contents or

without the relative markings;
C

- comply with the indications on the relative labels

when using chemical products.
I
Inflammable gases
NO YES YES NO NO
D b
t,
Defence against gas, fumes, dust, harmful J NO NO NO NO YES
May react with
water
vapours Combustible metals

E \A>\i
- make sure that the exhausting systems are opera-
ting; NO YES YES NO NO
Electrical equipment

- wear protective clothing and equipment;

- install temporary exhausts as near as possible to

the sources, if necessary;

- do not work in the direction of the flow of polluting

substances blown out by exhaust systems.

Agents of a biological nature

- in the event of fermentation (development of algae),

avoid direct contact and act with appropriate protecti-
ve means. Only enter places where anaerobic fermen-
tation may have taken place and produced fumes (e.g.
ammoniacal) after having worn a protective mask.

1 - 21
*
INTRODUCTION

Working in safety
B - Tools 31 DIF GL
Tool used to mount the bushing on the differential housing.

Makeshift, inadequate or defective tools may cause

faults or accidents. Never use the wrong tools since
such action could cause injuries and spoil the finished
job. 32 DIF GL
Tool used to insert the external rings on the taper bearings of the rear
Always use the special tools recommended by the differential (43 Fig.92/93-5)

manufacturer when demounting, overhauling and re-

mounting the various parts of a tractor. (Fig. 6-1)
-Use of specific tools will reduce the effort and time 0
required for the job and, consequently, the cost. You
33 DIF GL
will also be certain that the work has been correctly Puller for the normal and fast upper shaft mounted on the differential
done. housing (16 Fig.113-5)

Never use:
- A hammer with a loose head or cracked handle.
- Pincers or pieces of iron instead of a hammer;
drill bits or bolts instead of pin drivers. 34 DIF GL
Tool used to mount the needle bearing on the slow reduction range gear
- Worn or welded wrenches. shaft (15 Fig.52/53-5)
- A steel hammer to tap bearings or stress relieved
components (use one made of bronze or brass). ji

The engine and gearbox and the front and rear tran- Fig.6-1
smissions must be split for certain jobs on the tractor
components. This operation is facilitated and made
safer by use of the special divider kit (Fig.7-1).
J

When lifting weights, make sure that the chains, lifting

brackets, hooks, cables or ropes comply with CE stan-
SI
dards.
Unless different indications are given, an adjustable r_ V
V
,N<
bracket must be used when particularly heavy parts id i

are removed.
All chains and cables must be parallel to each other
and as near to the vertical as possible, depending on
SROT:
%• A
the component being lifted. dfti Ail ,•* /—!

Fig.7-1
C - First Aid
Mechanics are exposed to various risks at work.
If anyone should be injured, use sterile materials and
disinfectants for first aid purposes. These materials
should be kept in the first-aid box, equipped in com-
pliance with the laws in force. ¥*
U

Fig.8-1

1 - 22
 INTRODUCTION
Working in safety
D - Tractor safety regulations
Note
Before getting into the tractor, it is essential to
read and strictly comply with the instructions in
the operation and maintenance manual.
Starting
- Never start the engine in a closed space without an
adequate ventilation system able to eliminate the
gas fumes;
- Never place your head, body, limbs, feet, hands or
fingers near spinning belts or fans.
Engine
- Unscrew the radiator plug very slowly to relieve the
pressure from the system before taking it comple-
tely off. Coolant fluid must only be topped up with
the engine at a standstill or idling, if hot.
- Do not refuel the engine whilst the engine is run-
ning, particularly if this hot. Such action could cau-
se a fire outbreak if fuel were to be spilt.
- Never attempt to check or regulate the tension of
the fan belts whilst the engine is running.
Never adjust the fuel injection pump when the tractor
is moving.
- Do not lubricate the tractor when the engine is running.
Electrical system
- If auxiliary batteries are used, remember that the
leads at both ends must be connected to the termi-
nals in the indicated way: (+) with (+) and (-) with (-
). Avoid short-circuiting the terminals. THE GAS
ISSUED BY THE BATTERIES IS HIGHLY INFLAM-
MABLE.
When recharging, leave the battery compartment
uncovered to allow for ventilation. Never ever che-
ck the battery charge by placing metal objects on
the terminals as "jumpers". Avoid sparks or flames
in the battery zone. Do not smoke as there could
be a risk of explosion.
1 - 23
- Make sure that there are no fuel leaks before pro-
ceeding with any other operation: eliminate any le-
aks before continuing work.
- Do not recharge batteries in a closed space: make
sure that the ventilation is adequate to prevent the
risk of accidental explosions caused by accumula-
tions of the gas issued during the recharging pha-
se.
- Always disconnect the battery before carrying out
any work on the electrical system.
Hydraulic Plant
- A fluid leaking from a very small hole may be al-
most invisible but have sufficient force to penetrate
under the skin. If you need to check for leaks, use a
piece of cardboard or wood. NEVER USE THE
HANDS: if the fluid comes into contact with the skin,
immediately seek medical help. Series infections
or dermatitis may occur unless prompt medical tre-
atment is immediately obtained.
- Use suitable tools when checking the pressure va-
lues in the plant.
Lifting and lowering
- Lift and handle all particularly heavy components
with lifting means of a suitable carrying capacity.
Make sure that the parts are borne by appropriate
harness and hooks. Use adequate lifting bolts. Take
care of bystanders when lifting the load.
- Handle all parts with the greatest care.
Never insert the hands or fingers between one part
and the next. Wear approved protective clothing
such as goggles, gloves and safety footwear.
- Do not allow metal chains or ropes to twist.
Always wear protective gloves when handling ca-
bles or chains.
A INTRODUCTION

Working in safety
3-2 Safety decals
When replacing a tractor part bearing a sticker with A complete list of the places where these stickers are
safety warnings (yellow coloured), it is ESSENTIAL applied is given below.
to affix the same sticker to the spare part.

Fig.9-1
If) o
CO
CM

7
&E
In IA
ty
m
CO CO
Positions where the decals are affixed (WEO market)

V, u
LU
O)

CM
0
a:

o
co

1 - 24
 INTRODUCTION

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

1 - 25
 INTRODUCTION

Working in safety
3-3 Replacing tractor parts
It is essential to use genuine Massey Ferguson spare
parts when repairing the tractor. - Fasten your seat belt if the tractor is fitted with a
Pay particular attention to the following instructions roll-over frame.
when repairing and mounting parts and spares ac-
cessories. - Whenever possible, do not use the tractor near di-
Use of spurious spares can jeopardize tractor sa- tches or embankments.
fety. Strictly comply with the torque wrench values
given in the workshop manual and, where indicated, - Reduce speed when turning the tractor, crossing
install the relative locking devices when demounting slopes and on rough, slippery or muddy surfaces.
operations are being carried out.
Installation of spurious spare parts will automatically - Keep clear of slopes too steep for safe operation.
invalidate your tractor's warranty, since all Massey
Ferguson spares are guaranteed by the manurfactu- - Watch where you are going - especially at row ends
rer. Massey Ferguson dealers must only supply genu- and around trees.
ine spare parts.
- Never let anyone else get on to the tractor or the
implement.
3-4 Safe use of the tractor
- Operate the tractor smoothly, with no sudden mo-
vements: do not turn, start or stop abruptly.
Only qualified and authorized operators are able to
use farming tractors in safety. To be qualified you also
- Hitch only to the drawbar and recommended hitch
need to be familiar with the instructions in the opera-
points. Never hitch above the central line of the rear
tion and maintenance manual and to strictly comply
axle.
with these indications.
Moreover, operators need to know the labour safety
- Apply the parking brake whenever the tractor is stop-
regulations.
ped.
For example, some regulations specify that no one
- Never alter or remove any part of the equipment.
under the age of 18 years may use a tractor.
You are responsible for knowing these regulations and
- Keep others well clear of your work area.
for complying with them at work.
- Never use attachments that are not designed for
They also include the following instructions for safe
your tractor.
use of the tractor.

Warning: The operator must never use alcohol or

drugs that can affect his attention or the co-ordi-
nation of his movements.

A Observe the following precautions

- Do not allow children or unauthorized persons to

drive your tractor.

1 - 26
 INTRODUCTION

Working in safety
Safety frame (ROPS)
PI
Safety frame

Either a roll-over protective structure or a cab is moun-

ted as standard equipment together with a safety belt.
You cannot work without the safety frame or cab. A
safety structure or cab reduces the risk of injury should
the tractor roll over. Rolling over without a safety struc-
ture or cab can cause damage and serious injury.

Use
©
- Before using the tractor, ensure that the ROPS or
Fig.10-1
the cab has not been damaged and that it is secu-
rely fastened to the tractor.

- DO NOT attach chains, cables, etc., to the ROPS

or to the cab for towing purposes as this could cau-
se the tractor to tip up: always use the drawbar for
this purpose.

- Always fasten your safety belt. Do not wear the sa-

fety belt if the tractor is not equipped with a ROPS
or cab.

- Check the safety belt for damage. Damaged belts

must be replaced.

Damaged ROPS or cabs

If the tractor has rolled over and the ROPS or the cab
have been damaged (e.g. in the case of a crash against
a bridge), they must be replaced in order to ensure
the original degree of protection.

After an accident, check the ROPS or cab, the driving

seat, the safety belt and the anchor points of the sa-
fety belt. Replace all damaged parts before using the
tractor again.

DO NOT WELD, DRILL, BEND OR STRAIGHTEN

THE ROPS OR CAB: to do so reduces the degree of
protection that is ensured by original equipment.

1 - 27
 INTRODUCTION

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

1 - 28
 INTRODUCTION

CHAP. 1

Pre-delivery inspections and maintenance

INDEX

Sect. 4 Pre-delivery inspections and maintenance

4-1 General information ...................................................... 1-30

4-2 Inspections before delivery ........................................... 1-30
4-3 Routine maintenance guide.......................................... 1-31

1 - 29
 INTRODUCTION

Sect.4 - Pre-delivery inspections & maintenance

4-1 General information
To ensure that the tractor is regularly serviced during
the 12 month warranty period, the Massey Ferguson
dealer must carry out maintenance work after 50 and
250 hours service.
These operations will ensure your tractor functions
with utmost efficiency throughout the warranty period
and that it gives reliable service.
4-2 Pre-delivery inspection
The following operations must be carried out both by
the agent before delivering to the Dealer and by the
Dealer before delivering to the customer or operator:
- Make sure that the instruments, controls and indi-
cator lights operate correctly.
- Check the engine rate on the rev counter using
the pedal and hand accelerator.
- Hitch a towed implement and make sure that the
hydraulic accessories of the tractor operate cor-
rectly.
- Check and regulate the tyre pressure (on the road
or ground).
- Make sure that all nuts, bolts, centering pins, pipe
unions and fastening devices are correctly fixed.
- Make sure that there are no leaks from the pipes.
- Make sure that the lights are correctly positioned.
- Test the tractor on the road, making sure that the
brakes, controls and accessories operate correctly.

1 General installation
2. Electronic systems
- Clean the lower surface of the batteries and spread
the terminals with vaseline. - Make sure that the electronic lift operates correctly.
- Charge the battery if necessary.
- Check all battery connections. Make sure that all
leads, tubes and indicator lights are well fixed. 3. Driving torques
- Check and top up the oil in the engine and tran-
smission housings. - Check the driving torques of the bolts or nuts that
- Lubricate all parts requiring grease. fix the various chassis components:
- Check the tension of the belts (alternator, fan, ser- - Front axle/Engine
vo-control pump and air-conditioning compressor) - Engine/Gearbox
and adjust if necessary. - Gearbox/Rear axle
- Flush out the cooling circuit and fill it with fresh - Axle shaft housings/Rear axle- Check the driving
water (unless it contains antifreeze). torque of the nuts or bolts that fix the wheels and
- Make sure that the tank contains sufficient fuel and wheel plates.
that this is the right type.
- Make sure that the nuts and bolts that fix the cylin-
der head have been driven to the right torque.
Make sure that the fixing nuts and bolts on the
intake and exhaust manifolds are tight.
- Check and adjust the tappet play and visually ins-
pect the valve springs.
- Check the injectors. Bleed the fuel circuit and ti-
ghten all the fuel pipe unions.
- Make sure that the engine air filtering pipes are
well fixed.
- Check the adjustment of the engine articulations,
making sure that they operate smoothly.
- Start the engine.

1 - 30
 INTRODUCTION

Pre-delivery inspection and maintenance

4-3 Routine maintenance guide
AS
PERFORM THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS EVERY indicated
Daily or Servicing
as 100 250 500 1000
DESCRIPTION required hours hours hours hours
points
(Fig.11-1)

o
LUBRICA-

Perform general lubrication ABCD

TION

Lubricate three-point hitch o E

Front wheel hub for axle with 2 driving wheels o -
Check engine oil level o 3
Change engine oil 12
ENGINE

Change engine oil filter 14

Check valve clearance □ -

Clean fuel filter bowls o 18

Change fuel filter cartridges 18
FUEL SYSTEM

Check injector settings □ -

Dry air filter: clean drain valve o 15
Dry air filter: clean or change cartridge o 15
Drain sludge from fuel tank q -
Check coolant level in radiator o 2
COOLING
SYSTEM

Clean radiator fins q 2

Wash out cooling circuit q -
Check oil levels in gearbox (steering and hydraulic systems), front axle differential and front final drives q 4-5-6
TRANSMISSION - BRAKES

AND STEERING CIRCUIT

Change oil in gearbox (2) (steering and hydraulic system), front axle differential and rear final drives 8-9-10-11
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Clean oil filter on the intake (3) q 16

Change oil filter on the delivery side (3) of the steering circuit 17
Clean the transmission and hydraulic system oil cooler q -
Check and adjust free travel of brake pedals o -
Check and adjust free travel of clutch pedal and PTO clutch o -
Check oil level in brake circuit o 6
Check level of electrolyte in battery o 20
ELECTRIC
SYSTEM

Check fan belt tension o 21

Check efficiency of alternator and starter motor □ -
Check level of screen wash liquid -
CONDITIONING

Check and clean cab air filter q 19

CAB AND AIR

Change cab air filter element 19

Check charge of air conditioning system o -
Clean condenser of air conditioning system q -
Check tension of compressor belt o -
Check tyre pressure o -
OTHERS

Check wheel nut tightness o -

Check tightness of nuts and bolts in general o -

REFERENCE MARKS FOR THE OPERATIONS

o Inspection, filling, lubrication or adjustment. q Cleaning or washing
Replacement. □ Operations that must be carried out by the Dealer

(1) Operation to be carried out at least once a year.

(2) Initially after the first 500 hours service and then every 1000 hours.
(3) ATTENTION: Change the filter on the delivery side of the steering circuit after the first 50 hours service to safeguard the circuit itself.
Following this, replace the filtre on the delivery every 250 hours. Clean (or replace) the filtre on the intake side of the hydraulic pumps
after the first 250 hours service. After this, clean the filter after every 250 hours service and change it every 500 hours.

ATTENTION: use your own discretion and experience when deciding the actual intervals for variable interval service and maintenance
operations. Always remember however, that it is better to perform them too often than not often enough.

1 - 31
 INTRODUCTION

Pre-delivery inspections and maintenance

Maintenance and service points

1522 17 !04

z
--4—
mm 5

9 A D 8
1 2 7 12 3 14 C 16
T
1- cz
18 21
! E
6 B h~- a
B — 11
11-ÿ
4> f
10
13 19
Fig.11-1

o FILLING
q
DRAINING POINTS □ FILTERS
A/C AND ELECTRIC
SYSTEMS
q LUBRICATION

1 - Diesel fuel tank. 8 - Transmission oil 14 - Engine oil filter. 20 - Battery electrolyte A - Front axle hinge points
2 - Coolant radiator. (5 plugs). 15 - Engine air filter. level. (2 grease nipples).
3 - Engine oil dipstick 9 - Rear final drives 16 - Transmission oil filter in 21 - Check fan belt B - Steering arms (2
and fill plug. (2 plugs). washable gauze. tension. grease nipples).
4 - Gearbox oil. 10 - Front axle. 17 - Replaceable paper oil 22 - Check dryer/reservoir C - Thrust bearing.
5 - Rear final 11 - Front final drives. filter of the hydraulic charge of A/C system. D - Rear brake control
drives. 12 - Engine oil drain system and steering shaft.
6 - Front axle. plug. circuit. E - Three-point linkage.
7 - Brake fluid 13 - Engine coolant 18 - Fuel filter.
reservoir. drain plug. 19 - Cab air filter.

1 - 32
 INTRODUCTION

CHAP. 1

Conversion tables

INDEX

Sect. 5 Conversion tables

5-1 Length ........................................................................... 1-34

5-2 Area ............................................................................... 1-37
5-3 Volume .......................................................................... 1-38
5-4 Weight ........................................................................... 1-41
5-5 Pressure ........................................................................ 1-43
5-6 Moment of rotation ........................................................ 1-45
5-7 Temperature .................................................................. 1-47

1 - 33
 INTRODUCTION

Sect. 5 - Conversion tables

5-1 Length
From mm to inches
mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches

1 0.0394 26 102.36 51 2.0079 76 2.9921

2 0.0387 27 1.0630 52 2.0472 77 3.0315
3 0.1181 28 1.1024 53 2.0866 78 3.0709
4 0.1575 29 1.1417 54 2.1260 79 3.1102
5 0.1968 30 1.1811 55 2.1653 80 3.1496
6 0.2362 31 1.2205 56 2.2047 81 3.1890
7 0.2756 32 1.2598 57 2.2441 82 3.2283
8 0.3150 33 1.2992 58 2.2835 83 3.2677
9 0.3543 34 1.3386 59 2.3228 84 3.3071
10 0.3937 35 1.3779 60 2.3622 85 3.3464
11 0.4331 36 1.4173 61 2.4016 86 3.3858
12 0.4724 37 1.4567 62 2.4409 87 3.4252
13 0.5118 38 1.4961 63 2.4803 88 3.4646
14 0.5512 39 1.5354 64 2.5197 89 3.5039
15 0.5905 40 1.5748 65 2.5590 90 3.5433
16 0.6299 41 1.6142 66 2.5984 91 3.5827
17 0.6693 42 1.6535 67 2.6378 92 3.6220
18 0.7087 43 1.6929 68 2.6772 93 3.6614
19 0.7480 44 1.7323 69 2.7165 94 3.7008
20 0.7874 45 1.7716 70 2.7559 95 3.7401
21 0.8268 46 1.8110 71 2.7953 96 3.7795
22 0.8661 47 1.8504 72 2.8346 97 3.8189
23 0.9055 48 1.8898 73 2.8740 98 3.8583
24 0.9449 49 1.9291 74 2.9134 99 3.8976
25 0.9842 50 1.9685 75 2.9527 100 3.9370

From inches to mm From inches to mm

inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm

1/64 0.3969 33/64 13.0969 17/64 6.7469 49/64 19.4469

1/32 0.7937 17/32 13.4937 9/32 7.1437 25/32 19.8437
3/64 1.1906 35/64 13.8906 19/64 7.5406 51/64 20.2406
1/16 1.5875 9/16 14.2875 5/16 7.9375 13/16 20.6375
5/64 1.9844 37/64 14.6844 21/64 8.3344 53/64 21.0344
3/32 2.3812 19/32 15.0812 11/32 8.7312 27/32 21.4312
7/64 2.7781 39/64 15.4781 23/64 9.1281 55/64 21.8281
1/8 3.1750 5/8 15.8750 3/8 9.5250 7/8 22.2250
9/64 3.5719 41/64 16.2719 25/64 9.9219 57/64 22.6219
5/32 3.9687 21/32 16.6687 13/32 10.3187 29/32 23.0187
11/64 4.3656 43/64 17.0656 27/64 10.7156 9/64 23.4156
3/16 4.7625 11/16 17.4625 7/16 11.1125 15/16 23.8125
13/64 5.1594 45/64 17.8594 29/64 11.5094 21/64 24.2094
7/32 5.5562 23/32 18.2562 15/32 11.9062 31/32 24.6062
15/64 5.9531 47/64 18.6531 31/64 12..3062 63/64 25.0031
1/4 6.3500 3/4 19.0500 1/2 12..7000 1 25.4000
00

1 - 34
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
From Ft to Meters
ft. 0 1 2 3 4
m m m m m

- 0.305 0.610 0.914 1.219

10 3.048 3.353 3.658 3.962 4.267
20 6.096 6.401 6.706 7.010 7.315
30 9.144 9.449 9.754 10.058 10.363
40 12.192 12.497 12.802 13.106 13.411
50 15.240 15.545 15.850 16.154 16.459
60 18.288 18.593 18.898 19.202 19.507
70 21.336 21.641 21.946 22.250 22.555
80 24.384 24.689 24.994 25.298 25.603
90 27.432 27.737 28.042 28.346 28.651
100 30.480 30.785 31.090 31.394 31.699

ft. 5 6 7 8 9
m m m m m

- 1.524 1.829 2.134 2.438 2.743

10 4.572 4.877 5.182 5.486 5.791
20 7.620 7.925 8.230 8.534 8.839
30 10.668 10.973 11.278 11.582 11887
40 13.716 14.021 14.326 14.630 14.935
50 16.764 17.069 17.374 17.678 17.983
60 19.812 20.117 20.422 20.726 21.031
70 22.860 23.165 23.470 23.774 24.079
80 25.908 26.213 26.518 26.822 27.127
90 28.956 29.261 29.566 29.870 30.175
100 32. 004 32.309 32.614 32.918 33.223

From Meters to Ft
m 0 1 2 3 4
ft. ft. ft. ft. ft.

- 3.2808 6.5617 9.8425 13.1234

10 32.8084 36.0892 39.3701 42.6509 45.9318
20 65.6168 68.8976 72.1785 75.4593 78.7402
30 98.4252 101.7060 104.9869 108.2677 111.5486
40 131.2336 134.5144 137.7953 141.0761 144.3570
50 164.0420 167.3228 170.6037 173.8845 177.1654
60 196.8504 200.1312 203.4121 206.6929 209.9738
70 229.6588 232.9396 236.2205 239.5013 242.7822
80 262.4672 265.7480 269.0289 272.3097 275.5906
90 295.2756 298.5564 301.8373 305.1181 308.3990
100 328.0840 331.3648 334.6457 337.9265 341.2074

m 5 6 7 8 9
ft. ft. ft. ft. ft.

- 16.4042 19.6850 22.9659 26.2467 29.5276

10 49.2126 52.4934 55.7743 59.0551 62.3360
20 82.0210 85.3018 88.5827 91.8635 95.1444
30 114.8294 118.1102 121.3911 124.6719 127.9528
40 147.6378 150.9186 154.1995 175.4803 160.7612
50 180.4462 183.7270 187.0079 190.2887 193.5696
60 213.2546 216.5354 219.8163 223.0971 226.3780
70 246.0630 249.3438 252.6247 255.9055 259.1864
80 278.8714 282.1522 285.4331 288.7139 291.9948
90 311.6798 314.9606 318.2415 321.5223 324.8032
100 344.4882 347.7690 351.0499 354.3307 357.6116

1 - 35
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
From Miles to Kilometers
miles 0 1 2 3 4
Km Km Km Km Km

- 1.609 3.219 4.828 6.437

10 16.093 17.703 19.312 20.921 22.531
20 32.187 33.796 35.406 37.015 38.624
30 48.280 49.890 51.499 53.108 54.718
40 64.374 65.983 67.593 69.202 70.811
50 80.467 82.077 83.686 85.295 86.905
60 96.561 98.170 99.779 101.390 103.000
70 112.650 114.260 115.870 117.480 119.090
80 128.750 130.360 131.970 133.580 135.190
90 144.840 146.450 148.060 149.670 151.280
100 160.930 162.540 164.150 165.760 167.370

miles 5 6 7 8 9
Km Km Km Km Km

- 8.047 9.656 11.265 12.875 14.484

10 24.140 25.750 27.359 28.968 30.578
20 40.234 41.843 43.452 45.062 46.671
30 56.327 57.936 59.546 61.155 62.764
40 72.421 74.030 75.639 77.249 78.858
50 88.514 90.123 91.733 93.342 94.951
60 104.610 106.220 107.830 109.440 111.040
70 120.700 122.310 123.920 125.530 127.140
80 136.790 138.400 140.010 141.620 143.230
90 152.890 154.500 156.110 157.720 159.330
100 168.980 170.590 172.200 173.810 175.420

From Kilometers to Miles

Km 0 1 2 3 4
miles miles miles miles miles

- 0.621 1.243 1.864 2.486

10 6.214 6.835 7.457 8.078 8.699
20 12.427 13.049 13.670 14.292 14.913
30 18.641 19.263 19.884 20.506 21.127
40 24.855 25.477 26.098 26.720 27.341
50 31.069 31.690 32.311 32.933 33.554
60 37.282 37.904 38.525 39.147 39.768
70 43.497 44.118 44.739 45.361 45.982
80 49.711 50.332 50.953 51.575 52.196
90 55.924 56.545 57.166 57.788 58.409
100 62.138 62.759 63.380 64.002 64.623

Km 5 6 7 8 9
miles miles miles miles miles

- 3.107 3.728 4.350 4.971 5.592

10 9.321 9.942 10.562 11.185 11.805
20 15.534 16.156 16.776 17.399 18.019
30 21.748 22.370 22.990 23.613 24.233
40 27.962 28.584 29.204 29.827 30.447
50 34.175 34.797 35.417 36.040 36.660
60 40.389 41.011 41.631 42.254 42.874
70 46.603 47.225 47.845 48.468 49.088
80 52.817 53.439 54.059 54.682 55.302
90 59.030 59.652 60.272 60.895 61.515
100 65.244 65.866 66.486 67.109 67.729

1 - 36
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
5-2 Area
From square inches to square centimeters
in(2) 0 1 2 3 4
cm(2) cm(2) cm(2) cm(2) cm(2)

- 6.452 12.903 19.355 25.806

10 64.516 70.968 77.419 83.871 90.322
20 129.032 135.484 141.935 148.387 154.838
30 193.548 200.000 206.451 212.903 219.354
40 258.064 264.516 270.967 277.419 283.870
50 322.580 329.032 335.483 341.935 348.386
60 397.096 393.548 399.999 406.451 412.902
70 451.612 458.064 464.515 470.967 477.418
80 516.128 522.580 529.031 535.483 541.934
90 580.644 587.096 593.547 599.999 606.450
100 645.160 651.612 658.063 664.515 670.966

in (2) 5 6 7 8 9
cm(2) cm(2) cm(2) cm(2) cm(2)

- 32.258 38.710 45.161 51.613 58.064

10 96.774 103.226 109.677 116.129 122.580
20 161.290 167.742 174.193 180.645 187.096
30 225.806 232.258 238.709 245.161 251.612
40 290.322 296.774 303.225 309.677 316.128
50 354.838 361.290 367.741 374.193 380.644
60 419.354 425.806 432.357 438.709 445.160
70 483.870 490.322 496.773 503.225 509.676
80 548.386 554.838 561.289 567.741 574.192
90 612.902 619.354 625.805 632.257 638.708
100 677.418 683.870 690.321 696.773 703.224

From square centimeters to square inches

cm(2) 0 1 2 3 4
in(2) in(2) in(2) in(2) in(2)

- 0.155 0.310 0.465 0.620

10 1.550 1.705 1.860 2.015 2.170
20 3.100 3.255 3.410 3.565 3.720
30 4.650 4.805 4.960 5.115 5.270
40 6.200 6.355 6.510 6.665 6.820
50 7.750 7.905 8.060 8.215 8.370
60 9.300 9.455 9.610 9.765 9.920
70 10.850 11.005 11.160 11.315 11.470
80 12.400 12.555 12.710 12.865 13.020
90 13.950 14.105 14.260 14.415 14.570
100 15.500 15.655 15.810 15.965 16.120

cm(2) 5 6 7 8 9
in(2) in(2) in(2) in(2) in(2)

- 0.775 0.930 1.085 1.240 1.395

10 2.325 2.480 2.635 2.790 2.945
20 3.875 4.030 4.185 4.340 4.495
30 5.425 5.580 5.735 5.890 6.045
40 6.975 7.130 7.285 7.440 7.595
50 8.525 8.680 8.835 8.990 9.145
60 10.075 10.230 10.385 10.540 10.695
70 11.625 11.780 11.935 12.090 12.245
80 13.175 13.330 13.485 13.640 13.795
90 14.725 14.880 15.035 15.190 15.345
100 16.275 16.430 16.385 16.740 16.895

1 - 37
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
5-3 Volume
From cubic inches to cubic centimeters
(3)
in 0 1 2 3 4
cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc)

- 16.387 32.774 49.161 65.548

10 163.871 180.258 196.645 213.032 229.419
20 327.741 344.128 360.515 376.902 393.290
30 491.612 507.999 524.386 540.773 557.160
40 655.483 671.870 688.257 704.644 721.031
50 819.353 835.740 852.127 868.514 884.901
60 983.224 999.611 1015.998 1032.385 1048.772
70 1147.094 1163.482 1179.869 1196.256 1212.643
80 1310.965 1327.352 1343.739 1360.126 1376.513
90 1474.836 1491.223 1507.610 1523.997 1540.384
100 1638.706 1655.093 1671.481 1687.868 1704.255

in(3) 5 6 7 8 9
cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc) cm(3) (cc)

- 81.935 98.322 114.709 131.097 147.484

10 245.806 262.193 278.580 294.967 311.354
20 209.677 426.064 442.451 458.838 475.225
30 573.547 589.934 606.321 622.708 639.095
40 737.418 753.805 770.192 786.579 802.966
50 901.289 917.676 934.063 950.450 966.837
60 1065.159 1081.546 1097.933 1114.320 1130.707
70 1229.030 1245.417 1261.804 1278.191 1294.578
80 1392.200 1409.288 1425.675 1442.062 1458.449
90 1556.771 1573.158 1589.545 1605.932 1622.319
100 1720.642 1737.029 1753.416 1769.803 1786.190

From cubic centimeters to cubic inches

cm(3) (cc) 0 1 2 3 4
in(3) in(3) in(3) in(3) in(3)

- 0.0610 0.1220 0.1831 0.2441

10 0.6102 0.6713 0.7323 0.7933 0.8543
20 1.2205 1.2815 1.3425 1.4035 1.4646
30 1.8307 1.8917 1.9528 2.0138 2.0748
40 2.4409 2.5020 2.5630 2.6240 2.6850
50 3.0512 3.1122 3.1732 3.2343 3.2953
60 3.6614 3.7224 3.7835 3.8445 3.9055
70 4.2717 4.3327 4.3937 4.4547 4.5158
80 4.8819 4.9429 5.0039 5.0650 5.1260
90 5.4921 5.5532 5.6142 5.6752 5.7362
100 6.1024 6.1634 6.2244 6.2854 6.3465

cm(3) (cc) 5 6 7 8 9
in(3) in(3) in(3) in(3) in(3)

- 0.3051 0.3661 0.4272 0.4882 0.5492

10 0.9154 0.9764 1.0374 1.0984 1.1595
20 1.5256 1.5866 1.6476 1.7087 1.7697
30 2.1358 2.1969 2.2579 2.3189 2.3799
40 2.7461 2.8071 2.8681 2.9291 2.9902
50 3.3563 3.4173 3.4784 3.5394 3.6004
60 3.9665 4.0276 4.0886 4.1495 4.2106
70 4.5768 4.6378 4.6988 4.7599 4.8209
80 5.1870 5.2480 5.3091 5.3701 5.4311
90 5.7973 5.8583 5.9193 5.9803 6.0414
100 6.4075 6.4685 6.5295 6.5906 6.6516

1 - 38
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
From gallons (U.S.) to liters
U.S. gal. 0 1 2 3 4
liters liters liters liters liters

- 3.7854 7.5709 11.3563 15.1417

10 37.8543 41.6397 45.4251 49.2105 52.9960
20 75.7085 79.4940 83.2794 87.0648 90.8502
30 113.5528 117.3482 121.1337 124.9191 128.7045
40 151.4171 155.2025 158.9879 162.7734 166.5588
50 189.2713 1930568 196.8422 200.6276 204.4131
60 227.1256 230.9110 234.6965 238.4819 242.2673
70 264.9799 268.7653 272.5507 276.3362 280.1216
80 302.8342 306.6196 310.4050 314.1904 317.9759
90 340.6884 344.4738 348.2593 352.0447 355.8301
100 378.5427 382.3281 386.1135 389.8990 393.6844

U.S. gal. 5 6 7 8 9
liters liters liters liters liters

- 18.9271 22.7126 26.4980 302834 34.0638

10 56.7814 60.5668 64.3523 68.1377 71.9231
20 94.6357 98.4211 102.2065 105.9920 109.7774
30 132.4899 136.2754 140.0608 143.8462 147.6316
40 170.3442 174.1296 177.9151 181.7005 185.4859
50 208.1985 211.9839 215.7693 219.5548 223.3402
60 246.0527 2498382 253.6236 257.4090 261.1945
70 283.9070 287.6924 291.4779 295.2633 299.0487
80 321.7613 325.5467 329.3321 333.1176 336.9030
90 359.6156 363.4010 367.1864 370.9718 374.7573
100 397.4698 401.2553 405.0407 408.8261 412.6115

From liters to gallons (U.S.)

Liters 0 1 2 3 4
gal. gal. gal. gal. gal.

- 0.2642 0.5283 0.7925 1.0567

10 2.6417 2.9059 3.1701 3.4342 3.6984
20 5.2834 5.5476 5.8118 6.0759 6.3401
30 7.9251 8.1893 8.4535 8.7176 8.9818
40 10.5668 10.8310 11.0952 11.3594 11.6235
50 13.2086 13.4727 13.7369 14.0011 14.2652
60 15.8503 16.1144 16.3786 16.6428 16.9069
70 18.4920 18.7561 19.0203 19.2845 19.5487
80 21.1337 21.3979 21.6620 21.9262 22.1904
90 23.7754 24.0396 24.3037 24.5679 24.8321
100 26.4171 26.6813 26.9454 27.2096 27.4738

Liters 5 6 7 8 9
gal. gal. gal. gal. gal.

- 1.3209 1.5850 1.8492 2.1134 2.3775

10 3.9626 4.2267 4.4909 4.7551 5.0192
20 6.6043 6.8684 7.1326 7.3968 7.6610
30 9.2460 9.5102 9.7743 10.0385 10.3027
40 11.8877 12.1519 12.4160 12.6802 129444
50 14.5294 14.7936 15.0577 15.3219 15.5861
60 17.1711 17.4353 17.6995 17.9636 18.2278
70 19.8128 20.0770 20.3412 20.6053 20.8695
80 22.4545 22.7187 22.9829 23.2470 23.5112
90 25.0962 25.3604 25.6246 25.8888 26.1529
100 27.7380 28.0021 28.2663 28.5305 28.7946

1 - 39
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
From gallons (IMP) to liters
Imp gal. 0 1 2 3 4
liters liters liters liters liters

- 4.5460 9.0919 13.6379 18.1838

10 45.4596 50.0056 54.5515 59.0975 63.6434
20 90.9192 95.4652 100.0111 104.5571 109.1030
30 136.3788 140.9248 145.4707 150.0167 154.5626
40 181.8384 186.3844 190.9303 195.4763 200.0222
50 227.2980 231.8440 236.3899 240.9359 245.4818
60 272.7576 277.3036 281.8495 286.3955 290.9414
70 318.2172 322.7632 327.3091 331.8551 336.4010
80 363.6768 368.2223 372.7687 377.3147 381.8606
90 409.1364 413.6824 418.2283 422.7743 427.3202
100 454.5960 459.1420 463.6879 468.2339 472.7798

Imp gal. 5 6 7 8 9
liters liters liters liters liters

- 22.7298 27.2758 31.8217 36.3677 40.9136

10 68.1894 72.2354 77.2813 81.8275 86.3732
20 113.6490 118.1950 122.7409 127.2869 131.8328
30 159.1086 163.6546 168.0005 172.7465 177.2924
40 204.5682 209.1142 213.6601 218.2061 222.7520
50 250.0278 254.5738 259.1197 263.6657 268.2116
60 295.4874 300.0334 304.5793 309.1253 313.6712
70 340.9470 345.4930 350.0389 354.5849 359.1308
80 386.4066 390.9526 395.4985 400.0445 404.5004
90 431.8662 436.4122 440.9581 445.9041 450.0500
100 477.3258 4818718 4864177 490.9637 495.5096

From liters to gallons (IMP)

Liters 0 1 2 3 4
gal. gal. gal. gal. gal.

- 0.2200 0.4400 0.6599 0.8799

10 2.1998 2.4197 2.6397 2.8597 3.0797
20 4.3995 4.6195 4.8395 5.0594 5.2794
30 6.5993 6.8193 7.0392 7.2592 7.4792
40 8.7990 9.0190 9.2390 9.4590 9.6789
50 10.9988 11.2188 11.4388 11.6587 11.8787
60 13.1986 13.4185 13.6385 13.8585 14.0785
70 15.3983 15.6183 15.8383 16.0582 16.2782
80 17.5981 17.8181 18.0380 18.2580 18.4780
90 19.7978 20.0178 20.2378 20.4578 20.6777
100 21.9976 22.2176 22.4376 22.6575 22.8775

Liters 5 6 7 8 9
gal. gal. gal. gal. gal.

- 1.0999 1.3199 1.5398 1.7598 1.9798

10 3.2996 3.5196 3.7396 3.9596 4.1795
20 5.4994 5.7194 5.9394 6.1593 6.3793
30 7.6992 7.9191 8.1391 8.3591 8.5791
40 9.8989 10.9189 10.3389 10.5588 10.7788
50 12.0987 12.3187 12.5386 12.7586 12.9786
60 14.2984 14.5184 14.7384 14.9584 15.1783
70 16.4982 16.7182 16.9382 17.1581 17.3781
80 18.6980 18.9179 19.1379 19.3579 19.5779
90 20.8977 21.1177 21.3377 21.5576 21.7776
100 23.0975 23.3175 23.5374 23.7574 23.9774

1 - 40
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
5-4 Weight
From Pounds to Kilograms
Ibs. 0 1 2 3 4
Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg

- 0.454 0.907 1.361 1.814

10 4.536 4.990 5.443 5.897 6.350
20 9.072 9.525 9.979 10.433 10.886
30 13.608 14.061 14.515 14.969 15.422
40 18.144 18.597 19.051 19.504 19.958
50 22.680 23.133 23.587 24.040 24.494
60 27.216 27.669 28.123 28.576 29.030
70 31.571 32.205 32.659 33.112 33.566
80 36.287 36.741 37.195 37.648 38.102
90 40.823 41.277 41.730 42.184 42.638
100 45.359 45.813 46.266 46.720 47.174

Ibs. 5 6 7 8 9
Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg

- 2.268 2.722 3.175 3.629 4.082

10 6.804 7.257 7.711 8.165 8.618
20 11.340 11.793 12.247 12.701 13.154
30 15.876 16.329 16.783 17.237 17.690
40 20.412 20.865 21.319 21.772 22.226
50 24.948 25.401 25.855 26.308 26.762
60 29.484 29.937 30.391 30.844 31.298
70 34.019 34.473 34.927 35.380 35.834
80 38.555 39.009 39.463 39.916 40.370
90 43.092 43.545 43.998 44.453 44.906
100 47.627 48.081 48.534 48.988 49.442

From Kilograms to Pounds

kg 0 1 2 3 4
Ibs. Ibs. Ibs. Ibs. Ibs.

- 2.205 4.409 6.614 8.818

10 22.046 24.251 26.455 28.660 30.865
20 44.092 46.297 48.502 50.706 52.911
30 66.139 68.343 70.548 72.752 74.957
40 88.185 90.389 92.594 94.799 97.003
50 110.230 112.440 114.640 116.840 119.050
60 132.280 134.480 136.690 138.890 141.100
70 154.320 156.530 158.730 160.940 163.140
80 176.370 178.570 180.780 182.980 185.190
90 198.420 200.620 202.830 205.030 207.230
100 220.460 222.670 224.870 227.080 229.280

kg 5 6 7 8 9
Ibs. Ibs. Ibs. Ibs. Ibs.

- 11.023 13.228 15.432 17.637 19.842

10 33.069 35.274 37.479 39.683 41.888
20 55.116 57.320 59.525 61.729 63.934
30 77.162 79.366 81.571 83.776 85.980
40 99.208 101.410 103.620 105.820 108.030
50 121.250 123.460 125.660 127.870 130.070
60 143.300 145.510 147.710 149.910 152.120
70 165.350 167.550 169.760 171.960 174.170
80 187.390 189.600 191.800 194.010 196.210
90 209.440 211.640 213.850 216.050 218.260
100 231.490 233.690 235.890 238.100 240.300

1 - 41
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
From Kilograms to Newtons
kg 0 1 2 3 4
N N N N N

- - 9.81 19.61 29.42 39.23

10 98.07 107.87 117.68 127.49 137.29
20 196.13 205.94 215.75 225.55 235.36
30 294.20 304.01 313.81 323.62 333.43
40 392.27 402.07 411.88 421.69 431.49
50 490.33 500.14 509.95 519.75 529.56
60 558.40 598.21 608.01 617.82 627.63
70 686.47 696.27 706.08 715.89 725.69
80 784.53 794.34 804.15 813.95 823.76
90 882.60 892.41 902.21 912.02 921.83
100 980.66 990.47 1000.30 1010.08 1019.89

kg 5 6 7 8 9
N N N N N

- 49.03 58.81 68.65 78.45 88.26

10 147.10 156.91 166.71 176.52 186.33
20 245.17 254.97 264.78 274.59 284.39
30 343.23 353.04 362.85 372.65 382.46
40 441.30 451.11 460.91 470.72 480.53
50 539.37 549.17 558.98 568.79 578.59
60 637.43 647.24 657.05 666.85 676.66
70 735.50 745.31 755.11 764.92 774.73
80 833.57 843.37 853.18 862.99 872.79
90 931.63 941.44 951.25 961.05 970.86
100 1029.69 1039.47 1049.31 1059.11 1068.92

From Newtons to Kilograms

N 0 1 2 3 4
kg kg kg kg kg

- - 1.020 2.039 3.059 4.079

100 10.197 11.217 12.237 13.256 14.276
200 20.394 21.414 22.434 23.453 24.473
300 30.591 31.611 32.631 33.651 34.670
400 40.789 41.808 42.828 43.848 44.868
500 50.986 52.006 53.025 54.045 55.065
600 61.183 62.203 63.222 64.242 65.262
700 71.380 72.400 73.420 74.439 75.459
800 81.577 82.597 83.617 84.636 85.656
900 91.774 92.794 93.814 94.834 95.853
1000 101.972 102.990 104.011 105.031 106.051

N 5 6 7 8 9
kg kg kg kg kg

- 5.099 6.118 7.138 8.158 9.177

100 15.296 16.315 17.335 18.355 19.375
200 25.493 26.513 27.532 28.552 29.572
300 35.690 36.710 37.729 38.749 39.769
400 45.887 46.907 47.927 48.946 49.966
500 56.084 57.104 58.124 59.144 60.163
600 66.282 67.301 68.321 69.341 70.360
700 76.479 77.498 78.518 79.538 80.558
800 86.676 87.696 88.715 89.735 90.755
900 96.873 97.893 98.912 99.932 100.951
1000 107.071 108.090 109.110 110.130 111.149

1 - 42
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
5-5 Pressure
From Pounds per square inch to Kilograms per square centimeter
(2)
Ib/in 0 1 2 3 4
(psi) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2)

- 0.0703 0.1406 0.2100 0.2812

10 0.7031 0.7734 0.8437 0.9140 0.9843
20 1.4062 1.4765 1.5468 1.6171 1.6874
30 2.1092 2.1795 2.2498 2.3202 2.3905
40 2.8123 2.8826 2.9529 3.0232 3.0935
50 3.5154 3.5857 3.6560 3.7263 3.7966
60 4.2185 4.2888 4.3591 4.4294 4.4997
70 4.9216 4.9919 5.0622 5.1325 5.2028
80 5.6246 5.6949 5.7652 5.8356 5.9059
90 6.3277 6.3980 6.4683 6.5386 6.6089
100 7.0308 7.1011 7.1714 7.2417 7.3120

Ib/in(2) 5 6 7 8 9
(psi) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2)

- 0.3515 0.4218 0.4921 0.5625 0.6328

10 1.0546 1.1249 1.1952 1.2655 1.3358
20 1.7577 1.8280 1.8983 1.9686 2.0389
30 2.4608 2.5311 2.6014 2.6717 2.7420
40 3.1639 3.2342 3.3045 3.3748 3.4451
50 3.8669 3.9372 4.0072 4.0779 4.1482
60 4.5700 4.6403 4.7106 4.7809 4.8512
70 5.2731 5.3434 5.4137 5.4840 5.5543
80 5.9762 6.0465 6.1168 6.1871 6.2574
90 6.6793 6.7496 6.8199 6.8902 6.9605
100 7.3823 7.4526 7.5229 7.5933 7.6636

From Kilograms per square centimeter to Pounds per square inch

Kg/cm(2) 0 1 2 3 4
Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi)

- 14.22 28.45 42.67 56.89

10 142.23 156.45 170.68 184.90 199.12
20 284.46 298.69 312.91 327.13 341.36
30 426.70 440.92 455.14 469.36 483.59
40 568.93 583.15 597.37 611.60 625.82
50 711.16 725.38 739.61 753.83 768.05
60 853.39 867.61 881.84 896.06 910.28
70 995.62 1009.80 1024.10 1038.30 1052.50
80 1137.80 1152.10 1166.30 1180.50 1194.70
90 1280.10 1294.30 1308.50 1322.70 1337.00
100 1422.30 1436.50 1450.80 1465.00 1479.20

Kg/cm(2) 5 6 7 8 9
Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi) Ib/in(2) (psi)

- 71.12 85.34 99.56 113.78 128.01

10 213.35 227.57 241.79 256.02 270.24
20 355.58 369.80 384.03 398.25 412.47
30 497.81 512.03 526.26 540.48 554.70
40 640.04 654.27 668.49 682.71 696.94
50 782.28 796.50 810.72 824.94 839.17
60 924.51 938.73 952.95 967.18 981.40
70 1066.70 1081.00 1095.20 1109.40 1123.60
80 1209.00 1223.20 1237.40 1251.60 1265.90
90 1351.20 1365.40 1379.60 1393.90 1408.10
100 1493.40 1507.70 1521.90 1536.10 1550.30

1 - 43
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
From Kilograms per square centimeter to Pascal Kilos
(2)
Kg/cm 0 1 2 3 4
KPa KPa KPa KPa KPa

- - 98.1 196.1 294.2 392.3

10 980.7 1078.7 1176.8 1274.9 1372.9
20 1961.3 2059.4 2157.5 2255.5 2353.6
30 2942.0 3040.1 3138.1 3236.2 3334.3
40 3922.7 4020.7 4118.8 4216.9 4314.9
50 4903.3 5001.4 5099.5 5197.5 5295.6
60 5584.0 5982.1 6080.1 6178.2 6276.3
70 6864.7 6962.7 7060.8 7158.9 7256.9
80 7845.3 7943.4 8041.5 8139.5 8237.6
90 8826.0 8924.1 9022.1 9120.2 9218.3
100 9806.6 9904.7 10003.7 10101.8 10198.9

Kg/cm(2) 5 6 7 8 9
KPa KPa KPa KPa KPa

- 490.3 588.4 686.5 784.5 882.6

10 1471.0 1569.1 1667.1 1765.2 1863.3
20 2451.7 2549.7 2647.8 2745.9 2843.9
30 3432.3 3530.4 3628.5 3726.5 3824.6
40 4413.0 4511.1 4609.1 4707.2 4805.3
50 5393.7 5491.7 5589.8 5687.9 5785.9
60 6374.3 6472.4 6570.5 6668.5 6766.6
70 7355.0 7453.1 7551.1 7649.2 7747.3
80 8335.7 8433.7 8531.8 8629.9 8727.9
90 9316.3 9414.4 9512.5 9610.5 9708.6
100 10296.9 10395.0 10493.1 10591.1 10689.2

From Pascal Kilos to Kilograms per square centimeter

KPa 0 1 2 3 4
Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2)

- - 1.020 2.039 3.059 4.079

1000 10.197 11.217 13.237 13.256 14.276
2000 20.394 21.414 22.434 23.453 24.473
3000 30.591 31.611 32.631 33.651 34.670
4000 40.789 41.808 42.828 43.848 44.868
5000 50.986 52.006 53.025 54.045 55.065
6000 61.183 62.203 63.222 64.242 65.262
7000 71.380 72.400 73.420 74.439 75.459
8000 81.577 82.597 83.617 84.636 85.656
9000 91.774 92.794 93.814 94.834 95.853
10000 101.972 102.990 104.011 105.031 106.051

KPa 5 6 7 8 9
Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2) Kg/cm(2)

- 5.099 6.118 7.138 8.158 9.177

1000 15.296 16.315 17.335 18.355 19.375
2000 25.493 26.513 27.532 28.552 29.572
3000 35.690 36.710 37.729 38.749 39.769
4000 45.887 46.907 47.927 48.946 49.966
5000 56.084 57.104 58.124 59.144 60.163
6000 66.282 67.301 68.321 69.341 70.360
7000 76.479 77.498 78.518 79.538 80.558
8000 86.676 87.696 88.715 89.735 90.755
9000 96.873 97.893 98.912 99.932 100.951
10000 107.071 108.090 109.110 110.130 111.149

1 - 44
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
5-6 Moment of rotation
From Ft/Pounds to Kilogrammeters
ft. Ibs. 0 1 2 3 4
Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m

- 0.138 0.276 0.415 0.553

10 1.382 1.520 1.658 1.796 1.934
20 2.764 2.902 3.040 3.178 3.316
30 4.146 4.284 4.422 4.560 4.698
40 5.528 5.666 5.804 5.942 6.080
50 6.910 7.048 7.186 7.324 7.462
60 8.292 8.430 8.568 8.706 8.844
70 9.674 9.812 9.950 10.088 10.227
80 11.056 11.194 11.332 11.470 11.609
90 12.438 12.576 12.714 12.855 12.991
100 13.820 13.958 14.096 14.235 14373

ft. Ibs. 5 6 7 8 9
Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m Kg-m

- 0.691 0.829 0.967 1.106 1.244

10 2.073 2.211 2.349 2.487 2.625
20 3.455 3.593 3.731 3.869 4.007
30 4.837 4.975 5.113 5.251 5.389
40 6.219 6.357 6.495 6.633 6.771
50 7.601 7.739 7.877 8.015 8.153
60 8.983 9.121 9.259 9.397 9.535
70 10.365 10.503 10.641 10.779 10.918
80 11.747 11.885 12.023 12.161 12.300
90 13.129 13.267 13.405 13.544 13.682
100 14.511 14.649 14.787 14.925 14.064

From Kilogrammeters to Ft/Pounds

Kg-m 0 1 2 3 4
ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs.

- 7.23 14.47 21.70 28.93

10 72.33 79.57 86.80 94.03 101.27
20 144.67 151.90 159.13 166.37 173.60
30 217.00 224.23 231.46 238.70 245.93
40 289.34 296.57 303.79 311.04 318.27
50 361.66 368.89 376.12 383.36 390.59
60 434.00 441.23 448.45 455.70 462.93
70 506.34 513.57 520.80 528.04 535.27
80 578.68 585.91 593.14 600.38 607.61
90 651.00 658.23 665.46 672.70 679.93
100 723.34 730.57 737.80 745.04 752.27

Kg-m 5 6 7 8 9
ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs. ft. Ibs.

- 36.17 43.40 50.63 57.87 65.10

10 108.50 115.74 122.97 130.20 137.43
20 180.84 188.08 195.30 202.54 209.77
30 253.17 260.41 267.63 274.87 282.10
40 325.50 332.75 339.98 347.21 354.44
50 397.82 405.07 412.30 419.53 426.76
60 470.17 477.41 484.64 491.87 499.10
70 542.50 549.75 556.98 564.21 571.44
80 614.85 622.09 629.41 636.55 643.78
90 687.17 694.41 701.63 708.87 716.10
100 759.51 766.75 774.07 781.21 788.44

1 - 45
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
From Kilogrammeter to Newton meter
Kg - m 0 1 2 3 4
N-m N-m N-m N-m N-m

- - 9.81 19.61 29.42 39.23

10 98.07 107.87 117.68 127.49 137.29
20 196.13 205.94 215.75 225.55 235.36
30 294.20 304.01 313.81 323.62 333.43
40 392.27 402.07 411.88 421.69 431.49
50 490.33 500.14 509.95 519.75 529.56
60 558.40 598.21 608.01 617.82 627.63
70 686.47 696.27 706.08 715.89 725.69
80 784.53 794.34 804.15 813.95 823.76
90 882.60 892.41 902.21 912.02 921.83
100 980.66 990.47 1000.30 1010.08 1019.89

Kg - m 5 6 7 8 9
N-m N-m N-m N-m N-m

- 49.03 58.81 68.65 78.45 88.26

10 147.10 156.91 166.71 176.52 186.33
20 245.17 254.97 264.78 274.59 284.39
30 343.23 353.04 362.85 372.65 382.46
40 441.30 451.11 460.91 470.72 480.53
50 539.37 549.17 558.98 568.79 578.59
60 637.43 647.24 657.05 666.85 676.66
70 735.50 745.31 755.11 764.92 774.73
80 833.57 843.37 853.18 862.99 872.79
90 931.63 941.44 951.25 961.05 970.86
100 1029.69 1039.47 1049.31 1059.11 1068.92

From Newton meter to Kilogrammeter

N-m 0 1 2 3 4
Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m

- - 1.020 2.039 3.059 4.079

100 10.197 11.217 12.237 13.256 14.276
200 20.394 21.414 22.434 23.453 24.473
300 30.591 31.611 32.631 33.651 34.670
400 40.789 41.808 42.828 43.848 44.868
500 50.986 52.006 53.025 54.045 55.065
600 61.183 62.203 63.222 64.242 65.262
700 71.380 72.400 73.420 74.439 75.459
800 81.577 82.597 83.617 84.636 85.656
900 91.774 92.794 93.814 94.834 95.853
1000 101.972 102.990 104.011 105.031 106.051

N-m 5 6 7 8 9
Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m Kg - m

- 5.099 6.118 7.138 8.158 9.177

100 15.296 16.315 17.335 18.355 19.375
200 25.493 26.513 27.532 28.552 29.572
300 35.690 36.710 37.729 38.749 39.769
400 45.887 46.907 47.927 48.946 49.966
500 56.084 57.104 58.124 59.144 60.163
600 66.282 67.301 68.321 69.341 70.360
700 76.479 77.498 78.518 79.538 80.558
800 86.676 87.696 88.715 89.735 90.755
900 96.873 97.893 98.912 99.932 100.951
1000 107.071 108.090 109.110 110.130 111.149

1 - 46
 INTRODUCTION

Conversion tables
5-7 Temperature
From Fahrenheit to degrees Centigrade From degrees Centigrade to Fahrenheit
°F °C °F °C °C °F °C °F

-20 -28.9 90 32.2 -30 -22.0 28 82.4

-15 -26.1 95 35.0 -28 -18.4 30 86.0
-10 -23.3 100 37.8 -26 -14.8 32 89.6
-5 -20.6 105 40.6 -24 -11.2 34 93.2
-22 -7.6 36 96.8
0 -17.8 110 43.3
-20 -4.0 38 100.4
1 -17.2 115 46.1 -18 -04 40 104.0
2 -16.7 120 48.9 -16 3.2 42 107.6
3 -16.1 125 51.7 -14 68 44 112.2
4 -15.6 130 54.4 -12 10.4 46 114.8
5 -15.0 135 57.2 -10 14.0 48 118.4
10 -12.2 140 60.0 -8 17.6 50 122.0
-6 21.2 52 125.6
15 -94 145 62.8
-4 24.8 54 129.2
20 -6.7 150 65.6 -2 28.4 56 132.8
25 -3.9 155 68.3 0 32.0 58 136.4
30 -1.1 160 71.1 2 35.6 60 140.0
35 1.7 165 73.9 4 39.2 62 143.6
40 4.4 170 76.7 6 42.8 64 147.2
8 46.4 66 150.8
45 7.2 175 79.4
10 50.0 68 154.4
50 10.0 180 82.2
12 53.6 70 158.0
55 12.8 185 85.0 14 57.2 75 167.0
60 15.6 190 87.8 16 60.8 80 176.0
65 18.3 195 90.6 18 64.4 85 185.0
70 21.1 200 93.3 20 68.0 90 194.0
75 23.9 205 96.1 22 71.6 95 203.0
80 26.7 210 98.9 24 75.2 100 212.0
26 78.8 - -
85 29.4 212 100.0
00

1 - 47
 INTRODUCTION

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

1 - 48
 INTRODUCTION

CHAP. 1

Types of Loctite for fixing and sealing

INDEX

Sect. 6 Types of Loctite for fixing and sealing. ................................. 1-50

1 - 49
 INTRODUCTION

Sect. 6 - Types of Loctite for fixing and sealing

DESCRIPTION TYPE USE

Weak locking and sealing of screws, adju-

Weak thread locking Loctite 222 ster screws.
gripping and sealing
Thread coupling

Medium locking and sealing of threaded

Medium thread locking Loctite 242 parts in general.

Highly resistant fixing, locking and sealing

Strong thread locking Loctite 270 of stud bolts, bolts, screws.

Locking and sealing of already mounted

Penetrating thread locking Loctite 290 parts by capillarity. Microporosity sealing.

Highly resistant bonding.

Locker Loctite 601
Smooth bonding

Medium resistant fixing for bushes, bea-

Fixer Loctite 641 rings, etc. Parts can be demounted with
normal tools.

Fast, highly heat resistant fixing of cylin-

Super-bonding Loctite 638 drical parts. Dynamic operation.

Fast, highly heat resistant fixing of cylin-

High temperature bonder Loctite 648 drical parts.

Sealing of threaded unions on hydraulic and

couplings

Hydraulermetic Loctite 542 air pipes of up to 3/4".

Wet

Tubermetic Loctite 572 Sealing of threaded unions in general.

Sealing of flat surfaces.

Thick pianermetic Loctite 510 Applied by hand.
sealers
Flat

Sealing of precise flat surfaces. Applied by

Pianermetic Loctite 573 hand or with screen-printing systems.

Plastic-spray hermetic type Sealing of cylinder head surfaces.

Engine

Perkins
power part
hylomar
Hermetic paste type Sealing of casings, covers.

1 - 50
 INTRODUCTION

CHAP. 1

Table of bolt driving torques

INDEX

Sect. 7 Table of bolt driving torques. .................................................. 1-52

1 - 51
 INTRODUCTION

Sect. 7 - Table of bolt driving torques

MATERIAL 8.8 10.9 12.9

BOLT Z B Z B Z B

M8x1 25 27 36 38 43 46
M 8 (1.25) 23 25 33 35 40 42
M 10 x 1.25 50 55 70 75 85 90
M 10 (1.5) 46 50 66 70 80 85
M 12 x 1.25 90 97 127 135 143 155
M 12 (1.75) 82 86 115 120 138 145
M 14 x 1.5 142 153 200 215 240 260
M 14 (2) 130 140 182 195 220 235
M 16 x 1.5 215 230 300 320 360 390
M 16 (2) 200 215 280 300 340 360
M 18 x 1.5 310 330 435 470 520 560
M 18 (2.5) 270 295 385 415 460 495
M 20 x 1.5 430 460 610 660 720 770
M 20 (2.5) 390 415 550 585 660 705

3/8" -24 UNF 44 47 62 67 75 80

3/8" -16 UNC 40 43 56 60 68 72
1/2" -20 UNF 105 112 147 157 175 190
1/2" -13 UNC 95 102 135 145 160 173
9/16" -18 UNF 150 160 210 225 250 270
9/16" -12 UNC 135 145 190 205 230 245
5/8" -18 UNF 205 215 285 305 345 365
5/8" -11 UNC 185 200 260 280 315 335
3/4" -16 UNF 355 380 500 535 600 645
3/4" -10 UNC 325 345 455 490 550 585

Torque value in Nm Z = galvanized bolt B = burnished bolt

DRIVING TORQUE TOLERANCE VALUES

Critical assembly +5% / -5%
Important assembly +5% / -15%
Secondary assembly +5% / -30%

1 - 52
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

CHAP. 2

INDEX

Sect. 1 A - Splitting the cab from the tractor. ................................................ 2-3

A 1 - Sequence of splitting operations ......................................... 2-4
A 2 - Sequence of assembly operations ...................................... 2-6
B - Splitting the platform from the tractor. ....................................... 2-7
B 1 - Sequence of splitting operations ......................................... 2-7
B 2 - Sequence of assembly operations ..................................... 2-8

Sect. 2 Splitting the engine from the axle. .................................................... 2-9

2.1 - Which main assemblies are accessed. ...................................... 2-10
2.2 - Sequence of splitting operations. ............................................... 2-10
2.3 - Sequence of operations to join the parts together. .................... 2-12

Sect. 3 Splitting the axle from the gearbox. ................................................ 2-13

3.1 - Which main assemblies are accessed. ...................................... 2-14
3.2 - Sequence of splitting operations. ............................................... 2-14
3.3 - Sequence of operations to join the parts together. .................... 2-17

Sect. 4 Splitting the gearbox from the differential housing. ...................... 2-19
4.1 - Which main assemblies are accessed. ...................................... 2-20
4.2 - Sequence of splitting operations. ............................................... 2-20
4.3 - Sequence of operations to join the parts together. .................... 2-22

2-1
SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

2-2
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

CHAP. 2

Splitting the cab from the tractor

INDEX

Sect. 1 A - Splitting the cab from the tractor.

A 1 - Sequence of splitting operations ......................................... 2-4

A 2 - Sequence of assembly operations ...................................... 2-6

B - Splitting the platform from the tractor.

B 1 - Sequence of splitting operations ......................................... 2-7

B 2 - Sequence of assembly operations ...................................... 2-8

2-3
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Sect.1- A - Splitting the cab from the tractor

A 1 - Sequence of splitting 6 - Disconnect the two coolant tubes (1 and 2 Fig.
3-2) of the air conditioning unit, applying the co-
operations olant charging and discharging device. (Fig.2-2);

1 - Disconnect the positive battery lead. Access the
compartment on the left-hand side in the cab and
remove the battery itself;
2 - Remove the two side guards from the bonnet and
then remove the bonnet;
3 - Hook the cab to an adequate device and fix it
with two 12MA bolts in the two side holes after
having removed the two rubber protection caps
(Fig.1-2a);
7 - Disconnect the two water circulating tubes of the
cab heating system (3 and 4 Fig.4-2);
8 - Disconnect the three main connectors on the front
left-hand side of the cab (5 Fig.5-2);
9 - Disconnect the following six connectors:
1 electric fan cable on the front right-hand side;
1 windscreen-wiper cable with 4 connectors on
the front right-hand side;
4 cables for the electronic lift system;

4 - Remove the four bolts that fix the cab to the Si- 10 - Disconnect the power lead from the starter mo-
lent blocks; tor;

5 - Disconnect the power steering feed and dischar-

ge tubes, i.e.:
a) tube that delivers oil to the power steering
unit between the filtre and Orbitrol;
b) tubes that deliver oil to the steering cylinder;
c) tube that drains oil from the Orbitrol device
and supplies the solenoid valve unit;

re
m s I
))

Lh
0» A mm
v J
L
Fig.1-2a v o
\

2-4
*
SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Splitting the cab from the tractor

ima B
C

f%\
v

1.

Fig.2-2

<3> 1 2

u
□Tp (Cl
S' i c n
\i jm

Fig.3-2
?!
-U. cnift
1/
(
'0
/(
i /ÿ.
1

«/ /
CD i_i|ÿ
Wifi
U
t
xrx
Jra
* .r
M
'-Z7P

&
ST?
a C
3H4
iiT|
x>
ap
mgy N 5
fk
ss®TO
OM <%CQ i
s
0
K=3s=46'o
- ZTJ
i
©0
<5
Fig.4-2 Fig.5-2a -ÿC 1m
2-5
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Splitting the cab from the tractor

11 - Remove the cover in the battery compartment to
access the reverse shuttle (6) control rod con-
nected to the lever (7 Fig.6-2)

12 - Disconnect the supplementary spool valve con- «L 7

trol rods;

13 - Disconnect the hand-brake rod;

14 - Disconnect the pedal and lever accelerator con-

MU
trol rod; ©
15 - Disconnect the two unions of the hydraulic tubes
that supply the brakes;

16 - Disconnect the control rods of the 540 rpm and Fig.6-2a

540/1000 rpm rear PTO;

17 - Disconnect the synchronized PTO rod;

18 - Disconnect the creeper gear control rod;

19 - Lift the cab about 15 cm so that the reverse shut-

S e
tle rod (6) can be disconnected from the reverse & e
shuttle control lever (7 Fig.6-2a and 7-2a) and
c ©
the engine clutch control rod (8 Fig.6-2); L/1
7W
CQ
0
20 - Remove the cab from the tractor. J <o
c
T

n
A 2 - Sequence of assembly
\
operations
Proceed with the demounting operations in reverse,
®W
Fig.7-2a

complying with the following instructions:

1 - Hang the cab from an adequate device, fixing
this in the two side holes (see Fig. 1-2) and kee-
ping the cab in a horizontal position;
2 - Set the cab in its normal location, about 40 cm
from its definitive position and route the cables,
rods, tubes and so forth in the required way;
3 - Connect the control rods to their respective sup-
plementary spool valves;
5 - Lower the cab a further 15 cm from its definitive
position and set the clutch control rod and rever-
se shuttle control rod in their respective suppor-
ts. These will be definitively fixed and adjusted
once the cab has been completely mounted;
6 - Now connect all possible electric wires;
7 - Set the cab in its definitive position and fix it to its
supports. Complete all electrical, hydraulic and
mechanical connections.

4 - Insert the two feed tubes of the steering cylinder

between the protective plate of the exhaust pipe
and the starter motor flanging;

2-6
*
SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

B - Splitting the platform from the tractor

B 1 - Sequence of splitting
operations
1 - Disconnect the positive battery lead. Access the
compartment on the left-hand side in the cab and
remove the battery itself;
2 - Demount the two side guards from the bonnet
and remove the bonnet;
3 - Hook the platform to an adequate device, fixing
it with two 12MA bolts in the two side holes after
having removed the two rubber protection caps
6 - Disconnect the three main connectors on the front
left-hand side of the cab (5 Fig.5-2b);
7 - Disconnect the following connectors:
1 solenoid valve lead on the front right-hand side;
4 leads for the electronic lift system (if installed);
8 - Disconnect the power lead from the starter mo-
tor;
/
vs \=J*\
rta

(Fig.1-2b);
TJkl
4 - Remove the four bolts that fix the platform to the
Silent blocks; MrJJ 5?
5 - Disconnect the power steering feed and dischar-
ge tubes, i.e.:
O'
a: N
c

5
a) tube that supplies oil to the power steering
unit between the filtre and Orbitrol; a? YQ\ -<®
b) tube supplying oil to the steering cylinder; VXfll s
(

c) tube that discharges the Orbitrol and supplies

the solenoid valve unit; — Hu?
Fig.5-2b -*€ o n

L'-
rb

«
h]

V
\V
fa
(LLL‘ IS
\
Fig.1-2b

2-7
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Splitting the platform from the tractor

9 - Remove the cover from the battery compartment
for access to the reverse shuttle control rod (6)
connected to the lever (7 Fig.6-2b);

10 - Disconnect the supplementary spool valve con- 7

trol rods;

11 - Disconnect the hand brake rod;

12 - Disconnect the lever and pedal accelerator con-

Ml? 6
trol rod;

13 - Disconnect the two unions from the hydraulic

tubes that supply the brakes;

14 - Disconnect the control rods of the 540 rpm and Fig.6-2 b

540/1000 rpm rear PTO;

15 - Disconnect the synchronized PTO rod;

16 - Disconnect the creeper gear control rod;

17 - Lift the platform about 15 cm so that the reverse

S e
shuttle rod (6) can be disconnected from the re- & e
verse shuttle control lever (7 Fig.6-2b and 7-2b)
c ©
and the engine clutch control rod (8 Fig.6-2); L/1
CQ
0
18 - Remove the platform from the tractor. J

B 2 - Sequence of assembly
\
operations
Proceed with the demounting operations in reverse,
®W
Fig.7-2b

complying with the following instructions:
1 - Hang the platform from an adequate device with
4 rods, taking care to keep it in a horizontal posi-
tion;
5 - Lower the platform about to 15 cm from its defi-
nitive position. Set the clutch control and rever-
se shuttle rods in their respective supports. The
se will be definitively fixed and adjusted once
the platform has been completely mounted;

2 - Set the platform in its normal location about 40
cm from its definitive position and route the ca-
bles, rods, tubes and so forth in the required way;
3 - Connect the control rods to their respective sup-
plementary spool valves;
6 - Now connect all possible electric wires;
7 - Set the platform in its definitive position, fixing it
to the relative supports and complete all the
electrical, hydraulic and mechanical connections.

4 - Insert the two feed tubes of the steering cylinder

between the protective plate of the exhaust pipe
and the starter motor flanging;

2-8
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

CHAP. 2

Splitting the engine from the axle

INDEX

Sect. 2 Splitting the engine from the axle.

2.1 - Which main assemblies are accessed. ...................................... 2-10

2.2 - Sequence of splitting operations. ............................................... 2-10
2.3 - Sequence of operations to join the parts together. .................... 2-12

2-9
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Sect.2 - Splitting the engine from the axle

2.1 Which main assemblies are
accessed

2.1 - Which main assemblies are

accessed
The Clutch and thrust plate unit can be accessed
once the engine and axle have been split from the to
tractor.
Tf {§)
2.2 - Sequence of operations to $ Fig.8-2
11
fO
split the parts
The cab or platform need not be demounted.

Note: the following description concerns tractors with

cabs. If the tractor only has a platform, the number of
operations required will be sensibly reduced owing to
the absence of the air conditioning, heating, ventila-
ting systems and certain electrical components. £
®/J
Q
1 - Remove the side guards and bonnet;

2 - Disconnect the battery lead from the starter mo- 13 o

tor ;
i°
3 - Disconnect the electric cable connector for the
by speed steering sensor at starter motor level;
<T' fee
4 - Disconnect the two main upper connectors for
the electric wiring in the front part of the tractor
Fig.9-2
■ nTcy
on the left-hand side of the cab (9 Fig.8-2);

5 - Disconnect the electric cable connector for the

(i
cab fan on the front right-hand side (14 Fig.10-
2); 14

6 - Remove the guard and relative drive shaft of the

4WD axle;
cu
priM
7 - Disconnect the delivery (11) and intake (10) pi- reefs:
!'ÿ -< ?&
pes from the hydraulic pump (Fig.8-2);

8 - Disconnect the two oil tubes from the steering

<8> A
cylinder; 'fflSSp&fl
0)
9 - Disconnect the Orbitrol delivery tube between the ©
filtre and the Orbitrol unit itself (12 Fig.8-2); & o
DrW? Fig.10-2
<3
0
U4ll I TUT
2 - 10
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Splitting the engine from the axle

10 - Disconnect the flexible tubes for the air conditio-
ning system and apply the coolant charging and
rÿ
\ <Xs>
discharging device as described in chapter 10
(cab) (Fig.2-2); (5
11 - Disconnect the two flexible tubes that re-circula-
O' 0>
te water in the cab heating circuit, connected to
the front part of the engine (8 Fig.9-2);

12 - Disconnect the two tubes from the transmission

oil cooling radiator on the right-hand side (13
Fig.9-2);
00
13 - Disconnect the pipe that supplies oil to the front
C
diff lock (15 Fig.10-2);
Fig.11-2
14 - Disconnect the two tubes between the pump and
brake oil reservoir (16 Fig.10-2);

15 - Disconnect the accelerator cable from the injec-

tion pump (17 Fig.10-2);
r TZT
Bp?i
16 - Fit two wooden wedges between the 4WD axle
and the relative locking surfaces on the radiator c
1 £

d
t/
I h I If
'
C

o
#=*
u-
C
support to prevent the engine from overturning / nr,
(Fig.11-2); o

17 - Adequately support the assemblies to be sepa- \ ]fle £ B

fs '0 &

rated and then remove all the bolts that fix the © Q]
axle/engine flange (14 bolts) (Fig.12-2); c

18 - Split the two assemblies, taking care to keep /

their joining surfaces perfectly aligned and pa-
rallel (Fig.13-2).
Fig.12-2

n
u
,fo
Vÿy
V, p
•s-

o'
O

0
&
1/
o
<-

'o
o
t
•?r

1 NS
:=J

wv m
c

cv
v/ y-1
Fig.13-2

2 - 11
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Splitting the engine from the axle

2.3 - Sequence of operations to join
the parts together
Proceed with the demounting instructions in reverse,
complying with the following indications:

1 - Make sure that the clutch disks are correctly cen-

tered on the flywheel; use tool 01 FRI GL or 02
FRI GL

2 - Perfectly align the two assemblies, making sure

that the joining surfaces are parallel;

3 - Set the two assemblies near to each other and

allow the transmission shafts and clutch disks to
mesh by slightly turning the flywheel;

4 - Torque the 14 fixing bolts the required Nm value

after using Loctite 242.

2 - 12
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

CHAP. 2

Splitting the axle from the gearbox

INDEX

Sect. 3 Splitting the axle from the gearbox.

3.1 - Which main assemblies are accessed. ...................................... 2-14

3.2 - Sequence of splitting operations. ............................................... 2-14
3.3 - Sequence of operations to join the parts together. .................... 2-17

2 - 13
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Sect3 - Splitting the axle from the gearbox

3.1 - Which main assemblies are
accessed a 21) (22) (20)
S
O
The following assemblies can be accessed by split-
ting the axle from the gearbox:

- the complete axle

- the gearbox

3.2 - Sequence of splitting

operations
sgllM1
Fig.14-2

1 - Demount the cab or platform as described in

Sect.2 A or B
~ M
77
ifli L
2 - Drain the oil from the transmission unit by un-
screwing the relative drain plugs; -©ÿ

3 - Remove all the plastic clamps that fix the relati-

ve wires to the transmission unit; (

Note: the following description concerns tractors with

izU
r\
cabs. If the tractor only has a platform, the number of
operations required will be sensibly reduced owing to
©
the absence of the air conditioning, heating, ventila- £=
ting systems and certain electrical components.

Work to be carried out on the right-hand side of

the transmission unit Fig.15-2

4 - Disconnect the following wires and tubes from

the solenoid valve unit (20) (Fig.14-2): €>
a - the low pressure detecting bulb wire;
b - the four connectors for the solenoid valve powe-
ring leads;
o S
c - the two tubes that supply the by speed hydraulic
clutch;
] O V
d - the two tubes that supply the PTO clutch and
relative brake;
Q>
e - the two tubes that supply the front and rear diff
locks;
f - the drain tube connected to the lubricating pres-
sure calibrating valve block;
g - the gearbox casing return drain tube; 25)
Fig.16-2

2 - 14
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Splitting the axle from the gearbox

5 - Disconnect the shaped tube for axle and gear- Splitting the engine from the axle
box lubrication (21) (Fig.14-2);

6 - Disconnect the oil return tube from the radiator 10 - Fit two wooden wedges between the 4WD axle
on the block (22 Fig.14-2); and the relative holding surfaces on the radiator
core to prevent the engine from tilting;

Work to be carried out on the left-hand side of the 11 - Adequately support the units to be split and
transmission unit then remove all the axle/engine flange fixing bol-
ts (14 bolts);

7 - Disconnect the wire on the reverse shuttle sa-
fety switch (23 Fig.15-2);
8 - Disconnect the rubber sleeve (24) that joins the
two hydraulic circuit intake half-tubes (Fig.15-2);
12 - Split the two assemblies, making sure that the
joining surfaces are kept perfectly aligned and
parallel (Fig.16-2).

9 - Set down the rigid delivery pipe of the high flow

hydraulic circuit (25 Fig.16-2);

1)1 %
o-r %
1
5 ,1 K J
1 O

Vi jPP P
o
o 0 \>
o, p
o
P 'a
o
f 5*
&
[h
a

tÿftk W
a

Fig.17-2

2 - 15
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Splitting the axle from the gearbox

Splitting the axle from the gearbox

13 - Couple the axle to an adequate apparatus, kee- 2 g-

ping it perfectly aligned;

c
14 - Remove the gearbox cover; 1

15 - Demount the reverse shuttle engaging levers

(1-2 Fig.18-2); O

16 - Remove the rod and take out the reverse shuttle

£17 Cl Jl ®
control fork (3-4 Fig.19-2);
L.
£
17 - Remove the two screws from inside the axle
along with the six stud bolt nuts. Fig.18-2
Remove the shaft, the fork and the clutch control
collar for access to the two top nuts;

18 - Remove the PTO shaft;

19 - Remove the axle, making sure to keep it well ali-

gned (Fig. 20-2). C \
c S"--
o
(
mMo vmo / m& o
) o
Oo
h
\

n Fig.19-2
c
II

;*>
Wv

II o,
2Q*33
_;

P L
ZS=©
)
'[
© c

c c.
o'ig" %i(fn
v\l 1
Fig.20-2

2 - 16
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Splitting the axle from the gearbox

3.3 - Sequence of operations to join
the parts together

Proceed with the demounting instructions in reverse,

complying with the following indications:

1 - Prepare the axle and gearbox as described in

sect. A5 and B5 of chap. 5;

2 - Perfectly align the two assemblies, ensuring that

the joining surfaces are parallel;

3 - Spread flange sealing liquid (Loctite 510) on the

adequately cleaned joining surfaces;

4 - Set the two assemblies near to each other (axle

and gearbox) to allow the drive shafts to
couple and torque the bolts and fixing nuts to
98-120 Nm after having spread them with Locti-
te 242;

5 - Couple the transmission unit to the engine and

then proceed with all the other assembly opera-
tions as described in sect. 2 and 3.

2 - 17
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

2 - 18
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

CHAP. 2

Splitting the gearbox from the

differential housing
INDEX

Sect. 4 Splitting the gearbox from the differential housing.

4.1 - Which main assemblies are accessed. ...................................... 2-20

4.2 - Sequence of splitting operations. ............................................... 2-20
4.3 - Sequence of operations to join the parts together. .................... 2-22

2 - 19
*
SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Sect.4 - Splitting the gearbox from the diff. housing

4.1 - Which main assemblies are
accessed
Separation of the gearbox and differential housing from
the tractor allows access to:
v-=ÿJ

\
m
TJ o m
/
o 5V
- the differential and locking unit
- the bevel gear pair
- the reduction ranges /] r
(m
0 C
- the 4WD hydraulic clutch _1 N>
- the creeper gear unit
i °o [(
c
4.2 - Sequence of splitting
operations 6 Fig.21-2

1 - Remove the cab or platform as described in

Sect.2 A or B; ~7c .u SI
2 - Drain the oil from the transmission by unscrewing
the relative drain plugs; W dÿ© 0
&-Tf
3 - Remove all the plastic clamps that fix the relati- «2
ve wires to the transmission unit; 1
Note: the following description concerns tractors with 8 9
cabs. If the tractor only has a platform, the number of
operations required will be sensibly reduced owing to
I
the absence of the air conditioning, heating, ventila-
ting systems and certain electrical components. K
4 - Disconnect the wires from the electronic lift sy-
stem along with the wires of the relative sensors; 11
Fig.22-2
5 - Disconnect the wire of the PTO shaft rpm sen-
sor (6 Fig.21-2);

6 - Disconnect the rear current tap wires;

Work to be carried out on the right-hand side of the tran-
smission unit
9 - Disconnect the supply tube of the diff lock
on the control plunger (10 Fig.22-2);
10 - Disconnect the two 4WD hydraulic clutch supply
tubes (11 Fig.22-2);

7 - Disconnect the forward ground speed sensor wire 11 - Disconnect the brake rod from its relative brac-
(7 Fig.22-2); ket (12 Fig.22-2);

8 - Disconnect the PTO clutch supply tubes (8) and

the relative brake (9) at hydraulic damper level
(Fig.22-2);

2 - 20
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Splitting the gearbox from the differential housing

Work to be carried out on the left-hand side of the tran-
smission unit

12 - Disconnect the oil return tube leading to the ge- *=i

arbox housing (13 Fig.23-2);
©
13 - Disconnect the oil inlet tube leading from the C-D .11
vo
gearbox (14 Fig.23-2); 13 (c
!IL) tx
cT
14 - Disconnect the lift oil delivery tube between the
15
rigid and flexible parts (15 Fig.23-2); tc
15 - Disconnect the brake rod from its relative brac- v©
ket (16 Fig.23-2); fa ©
18 Fig.23-2
16 - Remove the gearbox cover and the lower cover
(18) on the differential housing for access to the
two internal connecting bolts located in both the
'S
upper and lower parts (Fig.24-2);
)
,,/
c
?
17 - Remove the external bolts that fix the differential 3
housing to the gearbox; O

—
A
2®ÿ
18 - Mesh the creeper unit in top gear (1) by opera- i

ting the relative external lever (Fig.25-2);

19 - Fit two wooden wedges between the 4WD axle

RJ
and the relative holding surfaces on the radiator
core to prevent the engine from tilting;
A
20 - Adequately support the units to be split; /; '

f\V
Fig.24-2

o o
o °\
=rc FT

o
o
a;
a ■I
o o

V
o

Fig.25-2

2 - 21
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Splitting the gearbox from the differential housing

21 - Split the two assemblies, making sure that
the two joining surfaces are kept perfectly ali-
gned and parallel (Fig.22-2);
22 - Help the PTO shaft to slip from the rear part of
the gearbox whilst the two assemblies are being
split.
position on the gearbox housing, making sure
that it has connected to the flywheel hub;
2 - Perfectly align the two units, making sure that
the joining surfaces are parallel;
3 - Spread flange sealing liquid (Loctite 510) on the
adequately cleaned joining surfaces;

4.3 - Sequence of operations to join 4 - Set the two assemblies near to each other, to al-
low the upper shaft of the transmission unit and
the parts together the drive shaft of the 4WD clutch to couple;

5 - Torque the internal and external fixing bolts to

Proceed with the demounting instructions in reverse, 98-120 Nm after having spread them with Locti-
complying with the following indications: te 242.

1 - Prepare the gearbox by meshing the creeper unit

in top gear and set the PTO shaft in its correct

r■J
J K %
%
D
_ I CO
Ji o
n ILJ J
1

4 «OS (A
S-g

Fig.26-2

2 - 22
 SPLITTING THE ASSEMBLIES

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

2 - 23
 ENGINE

CHAP. 3

INDEX

Sect. 1 Technical specifications. .................................................................................... 3-3

1-1 Main technical specifications.................................................................. 3-3

Sect. 2 Driving torques. ................................................................................................... 3-5

2-1 Standard driving torques ........................................................................ 3-6
2-2 Recommended driving torques: engine 903.27 ..................................... 3-6
2-3 Recommended driving torques: engine 1004.40/1004.42 ..................... 3-8

Sect. 3 Timing: engine 903.27

3-1 Introduction........................................................................................... 3-16
3-2 Cylinder N° 1 compression TDC identification ..................................... 3-17
3-3 Checking the camshaft timing .............................................................. 3-17
3-4 Checking the injection pump locking angle .......................................... 3-18
3-5 Checking the injection pump timing ..................................................... 3-19

Sect.4 Timing: engines 1004-40 and 1004-42

4-1 Introduction........................................................................................... 3-22
4-2 Cylinder N° 1 compression TDC identification ..................................... 3-24
4-3 Checking the camshaft timing .............................................................. 3-25
4-4 Checking the injection pump timing ..................................................... 3-26

3-1
ENGINE

3-2
 ENGINE

Sect.1- Technical specifications

1-1 Main technical specifications
Engine Perkins Perkins Perkins
Massey Ferguson 2210 Massey Ferguson 2220 Massey Ferguson 2230

GENERAL DATA
Manufacturer Perkins Engine co. Perkins Engine co. Perkins Engine co.
Type 903.27 1004.40 1004.42
List CP. 80906 AP. 81859 AS. 81039
Cycle Diesel, natural induction Diesel, natural induction Diesel, natural induction
with direct injection with direct injection with direct injection
N° Cylinders 3 4 4
Swept volume 2.7 liters 3.99 liters 4.233 liters
Compression ratio 17.25:1 17.25 : 1 17.25 : 1
Bore 95 mm 100 mm 103 mm
Stroke 127 mm 127 mm 127 mm

POWER RATING
DIN 70020 39.7 kW / 54 HP 48.6 kW / 66 HP 54 kW / 73 HP
Max. speed with no load 2475 RPM 2375 RPM 2310 RPM
Idling rate 750 RPM 750 RPM 750 RPM

MAX. TORQUE
DIN 70020 193.1 Nm at 1350 RPM - 282 Nm at 1400 RPM

FUEL PUMP
Make AC Delco AC Delco AC Delco XD
Pressure 0.5-0.8 bar 0.5-0.8 bar 0.4-0.7 bar

INJECTION PUMP
Make LUCAS LUCAS LUCAS
Type DP202 DP202 DP202
Length of injection pipe 400 mm 400 mm 400 mm
Pipe diameter 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 1.5 mm

INJECTORS
Make LUCAS LUCAS LUCAS
Injector casing U2645 A049 U2645 A055 2645 A311
Atomizer sprayer LO 58 PBA LO 68 PBA 2645 K609
Pressure setting 296 ± 5 bar 296 ± 5 bar

SPEED REGULATOR
Make CAV CAV
Type mechanical mechanical

COLD STARTING DEVICE

Make ISKRA ISKRA ISKRA
Type Glow plug Glow plug Glow plug

COOLING SYSTEM
Type Water, with centrifugal pump
0.7 bar radiator plug pressure
and thermostat with by pass.
70 kpa (0.7 bar)
Water, with centrifugal pump Water, with centrifugal pump
0.7 bar radiator plug pressure 0.7 bar radiator plug pressure
and thermostat with by pass. and thermostat with by pass.
70 kpa (0.7 bar) 70 kpa (0.7 bar)

3-3
 ENGINE

Technical specifications
Engine Massey Ferguson Massey Ferguson Massey Ferguson
Massey Ferguson 2210 Massey Ferguson 2220 Massey Ferguson 2230

FAN
Type Massey Ferguson Massey Ferguson Massey Ferguson

TAPPET GAP
Cold intake 0.20 mm 0.20 mm 0.20 mm
Cold exhaust 0.45 mm 0.45 mm 0.45 mm
Exhaust pressure 10.2 kn/m2 10.2 kn/m2 10.2 kn/m2

3-4
 ENGINE

Driving torques
INDEX

Sect. 2 Driving torques

2-1 Standard driving torques ................................................ 3-6

2-2 Recommended driving torques: engine 903.27 ..................... 3-6
2-3 Recommended driving torques: engine 1004.40/1004.42 .................. 3-8

3-5
 ENGINE

Sect. 2 - Driving torques

Driving torques Standard driving torques for stud bolts (metal
ends)
The below listed driving torques refer to components
slightly lubricated with new engine oil before being DRIVING TORQUE
torqued.
Thread size Nm kgf m
M 6 x 1.00 5 0.5
2-1 Standard driving torques M 8 x 1.25 11 1.1
Driving torques for fixing bolts and nuts M10 x 1.50 18 1.8
M12 x 1.75 25 2.5
DRIVING TORQUE

THREAD SIZE Nm kgfm

M 6 x 1.00 9 0.9 Standard torques for pipe unions, plugs and adap-
ters
M 8 x 1.25 22 2.2
M10 x 1.50 44 4.5 DRIVING TORQUE
M12 x 1.75 78 8.0
Thread size Nm kgfm
M14 x 2.00 124 12.6
1/8 PTF 9 0.9
M16 x 2.00 190 19.3
1/4 PTF 17 1.7
3/8 PTF 30 3.0
2-2 Recommended driving torques for 3/4 PTF 45 4.5
engine 903.27
Cylinder head

Torque bolts 1 to 8 to 90 Nm in numeric order.

Re-torque bolts 1 to 8, turning through 60°, again in
numeric order.
Torque nuts 9 to 12 to 60 Nm, in numeric order.
Re-torque bolts 9 to 12, turning through 60°, again in
numeric order.

B® 9 10® o
O O

Q2 70
o o
o o 30
8

®w@ @w@ © ®;

Fig.1-3

3-6
 ENGINE

Driving torques
2-3 Recommended driving torques for engine 903.27

DRIVING TORQUE

DESCRIPTION Thread Nm kgfm

Cylinder head
Cylinder head fixing bolts M12/M14 (see page 3-6)
Flanged nuts of tappet cover – metal cover M10 30 3.0
Flanged nuts of tappet cover – plastic cover M10 20 2.0
Bolts fixing intake manifold to cylinder head M8 22 2.2
Cylinder head exhaust manifold nuts M8 22 2.2
Fixing bolts of engine lifting bracket M10 44 4.5
Temperature switch 5/8 UNF 30 3.1
Temperature switch 3/8 PTF 30 3.1

Pistons and connecting rods

Connecting rod nuts 7/16 UNF 77.5 7.9

Drive shaft
Main bearing fixing bolts 9/16 UNF 152.5 15.6
Drive shaft pulley fixing bolts 7/8 UNF 325 33.2
Drive shaft pulley fixing bolts with washer 7/8 UNF 365 37.2
Bolts to fix flywheel to drive shaft 1/2 UNF 105 10.7
Rear oil retainer casing fixing bolts M8 22 2.2
Bolts fixing counterbalance to drive shaft 7/16 UNF 73 7.4
Flanged bolt to fix adapter to pulley 3/8 UNC 37 3.8

Valve gear housing and relative control

Bolts to fix valve gear housing to engine block M8 22 2.2
Fixing bolts for bottom cover of valve gear housing M8 22 2.2
Fixing bolts of front cover of valve gear housing M8 22 2.2
Fixing bolts of front cover of valve gear housing M6 9 0.9
Fixing bolts of front bridge cover, bottom cover M8 22 2.2
Camshaft gear fixing bolts M8 27 2.8
Intermediate gear fixing bolt 1/2 UNF 65 6.6
Intermediate gear fixing bolt M12 78 8.0

3-7
 ENGINE

Driving torques
DRIVING TORQUE

DESCRIPTION Thread Nm kgfm

Engine block
Sump fixing bracket bolt M12 78 8.0
Mazak plug for cylinder block support M12 3.5 0.4
Front engine support bracket nut M12 78 8.0

Intake system
Bolts to fix intake manifold to cylinder head M8 22 2.2
Nuts to fix exhaust manifold to cylinder head M8 22 2.2
Nuts to fix turbocompressor to manifold (CR) M8 44 4.5
Turbocompressor oil discharge elbow (CR) 1/2 PTF 24 2.4
Induction heater 7/8 UNF 30.5 3.1
Induction heater M22 30.5 3.1

Fuel system
High pressure pipe nuts M12 22 2.2
Low pressure pipe nut (tank to pump intake union) 1/2 UNF 9 0.9
Low pressure fuel pipe nut (breather pipe to tank) 1/2 UNF 9 0.9
Low pressure fuel pipe nut (breather pipe) M10 6 0.6
Bolt for positionable fuel filter union 1/2 UNF 23 2.3
Injector clamp fixing bolts (CP) M8 22 2.2
Injector packing gland bolt 30 3.1
Bolts to fix cylinder block or pump bearing bracket M8 22 2.2
Nut to fix pump bearing bracket to injection pump M8 22 2.2
Injection pump hub nut M14 80 8.2
Injection pump flange nuts M8 22 2.2
Bolts to fix hub to injection pump gear M8 28 2.9
Fuel pump fixing bolts M8 22 2.2

3-8
 ENGINE

Driving torques
DRIVING TORQUE

DESCRIPTION Thread Nm kgfm

Lubrication system
Lubricating oil sump plug 3/4 UNF 34 3.5
Lubricating oil sump fixing bolt nuts M8 22 2.2
Bolt to fix sump to block (CR) M8 30 3.1
Nut connecting oil delivery to turbo
Nut connecting union to oil exchanger spacer
Turbocompressor oil discharge union nut
Block bearing bracket sump fixing bolt (CR) M16 170 17.3
Nut fixing sump to valve gear housing stud (CR) M8 25 2.5
Countersunk nut of lubricating oil pump pipe union 7/8 UNF 55 5.6
Bolts to fix oil pump to front bearing cap M8 22 2.2
Bolts fixing draw pipe to main bearing support M6 9 0.9
Filter head fixing bolts M10 44 4.5

Cooling system
Bolts to fix union plate to valve gear housing M8 22 2.2
Bolts and nuts to fix cooling plant pump to front cover of
valve gear housing and union plate M8 22 2.2
Nuts fixing fan to cooling plant pump
pulley M8 22 2.2

Flywheel and housing

Bolts fixing flywheel to drive shaft 1/2 UNF 105 10.7
Flywheel housing union plate fixing bolts M10 44 4.5

Electrical equipment
Alternator pulley nut (Lucas A 127) M17 80 8.2
Bolt to fix adjuster lever to alternator pulley M8 18 1.8
Adapter for adjuster lever 3/4 UNF 35 3.6
Starter motor nut bolt M10 55 5.6
Wax cap casing 2 0.2
Oil pressure switch 1/8 PTF 9.5 1.0

Retainers
Up to 19 mm including outer diameter 9 mm in width 3 0.3
Diameter between 16 mm and 25 mm 13 mm in width 5 0.5
Outer diameter over 25 mm and up to 41 mm 13 mm in width 5 0.5
Outer diameter over 41 mm and up to 63 mm 13 mm in width 6 0.6
Outer diameter over 63 mm 13 mm in width 7 0.7

3-9
 ENGINE

Driving torques
2.4 - Recommended driving torques for
engine 1004.40/1004.42
Cylinder head 1r T

CT8 a*
err
XT’3
Torque all bolts to 45 Nm in the order indicated in Fig. i P?8
2-3. 619'y [ol 09 lei ©1 loj @3 |ol \4©.
Torque the four bolts 2-8-13-18 to 110 Nm in the indi-
cated numeric order.
t) O O D O O O Q
Using the tool indicated in Fig.3-3 or making a mark (M)I° @7
on the bolts and head, torque the bolts further in nu-
meric order and in compliance with the rotation de-
grees shown in Fig.4-3.
CfU®o®, 11 12
EffL&ofnl®
Bolts S and M indicated in Fig.2/4-3 must be torqued
a further 120°, bolts L a further 150° and bolts 2-8-13-
Fig.2-3
18 by 180°.

~r_

©
*Sk
fe-
1Tfc

Fig.3-3

L 1/2 UNF S and M

150° 180° 120°
JL

Fig.4-3

3 - 10
 ENGINE

Driving torques
DRIVING TORQUE

DESCRIPTION Thread Nm kgfm

Cylinder head
Cylinder head fixing bolts 1/2 UNF see p. 3-10
Fixing components, tappet pin supports:
- Aluminium supports M12 40 4.1
- Cast iron and sintered steel supports M12 75 7.6
Flanged nuts, plastic tappet cover M12 20 2.1
Flanged nuts, aluminium tappet cover M12 30 3.0
Bolts fixing intake manifold to cylinder head M10 44 4.5
Bolts between exhaust manifold and cylinder head M10 44 4.5
Fixing bolts of engine lifting bracket M10 44 4.5

Pistons and connecting rods

Connecting rod nuts 1/2 UNF 125 12.7
Connecting rod fixing bolts 1/2 UNF 155 15.8
Bolts for positionable piston cooling jet unions 3/8 UNF 27 2.7

Drive shaft
Main bearing fixing bolts 5/8 UNF 265 27.0
Drive shaft pulley fixing bolts 7/16 UNF 115 11.8
Bolts fixing viscious damper to drive shaft pulley M12 75 7.6
Flanged bolts between viscious damper and drive shaft pulley M8 35 3.6
Flanged bolts between glued damper and drive shaft pulley M8 35 3.6
Bolts fixing rear oil retainer casing to engine block M8 22 2.2
Flanged bolts of bridge on engine block M6 16 1.6
Flanged bolts of rear oil retainer casing on bridge M6 13 1.3
Torx bolts of oil retainer casing on bridge M8 18 1.9
Flanged bolts of intermediate gear hub, balancer ass'y M12 93 9.5
Counterbalance gear nut, balancer ass'y 1/2 UNF 82 8.4
Rear housing cover fixing bolts M10 54 5.5
Bolts fixing balancer ass'y to engine block M10 30 3.1
Bolts fixing oil pump to balancer housing M8 27 2.8
Bolts fixing balancer to engine block M10 54 5.5

3 - 11
 ENGINE

Driving torques
DRIVING TORQUE

DESCRIPTION Thread Nm kgfm

Valve gear housing and relative control

Bolts fixing valve gear housing to engine block M8 22 2.2
Bolts fixing valve gear housing to engine block M10 44 4.5
Intermediate gear hub fixing bolts M10 44 4.5
Camshaft gear fixing bolt M12 95 9.5
Bolts fixing cover to valve gear housing M8 22 2.2
Cover fixing nuts on valve gear housing M8 22 2.2

Engine block
Bolts fixing rod instead of piston cooling jets 3/8 UNF 27 2.7

Fuel system
High pressure pipe nuts M12 22 2.2
Bolt for positionable union, recycle tube M8 9 0.9
Injector body packing bolt - 40 4.1
Fixing bolts for injection pump gear M10 28 2.8
Torx bolts for injection pump gear M10 22 2.2
Fuel pump fixing bolts M8 22 2.2
Nuts for injection pump flange M8 22 2.2
Retainer bolt for Bosch VE injection pump M10 27 2.8
Retainer bolt for DP 200 injection pump 10 A/F 10 1

Lubrication system
Lubricating oil sump plug 3/4 UNF 34 3.5
Bolts to fix oil pump to front bearing cap M8 22 2.2
Oil pump cover fixing bolts M8 28 2.9
Lubricating oil sump stops M8 22 2.2

Cooling system
Cooling pump driving pulley nut M8 22 2.2
(engines type AP, AQ, AS)
Bolts fixing fan control housing to valve gear M10 44 4.5
housing
Bolts fixing fan control pulley to hub M8 22 2.2
Bolts fixing fan control pulley to hub M10 44 4.5
Fan fixing bolts M8 22 2.2
Oil radiator union on oil filter head 3/4 UNF 58 5.8
Fixing bolts between coolant pump and pump housing (engine type AS) M8 29 2.9
Bolt between cooler and oil filter head 3/4 UNF 37 3.7

3 - 12
 ENGINE

Driving torques
DRIVING TORQUE

DESCRIPTION Thread Nm kgfm

Flywheel and housing

Bolts fixing flywheel to drive shaft 1/2 UNF 105 10.7
Bolts fixing cast iron flywheel housing to engine block M10 44 4.5
8.8 stamping on head M12 75 7.6
10.9 stamping on head M10 63 6.4
10.9 stamping on head M12 115 11.7
Bolts fixing aluminium flywheel housing on engine block (paper) M10 70 7.1

Induction system
Turbocompressor nuts on manifold M10 44 4.5

Electrical system
CAV AC5RA and AC5RS 5/8 UNF 55 5.6
A127 thin nut, and Motorola pulley, 22 mm gap M17 60 6.1
A127 tall nut, and Motorola pulley, 24 mm gap M17 80 8.2
Bosch 55° M14 45 4.5
Bosch 55° M16 50 5.1
Opening heater to intake manifold M22 60 6.1
Starter motor nut/bolt 3/8 UNF 30 3.0

Auxiliary equipment
Nut fixing compressor control gear to compressor 5/8 UNF 120 12.0
drive shaft
Compressor gear nut (30 gap) M20 130 13.0
Flanged bolt between bracket and intermediate gear hub M10 60 6.0
Flanged bolt for bracket and valve gear housing M8 35 3.5

3 - 13
 ENGINE

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

3 - 14
 ENGINE

CHAP. 3

Timing: engine 903.27

INDEX

Sect. 3 Timing: engine 903.27

3-1 Introduction........................................................................................... 3-16
3-2 Cylinder N° 1 compression TDC identification ..................................... 3-17
3-3 Checking the camshaft timing .............................................................. 3-17
3-4 Checking the injection pump locking angle .......................................... 3-18
3-5 Checking the injection pump timing ..................................................... 3-19

3 - 15
 ENGINE

Timing: engine 903.27

3-1 Introduction (Fig5/6-3)
To ensure they are assembled in the correct way, the
gears of the timing system are stamped with timing
marks (A). The stamped teeth of the drive shaft ge-
ars, those of the camshaft and the injection pump are
aligned with the intermediate gear when piston num-
ber 1 is at top dead center (TDC) of the compression
A y £>
©
stroke. Since the gears turn at different speeds, the
marked teeth of the intermediate gear will not neces-
sarily be aligned in this position. 7
The TDC of cylinder number 1 can be found by ali-
gning the holes in the rear plate and flywheel. IS# Fig.5-3
The two injection pumps available are both timed to
TDC on the compression stroke of cylinder number 1.
The rear side of the valve gear housing has no timing
mark, but there is a mark on the flange of the injection
pump.
a
O 3-r,
Both injection pumps have a locking bolt (1) that blocks
the shaft. If the shaft blocks before the pump is de-
a
mounted, there is no need to time the pump in rela-
tion to the engine if the drive shaft has not been tur-
( li o
A
ned. 7
The code of the injection pump on the data plate has
two letters (AN or BN) on the inside, which are used
for the successive pump timing operation.

Pump code example: 2644 A000 AN /2/2270 1

AN are the two letters used to time the pump.
2
Fig.6-3

3 - 16
 ENGINE

Timing: engine 903.27

3-2 Cylinder N° 1 compression TDC
identification (Fig 7-3)
D
1 - Remove the tappet cover.
3
2 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the
front part) until the intake valve (the first valve)
has just closed. There is a groove (3) on the left-
4
hand side of the rear plate (viewed from the rear),
allowing access to the starter ring gear. A lever Z 5
(4) can be used to turn the flywheel towards the
groove. >•? 6
\
3 - Fit the drive shaft locking plug (6) - Perkins PD241
tool - into hole (5) under the groove in the rear Fig.7-3
plate.
Continue to slowly turn the drive shaft clockwise
until the plug fits into the hole in the flywheel. The
engine is now set to TDC of cylinder number 1 on
the compression stroke.

4 - Remove the plug from the flywheel and from the

rear plate.
5 - Mount the tappet cover.
3-3 Checking the camshaft timing
1 - Check the valve play and adjust if necessary.
2 - Preset cylinder number 1 to the TDC of the com-
pression stroke.
3 - Mark the drive shaft pulley.
Place a suitable indicator on the valve gear hou-
sing in order to align it with the mark on the pulley.
4 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise from the front part
until the exhaust valve of cylinder number 3 has
completely opened.
5 - Set a 0.631 mm valve play for the intake valve of
cylinder number 1.
6 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the
front part) until the rod of the intake valve tappets
of cylinder number 1 begins to close. In this posi-
tion, make sure that the mark on the pulley is within
2/1/2 of the indicator. 21/2 equals 3.5 mm of the cir
cumference of the standard pulley, whose diame-
ter is 163.2 mm.
7 - If timing is more than 2/1/2 out of range, the gears
of the timing system are probably not meshed in
the correct way.
Note: A gear tooth of the camshaft equals 20.5 mm
on the circumference of a pulley whose diameter is
163.2 mm.
8 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the
front part) until the intake valve of the rear cylin
der has completely opened.
The cylinder 1 intake valve play should be 0.20
mm.
9 - Mount the tappet cover.

10 - Remove the temporary indicator from the valve

gear housing and the timing mark from the pulley.

3 - 17
*
ENGINE

Timing: engine 903.27

3-4 Checking the injection pump
locking angle
1 - Demount the injection pump from the engine. ,0 I

v ••

Warning: do not subject the alloy components to pres- \

\
\A
'/ .</ \.
sure when holding the pump. /
r\
,w V

2 - Hold the pump firmly in a vice. Mount the adapter

/.
-v \: Ml il
i
i
i
i

//
«•>
■n

/! - J i
i

(9 Fig.10-3) for the timing tool (7 Fig.8-3) - Perkins / XT

J

tool PD678 - on the driving shaft of the pump. Use i

the nut of the driving gear to lock the adapter. Ti-

7 0/
ghten the nut by hand.

3 - Slacken off the lock bolt (8 Fig.9-3) on the timing Fig.8-3

tool and set the tool to 89° for the AN pump rea-
dings or 88° for the BN pump readings. Tighten
the lock nut. These angles are locking angles.
/
/
/
4 - Mount the timing tool along with the spacer (11 4 '
1 ‘1 '
Fig.10-3), on the adapter on the pump. f
rT' /ÿ
/7 \
/ v

/
r X
V
/

5 - Unscrew the lock bolt (9 Fig.10-3) and allow the

indicator (12 Fig.10-3) - Perkins tool PD67-3 - to i
/
\

slide forwards until it is on the center of the pump I

flange, then tighten the lock bolt. Make sure that 7

4
the mark on the pump flange is in the center of the r , -
y r /
/
groove in the indicator. /
.

/ \
8
6 - If the mark is not correct, demount the timing tool C/ \>
and adapter. Move the Perkins timing pump nea- c/
' /a, i
rer in order to check. If the mark is correct, de
mount the timing tool and adapter from the pump.
Fig.9-3
7 - Mount the injection pump.

oVi
•»

9 l

m
■V
t\
ft
■

\'
nn
i
SS 7 i
&
10 11 12
Fig.10-3

3 - 18
 ENGINE

Timing: engine 903.27

3-5 Checking the injection pump
timing (Fig.11/12-3)
0
i 1
0 i
0
Warning: Do not unscrew the nut (14 Fig.11/3) from
the injection pump shaft. To make sure that the injec- "V /
tion pump is in the right position for timing, the injec- ,0'
tion pump hub is mounted on the shaft in the factory. © o
2*
If the hub is demounted, it must be carefully remoun-
ted on the pump using a special tool available from ')

s
0
N
Perkins dealers. (

1 - Demount the injection pump gear cover.

2 - Set piston number 1 to TDC on the compression 13 15 14

Fig.11-3
stroke.

3 - Insert the timing plug (13) - Perkins tool PD 246 -

through the groove (15) into the injection pump gear
and the hole in the hub (16). Fully push the plug
into the recess (17) in the injection pump casing. If
3ÿ
n,
the plug can be fully inserted, then pump timing is
correct. There should be no need to force in the
plug.

4 - If the timing plug cannot be inserted into the pump

casing, make sure that the engine has been cor-
0: JrI L
16) (17
■

?> •V' »7
'
7/
5»

rectly set to the TDC of cylinder number 1 on the

compression stroke. x Sÿfli j’i'j

7
X-*
f:
5 - If the engine has been correctly set to TDC but the V
plug cannot be inserted into the hole, demount the i

pump and have it set up by a specialized techni- i(i

i I
cian.
Fig.12-3
6 - If the engine has been correctly set up, remove
the timing plug and mount the injection pump gear
cover on the valve gear housing.

7 - Warning: demount the plug from the flywheel and

from the rear plate.

3 - 19
 ENGINE

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

3 - 20
 Brought to you by

SachaLnn

There’s A LITTLE DEVIL IN US ALL!

_ m
ID

*
*1* J •

• «* c A 0I
n

[L
I

%. •
-r ' ;
S5
4 Xij_.
-4
V
S
1

dFV9':
v.

gr*
t

i*
l i %

p.f * *
.»
1
*•
•H
*
 ENGINE

CHAP. 3

Timing: engines 1004-40 / 42

INDEX

Sect.4 Timing: engines 1004-40 / 42

4-1 Introduction........................................................................................... 3-22
4-2 Cylinder N° 1 compression TDC identification ..................................... 3-24
4-3 Checking the camshaft timing .............................................................. 3-25
4-4 Checking the injection pump timing ..................................................... 3-26

3 - 21
 ENGINE

Timing: engines 1004-40 / 42

4-1 Introduction \

To achieve the correct fuel injection able to meet the

requirements of the anti-pollution standards in force, ‘Ti’iyy/flHft'AiteviiBKi
-N2-
j 0iM
/
Vj
;;<c
the more recent injection pumps operate with a static
advance near to TDC.
o, 11ÿ
(o
Timing marks are stamped on the gears of the timing p 1
O
system so that they can be mounted in the correct
i •! , (o
way (A). The teeth marked on the gears of the drive o
w
shaft, the camshaft and the injection pump will be ali-
gned with the intermediate gear when piston number
o'

O'
\
1 is near to top dead center (TDC) on the compres-
sion stroke.
It may be very difficult to align all the marks since the
o
kl8p •'xs
A
ratio of the intermediate gear is much different from Fig.13-3
that of the others.
The injection pump is timed on the TDC of the com-
pression stroke of cylinder number 1. It is important to
ensure that injection is accurately timed in order to
comply with the regulations governing emissions. no 7 t— 5
Warning: The injection pump has a lock bolt (1) that
o lrt Q
blocks the shaft.
It is important to slacken off the lock bolt and for
the pump shaft to freely turn. li o
The pump drive shaft must nut be turned without the A
7
spacer (2) mounted under the lock bolt. The drive shaft
would be damaged if it were to be turned with the lock
bolt toghtened on it.

More recent injection pumps are equipped with a hub 1

(3) permanently mounted on the control shaft.
The manufacturer mounts the hub on the pump to 2
ensure very accurate timing. Engines with this confi- Fig.14-3
guration are equipped with a driving gear fixed to the
hub and not to the pump shaft. A plug (4) is used to
accurately time these pumps when serviced.
ryti j
4 3 V,

~)
)

1
s5H
'l
A mil
ISC
5 W/C /Ml
Fig.15-3

3 - 22
 ENGINE

Timing: engines 1004-40 / 42

Warning: do not unscrew the nut (5) from the injec- !
tion pump. Fig.16-3 shows the position of the nut (5) f

when the injection pump is mounted on the engine. \ O,

/ v
The hub of the injection pump is mounted on the shaft /
/ -X •
in the factory to ensure that the injection pump is in
the correct position for timing. If the nut is removed
.*
o r "*s
)
-'A
and the hub shifts, it must be accurately fixed back on ’
\ iQ
m■\o
i /.
the pump using a special tool before the pump can be / /
fitted back on the engine. i
The injection pump gear is fixed to the pump hub with
6 ♦

four fixing bolts. These bolts pass through the slits in

\
\ o O,
the gear and allow the play to be eliminated.
o
Note: in recent engines equipped with belt type coo-
lant pumps, four anti-tamper bolts are used to fix the 5
Fig.16-3
gear of the injection pump. Special tools are required
to unscrew these bolts. Consult your nearest Perkins
dealer.
Just unscrew the four bolts (6) that fix the pump gear
to the hub in order to demount the injection pump from
the engine.

3 - 23
 ENGINE

Engine timing: 1004-40 / 42

4-2 Cylinder N° 1 compression TDC
7
identification /-/A
1 - Fix a temporary indicator on the cover of the valve iSKÿ
gear housing with the tip near to the outer edge of
the pulley or drive shaft damper (6).
7>
W==M
\\ ai
« 7 n\"i
2 - Slacken off the packing gland bolts that fix the \\
injectors.
\\

;fj4il
i
I fa 5A
3 - Demount the tappet cover. J !<0 \
11
V
4 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the /1

front) until the rod of the intake valve tappet of the Fig.17-3 6
rear cylinder is about to close.

5 - Remove the elastic clamp and spacer from the front

part of the rocker arm. Unscrew the bolts of the
two front pedestals of the rocker arm and demount Mark the central point between the two marks on
the front rocker arm. Tighten the bolts of the roc- the pulley or on the damper and remove the other
ker arm pedestals. two.

6 - Demount the valve springs from the front valve
using - Perkins tool PD 6118B - and adapter PD
6118-7 for the pedestal stud bolts, or adapter PD
6118-8 for the pedestal fixing screws.
Warning: Mount a suitable collar near the upper part
of the valve to hold it if the drive shaft is turned too
much.
9 - Turn the drive shaft through 45° in an anti-
clockwise direction (viewed from the front) and then
clockwise until the mark on the pulley or damper
aligns with the indicator. Piston number 1 will be
on TDC of its compression stroke.

7 - Allow the valve to be held by the top part of the

piston.

8 - Fix a dial comparator with its feeler resting on the

top part of the valve stem (7) in order to make a
reading.
Slowly turn the drive shaft clockwise until the poin-
ter of the comparator stops turning clockwise.
Make a suitable mark on the pulley or damper of
the drive shaft in order to align it with the tempo-
rary indicator.
Keep turning the drive shaft in the same direction
until the comparator pointer starts to move anti-
clockwise. Make another mark on the pulley or
damper to align it with the pointer.

3 - 24
 ENGINE

Timing: engines 1004-40 / 42

4-3 Checking the camshaft
timing
1 - Move the piston of cylinder number 1 to the TDC
of its compression stroke.
2 - Remove the dial comparator from intake valve num-
ber 1 and mount the valve spring and tappet. Make
sure that the bolts of the rocker arm pedestals are
tighten to the correct torque value.
7 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the
front) until the intake valve of the rear cylinder is
completely open.
Adjust the play of the intake valve of cylinder N° 1
to 0.20 mm.
8 - Mount the tappet cover.

3 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the 9 - Remove the temporary indicator from the valve
front) until the intake valve of the rear cylinder is gear housing and the timing mark from the pulley
completely open. or damper.

4 - Set the play of the intake valve of cylinder N° 1 to

1.5 mm.

6 - Turn the drive shaft clockwise (viewed from the

front) until the rod of the intake valve tappet of cylin-
der number 1 just closed. In this position, check
whether the mark on the pulley or damper of the
drive shaft is +/-2 1/2° from the temporary indica-
tor. Use the following formula to find the measure
ment that corresponds to 2 1/2° on the pulley or
damper.

CXP
360
C = circumference of the pulley or damper
P = 2.5 degrees

6 - If timing is more than 2 1/2° off range, the gears of

the timing system are probably not aligned in the
correct way.

Note: a tooth of the camshaft gear corresponds to 23

mm on the circumference of a pulley whose diameter
is 203 mm. If the damper mounted is larger, a tooth of
the camshaft corresponds to 35 mm on the circumfe-
rence of a 310 mm diameter damper or 37 mm on
that of a 327 mm diameter damper.

3 - 25
 ENGINE

Timing: engines 1004-40 / 42

4-4 Checking the injection pump \Y ® L
timing -0\

V
o-j
V'7>
Warning: Do not unscrew the nut (5) that fixes the
hub on the injection pump shaft. The hub is mounted
on the shaft in a permanent way. If the hub moves, an ;V4 f%Q — .•
v /,

5 Q
injection pump specialist will have to re-position it cor- 10 i
rectly on the shaft with a special test device used by \
Perkins dealers.
9
A
1 - Set the piston of cylinder number 1 to TDC on its
compression stroke. o
7
2 - Demount the gear cover from the valve gear hou- 8
sing. For gear operated coolant pumps. Demount Fig.18-3
the coolant pump.

Note: In more recent engines with belt operated coo-

lant pumps, four anti-tamper bolts are used to fix the
fuel pump gear. These bolts can only be unscrewed
by specially trained technicians using special tools.
4%
o
Contact your nearest Perkins dealer.

3 - Insert the timing plug (10) into the hole in the gear
of the injection pump (9) through the hub slit (8).
/0
! 0)»|
\
i
Fit the plug fully into the hole (7) in the injection o \ /
pump casing. If the plug can be fully inserted, this
means that the pump has been correctly timed. It
o\yo0,ÿ
should not have to be forced in any way.

Note: The position of the timing plug for Lucas and

Stanadyne injection pumps is illustrated in (Fig.18-3). £
■

The position of the timing plug for Bosch EPVE injec-

Fig.19-3
10
tion pumps is indicated in (19-3).

4 - Remove the timing plug.

5 - If the timing plug cannot be fitted into the pump

casing, make sure that the engine has been cor-
rectly set to TDC on the compression stroke of
cylinder number 1.
If the engine has been correctly set to TDC on the
compression stroke of cylinder number 1 but the
plug does not fit into the hole, demount the injec-
tion pump and have it set up by an authorized pump
expert.

6 - Mount the gear cover on that of the valve gear

housing.

3 - 26
 ENGINE

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

3 - 27
 CLUTCH

CHAP.4

INDEX

Sect.1 General description.................................................................... 4-3

1-1 Drawing of assembly and components .......................... 4-4
1-2 Description of operation ................................................. 4-6

Sect.2 Technical specifications of clutch............................................ 4-7

Sect.3 Demounting, inspection and remounting................................ 4-9

3-1 Removal from the tractor .............................................. 4-10
3-2 Dismantling ................................................................... 4-10
3-3 Inspection ...................................................................... 4-11
3-4 Remounting and adjustment ........................................ 4-11

Sect.4 Special tools.............................................................................. 4-13

4-1
CLUTCH

4-2
 CLUTCH

CHAP. 4

General description

INDEX

Sect.1 General description

1-1 Drawing of assembly and components .......................... 4-4

1-2 Description of operation ................................................. 4-6

4-3
 CLUTCH
Sect.1 - General description
1-1 Drawing of assembly
1 6 7 8 9 10 11 24 16 15
■ip
<
a Zb
1
T)
mm
2 ;:•
wnfnMF
\
.-• .jj
;_ILJ \v%mm\
7
3
C"
( lmZ±
rfimw
v:
(
4 k
V
5 * —
12 13 14
1 - Gearbox drive shaft 13 - Clutch sleeve
2 - PTO transmission shaft 14 - Sleeve support
3 - Keyed hub 15 - Clutch control fork
4 - Hub-flywheel fixing screws 16 - Clutch fork shaft
5 - Flywheel 17 - Plug
6 - Clutch fixing bolts 18 - Cable fork
7 - Gearbox friction disc 19 - Cable
8 - Clutch plate 20 - Clutch pedal
9 - Clutch cover 21 - Safety switch
10 - Flexible coupling spring 22 - Return spring
11 - Diaphragm spring 23 - Pawl Fig.1-4
12 - Thrust bearing 24 - Screw
4-4
 CLUTCH

General description

1-1 Main components

8 9 6 pop
c
b
funyO'

o
S
.V
£ ki>
I" {0
o
o
P o
(j <k
<£2 M
u o ,b 0
o c }N;/°
,o

IO
m H£a O C/
1
o o
c ,o

'o

13) @) @ @

12
Eggwn
fr
V//
23 1
21

20 19

Fig.2-4

4-5
 i
%

CLUTCH
General description
p
-4
a>
3
><
0)

11" (28mm)
cn
&
ro
co

U1
o>
NO

NO
u
o
1+
Q
<o

fru/X
-si
ro

K
iyi

(0
W
\

i\\\\v~
r®w

N>
oo

00
X?

X
m
o
W

£\
1

Hi
0 166,2
0 280

00
00
NJ
w

Bm
aei E

00
NO
i— XÿX
V

Pw.
\
\

4ÿ
w uw
Nr/"
■/

X
i
1 cn A

ra!’
cn
00

w
1+

s
cn
co
oo
4*
cn
*

Fig.4-4
o

Fig.3-4
1-2 Description of operation
The clutch is the component that transmits drive from
the engine to the transmission unit.
The driver uses a pedal to engage and disengage the
clutch as required.
It can be the single plate type (Fig. 3-4) for tractors
equipped with hydraulic PTO clutch and the double
plate type (Fig. 4-4) for tractors equipped with the
4-6
mechanical PTO.
Power reaches the clutch from the flywheel and is tran-
smitted to the transmission unit by means of the two
plates (33-28) on which the gearbox and PTO tran-
smission shafts are splined. When the pedal is pres-
sed or the hand lever pulled, the friction plates are
freed and drive transmission stops.
 CLUTCH

CHAP. 4

Technical specifications of the clutch

INDEX

Sect.2 Technical specifications of the clutch.

2.1 Technical specifications. ................................................. 4-8

4-7
 CLUTCH

Sect. 2 - Technical specifications of the clutch

2.1 Technical specifications.
Single-plate clutch

Manufacturer Luk (Omg)

Type Single dry plate

Dimensions 11" (280 mm.)

Material 5 cerametallic plaques

Double-plate clutch

Manufacturer Luk (Omg)

Type Double plate

Dimension 11" (gearbox plate) (Massey Ferguson 2210-2220) and 12" (Massey Ferguson 2230)
10" (PTO plate) (Massey Ferguson 2210-2220) and 11" (Massey Ferguson 2230)

Material Gearbox plate: cerametallic

PTO plate : organic

4-8
 CLUTCH

CHAP. 4

Demounting, inspection and remounting

INDEX

Sect.3 Demounting, inspection and remounting.

3-1 - Removal from the tractor ............................................ 4-10

3-2 - Dismantling ................................................................. 4-10
3-3 - Inspection ................................................................... 4-11
3-4 - Remounting and adjustment ...................................... 4-11

4-9
 CLUTCH

Sect.3 - Demounting, inspection and remounting

3-1 Removal from the tractor v
—— W-
w— o
Proceed as described in Chap.2 Sect.2 (Fig. 4-4) to
access the clutch.
W. ~c V
fed M
10

3-2 Dismantling m
fc

1 - Unscrew the bolts that fix the clutch to the flywhe-

el (6 Fig.7-4) and set it down along with the fric-
tion disk.
o 0
TJ
©lo 1«
o
0,
lyj/jf JA
M(ih/k
2 - Remove the fork fixing bolt (24). Take out the
A 10
shaft (16) and the fork (15 Fig.6-4)
Fig.5-4
3 - Demount the collar (13) along with the thrust
bearing (12 Fig.6-4)

(16JHn
4 - To demount the double-plate clutch, unscrew the 24
nuts (27) from the rods (26) of the PTO clutch
/
disengaging levers (28 Fig. 8-4). o
15 /
■( V.

3-3 Inspection c
o
\ A-
13
1 - Thoroughly clean all parts and then check them.
C
2 - Replace the retention rings.
C /c
3 - Check the retaining bearing (12 Fig.6-4), making
vO O
sure that it turns in a normal way and that it of-
fers a good seal;
.0 o c/
w
Fig.6-4 0
Single plate clutch

4a - Check the friction surface on the flywheel, the

clutch plate and the friction disk.
If necessary, grind the friction surface on the
flywheel, removing a maximum 1 mm. depth of
In
material from the original new surface. fe\
\\
Double plate clutch
$
4b - Check the friction surface on the flywheel, the
clutch plate (29 and 30) and the friction disk (25). \

The friction plates can be ground. Comply with °r,R

the minimum dimensions allowed, as shown in <£p' / /
Fig.9-4. 02FRIGL
0
0

Fig.7-4

4 - 10
 CLUTCH

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3-4 Remounting and adjustment
123 105
After having thoroughly cleaned all components, re-
mount the parts by proceeding with the demounting
operations in reverse order and complying with the
following indications:
m
____ __ •
IQ103

1 - Remount the clutch disengaging level assembly 29

remembering to grease the sleeve (23) support rW
(Fig. 5-4); %
28 %
2 - Connect the engine to the axle as described in
Chap. 2 Sect. 2/5.

Single plate clutch

3 - Insert tool 02 FRI GL into the centre of the clutch

IB
and fit the friction disc on to the tool, coupling it to
the clutch plate.

4 - Mount the assembly formed in this way on to the

flywheel, remembering to perfectly centre the disc
on the clutch by turning tool 02 FRI GL (Fig.6-4). i
fir m
5 - Tighten the bolts (6) after spreading Loctite 242 m
on them. The clutch will not need to be adjusted.

34 *7
E
35
8,6 ±0'3
98 ±0’5
Fig.8-4

29’ (30) (25)

m15)
.EES
5 16.7 68 mm

Fig.9-4

4 - 11
 CLUTCH

Demounting, inspection and remounting

Double-plate clutch

6 - Insert tool 01 a FRI GL into the clutch and then fit

35
the tool on to the plate (33), also inserting the
(o%=
PTO plate (28);
32 34
7 - Mount the assembly formed in this way on to the
flywheel, taking care to perfectly center the two
plates by turning tool 01 FRI GL;
01 FR GL
8 - Tighten the clutch fixing bolts to the flywheel af-
ter having spread them with Loctite 242;
n
_]
9 - Check the height of the levers (31 and 32) and \
make sure that they are coplanar by means of
tool 01 FRI GL, which can assume two positions. u
One position allows the lever (31) height to be
regulated by means of the adjuster screw (27)
while when overturned, it allows the height of the
:
;:
I
levers (32) to be regulated by means of the bolt
(34) and nut (35);

10 - After adjusting, lock the nut (27) and clinch it then

tighten the nut (35 Fig.8-4) against the clutch plate 31
(30). 27

Fig.10-4

4 - 12
 CLUTCH

CHAP. 4

Special tools

INDEX

Sect.4 Special tools.............................................................................. 4-14

4 - 13
 CLUTCH

Sect. 4 - Special tools

Special tools
01 FRI GL
Double-plate clutch centering and adjusting plug

02 FRI GL
Single-plate clutch disk centering plug

4 - 14
 TRANSMISSION

CHAP. 5

INDEX

Sect. 1 General description.................................................................... 5-3

Sect. 2 Technical specifications of the transmission unit. .............. 5-13

Sect. 3 Demounting, inspection, remounting. ................................... 5-17

A - Gearbox drive shaft without Hydraulic Hi-Lo ................ 5-17
B - Gearbox ............................................................................ 5-29
C - Bevel gear pair and rear differential................................ 5-51
D - Rear final drives and brakes ........................................... 5-77
D1a - Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2210 tractors) . 5-78
D1b - Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2220-2230 tractors) .. 5-86
D2 - Brakes ........................................................................... 5-94
E - Hydraulic Hi-Lo................................................................. 5-99

5-1
TRANSMISSION

5-2
 TRANSMISSION

CHAP. 5

General description

INDEX

Sect. 1 General description

1-1 Introduction ..................................................................... 5-4

1-2 Drawing of the transmission assembly........................... 5-5
1-3 Exploded drawing of the gearbox ................................... 5-6
1-4 Exploded drawing of the engaging forks and levers ...... 5-7
1-5 Exploded drawing of the rear transmission unit ............. 5-8
1-6 Exploded drawing of the final drives .............................. 5-9
1-7 Ground speed table ...................................................... 5-10

5-3
 TRANSMISSION

Sect. 1 - General description

1.1 Introduction
The transmission mounted on Massey Ferguson
tractors is the modular type and consists of 7 sec-
tions:
The clutch is the dry type with an 11" diameter (279.4
mm) single-disk.
The reverse shuttle is installed on the gearbox input
and is synchronized.

Sect.1 - Clutch The gearbox has helical gears with four synchroni-
zed speeds obtained by infinitely meshed gears.

Sect.2 - Reverse shuttle The creeper (mounted on request) reduces the spe-
ed in the Slow or Standard ranges by 80% and can-
not be used with the fast ranges.
Sect.3 - Four synchro-mesh gears
There are three speed ranges: Slow-Standard and
Fast. These obtain 20 forward speeds and 20 reverse
Sect.4 - Creeper speeds.

The pinion-crown wheel assembly has Gleason

Sect.5 - Slow-Standard-Fast ranges toothing and a 9/41 ratio.

The PTO is independent with hydraulic clutch and

Sect.6 - Pinion / crown wheel and diffe- electro-hydraulic control.
rential
Transmission lubrication is forced and with oil
sprayed from the low flow circuit and splashed:
Sect.7 - Power take-off

Standard transmission

Reverse 12 forward speeds

shuttle + 4 Gears x 3 Ranges = 12 reverse speeds

Optional transmission
Reverse 15 forward speeds
shuttle + 5 Gears x 3 Ranges = 15 reverse speeds

Transmission with Creeper

Reverse 24/30 forward
shuttle + 4/5 Gears x 3 Ranges + Creeper
= speeds
24/30 reverse
speeds
Optional transmission with Creeper

Reverse 48/60 forward

4/5 Gears x 3
shuttle + Ranges + Creeper
+ HI-Lo = speeds
48/60 reverse
speeds
5-4
 TRANSMISSION

General description

1-2 Drawing of the transmission assembly

TWF[JW
ra "1 j E I
A i ■
I
rfifir
gi5
sit
« Hi
D Tÿÿ4aA3
y -dÿ SR

vlpN 1000BTO 540 ECO

0
u x
/ o
I s !c
GB5

P
•C5
o
O -«
l
1 -T.J
P it
We

J !E
!I
IT
] rSi
cr 4- Q [flanR*
g|g

/0
WHHr3 HHHHP- <T
w B3
131
,v.
Ip I
ii ■•s'
a

su
SI

Sez. 1 Sez. 2 Sez. 3 Sez. 4 Sez. 5 Sez. 6

540STD

* PEV

Sez. 7
Fig.A-5

5-5
 1-3 Perspective drawing of the gearbox

CO
K
\3

CV
#

<
#
■v
/?
CQ

/
v
71
\
o

*J?A
V
}

\\\

i
V
i )
7;

//
LLih

</

5-6
1
/
o

LU
TRANSMISSION

General description

1
I

o
o

A - Reverse shuttle
o

B - Creeper sliding gear

C - Creeper reduction gear
D - Hydraulic oil filter
Q

E - Fifth gear Fig.B-5

 1-4 Exploded drawing of the engaging forks and levers

/2
F
%
/

General description
V

’r’

TRANSMISSION
1 N
G
3

/
5-7

/ V.O
l / i

|Lv
\

V'
M
ft /J

/
1ST
I / 2ND i
7
i
i

\
3RD
rr,

■/
4TH

F - Gear lever
H
G - Reverse shuttle lever
H
I
- Fifth gear lever
- Creeper control lever
I
Fig.C-5
i
 1-5 Perspective drawing of the rear transmission unit

!
\
/

\\
>
*

v\
w
V
r

>1
<r-
7/
ft

w
l
\ •
•(

l 1
tl
!!
r
w

I
\
t
V
\
PAX

5-8
&
J
TRANSMISSION

M - Slow-Standard-Fast range selector

N - Slow-Standard-Fast range section

F
o

O - Pinion and crown wheel

W/M
©
General description

P - Fast-Run and 4WD clutch control scetion

s

/
fp

Fig.D-5

Q.
 1-6 Perspective drawing of the final drives

N
®\\/ ©

(/)
/1

/
©
o:

©
(
m

5-9
TRANSMISSION

General description

R - Differential ass'y
S - Internal final drive
T - External final drive Fig.E-5
 TRANSMISSION

General description
MasseyFerguson2220-2230 Speedsinkphwithengineat2200RPM Gearbox:4gears=30kph;5gears=40kph
Hi-Lo Engaged Hi-Lo Disengaged

Option Range Gear 14.9R30 16.9R28 16.9R24 14.9R30 16.9R28 16.9R24

480/70R30 540/65R28 480/70R30 540/65R28
1 0.18 0.17 0.16 0.22 0.21 0.19
4 2
3
4
0.24
0.35
0.46
0.23
0.33
0.45
0.21
0.31
0.41
0.29
0.42
0.56
0.28
0.40
0.54
0.26
0.37
1.50

*
Slow 5 0.62 0.60 0.55 0.74 0.71 0.66
1 0.49 0.47 0.43 0.58 0.56 0.52

i
CREEPER

2 0.65 0.63 0.58 0.78 0.75 0.70

3 0.93 0.90 0.83 1.12 1.08 1.00
4 1.25 1.20 1.11 1.49 1.44 1.33
Standard 5 1.66 1.60 1.48 1.99 1.92 1.77
1 1.33 1.29 1.19 1.60 1.54 1.42
2 1.79 1.72 1.59 2.14 2.06 1.91
3 2.55 2.46 2.28 3.06 2.95 2.73
4 3.41 3.28 3.04 4.08 3.93 3.64
Fast 5 4.54 4.37 4.05 5.43 5.24 4.85
FORWARD SPEEDS

1 1.34 1.29 1.20 1.61 1.55 1.43

2 1.80 1.73 1.60 2.15 2.08 1.92
3 2.57 2.48 2.29 3.08 2.96 2.74
4 3.43 3.30 3.06 4.10 3.95 3.66
Slow 5 4.56 4.40 4.07 5.46 5.27 4.87
STANDARD SPEEDS

1 3.59 3.46 3.20 4.30 4.15 3.84

i
Standard
2
3
4
5
4.81
6.87
9.16
12.20
4.64
6.62
8.83
11.76
4.29
6.13
8.17
10.88
5.77
8.23
10.97
14.61
5.56
7.93
10.58
14.08
5.14
7.34
9.79
13.03
1 9.81 9.46 8.75 11.75 11.32 10.48
2 13.14 12.67 11.72 15.74 15.17 14.04
3 18.75 18.07 16.72 22.45 21.64 20.03
4 25.01 24.11 22.31 29.95 28.87 26.72
Fast 5 33.30 32.10 29.71 39.88 38.44 35.57
1 0.18 0.17 0.16 0.22 0.21 0.19

X4 Slow
2
3
4
5
0.24
0.35
0.47
0.62
0.24
1.34
0.45
0.60
0.22
1.31
0.42
0.56
0.29
1.42
0.56
0.75
0.28
0.40
0.54
0.72
0.26
0.37
0.50
0.67
1 0.49 0.47 0.44 0.59 0.57 0.53
CREEPER

i
Standard
2
3
4
5
0.56
0.94
1.26
1.68
0.64
0.91
1.21
1.62
0.59
0.84
1.12
1.50
0.79
1.13
1.51
2.01
0.76
1.09
1.45
1.94
0.70
1.01
1.34
1.79
1 1.35 1.30 1.20 1.61 1.56 1.44
2 1.81 1.74 1.61 2.16 2.09 1.93
3 2.58 2.49 2.30 3.09 2.98 2.76
4 3.44 3.32 3.07 4.12 3.98 3.68
Fast 5 4.59 4.42 4.09 5.49 5.29 4.90
REVERSE SHUTTLE

1 1.36 1.31 1.21 1.62 1.57 1.45

2 1.82 1.75 1.62 2.18 2.10 1.94
3 2.60 2.50 2.31 3.11 3.00 2.77
4 3.46 3.34 3.09 4.15 4.00 3.70
Slow 5 4.61 4.44 4.11 5.52 5.32 4.92
STANDARD SPEEDS

1 3.63 3.50 3.24 4.35 4.19 3.88

i
Standard
2
3
4
5
4.87
6.94
9.26
12.33
4.69
6.69
8.93
11.88
4.34
6.19
8.26
11.00
5.83
8.32
11.09
14.76
5.62
8.02
10.69
14.23
5.20
7.42
9.89
13.17
1 9.91 9.56 8.84 11.87 11.44 10.59
2 13.28 12.80 11.85 15.91 15.33 14.19
3 18.95 18.27 16.90 22.69 21.87 20.24
4 25.28 24.37 22.55 30.27 29.18 27.00
Fast 5 33.66 32.45 30.02 40.30 38.85 35.95

5 - 10
 TRANSMISSION

General transmission

Transmission control levers

\y

\
C\

1 .3135

\ ''O'
f
V n
Uc
' _/
V \,
c
o'
2
H hH 4 24
//tV V; J
N',
Ui
t
V»A '• =ÿ>W
.Vy I I
HI-LO

£
A
L
9
N
uimv
\ ts L; iJ <.s iJ—ÿ4 <o s> si
W,
&
t n
n,

f
m
i
Q
(

n
r

C=ÿ
n
L
c
')
c
"ÿ1
\ w a
L-/,1

A - Reverse shuttle lever

B - Gear lever
C - Range lever
Fig.F-5 D - Creeper control lever

5 - 11
 TRANSMISSION

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

5 - 12
 TRANSMISSION

CHAP. 5

Technical specifications of the

transmission unit
INDEX

Sect. 2 Technical specifications of the transmission unit

2.1 Technical specifications ................................................ 5-14

2.2 Transmission power train diagram ................................ 5-15

5 - 13
 TRANSMISSION

Sect. 2 - Technical specifications of the transmis-

sion unit

2.1 Technical specifications.

Manufacturer Massey Ferguson

Gearbox

Gears With four synchronized infinitely meshed gears with heli-

cal toothing
Type of reduction range Three forward speed ranges (Low-Standard-High)
Creeper gear (7.333 reduction).
Reverse shuttle Synchronized on gearbox input
Number of speeds 12 forward and 12 reverse speeds with standard gearbox
15 forward and 15 reverse speeds with optional gearbox
24 forward and 24 reverse speeds with creeper
30 forward and 30 reverse speeds with optional gearbox
48/60 forward and 48/60 reverse speeds with Hi-Lo

Rear axle

Bevel gear pair 9/41 Gleason type, with helical toothing

Final drive Spur type with 10/51 or 11/49 ratio (Massey Ferguson 2210)
or 11/62 ratio (Massey Ferguson 2220-2230)
Total reduction ratio 23,236 o 20,29
Type of Differential With two planetaries
Diff lock With mechanical or electrohydraulic control
with mechanical engagement
Disengaged by brake operation (electro-hydraulic control).

Brakes

Type Multiple-plate, oil-coled with hydraulic control

Number of friction discs 8 (4 on each side)

Friction disk material Graphitized resin
Disk diameter 166x110mm
Total braking area 1900cm2
Diameter of braking cylinder 25.4 mm
Parking brake Mechanical and engaged by hand lever

5 - 14
 2-2 Power train diagram (without Hi-Lo)
%

Technical specifications of the transmission unit

A

' I42 20 20 (E) 39

r
@r-l
56
T 3ÿ—i — D)6|6|J IT
4A rÿs~ - -i I Bill 30
D
30
y

‘ntlllll ilihuLj

__
l
ITT

rHF
i

MITT! ITT 1 »

TRANSMISSION
2600 rpm I
I I
r •v 7 i 42 i
1

r
i 1

36 9
= 84 I I
5 - 15

25 I
I i
I I !
41 i
43 36 27
26! 48
57
18P 204K i

!, !
i
i
i
i 44
33 1
27
50ÿ
!i Jmw*
10 5©j
66

32ÿBR 46 \
4
14 I i
i 1

L _l 36 19

m 7
27
L 360 J

A - Engine F - Fast Run and 4WD clutch

B - 4WD front axle G - Rear final drive
C
D
E
- Reverse shuttle unit
- Creeper
- Ranges
H
I
- PTO output shaft
- PTO clutch Fig. G-5

i
 TRANSMISSION

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

5 - 16
 TRANSMISSION

CHAP. 5

Gearbox drive shaft without Hi-Lo

INDEX

Sect. 3 Demounting, inspection, remounting

A - Gearbox drive shaft without Hi-Lo

A 1 - Drawing of the assembly and components ............... 5-18
A 2 - Removal from the tractor ........................................... 5-20
A 3 - Dismantling ................................................................. 5-22
A 4 - Inspection ................................................................... 5-24
A 5 - Remounting ................................................................ 5-25
A 6 - Special tools ............................................................... 5-27

5 - 17
 i
*

TRANSMISSION
A - Gearbox drive shaft
Sect. 3 Demounting, Inspection, Remounting
A1 - Drawing of the assembly
0
0

0
0
0
0
w©

i ©

©
-I
:
v__
LTJ

*t:ss33©
H

1
H— J*\

m
3
r—

iÿr
r
o
L

3 !
s]
y
...J i
r -i
M7

i,
_
fT LX.
©
/

©s=
!r
kÿ7in
m

i\
J

j
I

1
1
1
u

imi
0
0

0
0
0
Fig. 1 - 5
5 - 18
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox drive shaft

A1 - Main components

5 6 7

.0
o
J
0 0),
0 r 14

m L-
-
"

® © ® o
12 jS) @ (j6)

© ® ®
1 - Thrust bearing 11 - Transmission shaft
2 - Clutch sleeve 12 - Needle bearing
3 - Sleeve support 13 - Reverse shuttle gear
4 - Shaft housing 14 - Synchronizing unit
5 - Fork bolt 15 - Retention ring
6 - Fork 16 - Concentric A.V. retention ring
7 - Clutch fork shaft 17 - Union
8 - Pin 18 - Lubrication tube
9 - Spring 19 - Union
10 - Pawl 20 - Lubrication tube for gearbox secondary shaft

Fig. 2-5

5 - 19
 TRANSMISSION
Gearbox drive shaft
A 2 - Removal from the tractor
Proceed in the following way to access the gearbox sect. 3 chap. 2 Fig. 3-5).
drive shaft: c - Demount all the relative parts and disconnect the
a - Split the cab or platform from the tractor (see sect.1 tubes as described in sect. 3 chap. 2
chap. 2).
b - Split the engine and shaft from the tractor (see
View of tractor with engine split from shaft
in to

mm.
to
l Us
i
1'V J-CC )I
r
&
f o
iffi®
o
i« *
%
5
Fig.3-5
j
/
2)
3”
O \ _
©
) njo
c
Fig.4-5
5 - 20
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox drive shaft

Removing the shaft
v'
1 - Remove the gearbox cover (Fig.4-5).
2 - Demount the reverse shuttle engaging levers (21-
4 Fig.5-5).
3 - Take out the rod (22) and remove the fork (23 Fig.6-5).
4 - Remove the two bolts from inside the shaft along
with the six stud bolt nuts. Remove the plug (7),
the fork (6) and the clutch sleeve (2 Fig.7-5) to
3
access the two upper nuts. Also remove the four
external fixing bolts.
5 - Take out the PTO shaft (25 Fig.7-5)
<3,
3 @>
6 - Remove the shaft, taking care to keep it well ali-
G.
£
gned (Fig.8-5). Fig.5-5

7(7
</ ( o o/
'/3,
V, -3 6
s L-'v.’ÿl
■C V.

_
k.
1 0
o
C

/ £7 te'vv i 2
wit »~/
f j

o
o o /. mo I
) o
Oo
7
G /c
.0
h
v0 O
k

7 //
n 3- .0 o3 <7
// B n Fig.6-5 G Fig.7-5

*
3
V (

3
3 if
) -LXSÿ if
l£ _O 0
3 I!) I
u
__ÿ)
;
=€>
\
J7
i / oQfl — 3a c
<_

c c
oI S., rJ
ft
' Q
oOJ

<//

J<t
Fig.8-5
±
5 - 21
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox drive shaft

A 3 - Dismantling 'A
1 - Demount the lubrication tube of the primary and S
secondary shaft of the gearbox (26 Fig.9-5). @J
2 - Remove the collar support (3) and the retaining 5
ring (27 Fig.10-5).

3 - Remove the stop ring (31 Fig.11-5). ,26

4 - Remove the drive shaft (11) complete with rever- m

se shuttle synchronizing unit (14 Fig. 12-5). V
The ball bearing that supports the shaft remains in
its seat in the housing. r s/
Fig.9-5

J3

1(© 0 /%
J§y A
0,
[

cr
A
Fig.10-5
V /_I

—
,\Ji
7
) IA =>ÿ

f 14 t,
11
;r-ÿ 4
Ay o
/
|gj ri

Fig.11-5 Fig.12-5

5 - 22
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox drive shaft

5 - Remove the ball bearing after having demounted
the stop ring mounted on the housing.
)
6 - Demount and dismantle the reverse shuttle syn- I
chronizing unit (14) and the gear (13) after having
removed the two stop rings (15-16 Fig.15-5).

7 - Demount the spring ring (28), the retaining ring - (13

(30) and the needle bearing (29 Fig.14-5) from the
front part of the transmission shaft (11).

Fig.13-5

16
J ■I
13

1
30

11

Fig.14-5 Fig.15-5

5 - 23
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox drive shaft

A 4 - Inspection
1 - Thoroughly clean all parts and then visually che-
ck them.

2 - Replace the retention rings.

3 - Check the retaining bearing, making sure that the-

r~g~irÿ
re re no faults as it turns and that the seals are in
a good condition.

4 - Check the rolling tracks and needle bearings and

replace any worn or damaged components.

5 - Using a jet of compressed air, check the oil lubri- Fig.16-5

cation ducts and make sure that they are not clog-
ged.

6 - Check the synchro rings, measuring X dimension

as shown in Fig.19-5 and remembering that the
minimum tolerated value is 1.25 mm.

7 - Replace all worn or defective components.

enzUH M

Fig.17-5

O o X

Fig.18-5 Fig.19-5

5 - 24
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox drive shaft

A 5 - Remounting
5
1 - After having thoroughly cleaned the housing and
all the other components, proceed with the remoun-
ting phase by proceeding with the demounting ope-
rations in reverse and complying with the following
indications:
(Si) / c ‘V HI
a - Mount the clutch sleeve support (3) with the
CUp
lubricating hole at the bottom on the left (Fig. ) o
21-5)
Apply Loctite 242 to the 3 stud bolts and ti- ©6\
ghten the nuts to a 19-24 Nm torque.
,X7
b - Take care when assembling the two retention /
rings for the transmission shaft.
The concentric AV type (16 Fig. 22 and 23-5) Fig.20-5
should be mounted on the gearbox side while
the conventional one (15 Fig. 22 and 23-5) fixes
the hub for the synchronizer;
c - Mount the synchro ring (31 Fig. 22-5) to keep
the assembly joined together, both to facilita-
tye connection to the gearbox and to measure
@ (O') ))
dimension A (Fig. 24-5). <OJ 3jQ

mi
CM
o
rM
Fig.21-5

O
O

0
o 16

31 16
o
o
0 Fig.22-5 Fig.23-5

5 - 25
%

TRANSMISSION
Gearbox drive shaft
2 - After assembly, use a depth gauge to measure
J
II

dimension “A” between the surface of the synchro

o

ring and that of the housing (Fig. 24-5).

o

Take the merasurement in three points.

a

Subtracted from dimension “B”, measured on the

gearbox, can be used to calculate the value of shim
7

S3, giving the exact amount of play to the syn-

!
?

chronizing unit of the reverse shuttle (0.45 mm)

7?
7

(Fig.25-5).
\
t.
V

B - A - 0.45 = S 3
o
o
'o

After assembly, make sure that the residue play

between the synchronizer and shim (S3) is betwe-
o

Fig.24-5
o

en 0.3 and 0.6 mm.

III
V

inCO
±

3
o]

L
n IVOPJ
7ÿ
i
i

c
v
Jr
Fig.25-5
5 - 26
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox drive shaft

A 6 - Special tools
06 PNT GL
Plug to fit the retention ring on to the drive shaft (4 Fig.14/15-5)

07 PNT GL
Block to use as a universal puller to demount clutch sleeve thrust bearings (1 Fig;1-5)

08 PNT GL
Plug to fit the retention ring on to the sleeve support (3 Fig.1-5)

0
09 PNT GL
Plug to insert the bearing and mounted seal on to the drive shaft (11 Fig.1-5)

□
5 - 27
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox drive shaft

A 6 - Special tools
10 PNT GL
Plug to insert the retention ring on to the thrust block sleeve (3 Fig.1-5)

11 PNT GL
Plug to insert bushes on to the left-hand side of the shaft housing (4 Fig.1-5)

12 PNT GL
Plug to insert bushes on to the right-hand side of the shaft housing (4 Fig.1-5)

a'

5 - 28
 TRANSMISSION

CHAP. 5

Gearbox

INDEX

Sect. 3 Demounting, inspection and remounting

B - Gearbox
B 1 - Drawing of the assembly and components ............... 5-30
B 2 - Removal from the tractor ........................................... 5-32
B 3 - Dismantling ................................................................. 5-33
B 4 - Inspection ................................................................... 5-39
B 5 - Remounting ................................................................ 5-40
B 6 - Special tools ............................................................... 5-48

5 - 29
 TRANSMISSION

B - Gearbox
Sect. 3 Demounting, inspection and remounting

B1 - Drawing of the assembly

22 3 20) 6 23
1 21 7

II SF2— fHjw
Igg
1
_ s
•M'S!
"

--— iv --
BSS=SS®=35=5S«

Sj Sg y '’errfcrfp
iFilf®3® it =ET V=f UJ

i .. W > f r
a r» -/
Jfcpa»
-A
— li-

Ifjsi
j$g2

II k3
:

[rinfÿ
*
;-v4ÿ4J
ibJ 16
iT£!i2
I Lpf7 *s
i

*s
_
26 (14
SSHaSfiK
43ÿ.
iBgBjjjgS
i
!

✓T
' r -|i i - -
— — ---
O,
s*i
m
Fig.33-5

1 - Gearbox main shaft 14 - Creeper gear double gear

2 - 1st speed gear 15 - Creeper gear support
3 - 1st and 2nd speed synchro unit 16 - Reverse shuttle gear
4 - 2nd speed gear 17 - Spacer
5 - 3rd speed gear 18 - Thrust plate
6 - 3rd and 4th speed synchro unit 19 - Ring nut
7 - 4th speed gear 20 - Bushing
8 - Ball bearing 21 - Adjuster shim
9 - Stop plate 22 - Ball bearing
10 - 1st and 2nd speed double gear 23 - Adjuster shim
11 - 3rd and 4th speed double gear 24 - Retention ring
12 - Gearbox secondary shaft 25 - Front taper roller bearing
13 - Creeper gear shaft 26 - Rear taper roller bearing

5 - 30
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox

B1 - Main components

r"I
3 i
i

J
5

2
D Ifel
ri
1 I 8) rvjl 26)
I
U- " ■"'i
23) (21) (7) (10, o I
I
I
l

© @ <® (9

iO”
0
r 13
ft
1C
18
2I Vs <§>
U"

Fig.34-5

5 - 31
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
B 2 - Removal from the tractor
A
?h
Proceed in the following way to access the gearbox:
[>\
1 - Remove the cab or platform from the tractor (see
l|
sect.1 chap.2). Oy
{-

2 - Split tractor between the engine and axle (see t ) s=.o

©
sect.3 chap.2). (

3 - Remove the axle (Fig. 35-5).

YW ©c c
3*=

4 - Demount all the relative parts and disconnect as

described in chap. 2 in order to prepare for remo-
val of the gearbox housing. "1 Fig.35-5
5 - Remove the upper cover from the gearbox.

6 - Bring the creeper gear (1) forwards by engaging

the direct drive (Fig. 36-5).
o
TTW o o
°\
7 - Remove the lower cover (27 Fig.37-5). re o
8 - Take out all the bolts that fix the gearbox to the a
differential housing, including the two accessible Ig 1 o

through the bottom opening (Fig. 38-5). o !C1 c_

o o o

V
© ©
o
/ 1
0 :o;
Fig.36-5
©

W
d) $ Msfc, (U
Mp
J P)

©
© C v-
©, ©
ID

<x CF
PJ
® ©>
i '
{

Fig.37-5 Fig.38-5
C\>

5 - 32
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
9 - Remove the complete gearbox from the rear dif-
ferential unit, keeping it perfectly aligned, and set
it on an adequate support (Fig.39-5 and 40-5).

B 3 - Dismantling M c

1 - Remove the lubrication tube (28) of the primary

\
FE»
shaft gears (Fig.41-5).

2 - Remove the speed gear control lever support (29

Fig.42-5).

/ Fig.39-5

Rs
\3Trf / N
— ic3
©
C

r— b
69
«.
c

Fig.40-5

$0vzÿ
0
6

i
p
•Ir1
Q
Tj
\ y
(Gs
28 l
\W i
c
O.
h
HL ©
o
m
h © r\
®
,Ax
<r
(29) o

Fig.41-5 Fig.42-5
_CL

5 - 33
*
TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
Demounting the creeper gear
arrt
G
3 - Remove the creeper gear rod and fork.

4 - Demount the creeper engaging gear (30 Fig.43-5).

fO - 30) P
gf ruLP r
5 - Remove the casing (15) with the double gear (14)
of the creeper unit (Fig.44-5).

mWT?
Demounting the upper shaft
6 - Remove the rod (4), the fork (17) and the 1st and
\
P
2nd speed engaging block (5), then remove the
same components for the 3rd and 4th speed
Fig.43-5
(Fig.45-5).

n
7 - Using a plastic mallet, allow the 4th speed gear
(7) to slip out at the rear along with the ball bea-
o
T=r ■ 1T
o T
ring (8 Fig. 46-5). o
14
k(j
dp)
o 17

c
&
M©
o
oi/ c:
c
u
L" 13 15
O /77 Fig.44-5

o
o
O
ol
R
O
T. W
i
4 17 5 A

c
I O °
o

hen
o o
o
u %y*
o o
Q- \l
ptra® (z) 8 I
o
O
\
l

Q
Fig.45-5 Fig.46-5
a ,D

5 - 34
 TRANSMISSION

A
Gearbox •v
CO

(0

CO
QC

Q
0)

CO

CM
h

o
00

H
00

CM
{

«\Er
©
J:
c:
il

fi
U

sW 1 ft
i ._S

S
,=fen

i
I

!!M

ii

:>l
ft ii

I iiII
■rap 1 1
wl i

!
r

1
M
II
I

/ Lid

zX
L~*-

pi
m
iLJ if

li
ft ! ii
‘—if:
Mih

I
-IV
!

w :LVT
!i ‘N

i;

!!

ii

ii
'

!! !| I
U

i
(
ii.!! w

— >y::"
K::

E2:
VIpiF\\

ifer

..gr-
Mil

il
w
! UN
.J_>

Ri!!
Ik-J

;
Fig.47-5
N
\

8 - Demount the spring ring (31) from the main shaft

3

(1 Fig.47-5).
0
0

9 - Remove the stop ring (24 Fig.47/48-5) from its

housing using a pair of grippers with shortened
tips (Fig. 49-5).
il
CM

4 speed gearbox
\

10 - Demount the main shaft (1) from the front part,

oo

taking care to hold all the gears and synchroni-

zing units of the four speeds (Fig.50-5).
0

Fig.48-5
E
E
V)
MOW

0
oL£
■C l

U
=
TZM

cj
10
©
©

■—-l
3

Fig.49-5 Fig.50-5

5 - 35
*
TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
5 speed gearbox

11 - Remove the rod (40) and fork (45 Fig.52-5) that

engages the 5th gear;
43 R
12 - Demount the ring nut (19) with the retention plate
(43), the entire synchro unit (44), the gear (16)
with the thrust bearings and thrust plate (39
1
Fig.51/52-5);

13 - Demount the main shaft (1) from the front part,

taking care to hold all the gears and the synchro 19
units of the four speeds (Fig. 50-5).

Demounting the transmission shaft

44
14 - Demount the ring nut (19) (on 4 speed gearbox)
with the spacer (17), the thrust bearings (18) and Fig.51-5
(32), and the gear (16 Fig.53/58-5).

15 - Demount the retention plate (9 Fig.54-5).

16 - Remove the transmission shaft from the front (12),

44
along with the two double gears (10 and 11 Fig.55-5). o
45
43
O

40

19
Fig.52-5

o
0 Q

Q IO
/ ©
V 16 M
o,
B H
.V
J9) (17) (18 f2X?K9
v
Q o
/ © O
Fig.53-5 Fig.54-5

5 - 36
 TRANSMISSION

A
17 - Using tool 16 CMB GL, remove the shaft (35) for
Gearbox \
the double reverse shuttle gear (34) together with
the front ball bearing (33 Fig.56a/b-5).

0
0
The ball bearing (36) remains in its housing in

\E
0

0
c.

I
the gearbox housing.
vvp

<£i
0
,0

0
,

hi
o

Ijii
©,
VU
¥
v

A
,0H

Fig.55-5

!0
Igl
O

CO
CO
co
CD
CD
00

CO
o

a a
©
p\

co
in

Fig.56a-5 Fig.56b-5
■

I!
]J
ii
I!
!!

il
t!
!!i

il

,
I

;
I
r*;
—i||

i
i
;
111 :
i
-c— f->
ii “ÿ"!
“ÿ?::::

I H#
mHh

!yp
1

I il-ffi
| IMriP

M
\s
L

•v

IK
v
1

J
L
c

— ftl
CO

cn
CM

1ÿ
CM
o

Fig.57-5
i

5 - 37
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox

!t! !l!

— 5
«— n
Ml
ft _| I * - — —

■'. W.'aL

ll
I

I 10 11 22) (19
21
stti
I JZ=
Fig.58-5

Demounting the gear lever support 5 6 7) 1 2

(Fig. 58 / 59-5)
o
1 - Remove the sheet metal plug (21) for access to
the bolt (19). 0
== %

2 - Remove the bolt (19), the fork (18) and the pla-
stic ring (17) (installed only in the 4 speed ver- (5

sion)
a 12) (14) (15
3
3 - Remove the spring ring (14) and demount the
9) (10 (11
16) @@
shaft support (13).
22) 13
4 - Remove the spring ring (22). 0.
Fig.59-5
5 - Take out the shaft (5) and remove the springs
(10), (11) along with their relative rings and sup-
ports.

5 - 38
 TRANSMISSION
V
Gearbox
B 4 - Inspection
1 - Clean all the components and check them.
•c>
2 - Replace the retention rings.
7
)
3 - Check the rolling tracks of all bearings, making
sure that there are no irregularities in their mo- (
vements.
4 - Using a jet of compressed air, check the oil lubri-
cating ducts to make sure they are not clogged.
5 - Check the synchro rings, measuring dimension
X (Fig. 62-5) and remembering that the minimum
tolerated value is 1 mm. Fig.60-5
6 - Replace all defective or worn parts.
B- 3
L
m
. . :a
i
hiuiiyiiiirl
o
Fulfil
PS
Fig.61-5
\i
IV
? r
x «3$
Ml

& s
Fig.62-5 Fig.63-5
5 - 39
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
B 5 - Remounting \\ (CC u
c
After having thoroughly cleaned the gearbox housing
and all the components, proceed by remounting, com-
Jh i.
plying with the demounting instructions in reverse or- 0
der and with the following general instructions:

a - Use grease to lubricate the needle bearings and

the housings in which the retaining rings opera- L
v
te. 3 'S'
b - Refer to the table in the introduction for any sea- $ 0
lants that are not indicated.

c - Tighten the bolts according to the indicated dri- Fig.64-5

_
ving torques. Refer to the table in the introduc-
tion if the values are not given.

Remounting the reverse shuttle

shaft and the transmission shaft
o o 5?

1 - Remount the shaft and double reverse shuttle (22HuZ 'Ml C

* D
gear along with the relative ball bearings (Fig.64-
5). \jr fKH
2 - Remount the transmission shaft (12) with the two 'V
o

o
_u CJ
o o o

double gears (10 and 11) and the relative sup-

>
<8:
porting taper bearings (Fig.65-5). =-@
I—
12/ (10 11
c:
3 - Mount the plate and fix the screws (37). ''CS AS>;
O-
Plate fixing (9) automatically establishes the pre-
(
load for the two taper bearings that support the
shaft (Fig.66-5). Fig.65-5

-J
# £>}

37 II

o O

©
o
9 o

R Fig.66-5

5 - 40
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
4 speed gearbox

4 - Mount the thicker shimming plate (39) and the

bushing (38) on to the transmission shaft (Fig.67-
5).

5 - Mount the gear (16), preceded by the thrust bea-

ring (32), the thrust plate (18) and then the thrust
bearing unit (18 and 41 Fig.68-5)
I
6 - Mount the spacer (17). (38) (39) i >0'
7 - Tighten and torque the ring nut (19) to 150-170
Nm (Fig.70-5).

Fig.67-5

(32) %

if 18

16

Fig.68-5

<§> % O

(1 8) (32) (39) rO

(41
o
£ o

Fig.69-5 5,0
Fig.70-5

5 - 41
* TRANSMISSION

Gearbox

2H3H4 M20H 5 H 6 H23H42

\
-A
I)
.+,
n n n n n n

Ai j[
u IX IX n ix

lL
.......
! inTÿ’

if T;:T’
1
irr
jr*
ii
-V- !
\X
v !
!!! i
IT

/1 ::r±:::ir :z:z±z:z~:zi:
v:::: L
-f-LJ-J-
1: :

nrr •f Fig.71-5

Remounting the main shaft

(Fig. 71 / 72-5) 1
Introductory note
Two adjustments must be made to ensure that the
main shaft is correctly mounted: O
a - Calculation of the shim (23) that limits the float of
the pack of four speed gears to 0.1 mm.
4
b - Calculation of the shim (21) that limits the float of 3
2
the 4th speed gear synchronizer to 0.35 mm. 2
(Fig.76-5).
20)(5)(6)(23)(42,
Remounting
1 - Premount the gears and synchronizer units of the
TO Fig.72-5
four speed gears on the main shaft.

2 - Mount the spring ring (42) without the shim (23)

on the drive shaft (1).

5 - 42
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
3 - Use a comparator to measure the float between
the hub of the synchronizer unit (6) and the spring
ring (42 Fig.71/73-5).
42
4 - Calculate the value of the shim (23) to insert
between the spring ring and the hub, remembe- 6
ring that the tolerated float value is 0-0.1 mm.

Example
/5ÿJ £
If the measured float is 3.3 mm, the required shim will k
be between 3.2 and 3.3 mm.

The following shims are available as spares:

2.385 mm
rw\ Fig.73-5

3.100 mm
3.200 mm
3.250 mm
3.300 mm
3.400 mm
3.500 mm c
O
3.550 mm
c-
X C£\
5 - Demount the gears and the synchronizer units of O bsJI
the main shaft then mount them on the gearbox c-

(Fig.74-5). C? c-
)
Use the special lowered grippers to mount the
lilr >=rÿ

spring ring (24 Fig.48-5). •t C~

<2>
6 - Mount the previously calculated shim (23) along
with the relative spring ring (42 Fig.71/ 75-5); &
c
r
©
Fig.74-5

jg

aB
o, i
o Vo C

O
u c
Fig.75-5
©> /7
5 - 43
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
Sh.
8
Pr-xO/;
l
--
n -JU
n
r A
n
21 7

3F
i n

HR
e-
Fig.76-5

7 - Measure dimension C between surface A of the Example:

gearbox housing and surface B of the synchro
ring (Fig. 76/77-5). If the measured C dimension is 43.20 mm and D di-
mension is 41.1 mm, the value of the shim must be
8 - Measure dimension D on the 4th speed gear as follows:
(Fig. 76/78-5).

9 - Calculate the value of the shim (21) 43.20 - 41.1 - 0.45 = 1.65 mm.

Sh = C - D - 0.45

l »;
5a
/«2
11 r
■uZCi'f, c
c

© c
<t %

c
© 6
O

% \
c □

Hi
)
Fig.77-5 Fig.78-5

5 - 44
*
TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
The following shims are available as spares:

1.75 mm
2.00 mm
2.25 mm
2.50 mm
2.75 mm
3.00 mm
3.25 mm

If the calculated value of the shim is unavailable, round

off to the lower value

10 - Mount the 4th speed gear (7) with the shim (21
Fig.79-5) and check the play with a thickness
gauge. Fig.79-5

11 - Fit the creeper gear unit back into the rear part.

5 speed gearbox

12 - Mount the thicker thrust bearing (39) and the bush 41 18

(38) on the transmission shaft.

13 - Mount the gear 816) preceded by the thrust bea-

ring (32), the center plate 818), followed by the
thrust plate unit (41 Fig. 80-5).

14 - Mount the synchro unit (44) with the stop plate

(43)( and tighten the ring nut (19) to a 150-170
Nm torque.
(38) (16) (32) (39)
15 - Remount the fork rod and long pawl for the fifth
gear.
Fig.80-5
4 and 5 speed gearbox

16 - Remount the rod (8) and fork of the 3rd and 4th
speed gears (6), then the same components for 17)1 7
the 1st and 2nd speed gears, inserting the pawl
(16) between the two rods. 12 7

17 - Remount the balls, the springs and all the com- o 10)
ponents illustrated in Fig.81-5.
1A 2A

18 - Remount the support with the double gear for the

creeper unit using Loctite 242 on the bolts and
ff (L5)(5
torquing them to a value of 42-52 Nm.
3a 4a
8
M
11
13) (12 g)©@
Fig.81-5

5 - 45
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox

S3

t
Fig.82-5

19 - Fit the two bolts that fix the gearbox to the diffe-
rential housing since access is impossible once
the creeper gear has been mounted.
@@® @@
20 - Remount the engaging gear of the creeper unit.
m Oi 0)
21 - Remount the rod, fork and all the components
Q fV
illustrated in Fig. 83-5 for the creeper unit. N

'23) (24) (25) (26) (21

Note:
After assembly, with the rods, forks and gears in neu-
tral, make sure that the synchronizers are free to turn
without jamming.
Replace the engaging forks or rods if this is not the
case. Fig.83-5

5 - 46
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
22 - After assembly, calculate the value of shim "S 3"
to mount on the drive shaft in order to achieve
the correct play for the reverse shuttle synchro 0
ring mounted on the engine-gearbox connection 0
shaft (Fig.82/85-5). LVT»!
Use a depth gauge to measure dimension "B" on
the gearbox (Fig. 82/84-5).
Measure dimension "A" on the shaft, between
the surface of the synchro ring and the surface of
the housing (Fig. 82/84-5).
It is advisable to take this measurement in three
o
©
points in order to avoid errors. 0
The value of shim "S3" is given by:
.0
B - A - 0.45 = S3 0
Fig.84-5 0
where 0.45 mm is the play the synchronizer unit
must have.

2J
Example: © c~
If the measured B dimension is 79.1 mm and A is o
75.6 mm, the shim to insert S3 will be: o \
79.1 - 75.6 - 0.45 = 3.05 mm o

The following shims are available as spare parts:

*>» ‘s?
2.25 mm ©
2.50 mm
2.75 mm
0
3.00 mm
0ÿ
3.25 mm
<0 Fig.85-5

If the value of the measured shim is unavailable, it

should be rounded off to the lower value.
In the example, the immediately available shim is 3
mm.

23 - Before coupling with the shaft, just mount the rod

for the reverse shuttle engaging fork on the ge-
arbox housing.
The fork will be mounted once the shaft and ge-
arbox have been coupled.

24 - Tighten the bolts that join the housing to the shaft

to a 98 -120 Nm torque and spread them with
Loctite 242.

25 - After assembly, make sure that the residue play

between synchronizer and shim (S3) is between
0.3 and 0.6 mm.

5 - 47
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
B 6 - Special tools
16 CMB GL
Reverse shuttle shaft puller (35 Fig.56/57-5)

17 CMB GL
Plug to insert the retention ring on the gear lever support (Fig.58/59-5)

18 CMB GL
Plug to insert the ball bearing on the main gearbox shaft (22 Fig.33/34-5)

19 CMB GL
0
Plug to insert the ball bearing for the 4th speed gear shaft (8 Fig.33/34-5)

5 - 48
 TRANSMISSION

Gearbox
B 6 - Special tools
20 CMB GL
Plug to insert the 4WD transmission shaft retention ring (Fig.33-5)

21 CMB GL
Plug to mount the needle bearings on the output shaft (1 Fig.33/34-5)

22 CMB GL
Plug to insert the bushes for the right and left brake levers

5 - 49
 TRANSMISSION

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

5 - 50
 TRANSMISSION

CHAP. 5

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

INDEX

Sect. 3 Demounting, inspection and remounting

C - Bevel gear pair and rear differential

C 1 - Drawing of the assembly and components ............... 5-52
C 2 - Removal from the tractor ........................................... 5-54
C 3 - Dismantling................................................................. 5-55
C 4 - Inspection ................................................................... 5-64
C 5 - Remounting ................................................................ 5-65
C 6 - Special tools ............................................................... 5-72

5 - 51
 TRANSMISSION

C - Bevel gear pair and rear differential

Sect. 3 - Demounting, inspection, remounting

C1 - Drawing of the assembly

15 29 25,
i gy_i i / Q
38
<§>
I 36

'26
,27) (21

|u4

'°J

\
i
Q
P
EE /

S=
jariB 22
3w

/
ffiS

40) (47 (45,

i t£lu,V Lrji

5? L
©'
t§>
42 i XillL x r— 42
43 •
-
,50 A. i£r
41
m-j 48
!f 49,

mr FfFÿEfr -er Fig.92-5

5 - 52
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

Demounting, inspection, remounting

13
C1 - Main components

Q 15

ivacp
8 <S> ®
12
,16
1
2

40

■ 3
,20,
21 ,26,

30,
5 4 w 19 25,
,31 32, ,28

0ÿÿ 27.

,22

SR:
L /»-{23)

53 Fig.93-5
55) r<54

1 -Bevel pinion
ill 19 -Top PTO shaft gear for 1000rpm Sp. 40 -Bevel ring gear
2 -Taper bearing 20 -Top PTO shaft gear for 540rpm eco Sp 41 -Differential housing
3 -Reduction gear 21 -PTO hydraulic clutch 42 -Bevel ring gear adjuster shims
4 -Fast range ratio gear 22 -PTO output shaft 43 -Taper bearing to support diff.
5 -Ring nut 23 -PTO gear for 540rpm eco sp. 44 -Support for diff lock piston
8 -Stop ring 24 -PTO gear for 1000 rpm speed 45 -Rod for diff lock fork
9 -Rev./Slow shaft 25 -Stop ring 46 -Differential lock fork
10 -Upper shaft 26 -Bearing with parallel rollers 47 -Differential lock spring
11 -Stop ring 27 -PTO gear for rotation reversal 48 -Differential crown wheel
12 -Ball bearing 28 -PTO side shaft 49 -Differential planetary gear
13 -Fast speed ratio gear 29 -PTO gear for 540 rpm speed 50 -Differential planetary gear pin
14 -Central hub 30 -Upper PTO shaft 51 -Diff. crown wheel shim plate
15 -Rev./Slow speed double gear 31 -Ring nut 52 -Diff. planetary gear shim plate
16 -Standard range ratio gear 32 -PTO gear 53 -Shaft for proportional PTO
17 -PTO shaft sleeve 38 -Ring nut 54 -Std 4WD clutch
18 -PTO shaft 39 -Differential support flange 55 -Fast run 4WD clutch

5 - 53
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

C 2 - Removal from the tractor 'X
33
Proceed in the following way to access the differential ID
housing: co A
1 - Remove the cab or platform from the tractor (see ft
CO
sect.1 chap.2).
pj
2 - Demount and disconnect the parts as described
in chap. 2, separating the units in order to prepare
for complete removal of the differential housing.

3 - Separate the differential housing from the gear- // '

box, removing all the outer bolts and the two in-
ternal ones (Fig. 94/95-5).
To make the parts easier to separate, it is advisa- Fig.94-5
ble to engage the creeper unit in top gear by me-
ans of the relative lever.

Demounting the main components on the diffe-

rential housing

4 - Remove the external part of the final drive

0M
ic 'OTi □
(Fig.96-5).

5 - After taking out the internal bolts, demount the

LD <o Q,
<-
t%
internal component of the final drive, taking
A>
care to keep it well aligned so that the brake disks kj
are free to slide on the axle shaft.
Tool 100 RID GL (1) allows the final drive to be
perfectly held. (Fig.97-5).
A
ML
Fig.95-5

-
m
SC di;$k
\) A
£
& VC LWy 100 RID GL
0 n
’
— Gr tc; >ÿ
JLJ p
re o>i
o
/c ~~~~
)
"<&
ik<
A

c LTFÿ -c njLj.
C L
fclL<ÿsS8
W ©f 6
LLWkV J 0
rD
P

'c,
'6.
o.
y
f
‘J
/'T.
/Y Lt
C.<
<
£*
0 0 o
Oi

0 0,
.c
0 C ■q c
c
6ÿ

/ /7
Fig.96-5 Fig.97-5

5 - 54
*
TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

6 - Remove the spring (9) and the brake lever unit (2
Fig.98-5). o
9
7 - Demount the pressure plate (3), remembering to o
pull the pin (4) a little, to make it easier to remove. O O
c
c
8 - Remove the range control lever support (A Fig.97- 'O,
5) and the hydraulic lift (Fig.99-5).

LO'
C 3 - Dismantling
.o
1 - Demount the standard / fast (5 and 6) and slow (7 07 \
.Q
O
Fig.100-5) engaging fork and rod.

2 - Remove the bearing stop plate (8) (Fig. 101-5).

Fig.98-5
©

<0
©O
0- &
<s n_n
V>

% C.
9
_c
©
n 'C. 0
•J
<CL @ Kn V u
■ c Fig.99-5
©

© o ©O' 5)
o (
o
o o t
5 6 00
C
0

o
© 8
d
lO 7

iS 1
5>
8 0 \S fG,

;©£ Fig.100-5 Fig.101-5

5 - 55
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

Demounting the Slow/Rev shaft
3 - Using a lever, demount the shaft for the Slow/Rev
ranges (9 Fig.102-5), remembering that the dou-
ble sliding gear (15 Fig.102-5) is not easy to remo-
ve since it is obstructed by the fast range shaft (10
Fig.103-5).
I? 2 1*1
Demounting the fast range shaft
i
4 - Using a lever, slightly move the fast shaft (10)
forwards to allow access to the spring ring (11
rli>J!
-1 joi
Fig.104-5).

5 - Remove the spring ring (11) from its housing.

r nr
Fig.102-5
6 - Demount the Fast range shaft (10) with the Fast
speed gear (13) and coupling hub (14 Fig.105-5).

7 - Remove the double gear that engages the Slow/ \o

Oo i
o
<
Rev range (15 Fig.107-5).
® 4H,
0
o
Q (8 O' 'o

O'
<S> Fig.103-5
0N

o
o 0,
)j
\
li o
o fl
V o © c 10
/),

(§>
(5>
©
y Fig.104-5 Fig.105-5

5 - 56
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential \

I
4

«
w

i c.
inzÿr

CO
(0

§L?
Fig.106-5

Demounting the slow top shaft

To demount the slow gear shaft (16), first remove the
m

spring ring (8 Fig.106-5) from its housing. This is ac-

0

cessed after having demounted the differential lock

system and the upper PTO shaft.
0
0

8 - Remove the diff lock piston support (44 Fig.108-

5).
0

£T

9 - Demount the rod (45), the fork (46) and the spring
(47) that engage the differential lock (Fig.109-5).

Take care when removing the diff lock

spring (47 Fig.109-5). Wear gloves to pro-
tect the hands and hold the spring firmly with the Fig.107-5
hand.
'T
0

o
©

iJJ
<D
o

0
o

0
o
J
hmaw

o
o

s,
0

0
/
!

Fig.108-5 Fig.109-5
c

ll

5 - 57
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

10 - Remove the PTO clutch cover (Fig.110-5).

11 - Remove the clutch unit (21) with the shaft (18

Fig.111-5).
2
o
r for
Sts
12 - Remove the spring ring (8) mounted on the shaft
(§y
-- C c
(16 Fig.112-5) from its housing. 1

13 - To remove the shaft (16), it must be slipped from

the inner bearing ring (12) while the bearing re-
i K:
mains in its seat in the housing, retained by the
external spring ring.
To correctly demount the parts, it is advisable to o
use tool “33 DIF GL”, consisting of a flange (A) c
that is fitted on to the rear part of the shaft (16),
p \lfc°
flange (B) that is mounted at the front in the seat
of the housing bearing, bolt (C) which, together
with nut (D), act as a puller for the shaft (Fig.113-
VL Fig.110-5

5).
Use a lever in the absence of the above mentio-
ned tool.
0 (J
o

5)
—
- 0
®
it//
u
if o
&

L 1
M| 0

0 o © @
Fig.111-5

<o

0;
o
o

o
O
I <xX
SQ(l6,
12
o y,
2
o

i
fr
Ml 6
8
o
'/

//-
tTggÿTSÿ 5=
/
Mr-

O'

% / Fig.112-5 Fig.113-5
If
M3
5 - 58
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

Demounting the differential unit
Pinion-Crown wheel o o
o
o r
t-
28,
o
To access the differential unit, along with the crown
wheel and bevel pinion it will also be necessary to
demount the two upper shafts of the PTO (30 and 28
m
Fig.114-5).
m ID
14 - Demount the rod (33) and the fork (34) of the
upper and central shaft (1000/540 eco) (Fig.116- ■; m (30)
5).
o o
15 - Demount the rod and fork of the side shaft (540
std/REV) (Fig.118-5). Fig.114-5
The rod should be moved to the front and remains
housed in the casing. To demount it, first r e m o -
ve the plug that closes the hole on the casing
and take it out from the rear.
31 32 (30
16 - Unscrew and remove the ring nut (31 Fig.116-
5).

17 - Demount the shaft (30) and the gears mounted “O,

on it (Fig.117-5).
\
■
©
I—:

Fig.115-5

m
@ \0
34

1 Q>
% 0
'Ll
V
cx
a
*«> (9
o
o,
o
31
c
1 o
32
V 0
t£
/
30

o a 0
o
Fig.116-5
& Fig.117-5

5 - 59
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

* 1

|
LL
18 - Unscrew the ring nut (38) and remove the spring
ring (35 Fig.119-5).

1 in ini
Tnmiii
Ii

19 - Using an aluminium or bronze punch (28), push a

“'ll

m
the shaft inwards a few millimeters (Fig.120-5).

20 - Lever on the front part of the shaft (28) and allow

it to move back a little to allow the inner ring (36)
lul
E

to be removed with a universal puller (Fig.121-

K3

[Sn
J

I
I

5).

Fig.118-5
00
CN
oo

00
co
co
CN
in
CO
CN

O a.
o
o

L>
u,
0.
O

Fig.119-5
%
§

\I
I
3 p

-~P \A
0;&

/65®O
Q)

O
O

Fig.120-5 Fig.121-5
C

5 - 60
*
TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

21- Remove the outer bearing ring (26) from its seat
in the casing (Fig.122-5). 26 0
0
22 - Remove the spring ring (25) from its housing in 0
the casing (fig.123-5). Qi o
o@
23 - Remove the shaft (28) together with all the ge-
ars mounted on it (Fig.124-5).

24 - Demount the two flanges (39) that support the 0

differential (40 Fig.125-5), marking the right and
left parts.
o
o >)
o Fig.122-5
£)

%
o o
0
m o
a
@
C/
fee Q -p

O
\

Fig.123-5 o O

u u ~7 T
tL
0
N
22 0
O
O
0 ro
c r<T
© oy

\
0
d m <§>
J1 6 CJ $
0
o

Fig.124-5 @ Fig.125-5

5 - 61
 TRANSMISSION
Bevel gear pair and rear differential
© ©
w
is
= Pisi
jn g»2§i
Fig.126-5
25 - Remove the complete differential unit
(41 Fig.127-5).
-o
o
26 - Unscrew the bevel pinion nut (5 Fig.128-5).
27 - Remove the inner ring of the taper bearing (6)
'o©
and demount the spring ring (7 Fig.129-5). Or
o \
Of 0
o
o
Fig.127-5 o
s
°
0
0 0 C7“©7
0 nn
bO Q ©
Oj
0©o
O
o
o
9
o
0
©
U
o>© ©ÿ
©
a
Fig.128-5 Fig.129-5
V)i 1Z17
5 - 62
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

<*>

c
(
a ■SSi
o
o 0

o o V
A
)
0 o
\ n_
o Fig.130-5

28 - Demount the bevel pinion (1) along with the re- Remounting
lative gears and spacers (Fig.130-5).
Proceed with the demounting instructions in reverse,
remembering to grease between the thrust bearings
Dismantling and remounting the and the relative crown wheels and planetary gears to
facilitate the assembly operations.
differential unit (Fig.131-5)
1 - Remove the spring ring that holds the spider (50).
2 - Remove the pin (50) from the differential hou-
sing (41).
3 - Remove the two planetary gears (49) and their
relative thrust plates (52).
4 - Remove the two crown wheels (48) with their re-
lative thrust plates (51).

o
5;
© 51
>
?§*e 48

®fSD jlpfgHs
60 ,52 5<
e 49
@ 41
Fig.131-5

5 - 63
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

I l

Q>, S09M
l o
Q

Fig.132-5

C 4 - Inspection

1 - Clean all the parts and examine them. ® ®

2 - Replace all the retention rings and the bevel pi-
nion nut. 1 2
3 - Check the rolling tracks of all the bearings and 3
make sure they roll in a normal way.

4 - Make sure that the oil ducts are not clogged, using
a jet of compressed air if necessary.

5 - Replace all defective or worn parts.

Fig.133-5

ft
vlPBlfi
\© 60)
'41 ?
o'
s:
51

mI 48)
51

52 49)
Fig.134-5

5 - 64
 TRANSMISSION
Bevel gear pair and rear differential
C 5 - Remounting
After having thoroughly cleaned the differential hou-
sing and all its parts, remount the components by com-
plying with the demounting instructions in reverse
along with the following general indications and adju-
stments:
a - Before assembly, grease the needle bearings and
the housing in which the retention rings operate.
b - Consult the table in the introduction for any sea-
lants not indicated in the description.
c - Tighten the bolts to the indicated driving torques.
Refer to the table in the introduction for any mis-
sing values.
<?
1
7?
5 - 65
Pinion-crown wheel adjustments
To ensure optimum operating conditions, there are four
adjustments to be carried out on the bevel gear pair:
1 - Regulation of the position of the pinion in re-
lation to the crown wheel to allow the two
components to mesh perfectly.
(1 Fig.135-5)
2 - Adjustment of the right preload for the two
taper bearings that support the pinion in or-
der to obtain the exact moment of rotation.
(2 Fig.135-5)
3 - Adjustment of the right preload for the taper
bearings that support the differential in order
to obtain the exact moment of rotation.
(3-4 Fig.135-5)
4 - Adjustment of the right play between the te-
eth of the pinion and those of the crown whe-
el. (3-4 Fig.135-5)
¥
T
Fig.135-5
 TRANSMISSION
Bevel gear pair and rear differential
2
H>C<-
sh.
Adjusting the position of the pinion
in relation to the crown wheel
Foreword: this adjustment must be made whene-
ver the rear taper bearing (2), the bevel gear pair
or the differential housing are replaced during a
general overhaul.
1 - The purpose of the adjustment is to determine
the value of shim Sh mounted between the outer
ring of the bearing (2) and the relative stop on
the housing (Fig.136-5).
2 - Use the following expression for the calculation:
SH = A - ( B + C )
5 - 66
sh.
B
A Fig.136-5
where:
A is the distance between the bearing surface of
the rear taper bearing and the axis of the ring
gear. (Fig. 136-5)
This measurement is calculated on the assem-
bly line and is stamped on the differential hou-
sing (Fig. 137-5).
B this is the nominal measurement (120 mm) that
must be complied with in order to perfectly cen-
ter the pinion on the crown wheel. (Fig. 136-5)
The measurement can be corrected by writing
with an electric pen on the pinion head (Fig.138-
5).
These values are added or subtracted to or from
the nominal value of 120 mm, depending on the
+ or - sign that precedes this value.
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

Example: V(
°
If + 0.15 is written on the end of the pinion, B dimen- o / A
sion will be 120 + 0.15 = 120.15 mm
o o
If - 0.10 is written on the end of the pinion, B dimen- 133,80
sion will be 120 - 0.10 = 119.90 mm li
c
o o ©o
C is the distance between the taper bearing stop o o
point (2 Fig.136-5) on the housing and the bea-
ring surface on the bevel pinion.
This dimension must be measured on the taper
bearing using tool 45 DIF GL (Fig.139-5).

©
l /M y
Fig.137-5
Example 1

a - If 133.8 mm is stamped on the housing

b - If + 0.15 is written on the end of the pinion

c - If the measured C dimension is 11.5 mm

Shim SH will be :
‘+015

SH = 133.8 - (120.15 + 11.5) = 2.15mm

Example 2

a - If 133.4 mm is stamped on the housing

b - If - 0.10 is written on the end of the pinion

Fig.138-5
c - If the measured C dimension is 11.9 mm

Shim SH will be:

45 DIF GL TT
P
SH = 133.4 - (119.9 + 11.9) = 1.6 mm □I

uJ 1
c

TT

ra Fig.139-5

5 - 67
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

Adjusting the right preload for the o
two taper bearings that support the
pinion.

1 - Fit the bevel pinion back on to the differential hou-

sing, remembering to mount the spring ring that v'
holds the two gears connected to the pinion, back «3
in its housing. 3-4 Nm
2 - Mount and tighten the nut until a 3-4 Nm moment Q
of rotation is obtained (Fig.140-5). Use a plastic
mallet to bed the pinion on the two bearings, then
o\
check again and vary the driving torque of the
nut until the required moment of rotation is obtai- n o Fig.140-5
ned.

3 - Hammer the outer edges of the nut near the two

cavities on the pinion. A sh

39

Adjusting the correct preload for

the two taper bearings that support
35 DIF
the differential. GL

1 - Mount the ring bevel gear on the complete diffe-

rential unit, torquing the bolts to 110-120 Nm and
spreading them with Loctite 242. 39

2 - Mount the two dummy bearings (Tool 35 DIF GL) B Psh2

Fig.141-5
on the differential housing without mounting any
shims between them and the seats of the diffe-
rential. Now fit the entire assembly along with the
ring bevel gear into the differential housing A
(Fig.141-5).

3 - Adequately fix the two supports and remember

that from this moment onwards, they must not be X
exchanged with each other.

4 - With the aid of a lever, shift the differential unit

fully against the support (B) and use a thickness
gauge to measure the distance between the dum-
my bearing and the bearing stop on the differen-
tial housing (X Fig.142-5).
Take this measurement a couple of times, che-
cking that the differential unit is perfectly in place t
by means of the dummy bearing on the support B
(B). Fig.142-5

5 - 68
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

The measured dimension corresponds to the total
value of the shims that need to be inserted in order to Ar—I
eliminate the float (X = X1 + X2). To give the two taper
X1
bearings the right preload and achieve the exact mo- Z1
ment of rotation, it is necessary to add 0.1mm to the
calculated value: thus the total value of the shims will
be: X + 0.1.
These shims must then be distributed between flan-
ge A and flange B in order to obtain the correct play [

between the teeth of the pinion and those of the ring 0,34max
gear.
I
Adjusting the correct play between |X2
the teeth of the pinion and those of Fig.143-5
B
the ring gear
1- Keeping the differential unit completely moved
on support B, place a comparator perpendicular-
ly on the center line of a flank of one of the ring
gear teeth (Fig.143-5).

2 - Slowly and axially move the differential unit towar- [fb

ds support (B), meanwhile measuring the varia- □t □t
tion in play between the teeth of the pinion and
those of the ring gear.
When the rotational play between the pinion and
ring gear teeth is between 0.18 and 0.34 mm,
y.®
stop the axial movement and check its entity by
inserting a thickness gauge between support A
and the relative dummy bearing (X1).

3 - As the maximum float X and X1 is now known, it Fig.144-5

will be easily possible to calculate the value of
X2:
The same procedure and the same calculation must
X2 = X - X1
naturally be also carried out for value X2.
4 - The values of X1 and X2 would correspond to
Example:
the values of shims Sh1 and Sh2 if the dummy
If the calculated X value is 3.5mm, by adding 0.1 mm
bearings were of the same thickness as the true
of preload one obtains X = 3.5 + 0.1 = 3.6mm.
taper bearings to be subsequently mounted.
It is therefore necessary to check for possible
If the measured X1 value is 1.6mm, X2 will be:
differences by using a depth gauge to measure
X2 = X - X1 = 3.5 - 1.6 = 1.9mm.
the difference in thickness between the dummy
bearing and the true bearing to be mounted
If Z1 is 21.1 and V1 is 21, Sh1 will be:
(Fig.144-5) and to add or subtract this difference
21.1 - 21 = 0.1
to or from values X1 and X2:
Sh1 = 1.6 + 0.1 = 1.7mm
Z1 - V1 = Difference to add to a X1 if positive and
If Z2 is 20 and V2 is 20.1, Sh2 will be:
to subtract from X1 if negative in order to obtain
21 - 21.1 = -0.1
Sh1
Sh2 = 1.9 - 0.1 = 1.8mm

5 - 69
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

5 - Proceed by definitively mounting the entire diffe-
rential unit, inserting the calculated shims, tor-

\\
0

quing the bolts of the supports to 48-52 Nm and

/
/

spreading Loctite 242 on them.

9
After assembly, check again to make sure that
the play between the pinion/ring gear teeth is

0
within 0.18-0.30 mm., with a maximum tolerated
//

variation of 0.1 mm. (Fig.145-5) and if the mo-

ment of rotation of the pinion-ring gear assembly
1

0
v

measured on the pinion nut is within 4 and 5 Nm.

0
Repeat all the previously described operations if
f //

there are differences.

/

0
0

6 - Place the double gear (15 Fig.107-5) for the Slow/

Rev side shaft on the gear connected to the be-
or

vel pinion. Fig.145-5

This pre-mounting operation must be carried out
since it would be too difficult if the upper shaft
were already mounted.
0

7 - Using tool (37 Dif GL) mount the shaft (16

t
o
0

Fig.146-5) along with the relative spring ring (8

Fig.106-5).
0

8 - Mount the slow upper shaft (10), remembering to

insert the spring ring beforehand (11 Fig.106-5).
MifirTiirninrS

ch
0
0

9 - Mount the Slow/Rev side shaft (Fig.102-5) con-

necting it to the double gear positioned during
the operation (6).

10 - Remount the two upper shafts from the PTO along

with the relative rods and forks as described in
Chap. 7 (Power take-off) Sect.3-5. Fig.146-5

11 - Mount the fork (46), the locking rod (45) with the
spring (47) on the housing (Fig.147-5).

Take care when assembling the spring (47

Fig.147-5). Wear gloves to protect the han-
<

ds, hold the spring firmly with the hand and qui-
d>
CO

ckly insert the rod (45-Fig.147-5).

tO

12 - Adjust the screw (A) until the fork is centered in

o

the coupling sleeve (B) when the lock is in the

W\

hold position. Also check to make sure that the

vS
Pi
Fa

sleeve coupling pins have a minimum play in re-

oI

0]

lation to the surface of the crown wheel in que-

stion. After adjusting, tighten the lock-nut using
Loctite 242.
0
0 0

&

13 - Finish mounting the remaining components, in-

cluding the rods and forks. Fig.147-5

5 - 70
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

14 - Torque the bolts that fix the differential housing to
the gearbox to a 98-120 Nm value and spread
them with Loctite 242.

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

5 - 71
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

C 6 - Special tools
31 DIF GL
Plug to mount the bush on the differential housing.

32 DIF GL
Plug to insert the outer rings of the taper bearings of the rear differential (43 Fig.92/93-5)

0
33 DIF GL
Puller for the fast and standard range upper shaft mounted on the differential housing (16 Fig.113-5)

34 DIF GL
Plug to mount the roller bearing on the slow upper shaft (10 Fig.106-5)

5 - 72
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

C 6 - Special tools
35 DIF GL
Dummy bearings to adjust the preload of the rear differential taper bearings (Fig.141/142-5)

36 DIF GL
ft
Plug to insert the outer ring of the differential bearing (43 Fig.92/93-5)

0
37 DIF GL
Plug to mount the standard and fast range gear / shaft for the differential housing (16 Fig.146-5)

38 DIF GL
Plug to mount the ball bearing on the slow upper shaft (10 Fig.106-5)

0
5 - 73
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

C 6 - Special tools
39 DIF GL
Plug to insert the bearing for the Slow and Rev shaft mounted on the differential housing (9 Fig.92/93-5)

40 DIF GL
a
Plug to mount the roller cage of the rear differential

41 DIF GL
Plug to insert the retention ring for the final drive engaging lever support on the diff. housing (A Fig.97-5)

42 DIF GL
Block to use with a universal puller to demount the bearing for the upper shaft of the rear differential housing
(12 Fig.92/93-5)

5 - 74
 TRANSMISSION

Bevel gear pair and rear differential

C 6 - Special tools
43 DIF GL
Dummy rear differential bevel pinion (1 Fig.92/93-5)

45 DIF GL
Tool to measure the shim of the preloaded rear differential bevel pinion taper bearing (Fig.139-5)

5 - 75
 TRANSMISSION

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

5 - 76
 TRANSMISSION

CHAP. 5

Rear final drives and brakes

INDEX

Sect. 3 Demounting, inspection and remounting

D 1a - Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2210)

D 1a.1 - Drawing of assembly and components ................ 5-78

D 1a.2 - Removal from the tractor ...................................... 5-80
D 1a.3 - Dismantling ........................................................... 5-80
D 1a.4 - Inspection .............................................................. 5-81
D 1a.5 - Remounting ........................................................... 5-81
D 1a.6 - Special tools ..........................................................5-83

D 1b - Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2220-2230)

D 1b.1 - Drawing of assembly and components ................ 5-86

D 1b.2 - Removal from the tractor ...................................... 5-88
D 1b.3 - Dismantling............................................................ 5-88
D 1b.4 - Inspection .............................................................. 5-89
D 1b.5 - Remounting ........................................................... 5-89
D 1b.6 - Special tools .......................................................... 5-92

D 2 - Brakes
D 2.1 - Description of operation .......................................... 5-94
D 2.2 - Demounting, inspection, remounting...................... 5-96
D 2.3 - Adjusting the pedals and hand brake ..................... 5-97
D 2.4 - Bleeding the air from the brake circuit.................... 5-98

5 - 77
 TRANSMISSION

D 1a - Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2210)

D 1a. 1 - Drawing of the assembly

13) 12 11 10 9 8 18

f]A

Slip
o
17
dp5
r
-S'
i Wfl
5
i-M

Fig. 148 - 5

1 - External axle shaft 11 - Retention ring

2 - Taper bearing 12 - Plate calipers
3 - External final drive housing 13 - Friction disks
4 - Taper bearing 14 - Steel disks
5 - Gear 15 - Spring
6 - Internal final drive housing 16 - Bolt
7 - Bolt 17 - Nut
8 - Internal axle shaft 18 - Spacer
9 - Radial roller bearing 19 - Retention ring
10 - Spring ring

5 - 78
 TRANSMISSION

Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2210)

D 1a.1 - Main components

'b-
4' 'e e
.17 (5) 4
■/
m 0 'e c
<& r
jypi 'A V
I le
3
/ 0
£ f
<? 2
6 14 16 I
5. A
m
f
1
m
m % Oy \s
15 7

e
'e

a
e
&

e %
o
i

13 12 18

11 10 9 8

Fig.149 - 5

5 - 79
 TRANSMISSION

Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2210)

D 1a.2 - Removal from the tractor T
Fig.150-5
1 -Remove the wheel of the final drive in question af-
ter having inserted an appropriate support under
the rear part of the differential housing.
J
C c
2 - Drain the oil from the transmission and the side
final drive unit.
%
J efe
Vi

3 - Disconnect the side stabilizer from the bracket C

fixed to the final drive.

4 - Disconnect the clamp that fixes the Leveling feed

r&L
5
(
r' iCWS i
o
o

0
pipes on the right-hand side (if mounted).

5 - Demount the bracket for the creeper gear control 3jV>3

wire on the left-hand side.

6 - Demount the bracket that fixes the PTO shock

absorber on the right-hand side.

7 - Remove all the fixing bolts (7) of the external fi- 21

nal drive housing (3 Fig.150-5 ) after having an-
chored this to a hoist.

8 - Remove the final drive from its housing and set it

down.
r. d w
9 - Mount tool (21) 100 RID GL on the internal final
drive housing (6 Fig.151-5) in order to balance the
? C\ '1 /ÿ bmlSLi/c,
final drive itself. ro,

.c C
10 - Remove the 4 internal bolts and the 8 outer ones 1) C
c
and demount the final drive from the differential c
Fig.151-5
housing (Fig.151-5).

D 1a.3 - Dismantling
External final drive (Fig.152-5) © UK

©
1 - Unscrew the nut (17).

2 - Remove the crown wheel (5).

0
----
3 - Remove the axle shaft (1) from the final drive
housing.

Internal final drive (Fig.153-5)

4 - Remove the retention ring (11) from its housing. to

o 1
o o Fig.152-5
5 - Remove the stop ring of the radial bearing (9 ).

5 - 80
 TRANSMISSION

Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2210)

6 - Demount the axle shaft (1) complete with radial
\nns
bearing.

7 - To remove the radial bearing from its housing,

I Fig.153-5

use tool 103 RID GL for axle shafts with 10 teeth

9 10
and tool 104 RID GL for axle shafts with 11 te- i'
eth.
a*
l
HK®®
o /A N
D 1.4 - Inspection o o
o

1 - Clean and check all parts.

2 - Replace the retention rings and axle shaft nut.

5
3 - Check the rolling tracks of all bearings and make JO I
sure that their movement is regular.

4 - Replace all defective or worn parts. r

D 1a.5 - Remounting
External final drive 'C|
.Cl y
A.
Proceed by complying with the demounting instruc-
tions in reverse, remembering to preload the two taper
B K
i

bearings with the nut (17) to obtain a moment of rota- 6 - 8 Nm

tion of 6 - 8 Nm, inclusive of retention ring resistance 5)
(Fig.154-5)

Internal final drive

«=>
o,
o Fig.154-5
Proceed by complying with the demounting instruc-
tions in reverse, remembering the following indications:

a - When remounting the radial bearing, use the

same tool used for demounting, i.e. 103 RID GL
or 104 RID GL (Fig.155-5).
'1)

rp§Ss?r

103 RID GL
OR
l Ml 104 RID GL
l
>

Fig.155-5

5 - 81
 TRANSMISSION

Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2210)

b - Insert the O-Ring (A) between the radial bearing
(9) and the spacer (18 Fig.156-5).

MU

Fig.156-5

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

5 - 82
 TRANSMISSION

Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2210)

D 1a.6 - Special tools
100 RID GL
Anchoring support to demount and mount the side final drive (21 Fig.151-5)

©
101 RID GL
Plug to insert the external retention ring of the side final drive (19 Fig.148-5)

0
102 RID GL
Plug to insert the taper bearing on the shaft of the side final drive (2 Fig.148-5)

103 RID GL
o
Puller and inserter for the radial bearing of the side final drive with a gear with 10 teeth (9 Fig.148/149-5)

5 - 83
 TRANSMISSION

Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2210)

D 1a.6 - Special tools
104 RID GL
Puller and inserter for the radial bearing of the side final drive with a gear with 11 teeth (9 Fig.148/149-5)

105 RID GL
Plug to mount the retention ring on the internal housing of the side final drive, on short shaft (11 Fig. 148/149-5)

106 RID GL
Plug to insert the outer rings of the taper bearings of the side final drive that support the wheel shaft (2 and 4
Fig. 148/149-5)

5 - 84
 TRANSMISSION

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

5 - 85
 TRANSMISSION

D 1b - Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2220-2230)

D1b. 1 - Drawing of assembly

XI

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 /

&

(
I
y
2 T f
_
i
1
r i
§P
4- •*k
M7
ii

o 13

18 12

16 17
-'H
----
IH>

15 14

1- Wheel hub 10 - Side final drive housing

2- Standard retention ring (Combi) 11 - Axle shaft
3- Wheel hub bearing 12 - Disk brake unit
4- Axle shaft taper bearing 13 - Ring gear
5- Spacer 14 - Adjuster shim
6- Final drive cover 15 - Wheel hub taper bearing
7- Axle shaft taper bearing 16 - Retention ring (paddy field type) (Metal to Me-
8- Adjuster shim tal)
9- Retention ring 17 - Fixing bolts
18 - Stop ring

Fig.157-5

5 - 86
 TRANSMISSION

Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2220-2230)

s *

% %
18
14 % %
15
9

5
3

H
%

10

2
17
•T
1

®
MO Vj
<& 13
3
A
VAÿi
$

Fig.158-5

5 - 87
*
TRANSMISSION

Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2220-2230)

D 1b.2 - Removal from the tractor
1 - Remove the wheel of the final drive in question
after having inserted an appropriate support under
the rear part of the differential housing.
0, ON oAJ
2 - Drain the oil from the transmission and the side
final drive unit. 0 0 D /

Q X
3 - Disconnect the side stabilizer from the bracket >0' /" \
(0
fixed to the final drive. V !
& /

4 - Disconnect the clamp that fixes the Leveling feed

pipes on the right-hand side.

5 - Demount the bracket for the creeper gear control Fig.159-5

wire on the left-hand side.

6 - Demount the bracket that fixes the PTO shock

absorber on the right-hand side.

7 - Remove all the fixing bolts from the final drive 131 RID GL
housing after having anchored this to a hoist;
6
8 - Remove the final drive from its housing, using an
adequate support (Fig.159-5); -S 7
O

CD
Q
11
ir-j
X
D 1b.3 - Dismantling 10
/

1 - Remove the bolts that fix the cover (6) to the final
drive housing (10) and remove the assembly (Fig.
160-5) with the aid of tool 131 RID GL. Fig.160-5
The axle shaft (11) will also be removed with the
cover, along with the relative inner ring of the taper
bearing (7).

2 - Remove the spring ring (18) and, with the aid of a

press, remove the hub (1) from the cover (6). Set
down the taper bearing (15), the ring gear (13) and
all the components in question (Fig. 161-5).
1
18

15 6
<=>
13 o

c>
o o

Fig.161-5

5 - 88
 TRANSMISSION

Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2220-2230)

D 1b.4 - Inspection
1 - Clean and check all parts.

2 - Replace the retention rings.

3 - Check the rolling tracks of all bearings and make

sure that their movement is regular.

4 - Replace all defective or worn parts.

D 1b.5 - Remounting
After having thoroughly cleaned the final drive hou-
sing and all its components, remount the parts by com-
plying with the demounting instructions in reverse or-
der, along with the general indications and adjustments
described below:

a - Prior to assembly, grease the needle bearings and

the housings in which the retention rings operate.

b - Refer to the table in the introductory part for the

sealants not indicated in the description.

c - Tighten the bolts to the indicated driving torque

values. Refer to the table in the introductory part
for any values not given.

Adjustments
To obtain optimum operating conditions, the following
adjustments must made:

1 - Calculation of the shim thickness (S1) used

to preload the bearings that support the axle
shaft (11);

2 - Calculation of the shim thickness (S2) used

for the hub bearings (1).

5 - 89
 TRANSMISSION

Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2220-2230)

1 - Calculation of the shim thickness (S1) used to
preload the bearings that support the axle
shaft (11)

Use the following formula to calculate the shim value

2 1
(S1):

S 1 = (A1 - B1) + P C*
7 — '
1
<

Where: ~7 / / /

S1 - Shim thickness to calculate. 2

A1 - Distance between the bearing surface of the fi-
nal drive (10) and the housing of the axle shaft
taper bearing (Fig.162/165-5) Fig.162-5

B1 - Distance between the bearing surface of the co-

ver (6) and the taper bearing (7) mounted on the
axle shaft (11) (Fig.165-5)

P - Preload/play required by the taper bearings (4-7

Fig.165-5)
(Preload Max = 0.05 mm) 3 130 RID GL
(Play Max = 0.10 mm)

2 - Calculation of the shim thickness (S2) used

for the hub bearings (1).
o

Use the following formula to calculate the shim value iO

,G>
(S2):
r
S2 = A2 – B2 + P Fig.163-5

Where:

S2 - Shim thickness to calculate

11
A2 - Distance between the bearing surface of the fi-
nal drive (10) and the housing of the hub taper
bearing
(Fig.162/165-5) 7

B2 - Distance between the bearing surface of the co- 15 6

ver (6) and the taper bearing of the hub
(15 Fig.165- 5) o

o
P - Preload/play for the taper bearings c>
•Q.
O o
(3-15 Fig.165-5)
(Preload Max = 0.15 mm)
(Play Max = 0.05 mm) Fig.164-5

5 - 90
 TRANSMISSION

Rear final drives (Massey Ferguson 2220-2230)

Bi *ÿ
Ai
*

4 7 *Si 10

«
//
6

H
3
\ 11
\
( /

/1
/

15
/ \
\
A
1 3

J2
Jl . A2 . Fig.165-5

Notes:
Determination of distances B1 and B2 is facilitated by
using tool 130 RID GL, which keeps the outer rings of
the two taper bearings centered (Fig.163-5) and
makes it easier to take the measurements with a com- 15÷35 Nm
parator or depth gauge.
Once shim thicknesses S1 and S2 have been calcu- rx57
lated, join the cover unit (6) to the final drive housing 1
(10) and make sure that the moment of rotation of the o
o
hub (1) is 15-35 Nm, inclusive of the resistance of the o
o

retention rings (Fig.166-5). 131 RID GL c

Before joingint the cover (6) to the housing (10), spread
this latter with Loctite 510.
Repeat the calculations if the measured value is not
TST-
correct.
Fig.166-5

5 - 91
 TRANSMISSION

Special tools
D1b.6 - Special tools
130 RID GL (ex R 502/A)
Taper bearing compressor for measurement taking; to adjust the taper bearings of the side final drive on
Massey Ferguson 2220-2230 (Fig.163-5).
o

131 RID GL
Massey Ferguson 2220-2230 side final drive cover puller and to check the moment of rotation (Fig.160/166-5).

0
0

132 RID GL
Plug to insert the outer taper bearing of the Massey Ferguson 2220-2230 side final drive (4 Fig.157-5).

0
133 RID GL
Plug to insert the standard retention ring for the Massey Ferguson 2220-2230 side final drive (2 Fig.157-5).

5 - 92
 TRANSMISSION

Special tools
134 RID GL
Plug to insert the outer ring of the taper bearing for the Massey Ferguson 2220-2230 side final drive (3 Fig.157-5).

135 RID GL
Plug to insert the inner ring of the taper bearing for the Massey Ferguson 2220-2230 side final drive (15 Fig.157-5).

136 RID GL
Plug to insert the inner ring of the taper bearing for the Massey Ferguson 2220-2230 side final drive (4 Fig.157-5).

5 - 93
 TRANSMISSION

D 2 - Brakes

9
1

\\

v\\
% JUI
jy= M3
3

4 '4 5
6 7

8
1 - Brake pedals
2 - Reservoir
3 - Brake pumps
4 - Braking compensator
5 - RH brake cylinder
6 - RH brake assembly
7 - LH brake cylinder
8 - LH brake assembly Fig.167-5
9 - Hand brake lever

D 2.1 - Description of operation

a - General circuit
The hydraulically controlled braking system consists
of two separate circuits.
Each circuit is operated by the brake pedals and con-
sists of a pump (3), a tube, a cylinder (5-7) and an oil
reservoir (2) used by both circuits (Fig.167-5).
These are installed so that they can be used indivi-
dually by removing the latch that joins the two pedals
together.
During normal work, the right and left brakes may
sometimes wear to a different extent. This normally
occurs when jobs like ploughing are carried out and
the operator is always forced to frequently turn in the
same direction, using the same brake.
Even when of a very limited extent, differentiated wear
inevitably leads to different pedal travels and if these
latter are used simultaneously with the latch enga-
ged, there will be a different braking action on the
wheels. This sometimes makes the machine unstable
during road transport.
This fault has been obviated by use of a braking sy-
stem equipped with a compensator (4 Fig. 167-5) to
guarantee an equal oil pressure on the cylinders re-
gardless of pedal travel. This therefore ensures the
same braking intensity on the wheels.

5 - 94
 TRANSMISSION
Brakes
Brake pump
JL) (CL t l S d s
i’*'l
1- Feed union k-v\
\
2- Piston N°1
3- Retention ring : /
4- Pump control pin v' vZ'Z'/.- 7/.
5- Bellows
6- Pump casing
7- Piston pin
8- Piston N° 1 retention ring
9- Piston N°2 •»
10 - Compensator union
11 - Piston N° 2 retention ring
21 U 0 L 9
12 - Piston return spring
($) @
13 - Delivery union Fig.168-5
14 - Compensator on-off valve
b - Brake pump
l @) ® @>
The brake pump consists of the parts illustrated in
@
Fig. 168/169-5).
When the brake pedal is depressed (single braking 9,
action), the piston (2) on the pump control pin moves
towards the delivery union (13). Meanwhile, the pi- o
ston (9) also moves and uncovers the hole of the union
(10) which feeds the compensator, thus increasing the
© ©
pressure values within the circuit. mmrn CTr*
In this case, the pressure acts on the plunger of one
©
single wheel. Despite the fact that the two unions (10)
are connected, the oil cannot pass through to the other
circuit because the piston (9) of the other pump blocks
£> © @ ©
its passage.
When the two pedals are latched together and the Fig.169-5
control pins (4) are depressed (simultaneous braking),
the pistons (2) move towards the delivery union (13)
while the other pistons (9) also move and uncover the
holes that feed the compensator. This allows the oil to
feed both circuits at the same time, with the same
pressure on the cylinders, thus recovering any diffe-
rences in travel due to different wear on the brake
disks and ensuring an equal braking action on both
wheels.
5 - 95
 TRANSMISSION

Brakes
D 2.2 - Demounting, inspection and
20
remounting J c:
o-
©
C\J
Demounting

1 - Demount the plate calipers (12) from the diffe-

rential housing after having first removed the le-
/
c a
ver (20 Fig.170-5). I,
iS
r),

2 - Dismantle the calipers by taking out the return k©

<S?
<§
springs (15 Fig.170-5).

Note:
The brake pump (Fig.169-5) and the control cylin- © ©
der (Fig.171-5) cannot be demounted for safety Fig.170-5
reasons dictated by the manufacturer.
Only the external parts such as: rubber cowling
(16 Fig.169-5 and 24 Fig.171-5) and the pins / acti-
vation forks (4 Fig.169-5 and 21 Fig.171-5) are sup-
plied as spare parts.
The exploded drawings are for explanatory pur-
@ (21
@
poses only.

Inspection
rx
1 - Clean and check all parts.

2 - Replace all the retention rings and the springs

for the plate calipers (12).
19 - Plunger
3 - Check the friction discs and replace them if the
20 - Cylinder casing
21 - Control pin
@ (22) @
scoring has become shallow. 22 - Washer
23 - Spring ring
4 - Make sure that there are no cracks, signs of over- 24 - Rubber protection cowling Fig.171-5
heating or deformations on the steel discs.

5 - Make sure that there is no marked scoring on the

plate calipers.

6 - Replace all defective or worn parts.

a -Thoroughly lubricate all parts, particularly the fric-
tion discs.
Remounting
b - Place a steel disk between the two friction discs
After having thoroughly cleaned all, remount all parts and mount them on the differential housing with
complying with the demounting instructions in rever- abundant grease.
se along with the following indications:
c - Mount the plate calipers, slightly opening them to
make them easier to insert into the differential
housing.

5 - 96
 TRANSMISSION

Brakes
D 2.3 - Adjusting the pedals and
hand brake lever
The braking system will need adjusting after an ove-
rhaul, when the machine is checked at the beginning
of the season or if the system is faulty. Proceed in the
following way to operate correctly:
1 - Lift the tractor with a hydraulic jack until the rear
wheels have been raised from the ground.
6 -Carry out the same operations on the other brake.
7 - Now check to make sure that the free travel is
within the prescribed values (30 - 40 mm). If this
is not the case, first make sure that the brake
circuit is efficient by checking to see whether there
are leaks or air in the circuit.

2 - Release the hand brake lever (L) and slacken off
the adjuster nut (14) of the rod (15) to relieve all
tension from the latch (16).
3 - Lift the latch that joins the two pedals to make
them independent.
4 - Tighten the adjuster nut (13) until the wheels can
be turned by hand.
5 - Now unscrew the adjuster nut by one turn, i.e.
until the wheel can be turned. After this, lock the
adjuster bolt with the relative nut.
8 - Tighten the nut (14) until obtaining a minimum
play between the latch (16) and control lever (17)
so that the hand brake (15) remains slack when
the brake is disengaged. When the idle travel of
the pedals tends to increase following wear on
the friction discs and exceeds 80 - 100 mm, just
restore the required value by tightening the adju-
ster nuts (13) to the required extent.
Change the friction discs (Fig. 172-5) if the nuts
(13) use the entire threaded part of the respecti-
ve rods after further adjustments.

L - Hand brake lever

H - Hydraulic brake control cylinder

(H 15 12 - Brake control rod

18) t
o o 0 \
13 - Pedal lever travel adjuster nut
14 - Hand brake travel adjuster nut
Q 15 - Hand brake cable
/
j 16 - Hand brake rod latch
Oil m m ‘1
17 - Control lever
i
0* Q\IA irt-
c 18 - Rod control lever
/
l

W/// 17
ft .01 v
Vi

0 A®.
4 0
12) (13) (14) (16
Fig.172-5

5 - 97
 TRANSMISSION

Brakes
Note: - Repeat the above operation until the oil that issues
To engage the brakes, the braking travel of the hand from the bleed screw is free from bubbles.
lever must be 5-6 marks on the sector with new brakes
and tends to increase as the friction disks become - Make sure that the pedal travel has returned to nor-
worn. Never reduce the travel of the hand lever by mal and is not spongy.
means of the adjuster nut (14) or rod (15) since this
would limit the travel of the brake pedals (Fig.172-5). - Carry out the same operations on the right-hand part
of the braking circuit.
D 2.4 - Bleeding air from the brake - Top up the oil in the reservoir after this operation.
circuit
It becomes necessary to bleed air from the circuit af-
ter topping up the oil in the reservoir or when parts of
the hydraulic braking system are replaced or repai-
red. This operation must be carried out in a precise
sequence and in the following way:
A Only use fluid for braking circuits to top
up the oil level. Different oils will quickly
lead to an inefficient braking system with all the
relative consequences.
- Fill the reservoir with clean brake fluid of the prescri- Do not use previously bled oil unless it has been
bed type. The reservoir must be kept topped up throu- filtered.
ghout the entire bleeding operation.

- Thoroughly clean around the bleeding screws (22

Fig.173-5).
22
- Fit an adequate length of rubber or plastic tubing on
the bleed screw.

- Place the end of the tube in a clean transparent re-

ceptacle. X
,V4— r
w
- Disconnect the two pedals to allow them to operate
independently. [
- Fully depress the left brake pedal. Meanwhile, un-
screw the bleed screw by half a turn, allowing any air
in the oil to flow out. The pedal will reach end of travel. i)
Tighten the screw and then release the pedal.
Fig.173-5

5 - 98
 TRANSMISSION

CHAP. 5

Hydraulic Hi-Lo

INDEX

Sect. 3 Demounting, inspection and remounting

E - Hydraulic Hi-Lo
E 1 - Drawing of the assembly and components ............. 5-100
E 2 - Description of operation ...........................................5-103
E 3 - Removal from the tractor and dismantling ............... 5-104
E 4 - Inspection .................................................................5-107
E 5 - Remounting ..............................................................5-108
E 6 - Special tools .............................................................5-110

5 - 99
 TRANSMISSION

E - Hydraulic Hi-Lo
Sect. 3 Demounting, Inspection, Remounting

E1a - Drawing of the assembly

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 12 14 15

uÿft
~~TFTÿ
r ifv
/ \\
* Ikiÿ-

I
“
\

L t
*ÿl a
-€EEE -£ = )-
!\:*T':
j .
ID
in Pm
4
T I
"(A f J +
x
+
i
M
L
L ;
"I X

-0
AV
ffl J

/
/
s
cr

i
trnm
LT.:
2 Hi
~rm
/4=
>L--
"t

i=j§ 7
/ / / / / / 7 7
7
J - -("~
■ i_ _
/J
31 30 26 25 24 23 23a 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Fig.174 - 5

5 - 100
 TRANSMISSION

Hydraulic Hi-Lo

1 - Axle housing 16 - 5th gear unit

2 - Clutch 17 - Lubrication tube
3 - Input shaft 18 - 4WD transmission shaft
4 - Disk hub 19 - Output crown wheel
5 - Single-plate clutch piston 20 - Input crown wheel
6 - Clutch plate 21 - Multiple plate clutch piston
7 - Belleville washer 22 - Single plate clutch disk
8 - Flange for spring 23 - Speed-shift cover
9 - Clutch disk 23a - Clutch oil inlet hole
10 - Planetary gears 24 - Multiple plate clutch cover
11 - Spider housing 25 - Support
12 - Reverse shuttle transmission 26 - Clutch collar support
shaft 27 - 4WD upper shaft
13 - Planetary pin 28 - Gear (Z = 15)
14 - Reverse shuttle unit 29 - 4WD lower gear shaft
15 - Gearbox cover 30 - Clutch disengaging fork
31 - PTO shaft

E1b - Drawing of assembly (variant for Massey Ferguson 2230)

pL
r
L ;
!
x=rÿ
i
<E
-— t
--- i
-:3 4-11
[*-*•

ifp&V
rz
4-
ry
[L _..

r©rf /

"'t'
3? ISEH
A

ffnSm®i
H0-
iT\
”3 - <-=

HI j©:
-CX

& 27
W.J

28

Fig. 175-5 29

5 - 101
 5 - 102

Fig.176 - 5

16 17 18 19 20 21 23a 23 3

17 "TV-
llh -
I
«

sigiSf 1
V
7

4-f-1
=-
— r
i
i
f*
c 3>
ru

r
-~r>
-•--
r
r
//
- K-f-

Mm*
A

t
\J±U
E? a
T
i
Hag W ft

S— %4
+
£
+
I I H
K 7 £ i

h-
h-
-
b I
XT
iRm.
3 1®f
T
- ! V
I
n-/< ■
i

7 \\
/_1| EM
€ »ltg| \b!\. j
-£EE_

31 12 13 11 10 4 9 8 7 6 5 22 24

Hydraulic Hi-Lo
TRANSMISSION
v
 TRANSMISSION
Hydraulic Hi-Lo
E2 - Description of Hi-Lo
operation
The Hi-Lo unit comprises an epicyclic final drive that
reduces each gearbox gear by 20%, thus doubling
the number of speeds available.
The device is controlled by a button on the gearshift
lever which transmits a signal to a solenoid valve. This
allows pressurized oil to act on two hydraulic clutch
assemblies (9 and 22 Fig.176-5).
The Hi-Lo unit transmits 2 ratios to the gearbox. The-
se are: Slow or Fast.
Press the control button on the handgrip of the gear
lever to select the “fast ratio” or direct drive.
The electric signal transmitted to the solenoid valve
allows oil at a pressure of 17 bar to pass towards the
chambers of the two pistons in question (5 and 21).
Thus activated, piston (21) will pack together the pla-
tes and inter-plates (9) of the clutch, in order to form a
solid block with the hub (4) splined to the input shaft
(3).
The piston (5) will act on the clutch plates (6), overco-
ming the thrusting action exercised by the Belleville
washer (7) and thus releasing the plate (22) from its
task of immobilizing the cover (24) to which it is con-
nected.
In these conditions, the input shaft (3) may transmit
its rotational movement, by means of the hub (4), to
5 - 103
the plates and inter-plates (9), to the cover (24) and
to the entire epicyclic unit and, as a single unit, to the
actual shaft itself. The difference in the number of te-
eth between double planetary gears (10) and crown
wheels (19) and (20) will create a mechanical block,
thus forcing the output shaft (12) to turn along with
the entire unit and with the input shaft (3) in a 1:1
direct ratio or "fast ratio”.
To obtain the “slow ratio” on the Speed-shift output,
press the control button again to interrupt the electric
signal transmitted to the solenoid valve in question.
By returning to its initial hold position, this latter will
immediately shut off the pressurized oil that flows
towards the pistons (5 and 21).
The clutch plates (9) will be freed again, while the disk
(22) will lock after the thrust exercised by the Bellevil-
le washer (7) on the clutch plate (6).
The cover ring (24) will allow the drive transmitted by
the input shaft (3) to pass from the crown wheel (20)
to the output one (19) through planetary gears (10),
thus achieving a 20% reduction on the output shaft.
 TRANSMISSION

1*

*
Hydraulic Hi-Lo
E 3 - Removal from the tractor and
dismantling

=ÿ
Proceed in the following way to access the gearbox
drive shaft:
O-
MJ

a - split the tractor between the engine and shaft

am
o

(see sect. 2) chap. 2 Fig.178-5; wimp 3

\ l
o

b - Remove the battery and sufficiently raise the cab

-On.

to be able to take out the clutch disengaging fork

rod (30 Fig.174-5); 137 PNT GL

r
)\
c - Remove the PTO shaft 26
(31 Fig.174-5);
-
d - After having removed the rod and clutch disenga-
B A
Fig.177-5
ging collar, take out the bolts that fix the Hi-Lo unit
and remove it from the shaft (B Fig.177-5) . Take great
care to keep the unit together, i.e. keep the shaft
(3) joined to the collar support (26). The job can
be facilitated by mounting tool 137 PNT GL on the
shaft (3), allowing it to join to the collar support
(26) and locking it in place by tightening the bolt.
M
o
XT
z.

■L

us*
urn
Lioijrÿ
o-ray

&AV.
o
\nW!T\\{\

oVÿ3
o o

¥wÿ,
t

'(£>01 *

Fig.178-5

5 - 104
*
TRANSMISSION

Hydraulic Hi-Lo
e - After having fixed the assembly in a vice, remove
the spider housing (11) from the gear Us
(20 Fig.179-5); 11

f - Remove the clutch assembly (9) with the two sin-

tered plates and three steel ones (Fig.180-5); 20

g - After having set the assembly down on the bench,

remove the input shaft (39) along with the disk hub
o
(4 Fig.181-5); a o

o'

©,

h - Remove the clutch cover (24) along with the clu- © o

tch piston (21 Fig.182/183-5);

.o'

Fig.179-5

4
9 Ir
\
-Z7
39
o. o.
o o

o,
o
o o
© ©
o'
o„

T
O
o O.
Q
o

Fig.180-5 Fig.181-5
/

24 21
24

o a
21
‘O o

,o
o
Q
O
o o
o
o
o
o o

Fig.182-5 Fig.183-5

5 - 105
 TRANSMISSION

Hydraulic Hi-Lo
i - Take out the Belleville washer (7 Fig. 184-5) after
having demounted the spring flange (8);
7 8
g - Remove the clutch plate (6), the single-plate clu-
o
tch disk (22) and the clutch control piston (5 "o
Fig.185-5);

m -After having demounted the collar support (26),

take the support (25) from the Hi-Lo cover (23 o

Fig.186-5) by means of the press. o

O
O
O
o
O o

Fig.184-5

22

5
o
'° o o

o /o
.O
o
o
O o

Fig.185-5

26

23
*o
o'
O'
o
O
o
25
1°
o
o
o
o o

Fig.186-5

5 - 106
 TRANSMISSION

Hydraulic Hi-Lo
E 4 - Inspection
1 - Thoroughly clean and check all components;

2 - Replace the retention rings;

o
3 - Make sure that the retention bearing turns in a I I o
I
regular way and that the seals are in a good con- I
dition; O'
O
4 - Check the rolling tracks, the needle bearings and
replace any damaged components (Fig.187-5);

5 - Check the friction disks of the hydraulic clutch as-

semblies and replace them if their scoring is too
shallow (Fig.189-5); Fig.187-5

6 - Check the steel plates of the hydraulic clutch as-

semblies to make sure that there is no scoring,
signs of strong overheating or warping (Fig.189-
5);

7 - Make sure that there is no marked scoring on the

two hydraulic clutch pistons;

8 - Using a jet of compressed air, check the oil chan-

nels and make sure that they are not clogged;

9 - Replace all defective or worn components.

Fig.188-5

Lfr ra
a

Fig.189-5

5 - 107
 TRANSMISSION

Hydraulic Hi-Lo
E 5 - Remounting
After having thoroughly cleaned all the components,
remount them by complying with the demounting in-
structions in reverse order along with the following o
recommendations: o
1 - Mount the planetary gear pins (13) with their lubri-
cation hole pointing in the direction indicated in o
(Fig.190-5); o
2 - Before mounting the third planetary gear, mount
the output crown wheel (19), taking care to posi- O Q
13
tion the mark on the tooth of each of the three o
planetary gears (10) to that it converges towards
the center as shown in (Fig.191-5), at 120°. 19 10
Once the third planetary gear (10) has been fixed
with its relative pin (13), check again to make sure Fig.190-5
that the three marks are pointing towards the cen
ter. Repeat the assembly operations if this is not
the case.
Note: the timing error of one tooth can
120°

A cause the unit to operate in a noisy way,

while an error involving two teeth can cau-
se a mechanical block.
o
3 - Position the mills (A) on the output crown wheel
(19 Fig.191-5) so that they point towards the ones
on the input crown wheel (20).
.•i
4 - Take care when assembling the two retention rin-
o

120°
gs (C and D) mounted on the support (25). Ring
(C) with scoring on the outer and inner diameter Q
O
must be mounted on the left while the normal one
(D) must be mounted on the right. Both must com O

ply with the assembly dimensions indicated in

19
Fig.192-5. It is understood that the needle bearing
(E) must be mounted before the two retention Fig.191-5
rings.

23
»ÿ «*

9,5
0)
D E
0,5

I
/
■4 C D E 25
C
J A/. /
/

—
"4V L/ rH
Fig.192-5 L
r
\ ILl JL _L Fig.193-5

5 - 108
 TRANSMISSION

Hydraulic Hi-Lo
4 - Apply Loctite 510 between the bearing surface of
the support (25) and the cover (23 Fig.192-5).
Take care to correctly center the three holes and 25
use the press when mounting the support (25). o o
o o
o'
o o
o
o o
m
o
o
o o

23

Fig.194-5

5 - 109
 TRANSMISSION

Hydraulic Hi-Lo
E 6 - Special tools
137 PNT GL
Sleeve to mount and demount the complete Speed-shift unit from the tractor (Fig.117-5).

138 PNT GL
Plug to insert the needle bearing for the Speed-shift support (E Fig.192-5).

0
139 PNT GL
Plug to insert the special retention ring for the Speed-shift support (C Fig.192/193-5).

140 PNT GL
Plug to insert the standard retention ring for the Speed-shift support (D Fig.192/193-5).

5 - 110
 FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6

INDEX

6A - Dana 4WD axle (Standard and Sherpa) ....................6-3

6B - 4WD axle with bevel gear pairs .............................. 6-45

6C - Axle with 2 driving wheels ...................................... 6-85

6D - 4WD engagement: Spring-on and hydraulic clutch .. 6-103

6-1
6-2
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6A

INDEX

Sect.1 General description. ............................................................................ 6-5

1-1 Drawing of the assembly and main components (standard version) .... 6-6
1-2 Description of operation and types ....................................... 6-10
1-3 Drawing of assembly (Sherpa version) ............................................... 6-12

Sect.2 Technical specifications. ................................................................... 6-13

Sect.3 Demounting, inspection and remounting (standard version). ....... 6-15

3.1 Removing the axle from the tractor. ...................................... 6-16
3.2 Dismantling the axle .............................................................. 6-17
3.3 Inspecting the axle ................................................................ 6-23
3.4 Remounting the axle ............................................................. 6-24

Sect.4 Demounting, inspection and remounting (Sherpa version). .......... 6-33

4.1 Dismantling the final drive. .................................................... 6-34
4.2 Inspection .............................................................................. 6-37
4.3 Remounting the final drive on the axle ................................. 6-37

Sect.5 Special tools. ...................................................................................... 6-39

6-3
6-4
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6A

General description

INDEX

Sect.1 General description.

1-1 Drawing of assembly and main components (Standard version) ......... 6-6
1-2 Description of operation and types ....................................... 6-10
1-3 Drawing of assembly (Sherpa version) ............................................... 6-12

6-5
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Sect.1- General description

1-1 Drawing of assembly (Standard version)

6) (7) (8) (9) (10 11) (12) (13) 16 (26) 15b (27

■<>---
4
V p

r
3
/ 14
2

L
\ \
\
CK
25 @@(@@@@@@@(15
Fig.1-6

1 - Taper bearing 11 - Retention ring 20 - Fork

2 - Retention ring
3 - Wheel hub
4 - Plug
5 - Ring nut
6 - Adjuster shims
7 - Taper bearing
8 - reduction gear cover
9 - Axle shaft
10 - Taper bearing
12 - O-Ring 21 - Adjuster shims
13 - Adjuster shims 22 - Taper bearing
14 - Retention ring 23 - Gear
15a- Lower taper bearing 24 - Plug
15b- Upper taper bearing 25 - Spring ring
16 - Grease nipple 26 - Upper cover
17 - Lower cover 27 - Plug
18 - Fork pin
19 - Retention ring

6-6
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

General description
1-1 Main components

s
8
7
m 5
m 4
22 )
23 *0, a 'Q/rtpo
25 a
o
1 (9
\
\

/0
N
S
\
N
\
\
\
\
\ 2 <9 •<?,
\

\
\
\
\

& 26
N
\
\
3
o s
\
\
s

15b

27

a to;*- «D
20

12
10 o V-
«

mm
sv
\
\
\
V
\

18 \
Sj

15a
<*£>

Fig.2-6

6-7
*
DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

General description

1-1 Drawing of assembly (Standard version)

37) (38) (39) 40
41
33 42
32 43
31
rri (25 ;
29
44
45
46
30 "V / / /
47
\
3 / / /
48
m
H
70 V
m m t
4

(69
-1-
'ÿ
49
7ÿ
im
\

□ 77ÿ
T
68
£ /7777
@
7 50

=i/ 3
;r
z ::
51

li
66 r 52
i
B
ry r\
Ik
8

® (64) k
;
I (S5)
X(54)ÿ:
/ 777
k
62i 7 IWJS
!:
®
56)
(61
.60 "59) ® Fig.3-6

28 - Lock housing 43 - Disc plate 58 - Brake hubs

29 - Piston 44 - Hydrolock housing 59 - bevel pinion nut
30 - Lh axle shaft 45 - Spring guide 60 - Bevel pinion
31 - Bolt 46 - Retention ring 61 - Retention ring
32 - Brake housing cover 47 - Thrust plate 62 - Taper bearing
33 - Ring nut 48 - Rh axle shaft 63 - Adjuster shim
34 - Piston 49 - Spring ring 64 - Taper bearing
35 - Brake housing 50 - thrust bearing 65 - Bevel ring gear
36 - Taper bearing 51 - Retention ring 66 - Differential support
37 - Planetary gear plug 52 - Piston 67 - Spring ring
38 - Bolt 53 - Retention ring 68 - Brake hubs
39 - Ring nut 54 - Union 69 - Axle housing
40 - Retention ring 55 - Plug 70 - Crown wheel
41 - Retention ring 56 - Spring
42 - Brake disc 57 - Spring ring

6-8
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

General description
1-1 Main components

66
m 61
» -V

s 1 <s X*» *
<>
62

L N

\N 65 xft

36 0
55 \

33
p

Q
N
V
\

54 35
aka
S

53 \
s
41
52 X

34
\
c Cj \

56 48
\
\ SN
VJ \
s
X
v

\
68)
42 v.
\ k
x
X

32
43 X
X
X
x
x

m i
X

44 29 x
X
X
X
X
ft, ''J
46 xÿ

49

L "v
"•ÿ4

58
28
39

69

Fig.4-6

6-9
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

General description
1-2 Description of operation and types
The 4WD front axle consists of a central casing in
spheroidal cast iron which includes the differential unit 1 2 3
(C), a double bevel reduction (D) and a dropped final c

drive (D). The 4WD can be electrohydraulically or 2*

mechanically engaged.
Electrohydraulic engagement occurs by means of a
button on the operator's right. This button can assu-
me three positions (Fig.5-6):
m© ,1

1 - 4 RM disengaged
2 - 4 RM engaged
3 - Fast Run engaged
Fig.5-6
Mechanical engagement of the 4WD occurs by me-
ans of a hand lever on the operator's left (1 Fig.6-6)
which shifts the sliding sleeve (4) and meshes the gear
(5) with the shaft that transmits drive to the axle (6). \
When the electrohydraulic clutch is applied, switch (b)
energizes two separate solenoid valves to allow oil at
a pressure of 18 bar to supply either the 4WD clutch
y
(A) or clutch (B) for the Fast Run.
N>

When the solenoid valve of clutch (A) (pos.2 Fig.5-6)

is energized, the oil activates the RH clutch and al-
lows the two front driving wheels to engage. When
the selector switch is set to position 3 (Fast Run) and
the steering angle exceeds 35°, the solenoid valve 1
will be energized automatically. In this case, the oil \
supplies the LH clutch (B), allowing a ratio for the four
driving wheels to be engaged with a 78% advance in
relation to the rear wheels. In these conditions, the o //
steering time and steering radius are considerably 7 //
reduced.

Solenoid valve energizing is automatically interrup-

ted when the steering angle returns below 35°. The
solenoid valve is always automatically re-energized
when the clutch activates (A) and the four driving
wheels engage with a 3% speed advance in relation
to the rear wheels.
•/7 / E
/
3

I Q# J. x ~h
%LSrbi27
j> in
M (6)(4)®S3 Fig.6-6

6 - 10
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

General description

lo
/1
' s
C
0 D
B A

*t®

:A
E

A) Hydraulic clutch for 4 WD

B) Fast Run hydraulic clutch
C) Differential
D) Dropped final drive
E) 4WD mechanical clutch Fig.7a-6

6 - 11
* DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

General description
1-3 Drawing of assembly (Sherpa version)

\ w
© © ©/+J
7 V /\
23
11 T
XX \\\\\ \ÿ\// V l'.;
10 /

8 \

7 rf*
\
X
6 XXX
p n m
/
x \
p|
\
\\
X
4

3
\ \ V
l
2 \

1
g)(20) 19) (18) (22

1 - Spider cover 13 - Retention ring

2 - Ring nut 14 - Bolt
3 - Crown wheel 15- Ring
4 - Retention ring 16 - Hub retention ring
5 - Washer 17 - Axle shaft retention ring
6 - Spacer 18 - Fork
7 - Planetary gear 19 - Taper bearings for wheel hub
8 - Shim ring 20 - Flange
9 - Planetary gear pin 21 - Retention ring
10 - Needle bearing 22 - Cover for lower pin
11 - Ring gear 23 - Cover for upper pin
12 - Pin retention roller
Fig.7b-6

6 - 12
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6A

Technical specifications

INDEX

Sect. 2 Technical specifications. .................................................................... 6-14

6 - 13
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Sect.2- Technical specifications

Type of axle In spheroidal cast iron, swinging with central pivot

Type of reductions Central pinion and crown wheel, Standard axle (Massey Ferguson 2210-2220):39/8
Central pinion and crown wheel, Standard axle (Massey Ferguson 2230): 53/13
Central pinion and crown wheel, Sherpa axle (Massey Ferguson 2210-2220): 41/9
Central pinion and crown wheel, Sherpa axle (Massey Ferguson 2230): 51/13
Dropped final drive, Standard axle (Massey Ferguson 2210-2220): 47/11
Dropped epicyclic final drive, Sherpa axle 4,6

Clutch control Mechanical with hand throttle or electrohydraulic

Ratio between front and rear axle 1.405 with 4 WD

2.500 with Fast Run

Type of hydraulic clutch Hydraulic clutch for 4 WD with oil-cooled disks,

electrohydraulic clutch and input/output ratio of 1:1
Hydraulic clutch with oil-cooled disks for Fast Run
and automatic engagement when steering angle exceeds 35°.
Input/output ratio 1:1.78

Max. steering angle 55°

Max. axle swing 8°

Minimum turning radius 3054 mm.

6 - 14
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6A

Demounting, inspection and remounting

INDEX

Sect.3 Demounting, inspection and remounting.

3.1 Removing the axle from the tractor. ...................................... 6-16

3.2 Dismantling the axle .............................................................. 6-17
3.3 Inspecting the axle ................................................................ 6-23
3.4 Remounting the axle ............................................................. 6-24

6 - 15
*
DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Sect.3 - Demounting, inspection and remounting

3-1 Removing the axle from the tractor
Comply with the following instructions to remove the
axle from the tractor: 0)
0
GO
1 - Disconnect the drive shaft for the 4WD axle after Mg
having allowed the telescopic protection tube to
slide at the rear.
> Vf(%ÿ
<D
-,
>-
i'

2 - After having slackened off the front tyre rim faste-

ning bolts, couple the axle from the two side final ft CO
drives and lift it about 15 cm. pA 0
3 - Fit an appropriate support under the engine sump. So 0)

4 - Disconnect the two tubes that supply oil to the ste-

ering cylinder.

_
5 - Disconnect the tube that supplies oil to the diffe-
rential lock. Fig.8-6
6 - Disconnect the steering sensor wire (for FAST RUN
device).
7 - Unscrew the four bolts that fix the front and rear
supports (Fig.8-6).
8 - Place the axle on an appropriate support and fix it F
to this (Fig.9-6).
n
0\ ™T3S,
Li

V
° .(KgO) 1—
S1 r*i C'J5
■I-To
1

Fig.9-6

6 - 16
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

6) (7) (8) (9) (10 11) (12) (13) 16 (26) (15b (27

4 i

V MjjB9

E> v
3 M
/ 14
2
£f
i

X
X

25

Fig.10-6

3-2 Dismantling the axle

Note: The dismantling sequence depends on the type 1 - Remove the connecting bar (F Fig.9-6)
of operation to be carried out on the axle.
The description therefore proceeds with detailed in- 2 - Drain the oil from the central part and from the two
structions about how to dismantle the rh final drive final drive assemblies.
and removal of the complete assembly for the lh final
drive, considering the axle configuration complete with
brakes and differential lock.

6 - 17
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3 - Remove the plug (4) using tool 80 DT GL (Fig.11-
6).
8 4
4 - Remove the ring nut (5) along with the adjuster
shims (6 Fig.12-6).
f' \

5 - After having removed the fixing bolts, take off the u

cover (8) complete with hub (3), holding the inner 0
ring of the taper bearing in place with the hands (7 (-1
Fig.13-6).
<5
6 - Remove the upper cover (26) and the adjuster
shims (13) from the fork (20 Fig.14-6). <3

7 - Remove the lower cover (17 Fig.15-6) and take

out the two plugs (18 and 27 Fig. 14/16-6) with the Fig.11-6
aid of tool 81 DT GL.

'6, \
3 0,
[c

3
(3
c
6
3 3

Fig.12-6

O 26
20 (7
<&>
V
v.

9 l '
N 'O] 27
n y 20
Iff
5 ,1
) ~AJL/
<s
9
O

O O
9ÿ
D o. O

Fig.13-6 Fig.14-6

6 - 18
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

8 - Remove the fork (20) along with the axle shaft (48 O'
Fig.17-6)

9 - Demount the lh final drive (D) complete with axle

shaft (30 Fig.18-6)
a
i!
))
:

17

Fig.15-6

81 DT GL

15

19 IS
/

(271

O O

r,

Fig.16-6

30

i
-<S
\ (

\ \ \ (f
j\

I i
I I
48 k
\ j.
/
I
i \ \ K
'

\ \ /

Fig.17-6 Fig.18-6 /
/
6 - 19
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

22
23
/
/
Z 25
Z
l/1
z1
V'J
8
/
U
II
II
_
IT
II
II
* s
Ti
>»
ii
n
ii
n*s
1

3 Fig.19-6

Dismantling the final drive

10 - After having removed the inner bearing ring (22),
22 t
A
take the gear (23) from the cover (8 Fig.20). ■N
I
11 - After having removed the spring ring (25), take
23 «iJ'lprn»

the wheel hub (3) from the cover (8 Fig.21).

12 - Remove the shaft (9) and axle shaft (30) from

8
the fork (20 Fig.22). 57 c

O
o

Fig.20-6

25 1

*> r
Q,
O, O

Uv
o
30
o
o
o o cv
o r
/1
Lÿ
o 20
;<D o
o
8 3 Fig.22-6
Fig.21-6

6 - 20
*
DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

Removing and dismantling the (ft)

complete support of the differen-

75 DT I GL
tial assembly VP*
13 - After having unscrewed the bolts that fix the dif- % o

ferential support, take out the complete assem- vQ o\

XJ(
bly (C) using tool 75 DTI GL and sleeve 75a DT
GL (Fig.23-6).
I
\ 0

~u\ \
14 - After having fixed the unit in a vice, remove the / //\ \
/ /u
Wu \

w
,
tube (54) that delivers oil to the differential lock
(Fig.24-6). i \
\ \

15 - Demount the Hydralock housing (44) with the dif-

ferential lock engaging sleeve (58), the brake di- Fig.23-6
scs (42-43) from the piston housing (28 Fig.25-
6).

n i

Mil (Qj
W
€

— r—

Fig.24-6

44) (58) (43) (28 35

rp
i >

42
Fig.25-6

6 - 21
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

16 - Remove the brak housing cover (32) with the
brake discs (42-43) from the brake housing (35 43 32
Fig.26-6).

17 - Using tool 82 DT GL, demount the ring nut (33) z's

and that of the opposite support (Fig.27-6). /

0,
VN3 \

warn \e,

!i V
m vim
18 - Remove the two housings (28 and 35) along with i 8K®h y<>
the differential assembly (Fig.28-6).
o c
19 - With the aid of tool 80 DT GL and the two plugs /*
80a DT GL, remove the bevel pinion ring nut (59
Fig.29) and take the pinion (60) from its housing ©
along with the outer ring of the taper bearing (64 /

Fig.30-6) and the adjuster spring (63 Fig.30-6). 1

4--
Fig.26-6
20 - After having removed the bolts of (38), take out
the ring bevel gear (65 Fig.31-6) and dismantle
the differential.

21 - Extract the piston (29) from the housing (28

Fig.32-6) using compressed air. e
&
ft

©
o PT& ©.
c.
C5 o®

ft ,-A

J.<

Fig.27-6

28 35 ©

59 ' <§ri% WW ©

r o — --— [ rs- sjNx

\
■

%
4 ;0 ©
m m
j
*>- B)v>

0
0
y)
0
c. w 4;

!
/---
"4=

66
Fig.28-6 Fig.29-6

6 - 22
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3-3 Inspection
1 - Thoroughly clean and check all parts. o\
2 - Replace all the retention rings and the nut for the
bevel pinion.

3 - Check the rolling tracks of all bearings and make

0
0, !
sure that everything operates correctly. °C2)
4 - Make sure that there are no dents or signs of wear 0
on any of the gears, pinions and bevel ring gears. 63
If defects are discovered, replace the part in que- 0
stion or the pair.
1 Fig.30-6
5 - Using a jet of compressed air, check the oil ducts
and make sure that they are not clogged.

6 - Replace all defective or worn parts.

J&ZM|JP.

Fig.31-6

ro,
0

0 0

28
Fig.32-6

6 - 23
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3.4 Remounting the axle
After having thoroughly cleaned the axle housing and
all its parts, remount the components by complying
with the demounting instructions in reverse and fol-
lowing the general indications and adjustments de-
scribed below:
a - Grease the needle bearings and the retention ring
housings.
b - Refer to the table in the introduction for any sea-
lers not indicated in the description.
c - Tighten the bolts to the indicated torque values
and refer to the table in the introduction for any
values not given in the description.
B -Apply the right preload for the two taper bearings
that support the pinion to obtain the exact moment
of rotation.
C -Apply the right play between the pinion and ring
gear teeth and the preload for the two taper bea-
rings that support the differential.
A -Adjusting the position of the pinion in relation
to the ring gear.
Foreword: this adjustment must be made whenever
the front taper bearing (59), the bevel gear pair or the
differential support are replaced during a major ove-
rhaul.

Remounting the complete support of the differen-
tial assembly
Three adjustments must be made to the bevel gear
pair in order to achieve optimum operating conditions:
A -Adjust the position of the pinion in relation to the
ring gear to allow the two components to perfectly
mesh.
Adjustment is carried out to determine the value of
shim (63) mounted between the ring of the bearing
(64) and the relative stop on the housing (66) to allow
the bevel pinion to set at a distance B from the shaft
of the bevel ring gear. B is, in fact, the nominal dimen-
sion of 90 mm that must be complied with if the pinion
is to be perfectly centered on the ring gear.

\ '\
\
/
T

imm \m~ I :

!
£
1 £
£
~y'i .ÿ•ÿ•ÿ•ÿ•ÿÿ•ÿÿÿ £ O
G)
oo
Ji¬ "1 iÿ ll
<e: J CO

Z
ail
*-y / / / <
MEL o
Sh

UKU
/

m
m
m
r<

r\
si

63
:: ::

UJI Fig.33-6

6 - 24
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

This measurement can be corrected by writing with
the electric pen on the pinion end.
These values should be added or subtracted from 90
mm depending on the + or - sign that precedes the Q5- 66
value. The dimensions that vary from component to o'
component are the A and C values where A is the
distance between the bearing surface of the rear taper o
bearing and the axis of the ring gear and C is the
thickness of the taper bearing (64).
& o
o

o o <
o
o
Apply the following formula to determine the value of o
shim Sh (63) applicare la seguente formula:

SH = 78 + A – B 64

1 - Mount the taper bearing (64) on the differential Fig.34-6

support (66) without inserting any shims then, using
a depth gauge, measure dimension A (distance
between the surface of the support and the bea-
ring Fig.34-6).
3 - Rear the correction value of dimension B written
on the top of the pinion and add or subtract it to or
from 90 mm (Fig.35-6).
4 - Apply the formula, determine the value of shim Sh J+015
(63) and mount the bevel pinion with shim and
bearing.

Example 1:
If the calculated A dimension is 14.1 mm.
If +0.15 is written on the pinion end, B will be 90.15mm
q
SH= 78 + 14.1 – 90.15 = 1.95 mm
Example 2: Fig.35-6
If the calculated A dimension is 13.9 mm.
If – 0.15 is written on the pinion end, B will be 89.85
mm

The following shims are available:

1 mm
0.5 mm
o\
0.3 mm
0.15 mm
0.10 mm
o
0, !
SH= 78 + 13.9 – 89.85 = 2.05 mm °C2)
0
63
0

Fig.36-6
1

6 - 25
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

B - Applying the preload to the two taper bearin-
gs of the pinion support ©

©
1 - After having mounted the bearing and retention 59
ring (61) on the support (66), use tool 80/80a DT m
GL to tighten the ring nut (59) until obtaining a
moment of rotation of 1.4-1.8 Nm (Fig. 38-6) inclu- ra
V)
sive of retention ring resistance (61 Fig.3/4-6). & A.)
The moment of rotation minus the retention ring <m
is 0.8 -1.2 Nm. yj
2 - Using a plastic mallet, bed the pinion on the two
bearings and check the moment of rotation again, \\ "S
varying the extent to which the nut has been tor- ;

qued until the right value has been obtained. i 66

3 - Afer having adjusted, rivet the ring nut lip in the S'
relative cavity on the pinion (X-Y Fig.38-6). Fig.37-6

&=»
,i
1,4 -1,8 Nm z>
v
X

x'Q\
Fig.38-6 v.
ia

28 35
/

jgÿ1 gn° /
0

Sfoj \ 4 ;0

fiir
o o
Wj°
o o
o o
/
'4=
66
66
Fig.39-6 Fig.40-6

6 - 26
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

C - Applying the play between the teeth of the pi-
nion and ring gear and the preload of the two
taper bearings that support the differential 9
0
82 DT GL
3s
1 - Apply Loctite sealer 510 to the support (66) as
shown in Fig.39-6.
2 - Fit the two housings (28 and 35) together with 0
the complete differential assembly on the sup-
port (66 Fig.40-6) and tighten the bolts to a 100-
110 Nm after applying Loctite 270 to them.
0 J
3 - Mount the two ring nuts (33 and 39), tightening
O
them until the differential float has been sensibly
reduced (Fig.41-6).
4 - Mount the comparator on a tooth of the ring gear 35) (65) (28) (39
and, keeping the differential assembly pushed
against the ring nut on the lock side (39), turn Fig.41-6
this latter until obtaining 0.10 - 0.25 mm play
between the pinion and ring gear teeth, measu-
red on three points of the ring gear (Fig.42-6).
5 - Turn the opposite ring nut (33) until the float of 0,10 - 0,25 mm
the differential assembly has been annulled and
a moment of rotation (measured on the pinion) of
1.8-2.2 Nm has been applied to the entire as- “A
V
sembly (pinion - ring gear - differential). The mo- -. a*,
{(
?
ment of rotation of the differential alone should /
be 2.5-3-5Nm. 1/ Gj
'ÿ
/

6 - Once assembly has terminated, check to make v

sure that the play between the pinion and ring
gear teeth is between 0.10 - 0.25 mm and also c>
CT
check the moment of rotation of the differential ©
assembly.
Repeat the above described operations if there
are differences.
7 - River the lip of the ring nuts (33 and 39) into the
Fig.42-6
relative cavity.
8 - Remount all the remaining components and fix
the complete support to the axle housing, remem-
bering that the differential lock must be supplied
from the right. The support could be mounted
upside down by error.
10 - Tighten the bolts that fix the support to a 100 -
110 Nm torque after applying Loctite 242.

6 - 27
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

6) (7) (8) 9) 10. 26 13 15b

Q.
cr )

27 >f x

5
\y
E

3
/

f 23) (22) (21) (20, 18) (17 15a

I
\

h f

. 9 . Fig.43-6

Remounting the side final drive

To obtain optimum operating conditions, the following
adjustments are required when the side final drive is
remounted:

A - Application of the preload for the taper bearings

(1 and 22) that support the wheel hub (3).

B - Application of the preload to the taper bearings

(15a and 15b) for the fork pins.

C - Application of the preload for the taper bearings

(7 and 10) that support the ends of the axle shaft
(9).

6 - 28
*
DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

A - Applying the preload to the taper bearings (1
and 22) that support the wheel hub (3)
22
1 - After having remounted the wheel hub (3) with
the gear (23) and the two bearings (1 and 22),
use a depth gauge to measure dimension "h"
between the surface of the cover (8) and the ou-
ter bearing ring (22 Fig.44-6).
2 - Using a straightedge and depth gauge, always ©
m
c>
1 I
©

measure dimension "g" between the surface of

the fork (20) and the bearing housing (Fig.45-6). 23 ro
o o
3 - Apply the following formula to calculate the value 8
of shim "f " (21).

f = g – h + 0.05
Fig.44-6
4 - Given that the available shims are 0.1 - 0.15 -
0.3 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 1 mm, combine them together
until obtaining the calculated “f ” value.

20
B - Applying the preload to the taper bearings
p
(15a and 15b) for the fork pins o

5?
o
1 - Mount the axle shaft and all the fork components <D
o O
(20) on the axle housing (69), definitively moun-
ting the pin (18), the bearing (15a) and the lower l o
o
cover (17). c
o o

2 - Mount the upper pin (27) with the taper bearing

K
(15b).

c Fig.45-6

"I

\
\
1 I

!
l
I
i l

48 / V
20

'

\ i

\
' i

Fig.46-6

6 - 29
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3 - Applying a force that brings the cone into contact
with the lower bearing housing 815a), using a
depth gauge to measure dimension “y” between
the outer ring of the taper bearing (15b) and the 15b)
surface of the fork (20 Fig.47-6).
W

4 - Again using a depth gauge, measure dimension

“x” on the upper cover, between the surface on ■"A.
which the cover rests on the fork and the bearing
surface of the taper bearing (Fig.48-6).
If ( /ÿj

fih
5 - Apply the following formula to calculate the value
of the shim Sh (13):
an r.
W 20
Sh = x – y + 0.20 17
I Fig.47-6
:
6 - Given that the available shims are 0.1 - 0.15 - 0.3
- 0.5 - 0.7 - 1 mm, combine them together until
the calculated Sh value has been obtained.

7 - Definitively fix the upper cover (26) in place, in-

serting the calculated shims and tightening the
bolts to a 110-125 Nm torque.
26
C - Applying the preload to the taper bearings (7
and 10) that support the ends of the axle shaft
(9).
rs x
iJU
_

1 - Remount final drive D on the fork, remembering

to insert the shim (21) calculated on page 27-6
under the outer ring of the taper bearing (22), to
apply Loctite 510 between the two fork and cover Fig.48-6
bearing surfaces and to tighten the bolts to a 60-
70 Nm (Fig.49-6) torque.

'I 20 (7
(S>

a i 7

N / )
i
'a, j
)
ff
a <
\

i ° Fig.49-6

6 - 30
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

m
o 7 5
0 c
0 'I
i I

0 R

9 Fig.51-6
Fig.50-6

2 - Using a depth gauge, measure dimension ”m” 5 - Given that the available shims are 0.1 - 0.15 - 0.3
between plane R of the axle shaft (9) and the - 0.5 - 0.7 - 1 mm, combine them together until
inner bearing ring (7 Fig.50-6). obtaining the calculated “k” value.

3 - Again using a depth gauge, measure dimension
“n” (Fig.51-6) on the ring nut.
4 - Apply the following formula to calculate the value
of shim “k”:
6 - Mount the calculated shims, tighten the ring nut
(5) to a 105-130 Nm torque, rivet the lip and re-
mount the cover (4), applying max two drops of
Loctite 572 to the thread.

k = m – n – 0.05 mm

7 9
6) (7) (9) (10

t_v A
5
/
/
/
/
k -
} *
/ S
\
7
y— 7 4
/
n
\ \

r
5 n
m
K
Fig.52-6

6 - 31
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

6 - 32
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6A

Demounting, inspecting and remounting the

side final drive of the Sherpa axle
INDICE

Sect.4 Demounting, inspection and remounting.

4.1 Dismantling the final drive. .................................................... 6-34

4.2 Inspection .............................................................................. 6-37
4.3 Remounting the final drive on the axle ................................. 6-37

6 - 33
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

(23;
hA
,11

gsz zzz

•
-4—
(a>- VV-T. \

7 \NS\VL
4

6 >i\\ÿr
/ P
1 HVuuÿTÿ
dJ >0 l .V
V

4 V
■f \\
\

3
!Z
2

1
i>© 19) (18)
Fig.53-6

4-1 - Dismantling the final drive

(14)
1 - Drain the oil from the side final drive;
1
"©
2 - Remove the bolts (14) and take off the cover (1)
complete with spider housing, levering on the two ©
mills (A) in the ring (15 Fig.54/55-6); t
.O
©
3 - Demount the retention ring (4) and take out the
crown wheel (3 Fig.56-6); ©

(15) A
Fig.54-6

6 - 34
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

4 - Using the tool, demount the ring nut (2) after ha-
ving removed the border clinched on the fork (18
Fig.57-6);
0

5 - Remove the ring gear with the aid of a lever (11

Fig.58-6); 0

f0|
0
0/
0

1 11
Fig.55-6

,0
O'

01
<s>
0]
0
0

4 3
Fig.56-6

o
o p
O'
O' o
o o
o, p cO o
o o
o o

2 18 11 15
Fig.57-6 Fig.58-6

6 - 35
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

6 - Remove the ring (15 Fig.59-6);
23
Note: refer to the description in sect. 3-2 on page 6-
18 when removing the two covers (22 and 23), the
relative hinging pins and the fork (18);

7 - After having removed the three retention rings (13) 1

with an 8MA bolt, remove the three pins (9) along C
with the needles, from the cover (12 Fig.60-6);
o'

8 - After the three pins (9) have been removed, the A

three planetaries (10), the center plates (8) with A
their relative roller bearings (7 Fig.61-6) can be *»}
demounted through the central hole.
15 22
Fig.59-6

/ \
s
s
\
i
*

■>

o h
O
l,
s
o 4
o
o o
o 12
o/4~"o
7

Fig.60-6

®@ @
p ■=s.
'
1
./ÿ

8
Q P
o r o
o o
o o
o o o
Fig.61-6

6 - 36
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

4-2 - Inspection
\
o
1 - Clean and check all the components; (•D
2 - Replace all the retention rings and the ring nut (2)
for the fork (18 Fig.63-6); «©'

3 - Check the rolling tracks of all the bearings. Make

sure there is nothing to prevent them from rolling
smoothly;
©. ffl,

o
(ED
4 - Make sure that there are no dents or wear on any
©

■
of the gears. If such damage is discovered, the
©/
©'

relative part must be replaced;

m
© ©5

Fig.62-6
5 - Check the oil through ducts using a jet of com
pressed air, and make sure that there is no clog-
ging;

6 - Replace all defective or worn components.

\

4-3 - Remounting the final drive on

X)

the axle
O

After having cleaned all the components, proceed with

o
o

the remounting operations by complying with the de-

10

mounting instructions in reverse order, along with the

general and particular indications given below:
a - Grease the needle bearings and the housings on
CM
CO

which the retention rings act;

b - Consult the table in the introductory part for any
sealants not indicated in the description;
Fig.63-6
c - Tighten the bolts to the indicated driving torque
values. Refer to the table in the introductory part
for any missing values.

1 - The ring nut (2) must be tightened to a 360-400

CM

Nm torque value. The two taper bearings that

support the final drive need not be adjusted since
the machining tolerances ensure they are perfectly
coupled.

2 - Tighten the bolts (14) to a 75-80 Nm torque va-

kvo
1AO

lue.
;

3 - The axle toe-in, which can be adjusted by means

of the coupling bar (24 Fig.64-6) must be 0 ± 4
mm, checked on a diameter of 800 mm.

Fig.64-6

6 - 37
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

6 - 38
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6A

Special tools

INDEX

Sect. 5 Special tools.............................................................................. 6-40

6 - 39
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Sect. 5 Special tools

Sect. 5 Special tools
08 PNT GL
Plug to insert the outer ring of the taper bearing that supports the pinion (62 Fig.3-6) and the outer ring of the
side final drive taper bearing (7 Fig.1-6);

0
18 CMB GL
Plug to remove the inner ring of the taper bearing that supports the pinion (64 Fig.3-6);

36 DIF GL
0
Plug to insert the wheel hub retention ring (2 Fig.1-6);

o
39 DIF GL
Plug to insert the inner ring of the taper bearing that supports the pinion (64 Fig.3-6);

a
6 - 40
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Special tools
65 DT GL
Plug to insert the axle shaft retention ring (11 Fig.1-6);

0
66 DTI GL
Plug to insert the outer ring of the taper bearing that supports the pinion (64 Fig.3-6);

.0
75 DTI GL
Support to demount and remount the complete differential unit, to use with sleeve 75a DT GL (Fig.23-6);

c
c
k

75a DT GL
Bush to use with tool 75 DTI GL to demount and remount the complete differential assembly (Fig.23-6);

6 - 41
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Special tools
79 DT GL
Plug to insert the inner ring of the taper bearing that supports the axle shaft (10 Fig.1-6);

0
80 DT GL
Wrench to remove the side final drive plug (4 Fig.11-6);

if?

80a DT GL
Plugs to use with tool 80 DT GL for the bevel pinion ring nut (59 Fig.37-6);

81 DT Gl
Bolt to use with tool 93 PTO GL to remove the fork hinge pin (27 Fig.1-6 / 16-6);

6 - 42
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Special tools
82 DT GL
Wrench for adjuster ring nute of differential taper bearings (33-39 Fig.3-6);

83 DT GL
Plug to insert the inner ring of the taper bearing that supports the differential (36 Fig.3-6);

84 DT GL
Plug to insert the outer ring of the taper bearing that supports the wheel hub (1Fig.1-6);

0
93 PTO GL
Fork hinge pin puller (27 Fig.16-6) to use with tool 81 DT GL.

6 - 43
 DANA 4WD FRONT AXLE

Special tools
160 DT GL
Retention ring insertion plug for Sherpa tractors (16 Fig.53-6);

161 DT GL
Plug to insert the inner ring of the taper bearing for the 4WD axle of Sherpa tractors (19 Fig.53-6);

162 DT GL
Plug to insert the outer ring of the taper bearing for Sherpa tractors (19 Fig.53-6);

0
163 DT GL
Wrench for the ring nut of the 4WD axle of Sherpa tractors (2 Fig.53-6)

6 - 44
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

CHAP. 6B

INDEX

Sect.1 General description. .......................................................................... 6-47

1-1 Drawing of assembly and main components ........................ 6-48
1-2 Description of operation and types ....................................... 6-52

Sect.2 Technical specifications. ................................................................... 6-55

Sect.3 Demounting, inspection and remounting . ...................................... 6-57

3.1 Removing the axle from the tractor. ...................................... 6-58
3.2 Dismantling the axle .............................................................. 6-59
3.3 Inspecting the axle ................................................................ 6-64
3.4 Remounting the axle ............................................................. 6-65

Sect.4 Special tools. ...................................................................................... 6-77

6 - 45
6 - 46
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

CHAP. 6B

General description

INDEX

Sect.1 General description.

1-1 Drawing of assembly and main components ........................ 6-48

1-2 Description of operation and types ....................................... 6-52

6 - 47
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Sect.1- General description

1-1 Drawing of assembly

1 6) ( 7) ( 8) ( 9)(10) (14) (11) (12) (1 3) (30)

\
A

i
I 34

-- 3-
,

”7 7
V

B-

Fig.65-6

1 - Wheel hub 13 - Support 25 - Ball bearing

2 - Retention ring 14 - Spring ring 26 - Taper roller bearing
3 - Adjuster shim 15 - Spring ring 27 - Ring bevel gear
4 - Ball bearing 16 - Ball bearing 28 - Screw
5 - Cover 17 - Taper pinion 29 - Spider housing
6 - Spider crown wheel 18 - Retention ring 30 - Lh axle shaft
7 - Articulation 19 - Thrust bearing 31 - Ring nut
8 - Planetary gear 20 - Spring bearing 32 - Spring ring
9 - Support 21 - Ball bearing 33 - Ring bevel gear hub
10 - Ring bevel gear 22 - Taper pinion 34 - Spring ring
11 - Cover 23 - Shaft
12 - Ball bearing 24 - Adjuster shim

6 - 48
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

General description
1-1 Main components

Jj) @ @(30)
14

10
9 34:
23 17) (16
>7

y J
26) (33) (27) (26) (25) (24) j.

I
<ri
r°/ LUS
13
k>/
o

70/
18
b\ 'o;
lol X)
0
0v 19'
(D o,
29 31
4
©
<§>
b.
3) <$)
ja
1
0)
Sv
<§)
\0' iif b)
Ol I <$>
0,
i
<§>
20
1)(2)(5)(3

Fig.66-6

6 - 49
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

General description

1-1 Drawing of assembly

40) (41) (42) (43 48) (49

rt i

dffih
39
m //

tm
:

TTU-H” H f

63
tS/
a 50
62 51
61 -t-e

ET
60 i

59
Jd
58
57 56 55 54) (53

Fig.67-6

6 - 50
*
FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

General description
1-1 Main components

(51) @
9
Sp
mm
3' o

3
0
54) (56) (5' @@)(59)@
-3_ /

D* ;0|
O
o o .o'
0
0
o
0 o.
55
"pit
V Lj
5) S _o,
o

k> 0

o
M
'
<1
<§)
39 - Axle housing 48 - Adjuster shims 57 - Pinion rear taper bearing
40 - Lh differential housing 49 - Differential lock piston 58 - Adjuster shims
41 - Adjuster shim 50 - Rh axle shaft 59 - Pinion front taper bearing
42 - Ball bearing 51 - Lock support 60 - Taper pinion
43 - Differential half-housing 52 - Lock fluid tube 61 - Differential support
44 - Planetary gear 53 - Crown wheel 62 - Screw
45 - Ring bevel gear 54 - Nut 63 - Spider shaft
46 - Differential half-housing 55 - Spacer
47 - Ball bearing 56 - Retention ring
Fig.68-6

6 - 51
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

General description
1-2 Description of operation and types
The 4WD front axle consists of a central casing in
spheroidal cast iron which includes the differential unit 1 2 3
(C), a double bevel reduction (D) and an epicyclic fi- c

nal drive (D). The 4WD can be electrohydraulically or 2*

mechanically engaged.
Electrohydraulic engagement occurs by means of a
button on the operator's right. This button can assu-
me three positions (b Fig.69-6):
m© ,1

1 - 4 RM disengaged
2 - 4 RM engaged
3 - Fast Run engaged
Fig.69-6
Mechanical engagement of the 4WD occurs by me-
ans of a hand lever on the operator's left (1 Fig.70-6)
which shifts the sliding sleeve (4) and meshes the gear
(5) with the shaft that transmits drive to the axle (6). \
When the electrohydraulic clutch is applied, switch (b)
energizes two separate solenoid valves to allow oil at
a pressure of 18 bar to supply either the 4WD clutch
y
(A) or clutch (B) for the Fast Run.
N>

When the solenoid valve of clutch (A) (pos.2 Fig.69-

6) is energized, the oil activates the rh clutch and al-
lows the two front driving wheels to engage. When
the selector switch is set to position 3 (Fast Run) and
the steering angle exceeds 35°, the solenoid valve 1
will be energized automatically. In this case, the oil \
supplies the lh clutch (B), allowing a ratio for the four
driving wheels to be engaged with a 78% advance in
relation to the rear wheels. In these conditions, the o //
steering time and steering radius are considerably 7 //
reduced.

Solenoid valve energizing is automatically interrup-

ted when the steering angle returns below 35°. The
solenoid valve is always automatically re-energized
when the clutch activates (A) and the four driving
wheels engage with a 3% speed advance in relation
to the rear wheels.
•/7 / E
/
3

I Q# J. x ~h
%LSrbi27
j> in
M (6)(4)®S3 Fig.70-6

6 - 52
*
FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

General description

o
o.

**»

O'

j
1

f
Kk 0 1

11
/
I
n il

i
8
r
c
*
t

\ A
0

A
s

V?

f-

(f A
(m

5k

A) Hydraulic clutch for 4 WD

B) Fast Run hydraulic clutch
C) Differential
D) Double bevel reduction and epicyclic reduction
E) 4WD mechanical clutch Fig.71-6

6 - 53
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

6 - 54
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

CHAP. 6B

Technical specifications

INDEX

Sect.2 Technical specifications. ................................................................... 6-56

6 - 55
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Sect.2- Technical specifications

Type of axle In pheroidal cast iron, swinging with central pivot

Type of reductions Central pinion and crown wheel 14/32

Double bevel reduction 20/26 and 18/41, plus final
epicyclic reduction 3.333

Clutch control Mechanical with hand lever or electrohydraulic

Ratio between front and rear axle 1.430 with 4 WD

2.543 with Fast Run

Type of hydraulic clutch
Hydraulic clutch for 4 WD with disks in oil bath,
electrohydraulic clutch and input/output ratio of 1:1
Hydraulic clutch with disks in oil bath for Fast Run
and automatic engagement when steering angle
exceeds 35°.
Input/output ratio 1:1.78

Max. steering angle 52°

Max. axle swing 8°

Minimum turning radius 3054 mm.

6 - 56
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

CHAP. 6B

Demounting, inspection and remounting

INDEX

Sect.3 Demounting, inspection and remounting.

3.1 Removing the axle from the tractor. ...................................... 6-58

3.2 Dismantling the axle .............................................................. 6-59
3.3 Inspecting the axle ................................................................ 6-64
3.4 Remounting the axle ............................................................. 6-65

6 - 57
* FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Sect.3 - Demounting, inspection and remounting

3-1 Removing the axle from the tractor
0
Comply with the following instructions to remove the
0
axle from the tractor:

1 - Disconnect the drive shaft for the 4WD axle after

having allowed the telescopic protection tube to
slide at the rear.
2 - After having slackened off the front tyre rim faste- 1
ning bolts, couple the axle from the two side final ;
i
D/f<
drives and lift it about 15 cm.
(C| It
\
3 - Fit an appropriate support under the engine sump. i

4 - Disconnect the two tubes that supply oil to the ste-

ering cylinder.
5 - Disconnect the tube that supplies oil to the diffe-
rential lock. Fig.72-6
6 - Disconnect the steering sensor wire (for super
turn).
7 - Unscrew the four bolts that fix the front and rear
supports (Fig.72-6).
8 - Place the axle on an appropriate support and fix it
to this (Fig.73-6). .nr n‘i
C~i
{ °r _ o\r A
i
i.
ft?
( (<ÿ <Sr1*12 o
i) \

o o 111
.0
AY \ li .
\
■
/
II ■■

■■

\W
■

T7
'7 \\
/
/ '
\

Fig.73-6

6 - 58
 IRS
VEL GEAR PA
E WITH BE
ounting
T AXL
FRON
n and rem
e c t i o
tin g, insp
Demoun
\
14
♦l
9 l

7 £ O',.
SJ

7H
f ttnj
/
(
/

\ -o
V / / i

l I +
I
p- /
/
ig£
+
p.
/»

+ i

A
r
/j /
t
+
Fig.74-6
+ / /

$ i
v

rv?

ing the axle

3-2 Dism
antl
ce depends on the
type
p
p
IIP))l!
g sequen the axle. \\

e d ismantlin t on ed di-
Note . T h
b e c arried ou eeds with detail p k0
tion to c com-
of opera tio n th e refore pro d removal of the iC
crip ea n \
The des f the left final driv
it
\
in g o
sma n tl
ht final d
rive un it.
the two ®/I/yi* / '/
plete rig and from ip, /

a l p a rt \
e centr
oil from th . unt the n
t
in th e
1-D ra
final dri v e a s se mblies
oved the
ving rem des the hub (1),
b o lt s (2 8), demo r (5),
the cove 1 5 29 27) <® / I
e r h a g bevel Fig.75-6
2- A ft
b ly th a t inclu it (2 9 ) a nd the rin
assem ction un
clic redu
the epicy ); );
Fig.75-6 ry crown wheel (6
gear (27 lane ta
ove the p support (9). sing sin-
3 - Rem th e to p a in s in its hou
o v e m
4 - Rem nit (7) re 4);
ulation u ng ring (1
The artic y th e s p ri
tained b 6 - 59
ce it is re
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

5 - Remove the cover (11) and take out the spring ring £
(14), remembering to hold the articulation in its hou- Ayz © 11
sing (Fig.76-6);
6 - Remove the articulation (7) along with the relative Vi
shaft (23 Fig.77-6).
The ring gear (10) remains in its housing along © ©-i 'I
with the relative bearing (12); c
7 - Demount the support (13) with the relative lh axle
shaft (30 Fig.78-6);
8 - Demount the complete rh reduction unit (A) along 14
iv
with the relative axle shaft (44 Fig.79-6). ( ©
C

I 0
©

<s>

Fig.76-6
c

(
n ■W l

c©
apntri
©
£If
K

T)W ® /
/

Fig.77-6

Jll
2j
_/
\
M p
X -
i.

r
_
i )

0 :L
A
5I l\ÿ
Llfrvhb ra= “vÿÿTrrV /1'
\

\\ ® c
Sr
///
® (30)

/ /

Fig.78-6 Fig.79-6

6 - 60
*
FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

u
32 «+)
is S

/
NI
i

r\
i i

l
y1 V /
\ \
t I
I i
1
\ I
ll. \
I

I *

\_
I \ \

1 *

ttl \
\
\

+
\

\ A.
\ \
l

Si

a
\
s

\ ■

l
i
i

4 3 1 5
Fig.80-6

Dismantling the components of the side final

drive

9 - Unscrew the ring nut (31);

10 - Remove the bearing (25) and, using a lever, take 25
out the ring gear hub (33) along with the ring be-
vel gear (27 Fig.77-6);
11 - Remove the two taper bearings (26 Fig.80-6): this O
can be done by hand; MraiiiKfi O

12 - Using a lever, remove the complete spider hou- 33

o o
o
sing (29) and, after having removed the spring
ring (32), take out the three pins (35) and the three
planetary gears (34 Fig.82-6);
Fig.81-6

6 - 61
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

13 - Remove the hub (1) from the cover (5 Fig.83-6);
14 - After having removed the cover (36) and the
spring ring (20), demount the bearing (21) along
with the bevel pinion (22) and the shaft (23 Fig.84-
6);
15 - After having removed the ring bevel gear (10) with
the bearing (12), demount the spring rings (15 35,
and 34) and the bevel pinion (17) along with 34
the relative bearing (16).

29

0
Fig.82-6

o 18

O 7
\ l <r

\ / £: o

\
o o
5 (§> 'Oi 0}
.o'
,22, io
0| foj
*ÿC5TS>
0
21 lo'
e==r re Vj
o
o sS? ~®- 'p
0
a

39

Fig.83-6 (§> Fig.84-6

@> ® .12) (14 E3

MSP
AVfo
©© ®@
Fig.85-6

6 - 62
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

Removing and dismantling the complete support
of the differential assembly

16 - After having loosened the fixing bolts (62) of the

II

s ; C c CD
differential support and using the two threaded
m t
c
holes on the support as a puller, take out the com-
plete assembly (C); (B®fi
17 - Remove the differential lock support (51) with the
c
spring (65) and the tube that delivers oil to the
lock (66); 0
18 - Remove the two supports for the diff lock bearing S.
t £t
(40) along with the relative adjuster shims (41);
\
19 - With the aid of a universal puller, remove the two
ball bearings (47 and 42) from their housings, be- c
ginning with the one on the lock side.
Use the two rods 58 DTI GL along with a univer- Fig.86-6
sal puller to make it easier to demount the bea-
ring (42);
20 - Remove the differential assembly (43) complete
with ring bevel gear (45);
21 - Unscrew the nut (54) and remove the bevel pi- 65 51
nion (60); x\ 0 ITT 6,
22 - After having fixed the assembly in a vice, remove
the ring bevel gear by lightly tapping it with a pla-
©/
stic mallet. Lastly, remove the ring gear from the fv\ C'
two centering pins (68); 'V c,
© r
r
23 - Demount the upper half-housing (46), the crown *o
wheel (67) and the pin (68) that also holds the l/( o
spider shaft in place (63); L>

24 - Demount the spider shaft (63), the two planetary

gears (44) and the crown wheel (71).
40
I 266
.41) (40

Fig.87-6

@>
kn
<§>
i m
/ \
u
@-
<z: <r
■
Io c
CZr

Fig.88-6 Fig.89-6

6 - 63
%

FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting
3-3 Inspection
1 - Thoroughly clean and check all parts.
2 - Replace all the retention rings and the nut for the
bevel pinion.
■w

3 - Check the rolling tracks of all bearings and make

sure that everything operates correctly.
i

4 - Make sure that there are no dents or signs of wear

Jy

on any of the gears, pinions and bevel ring gears.

\
HZ

If defects are discovered, replace the part in que-

stion or the pair.
d>
(D

5 - Using a jet of compressed air, check the oil ducts

and make sure that they are not clogged.
J

6 - Replace all defective or worn parts

Fig.90-6
\coJ Ken

♦
i

(D
fr~?

°T>
Uoy
Fig.91-6

1
(®) (D

u
,0
Tva

M u\\
(O

o
% k)i

W
(§) (1)

b
m

dHO
(D
d>

d>
d>
O
-*J
Fig.92-6 Fig.93-6
6 - 64
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3.4 Remounting the axle
After having thoroughly cleaned the axle housing and
all its parts, remount the components by complying
with the demounting instructions in reverse and fol-
lowing the general indications and adjustments de-
scribed below:
a - Grease the needle bearings and the retention ring
housings.
b - Refer to the table in the introduction for any sea-
lers not indicated in the description.
c - Tighten the bolts to the indicated torque values
and refer to the table in the introduction for any
values not given in the description.
B -Apply the right preload for the two taper bearings
that support the pinion to obtain the exact moment
of rotation.
C -Eliminate the float of the differential and apply the
correct play between the teeth of the pinion and
those of the ring gear.
A -Adjusting the position of the pinion in relation
to the ring gear.
Foreword: this adjustment must be made whenever
the front taper bearing (59), the bevel gear pair or the
differential support are replaced during a major ove-
rhaul.

Remounting the complete support of the differen-
tial assembly
Three adjustments must be made to the bevel gear
pair in order to achieve optimum operating conditions:
A -Adjust the position of the pinion in relation to the
ring gear to allow the two components to perfectly
mesh.
Adjustment is carried out to determine the value of
shim SH mounted between the ring of the bearing (59)
and the relative stop on the housing to allow the bevel
pinion to set at a distance B from the shaft of the be-
vel ring gear. B is, in fact, the nominal dimension of 84
mm that must be complied with if the pinion is to be
perfectly centered on the ring gear.

57 54

\ i HTscpp-n
/
«r!TI
r
CÿJLÿfA
/ /
53?£
11
\
III
rT ~ iS /
/

-JSPI
B=84 c Sp

A
Fig.94-6

6 - 65
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

This measurement can be corrected by writing with
the electric pen on the pinion end (Fig. 95-6). These
values should be added or subtracted from 84 mm
depending on the ± sign that precedes the value. The
dimensions that vary from component to component
are the A and C values where A is the distance betwe- J+015
en the bearing surface of the rear taper bearing and
the axis of the ring gear and C is the thickness of the
taper bearing (59 Fig.94-6).
To quickly measure the value of shim SH, we have
prepared tool 76 DTI GL which can measure dimen-
sions B1. This means that dimensions A and C need
q
not be measured (Fig.96-6).

Proceed in the following way to measure dimensions

B1: Fig.95-6
a - Mount the two taper bearings (59 and 57) on to
the dummy pinion 76a DTI GL; surface;
b - Tighten the nut (54) until the dummy pinion has a e - Mount the shaft on the two dummy flanges and
moment of rotation of 15-20 Nm; measure dimension B1;
c - Mount the two dummy flanges 76b DTI GL on the f - Now that all the variables are known, determine
differential support; the value of shim SH;
d - Mount the comparator on to shaft 76b DTI GL and
reset it on its outer diameter, resting it on a flat
SP = B1 + 18 + 66 - B

,18 Bl
76b DTI GL

76a DTI GL

riS <-66 -H

B=0
El
XI

76b DTI GL (59) (57) (54)

76c DTI GL

Fig.96-6

6 - 66
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

Example 1

If - 0.20 is written on the pinion end, B will be 84 - 0.20

= 83.8 .
0'
If the measured B1 dimension is 0.9 mm, SH = (0.9
+ 18 + 66) - 83.8 = 1.1 mm
a \ \ (®@©
Example 2
1,2 - 2
Nm
II
«\\ Y
: ,11 iil 01
If + 0.15 is written on the pinion end, B will be 84 +
0.15 = 84.15 mm
If the measured B dimension is 1.1 mm, SP = 1.1 +
18 + 66 - 84.15 = 0.95 mm. i i

The following shims are available: Fig.97-6

0.95 mm
1 mm
1.05 mm
1.1 mm
1.15 mm
1.20 mm
3mm
1.25 mm
1.30 mm
1.35 mm 77 DTI GL
I “mT
1.40 mm

B - Applying the right preload to the two taper

bearings of the pinion support

1 - Mount the bevel pinion on the support with the two

taper bearings and shim SH, taking care to pre-
vent them from being switched around in relation
to the pre-assembly phase described in the pre-
vious operation;
2 - Mount the tighten the nut until a 1.2 - 2 Nm mo-
ment of rotation is obtained.
Using a plastic mallet, bed the pinion on the two
bearings and check the moment of rotation again,
varying the extent to which the nut has been tor-
qued until the right value has been obtained.
3 - Mount the retention ring (56) and the spacer (55),
then rivet the outer ring nut lip in the relative cavity
on the pinion.
C -Eliminating the differential float and applying
the correct play between the teeth of the pi-
nion and those of the ring gear
1
'1 4ÿH*:X
Fig.98-6
differential then mount the support opposed to the
ring gear (A) without shims and the other (B) with
3 mm of shims in between. In these conditions,
the pinion teeth will always have play on the ring
gear teeth even when this latter is moved axially
against the pinion;
2 - Using a comparator, measure the float of the diffe-
rential assembly (X) (Fig. 98-6);
3 - Subtract the measured value from the 3 mm of
shims inserted between the support (B) and the
housing to obtain the total value of shims to be
distributed between supports (A) and (B) and the
housing, to eliminate the float.

1 - Mount the two dummy bearings 1 and 2 on the Total Sh = 3 - X;

6 - 67
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

-
Demounting, inspection and remounting
4 - Maintaining the comparator in the same position
and with the differential pushed right up against dp
the support (B), delicately move the differential as-
sembly in an axial direction towards support (A)
J
while measuring the variation in the rotary play
between the pinion and ring gear teeth. When the ft
rotary play measured on the ring gear teeth is
77 DTI GL
n n 0,15 - 0,30 mm

between 0.15 and 0.30 mm, stop the axial move-

ment and measure the axial movement made by
the differential assembly to obtain the required play
between the teeth, on the comparator. Subtracted
from 3 mm, the measured value gives the value of
the shims (Z) that should be mounted between the
support (B) and the housing (Fig.99-6);

5 - Subtract value (Z) from the total value (Tot. Sh) in Fig.99-6
order to obtain the value of shims (Y) to insert
between the support (A) and the housing;

Example
Shims inserted between the support (B) and the hou-
sing = 3 mm
Measured float (X) = 1.2 mm
Axial movement of the differential from the end of the
support (B) to obtain the play between the pinion/ring
gear teeth (0.15 - 0.25) = 1.5 mm □[
rHb
□L

Total Sh of the shims (Y - Z) = 3 - 1.2 = 1.8 mm

Shims to insert between the support (B) and the hou-
ME am
sing:
Z = 3 - 1.5 = 1.5 mm
Shims to insert between support (A) and the housing:
Y = 1.8 - 1.5 = 0.3 mm
Fig.100-6
6 - Values Y and Z would correspond to the effective
values of the shims to install if the dummy bearin-
gs were the same thickness as the true ball bea-
rings to be mounted. dp
Check whether there are any differences by using
a depth gauge or a comparator to measure the
difference in thickness between the dummy bea-
ring and the true bearing to be mounted, then add
or subtract this difference from values Y and Z: 77 DTI GL
n -
0,15 0,30 mm

V1 - H1 Difference to add to Z if position and to

subtract if negative. Naturally, the same procedure and
the same calculation must also be carried out for shim
Y (Fig.100-6).

#E=?P*.
A
Fig.101-6

6 - 68
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

Example
If value (Z) and 1.1 is V1 - H1 = + 0.1 78 DTI GL 77 DTI GL
The new value of the shims (Z) will be 1.1 + 0.1 = 1.2mm
yr{ f)
If value (Z) is 1.1 and V1 - H1 = - 0.1
The new value of the shims (Z) will be 1.1 - 0.1 =
1mm
C\d\
7 - Now definitively remount the entire differential o
assembly by inserting the calculated shims.
The ring bevel gear must be fixed with a 22-26Nm
driving torque value for the 8.8 bolts mounted on
tractors up to serial number DBKIF 10500 and
with a 33-36Nm driving torque value for the 10.9
\
bolts mounted on tractors from serial number
DBKIF 10501, remembering to also apply Locti- Fig.102-6
te 242 to them.
To remount the two ball bearings more easily, use
a universal puller and tool 78 DTI GL. To keep
the differential in the right position, mount the op-
posed support with dummy bearing 77 DTI GL,
II
© CD
as indicated in Fig.102-6;
8 - After assembly, check to make sure that the play
m
c
between the pinion and ring gear teeth (measu-
red on the ring gear teeth) is between 0.15 and “53 c
0.30 mm (with a maximum tolerated variation of c
0.1 mm). Also make sure that there is no float on
the differential assembly.
Repeat all the operations described above if dif-
V

S.
t D
ferences are detected; \
9 - Remount all the remaining components and fix
the support complete with axle housing. make
c
sure that the cavity that houses the steering cylin-
der is positioned in the top part and the ring be-
Fig.103-6
vel gear on the rh side.
The support could be mounted upside down by
error;
10 - Tighten the support fixing bolts to a 22-26Nm
driving torque value after spreading them with
Loctite 242.

6 - 69
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

6 - 70
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

6 7 27
I

2-2,5 Nm
1
V-— •

5
__ -
\
A

r+ :i
HK
l <
26
fl
fa
[V

22
7-T7'l
4
— 21
Sp2 SpJÿ
C B
0,15/0,25 mm 20
A

Fig.104-6

Remounting the side final drive (Fig.104-6)

To obtain optimum operating conditions, the following B -Adjusting the minimum and maximum play
adjustments are required when the side final drive is between the teeth of the ring bevel gear (27)
remounted: and the lower pinion (22);

A -Adjusting the float of the ring bevel gear as- C -Applying the right preload to the two taper be-
sembly (27); arings (26) that support the ring bevel gear.

6 - 71
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

26; 2 T) @ (27:

a
29;

CD

(4ÿ5 t)
67 DTI GL
Fig.105-6

A- Adjusting the float of the ring bevel gear as-

sembly
67 DTI GL
1 - Mount the ball bearing (4), the support (33) fitted
with the ring gear (27), the taper bearings (26) and B
the ball bearing (25) on the spider housing (29);
2 - Mount this assembly on tool 67 DTI GL and tighten
the nut (T), preloading the two taper bearings until 27
obtaining a rotational moment of 2-2.5 Nm, which
can be measured with tool 74 DTI-GL, positioned
on the ring gear teeth; 29
3 - Measure dimension B with a depth gauge (Fig.105/
106-6);

Fig.106-6

6 - 72
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

KD I
o c

I-
f
o

rÿto (:f
\
l

I
i
c- o o
T
I / l\> \\
€D

+ ;—
T
S* \ CJ fl 1
-
Fig.107-6

4 - Using a depth gauge again, measure dimension C

on the cover (5 Fig.107-6);
5 - Assembly the crown gear (6) and the cover (5) on ® 5
A
the articulation (7) and, using a depth gauge, me-
asure dimension A (Fig.109/110-6);
6 - Now that dimensions A, B, C are available, it will <
be possible to calculate the overall value of shims
Sh1 and Sh2 to eliminate the float of the ring bevel
gear assembly (Fig.110-6): 7
to11 m
*
Sh1 + Sh2 = A - B - C + G

Where G is the float that the assembly must have and

which must be between 0 and 0.2mm
Fig.108-6

Example

If A = 112.3mm B = 91mm C = 19.6mm Play =

0.1mm vj

Sh1 + Sh2 = 112.3 - 91 - 19.6 + 0.1 = 1.8mm

5) (A w
6

or,, 7

Fig.109-6

6 - 73
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

6 7 27
I

2-2,5 Nm -=#3s
-N

5
K JT '

\
■-A
A

1
\±.
>51 r-<

26 !
v-j
22
4
21
Sp2 Sql I
C B
0,15 / 0,25 mm 20
A

Fig.110-6

7 - Now calculate the value of shim Sh1 which deter-

Sp.1
mines the minimum play between the teeth of the
pinion (22) and ring gear (27), and shim Sh2
which determines the maximum play.
To avoid using very costly equipment to measure
the value of the shims in a single operation, we
advise operators to proceed by attempts. This pro-
o 0 '<D
cedure is still rapid since the final drive can be
quickly mounted and demounted without the use o
of tools. sV o
o
8 - Supposing that shims Sh1 and Sh2 are exactly
the same, mount shim Sh1 (in the example above V;
Sh1= Sh2= 0.9 mm) in its housing in articulation
(7 Fig.111-6);

Fig.111-6

6 - 74
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

6 7 27
I

2-2,5 Nm
\\
5
__ -
\
A

r+ :i
HK
l <
26 i
fl
fa
22
71
4
— 21
Sp2 SpJÿ
C B
0,15/0,25 mm 20
A
Fig.112-6

9 - Mount the pinion (22) with its ball bearing (21)

and the retention ring (20) and crown gear (6) on
the articulation (7) and fix it in a vice;
10 - Tighten the ring nut with a 2-2.5 Nm preload,
measuring this with the aid of tool 74 DTI GL and O
O
(L
holding the cover firmly in place (5 Fig.114-6). ,p»
v 7ÿ Sp.2
Bed the taper bearings by lightly tapping at the (

end of the hub with a mallet and then check the L°

O
moment of rotation again;
O

o
o
IHD
o o

Fig.113-6

6 - 75
* FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

11 - Mount the shim Sh2 (Fig. 113-6) between the ball
bearing (4) and the cover (5). V

Form the side final drive assembly again with the 74 DTI GL
hub (1), the cover (5), the crown gear (6), the
articulation (7), all the internal components and 2-2,5 Nm
the two taper bearings (Fig.115-6);
12 - Form the final drive assembly and fix the cover c

(5) in place with the three bolts (Fig.117-6);

13 - Mount tool 69 DTI GL on the bevel pinion (22) 5
and tighten the lug (D) as shown in (Fig.117-6).
'o)
The diameter of the lug is the same as that of the
bevel pinion. The play on the pinion teeth can the-
refore be measured on the actual lug;
O
14 - Using a comparator on the outer diameter of the
lug, measure the play between the teeth in at le-
ast three equidistant points. Fig.114-6
The correct play must be 0.15-0.25 mm.
If the play is less or more than the correct values,
modify shim Sh1, by reducing it if the play is more
or increasing it if the play is less.
lull
Every modification made to shim Sh1 must auto-
matically lead to the modification of shim Sh2 sin-
ce their sum must not change in relation to the
value calculated in point 6.
This test should be repeated until the exact play °/ Sh1
is obtained;
15 - Now definitively re-assembly the side final drive
oN
Z j) <§>
by inserting the calculated shims Sh1 and Sh2 ==0
o
and tightening the ring nut (31) until obtaining a (
2-2.5 Nm moment of rotation on the ring gear V
(Fig.115-6);
16 - Remount all the remaining parts by simply com
plying with the demounting instructions in rever-
se order.
Fig.115-6

I 1
o o
O
0,15-5-0,25 mm
O
Sh1

Mill
r TO 0,15 -r 0,25 mm fe. n
,<B>

69 DTI GL D
Sh2

22) (21) (20)

Fig.116-6 69 DTI GL Fig.117-6

6 - 76
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

CHAP. 6B

Special tools

INDEX

Sect. 4 Special tools.............................................................................. 6-78

6 - 77
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Sect. 4 - Special tools

56 DTI GL
Plug to mount the front bearing of the 4WD overdrive shaft (Fig.7-6)

57 DTI GL
Plug to insert the retention ring of the 4WD shaft support mounted on the gearbox housing (Fig.7-6)

58 DTI GL
Rods to use with a universal puller to demount the ball bearing for the differential support on the side opposite
the lock (Fig.24-6)

59 DTI GL
Plug to insert the retention ring on the differential support for the pinion side (56 Fig.3-6)

6 - 78
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Special tools
60 DTI GL
Plug to mount the taper bearing on the bevel pinion (59 Fig.3-6)

0
61 DTI GL
Plug for the universal puller for ball bearings on the upper/lower bevel gears of the side final drive
(12 Fig.1-6)

62 DTI GL
Plug for the universal puller for the ball bearing of the outer bevel gear of the long axle shaft
(16 Fig.1-6)

63 DTI GL
Plug to insert the ball bearing of the spider housing of the side final drive (4 Fig.1-6)

6 - 79
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Special tools
64 DTI GL
Plug to mount the ball bearing on the spider housing of the epicyclic side final drive
(4 Fig.1-6)

65 DTI GL
Plug to insert the retention ring on the cover of the side final drive (2 Fig.1-6)

0
66 DTI GL
Plug to insert the outer rings of the taper bearings by means of a wheel (26 Fig.1-6)

.0
67 DTI GL
Tool to measure and determine shim thicknesses for the side final drive (Fig.42-6)

6 - 80
 FRONT AXLE AND BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Special tools
69 DTI GL
Tool to check the play between the bevel gear teeth and relative side final drive ring gear. To use with a
comparator (Fig.52 and 53-6)

70 DTI GL
Plug to insert the bush and dust guard on the upper link of the side final drive
(9 Fig.1-6)

$3

71 DTI GL
Plug to mount the bush and dust guard in the front fixing support of the 4WD axle (Fig.4-6)

72 DTI GL
Plug to mount the bush and dust guard in the rear fixing support of the axle (Fig.4-6)

6 - 81
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Special tools
73 DTI GL
Plug to mount the bush and retention ring in the side final drive support (18 Fig.1-6)

V ; ***
1

74 DTI GL
Tool to check the rolling preload of the ring gear and side final drive components by means of a torque wrench
(Fig.50-6)

75 DTI GL
Support to mount and demount the differential assembly (Fig.3-6)

€>
V

76 a DTI GL
Dummy bevel pinion to use with a nut and spacer (Fig.32-6)

6 - 82
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Special tools
76 b DTI GL
Dummy flanges with plug to measure the basic end mounting dimension of the bevel pinion in the center of the
ring gear. Used with a comparator (Fig.32-6)

77 DTI GL
Dummy bearings for the front differential support to eliminate longitudinal play (Fig.34-6)

78 DTI GL
Plug to mount the ball bearings of the differential support. To use with a universal puller (Fig.38-6)

6 - 83
 FRONT AXLE WITH BEVEL GEAR PAIRS

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

6 - 84
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

CHAP. 6C

INDEX

Sect.1 General description. .......................................................................... 6-87

1-1 Drawing of the assembly and main components ..................... 6-88
1-2 Description ............................................................................ 6-90

Sect.2 Technical specifications. ................................................................... 6-91

Sect.3 Demounting, inspection and remounting . ...................................... 6-93

3.1 Removing the axle from the tractor . ..................................... 6-94
3.2 Dismantling the axle .............................................................. 6-95
3.3 Inspecting the axle ................................................................ 6-96
3.4 Remounting the axle ............................................................. 6-96

Sect.4 Special tools. ...................................................................................... 6-99

6 - 85
6 - 86
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

CHAP. 6C

General description

INDEX

Sect.1 General description.

1-1 Drawing of the assembly and main components ..................... 6-88
1-2 Description ............................................................................ 6-90

6 - 87
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

1-1 Drawing of the assembly and main components

12 1 30 I

ZT +— h
I

~~i i ♦
s
I
i i
i 1=4 i

i — -*-r-
i
m mA
n
I
3
4V 15 _U2 i
8

27 25

1
ft
f

22 I
I

v.
18
vz
19
24

20 15

21 23 16

1 - Axle housing 16 - Retention ring

2 - Axle hinge pin 17 - Washer
3 - Front support 18 - Nut
4 - Center plate 19 - Grease nipple
5 - Bush 20 - Hub cover
6 - Bush 21 - Taper bearing
7 - Center plate 22 - Wheel hub
8 - Rear support 23 - Taper bearing
9 - Steering link 24 - Thrust bearing
10 - Steering cylinder 25 - Spline
11 - Bush 26 - Bush
12 - Kingpin link (Lh) 27 - Steering link
13 - Lh articulation 28 - Rh articulation
14 - Kingpin link (Rh) 29 - Coupling bar
15 - Kingpin 30 - Radiator core support
Fig.118-6

6 - 88
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

5 4 3 2
0
o'
o
o
"o
O

7
Q
o
0
8
0=9 0
0
(Cl
6 1

29
m
©

0
0
0
0

14
0
0
0
o 27
0
o\
<fe

o cy,
o,
28
26

25

24

16 23
22
15
21
18
o B
<c 20
Fig.119-6
m
6 - 89
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

1-2 Description
The front axle consists of a central casing hinged to
the radiator core support and with two sliding bars at
the ends to which the two kingpins are welded (15).
They are fixed to the axle casing by two bolts and can
assume four different positions, allowing a wide ran-
ge of track widths to be selected.
The two wheel hubs (22) are mounted on the two kin-
gpins and are supported by two taper bearings (21
and 23).

8
r*~
i
i
i
22 i

18
2Z

9 15
21 23
Fig.120-6

6 - 90
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

CHAP. 6C

General description

INDEX

Sect.2 Technical specifications. ................................................................... 6-92

6 - 91
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

Sect.2 - Technical specifications

Type: Boxed and swinging around the central pivot

N° track widths 4
Min. track width 1320 mm
Max. track width 1620 mm
Track width increases 100 mm

1320
!SLLZ
1420
dT

1520
ZSJgT
as 1620
xcz
Fig.121-6

The front track widths for the 2WD axle can be set in
4 positions with 100 mm increases at a time.
(7.50-16 tyres).

6 - 92
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

CHAP. 6C

Demounting, inspection and remounting

INDEX

Sect.3 Demounting, inspection and remounting

3.1 Removing the axle from the tractor ....................................... 6-94
3.2 Dismantling the axle .............................................................. 6-95
3.3 Inspecting the axle ................................................................ 6-96
3.4 Remounting the axle ............................................................. 6-96

6 - 93
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

Sect.3 - Demounting, inspection and remounting

3-1 Removing the axle from the tractor
30
Comply with the following instructions to remove the
axle from the tractor: \

1 - Disconnect the two steering cylinder control tubes;

2 - Jack up the tractor at the front and insert an ade-

quate support under the engine sump to allow the IT ®\ \®
rf
front wheels to remain raised from the ground;
l
0
3 - Remove the bolts that fix the front (3) and rear (8) «
supports to the radiator core support (30 Fig.122- 8
6); 0 0,
Fig.122-6
4 - Place the axle on an adequate support and fix it to
this (Fig.123-6).

2 3

oO
ft

V
os2-

(W ©
8
l ©
Fig.123-6

0 o
©
O
0
I ©
ft
O
22 18 20 22 O

Fig.124-6 18 Fig.125-6

6 - 94
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

demounting, inspection and remounting

3-2 Dismantling the axle
1 - Remove the two supports (3 and 8), the center
plates and the hinge pin (2 Fig.123-6);
*
2 - Demount the hub cover (20) and, after having re-
moved the split pin, loosen the nut (18 Fig.124/125-6);

3 - Demount the hub (22) along with the relative taper

il!! & a
bearings (21 and 23 Fig.126-6);

4 - After having removed the fixing bolt of the steering

link (27), insert a chisel into the notch to make it
@> @ 22 21
easier to demount the link (27 Fig.127-6);
Fig.126-6
5 - After having removed the key (25), take out the
kingpin (15) along with the relative thrust bearing
(24 Fig.127/128-6);

6 - Take out the two bolts that fix the kingpin link (14)
to the axle housing (1), then take out the link and
set it down (Fig.129-6).

27
15

25
O
Fig.127-6

o
-03—

@>
m o O 0 0 0/0 0
i
I
0

15

© 14

Fig.128-6 Fig.129-6

6 - 95
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3-3 Inspection
1 - Thoroughly clean and check all parts.

2 - Replace all the retention rings and the kingpin nut

(18 Fig. 128-6).

3 - Check the rolling tracks of all bearings and make

sure that everything operates correctly.

4 - Replace all defective or worn parts.

3-4 Remounting the axle

I
sc
t
After having thoroughly cleaned all the axle parts, I
I
remount the components by complying with the de-
mounting instructions in reverse and following the
general indications and adjustments described below:

a - Grease the needle bearings and the retention ring

19 vz
housings.
g.
b - Refer to the table in the introduction for any sea-
lers not indicated in the description.

c - Tighten the bolts to the indicated torque values

and refer to the table in the introduction for any
values not given in the description.
18 22

Fig.128-6

/T A 'N
Hi N
i !i ■

i
!

2ZL I
1 QLIIJ
IO
B

Fig.129-6

6 - 96
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

Demounting, inspection and remounting

Adjustments w
1- Tighten the nut (18) until obtaining a 30 to 50 Nm
moment of rotation for the wheel hub (22).
U
2 - After having obtained the right track width, adjust
the coupling bar (29) until dimension (B) is greater o o
than dimension (A) by 2-5 mm (Fig.129-6);

3 - Having completed the assembly operations, fill the

J
pi y

cavity inside the hub with grease by means of the

grease nipple (19 Fig.128-6).

29
Fig.130-6

6 - 97
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

6 - 98
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

CHAP. 6C

Special tools

INDEX

Sect.4 Special tools. .................................................................................... 6-100

6 - 99
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

Sect.4 - Special tools

150 AR GL
Plug to mount bushes on the kingpin support for 2WD front axles (26 Fig.119-6)

151 AR GL
Plug to mount bushes for the central pivots of 2WD front axles (5-6 Fig.119-6)

152 AR GL
Plug to mount the outer ring of the taper bearing for the 2WD front axle (21 Fig.118-6)

153 AR GL
Plug to mount the thrust bearing on the kingpin of the 2WD front axle (24 Fig.118-6)

e>
6 - 100
 FRONT AXLE WITH TWO DRIVING WHEELS

Special tools
154 AR GL
Plug to mount the retention ring of the 2WD front axle (16 Fig.118-6)

155 AR GL
Plug to mount the outer ring of the taper bearing of the 2WD front axle (23 Fig.118-6)

156 AR GL
Plug to mount the inner ring of the taper bearing of the 2WD front axle (21 Fig.118-6)

157 AR GL
Plug to mount the inner ring of the taper bearing of the 2WD front axle (23 Fig.118-6)

6 - 101
6 - 102
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6D

4WD engagement with hydraulic clutch and

Spring-on
INDEX

Sect.1 General description. ........................................................................ 6-105

1-1 Drawing of the assembly and main components (hydraulic clutch) 6-106
1-2 Description of the operation of the hydraulic clutch ............ 6-107
1-3 Drawing of the assembly and main components (Spring-on unit) ... 6-108
1-4 Description of the operation of the Spring-on unit ........................... 6-109

Sect.2 Technical specifications. ................................................................. 6-111

Sect.3 Demounting, inspection and remounting. ..................................... 6-113

3.1 Removing the hydraulic clutch assembly from the tractor. . 6-114
3.2 Dismantling .......................................................................... 6-116
3.3 Inspection ............................................................................ 6-116
3.4 Remounting the axle ........................................................... 6-117
3.5 Removing the Spring-on unit from the tractor and dismantling it. ... 6-118
3.6 Inspection ............................................................................ 6-121
3.7 Remounting ......................................................................... 6-121

Sect.4 Special tools. .................................................................................... 6-123

6 - 103
6 - 104
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6D

General description

INDEX

Sect.1 General description.

1-1 Drawing of assembly and main components ................................... 6-106

1-2 Description of the operation of the hydraulic clutch ............ 6-107
1-3 Drawing of the assembly and main components (Spring-on unit) ... 6-108
1-4 Description of the operation of the Spring-on unit ........................... 6-109

6 - 105
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

Sect.1 - General description

1-1 Drawing of the assembly and main components

10
l
A
I

c
0 D
B A

5ÿs
7f

A) Hydraulic clutch for 4 WD

B) Fast Run hydraulic clutch
C) Differential
D) Dropped final drive
E) Spring-on

Fig.131-6

6 - 106
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

General description
1-2 Description of the operation of the
hydraulic clutch
1 2 3
The 4WD front axle consists of a central casing in c
spheroidal cast iron which includes the differential unit
(C) and a dropped final drive (D). Electrohydraulic en- 2*
<r.
gagement occurs by means of a selector switch on
the operator's right. This button can assume three po-
sitions (b Fig.132-6):
Iv
m© ■I

1 - 4 RM disengaged
2 - 4 RM engaged
3 - Fast Run engaged
Fig.132-6
When the switch (b) is turned, two separate solenoid
valves are energized and allow oil at a pressure of 18
bar to supply either the 4WD clutch (A) or the Fast
Run clutch (B).

When the solenoid valve of clutch (A) (pos.2 Fig.132-

6) is energized, the oil activates the rh clutch and al-
lows the two front driving wheels to engage. When
the selector switch is set to position 3 (Fast Run) and
the steering angle exceeds 35°, the solenoid valve
will be energized automatically. In this case, the oil
supplies the lh clutch (B), allowing a ratio for the four
driving wheels to be engaged with a 78% advance in
relation to the rear wheels.
In these conditions, the steering time and steering
radius are considerably reduced.

Solenoid valve energizing is automatically interrup-

ted when the steering angle returns below 35°. The
solenoid valve is always automatically re-energized
when the clutch activates (A) and the four driving
wheels engage with a 3% speed advance in relation
to the rear wheels.

6 - 107
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

General description

1-3 Drawing of the assembly and main components (Spring-on unit)

)
L v \
\

a/ / i
J
■pnnf
1 2
w
X
t
5
-A\.
\i
\

/
/

=3*
/
18
«C
M 5W£4ia
/
(~ // /
/ /
T77 /ÿy / / /
tEZ£ - tr
17
"frt :- v \ Vf. z KfT
/ /
t t=]
/ /

\ ' - ?ÿ1 /

\ /K
\
y Y
~i
/ /
T
16
/ nh7-T\
y I 1
r z>
a
rh

✓ //
/
-
jrn
ZM
n /vf

I
/

ti|
x ,-f / /
Kiri
14 "V
/

D D

15) (14) (19) (13 (12) (11) (10 9 8 7) 6 4 3

1 - Safety spacer 11 - 4WD engaging sleeve

2 - 4WD engaging spring 12 - Spring contrasting washer
3 - PTO shaft 13 - Spring ring
4 - PTO engaging sleeve 14 - Splined sleeve
5 - 4WD shaft 15 - Ball bearing
6 - Bush 16 - Spring ring
7 - Ball bearing 17 - 4WD shaft
8 - Thrust washer 18 - Cover
9 - Gear 19 - Spring ring
10 - Oil inlet channel

Fig.133-6

6 - 108
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

General description
1-4 Description of the operation of the
Spring-on unit n 2
|C
o
The “Spring-on” unit is a device that mechanically
engages the four driving wheels. Disengagement is
hydraulically controlled by means of a switch (B).
When the tractor is at a standstill, the four-wheel dri-
ve is permanently engaged, thus guaranteeing a safe
braking system.
When the tractor is operating, switch (B) can be used
to engage (Position 2) or disengage the four-wheel
drive (Position 1).
Each time the braking system is used, the four-wheel d)
drive automatically engages to ensure integral braking
on the four driving wheels. The four-wheel drive is di- Fig.134a-6
sengaged thanks to the oil that reaches the channel
(10) at a pressure of 18 bar, thus axially moving the
engaging sleeve (11) by compressing the spring (2).
Sleeve (11) movement interrupts the drive transmit-
ted by the gear (9), via the frontal toothing, to the shaft
(5), the sleeve (14) and the 4WD shaft (17).
The section of the sleeve (11) is represented in the 2
upper part (X) during the 4WD engaging phase and 9
in the lower part (Y) during the disengaging phase. 5

17
14
11

Fig.134b-6

6 - 109
6 - 110
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6D

Technical specifications

INDEX

Sect.2 Technical specifications. ................................................................. 6-112

6 - 111
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

Sect.2 - Technical specifications

Type of hydraulic clutch Hydraulic clutch for 4WD with oil-cooled plates, electro-hydraulic
engagement and with 1:1 input/output ratio
Hydraulic clutch with oil-cooled plates for Fast Run, automatic engagement
when the steering angle exceeds 35°.
Input/output ratio 1:1.78

Max. steering angle 55°

Max. axle swing 8°

Minimum turning radius 3054 mm.

6 - 112
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6D

Demounting, inspection and remounting

INDEX

Sect.3 Demounting, inspection and remounting.

3.1 Removing the clutch assembly from the tractor. ................. 6-114
3.2 Dismantling .......................................................................... 6-116
3.3 Inspection ............................................................................ 6-116
3.4 Remounting ......................................................................... 6-117
3.5 Removing the Spring-on unit from the tractor and dismantling it. ... 6-118
3.6 Inspection ............................................................................ 6-121
3.7 Remounting ......................................................................... 6-121

6 - 113
* 4 WD FRONT AXLE

Sect.3 - Demounting, inspection and remounting

3.1 Removing the clutch assembly
from the tractor
}) W
c (® 3
To remove the clutch assembly, first split the tractor
between the gearbox and differential housing since
the shaft that supports the two clutch assemblies can ko
only be taken out from the front.
Comply with the following instructions to demount the
u
clutch assembly:

1 - Remove the cab or platform from the tractor (see

sect. 1 chap.2);
2 - Demount and disconnect the parts as described
in chap. 2 in order to prepare for the removal of
the entire differential housing; Fig.135-6
o>
3 - Split the differential housing from the gearbox, re
moving all the outer bolts and the two inner ones.
To access the two internal bolts, first remove the
lower cover mounted on the differential housing
(Fig.135-6). £~~~

To make it easier to split the parts, engage the

creeper in direct drive mode by means of the rela-
tive lever; © &1&J _L

LD 6
y

A
_)

iF35ÿ
Fig.136-6

mil
m (79) 1 KiaBgeks
2

]
39
OTPvÿ “
3
;
£#=ÿ=T- Q
© (g Fig.137-6

6 - 114
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

cn ru- ■
R: |j>- ,80) (79
@ 3) [l[ DB>-J
£
i=uie nnc
a xxi
gzf %
'
L -ocaaa

L:
ipSpa
76

@> TIIW
B
n
Fig.138-6

4 - After having removed the cover (37), take the spring
ring (34) from its housing, taking care to turn it to
move the two holes to the lower part of the casing
(Fig.137-6);
5 - Remove the spring ring (75) and take the hub (77)
from its housing along with the bearing (78 Fig.138-
6);
6 - Using a lever and accessing through the lower
compartment, move the proportional PTO shaft
(79) to the rear along with the sleeve (80 Fig.139-
6);
7 - Using the same lever, force the shaft (76) to project
from the front. To make this operation easier, move
the clutch unit backwards and forwards but hold it
when the shaft has nearly slipped out (Fig.140-6);
8 - Set down the two clutch assemblies (A and B)
(Fig.140-6).

yJt 76 0
0
o
0
80 79 1
c 4 / 6}
o
\\
3
90
/

Fig.139-6 Fig.140-6

6 - 115
*

4 WD FRONT AXLE
Demounting, inspection and assembly
01
oo
01

00
2

00
<0
00

® ® ®©
3)® d

$3
o

o
O

r
I
T

=J
[

rr
>
00

:
:

3-2 Dismantling the clutch
assembly
1- Demount the spring ring (84) after having remo-
ved the gear (87) with the bearing (88) (84);
2- Remove the four steel plates and the three sinte-
red ones of the 4WD clutch (A);
3- Demount the spring ring (82) and the spring (83)
with the aid of tool 68 DT GL and the plug of tool
95 PTO GL;
4- Remove the piston (89) with the aid of compres-
sed air;
5- Remove all the components of the Fast Run clu-
tch (B) in the same order as the 4WD clutch. Re-
member that the plates (85 and 86), the pistons
(89), the spring rings (84 and 82) and the springs
(83) are identical.
6 - 116
T
Fig.141-6
3-3 Inspection
1 - Thoroughly clean and check all parts;
2 - Check the rolling tracks of all bearings and make
sure that everything operates correctly;
3 - Check the friction disks of the hydraulic clutch as-
semblies and replace them if the scoring depth is
too shallow;
4 - Check the steel plates of the hydraulic clutch units
to make sure that there is no scoring, signs of ove-
rheating or warping;
5 - Check the two hydraulic clutch pistons to make
sure there is no marked scoring;
6 - Using a jet of compressed air, check the oil ducts
and make sure they are not clogged;
7 - Replace all defective or worn parts.
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3-4 Remounting
68 DTI GL
After having thoroughly cleaned all the parts, remount the
components by complying with the demounting instructions 83 82
in reverse order and following the indications given below:
1 - Thoroughly lubricate all the parts;
2 - Remount the piston (89), the spring (83) and the spring
L JJ *4
1 Epj
ring (82) with the aid of tool 68 DTI GL and plug 95b
PTO GL (Fig.142/143-6);
3 - Complete the assembly of the clutch pack by first inser-
ting a steel disk (85) so that it touches the piston. Now
mount a friction disk and a steel one alternately. Lastly, 95b PTO GL
fit on the spring ring (84 Fig.144-6);
4 - The clutch assembly for the 4WD version (A) consists <&>
of 4 steel disks and 3 sintered ones while the Fast Run
clutch (B) consists of 3 steel disks and 2 sintered ones; Fig.142-6
5 - Fit the assembled clutch unit on the differential housing
along with all the remaining components.

\0\
83) 84)
<&> K
( 8!

90

VS
Fig.143-6 Fig.144-6

84 84

<§)
86

(89) (90) @ @ Fig.145-6

6 - 117
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3.5 Removing the Spring-on unit from
the tractor and dismantling it
w iiy

3) W
To remove the Spring-on unit, the tractor must first be ■o
split between the gearbox and differential housing sin-
ce the bearing shaft of the two clutch assemblies can <0
--£S>

only be taken out from the front.

Proceed in the following way to demount the clutch
assembly:
1 - Remove the cab or platform from the tractor (see
sect. 1 chap.2);
2 - Demount and disconnect the parts as described
in chap. 2 in order to prepare for the removal of
the entire differential housing;
3 - Split the differential housing from the gearbox, re
Fig.146-6
moving all the outer bolts and the two inner ones.
To access the two internal bolts, first remove the
lower cover mounted on the differential housing
(Fig.146-6).
To make it easier to split the parts, engage the '<£=
creeper in direct drive mode by means of the rela-
tive lever; ro;
© tmi&J
Id
iJ 6 c

»«5
p

A
Fig.147-6

© n
B
§> @ I
1STi!
.V,

3
39
: 3

li
© © <8 Fig.148-6

6 - 118
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

=3

N __
~L/ /
•IJfi
w
----
/

1 2 x 5
18
/ /

(~
Hk-c (Z
W//.>mh o
rw
I

'T'

.1-
pr -C
A. V

/
s\ f

I
\ jasL
- Y
T
■
i /)

16 'n

a /sx n r-y'
' 1ÿ7-T
D f
s
,-'

m
y 3

F°
15) @ @@@ ® @ ® ® © (S £> ©
Fig.149-6

4 - Remove the spring ring (16) and take out the sle-
eve unit (14) along with the ball bearing (15)

,0
0 3
\

,0
\b
0

14 @ a
Fig.150-6

6 - 119
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

A
Demounting, inspection and remounting
5 - After having demounted the lower cover with the
\
9
aid of a lever, remove the complete Spring-on as-
sembly and set it down along with the gear (9) il
n(
v

«
and thrust plate (8 Fig.151/152/153-6);

IT
-—
6 - Demount the spring ring (19), the safety spacer
S

(1) and mount the unit on tool (164 DT GL) in or-

D
i

der to compress the sproing (2) and remove the

retention ring (13 Fig.154-6).

Take great care both when demounting the

first spring ring (19) and when placing the
assembly on the tool since the spring (2) is

<*
highly compressed and maintained in this condition
by the spring ring (13). Use adequate protections and
operate with extreme care. Fig.151-6
\
I
r
ef"
/

;[4j>
-V

3
jju
1

w- ii
:

I "
4

I.

1 2 9
:J3— O

Fig.152-6
g)

/R
©

2
(g

a>
00

Fig.153-6 Fig.154-6

6 - 120
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3-6 Inspection
5 13
1 - Thoroughly clean and check all parts;

2 - Using a jet of compressed air, check the oil ducts

and make sure that they are not clogged;
ft J±.
J
3 - Replace all defective or worn parts.

4 I
3-7 Remounting
i
After having thoroughly cleaned all the parts, remount
the components by complying with the demounting
2
I I o11

instructions in reverse order. Take care to mount the

spring (2) with the aid of the tool (164 DT GL ), taking
n 3
great care and complying with the recommendations
given for the disassembly phase.
164 DT GL

Fig.155-6

1 O
2 11 9

5
Fig.156-6

6 - 121
 4WD FRONT AXLE

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

6 - 122
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

CHAP. 6D

Special tools

INDEX

Sect. 4 Special tools............................................................................6-124

6 - 123
 4 WD FRONT AXLE

Sect. 4 - Special tools

164 DT GL
Compressor to demount and remount the Spring-on spring (Fig.155-6)

165 DT GL
Plug to mount the bush for the Spring-on shaft (6 Fig.149-6)

166 DT GL
Puller for the Spring-on shaft bush (6 Fig.149-6)

@5 0

6 - 124
 POWER TAKE-OFF

CHAP. 7

INDEX

Sect. 1 General description.................................................................... 7-3

1-1 Drawing of the assembly and components .................... 7-4
1-2 Description of operation and types ................................ 7-6

Sect. 2 Technical specifications. ........................................................... 7-9

Sect. 3 Demounting, inspection and remounting.............................. 7-11

3.1 Access to the PTO unit ................................................. 7-12
3.2 Removal from the tractor .............................................. 7-12
3.3 Dismantling ................................................................... 7-17
3.4 Inspection ...................................................................... 7-17
3.5 Remounting ................................................................... 7-18

Sect. 4 Special tools.............................................................................. 7-21

7-1
POWER TAKE-OFF

7-2
 POWER TAKE-OFF

CHAP. 7

General description

INDEX

Sect. 1 General description.

1-1 Drawing of the assembly and components .................... 7-4

1-2 Description of operation and types ................................ 7-6

7-3
*
POWER TAKE-OFF

Sect.1 - General description

1.1 Drawing of assembly

2 9) (31) (32) (19) (30) (20) (21 18 (17) 16) (15

40
•? UJ
K 13
=====
12
rmsy o,
11A)
41
iiv
] -;5|!!|I<;-f- -tJHJIlllri
■

E? 1 '>ÿ 10
24 1
(11B 22
m
23
'ÿ!!!•!

MM Si 33
V

f mr Pi
37
28 36

38 35

<§>
r
i
%
1- PTO shaft 15 - PTO brake piston 29 - Gear
2- Sleeve 16 - PTO brake disk 30 - Upper shaft
3- Proportional PTO gear 17 - Clutch disks 31 - Ring nut
4- Proportional speed input shaft 18 - Hydraulic clutch engaging piston 32 - Gear
5- Prop. PTO engaging sleeve 19 - 1000 rpm speed gear 33 - Cover
6- Proportional PTO shaft 20 - 540 eco speed gear 34 - Spring ring
7- Ball bearing 21 - Hydraulic clutch housing 35 - Spring ring
8- Spring ring 22 - PTO output shaft 36 - Inner roller bearing ring
9- Ball bearing 23 - 540 eco speed gear 37 - Cover
10 - PTO output shaft guard 24 - 1000 rpm speed gear 38 - Ring nut
11A-B - Retention rings 25 - Spring ring 39 - Screw
12 - PTO hydraulic clutch spring 26 - Roller bearing 40 - Thrust bearing
13 - Oil inlet union 27 - Reverse speed gear 41 - Ball bearing
14 - Cover 28 - Shaft
Fig.1-7

7-4
*
POWER TAKE-OFF

General description
1.1 Main components

1
1

2 40
41
20 X

30
m
19
S)(32) 16
15 14,
o
13
o')
IC'
0
o,
12
21 18 10
17
o
(11A
11B,
22 .33 34

8
a 6
7

36!
$ 5
35
24) (23
9
25 26
28

a 27,

Fig.2-7

7-5
 POWER TAKE-OFF
General description
1.2 Description of operation and
types
The power-take-off mounted on Massey Ferguson
tractors can either be equipped with an electro-hydrau-
lically engaged multi-disc wet clutch or a mechanical-
ly engaged mechanical type.
Hydraulic PTO
The PTO assembly is located in the rear part of the
tractor with a transmission system on three shafts.
The hydraulic clutch (D) is installed at the end of the
tractor and receives oil from the low pressure circuit.
Before reaching the clutch, the oil passes through a
hydraulic damper that modulates the pressure so that
engagement is always gradual.
When the clutch is disengaged, the brake of the PTO
shaft will always be activated thanks to oil delivered
by the low pressure circuit.
J!
1)C2)(3
//<:
7-6
A button on the console to the operator's right (Fig. 3-
7) and three levers on the left (Fig. 4-7) allow the fun-
ctions of the PTO to be activated.
The button of Fig. 3-7 has three positions:
pos.0 - PTO disengaged and brake engaged
pos.1 - PTO engaged
pos.2 - PTO automatically disengaged when the cen-
tral clutch is disengaged or when the hydraulic lift is
raised.
This function is available when the relative switch on
the electronic panel is in the ON position.
The three levers depicted in Fig. (Fig. 4-7) have the
following functions:
Lever1 - 540 or 540 reverse speed selection
Lever2 - 540 Eco or 1000 speed selection
Lever3 - Proportional speed selection
0 J
Fig.3-7
Fig.4-7
 POWER TAKE-OFF

General description

A 1000 B
540 ECO

500 D
REV r
G c' /

D
\
0
\
c

//© 0
E
0

0
\ ©

A - Engine drive input shaft

B - 1000 / 540 ECO speed selector
C - PTO upper shaft
D - Hydraulic clutch
E - PTO output shaft
F - 540 / Reverse speed selector
G - Proportional speed selector

Fig.5-7

7-7
*
POWER TAKE-OFF

General description

1 10) (11 12 13 14
540— r~ 750
'

2 15
35

■e
S ±. ZB
_ /
16

d> 17) (22) (20,

-
8 r -SI
-5- If a
$ - j 18
! TTH"
rurv _i El
19

!
t yy
t

4(5 6 7 21

1- Shaft 9- Ball bearing 17 - Retention ring

2- Sleeve 10 - Spring ring 18 - Ball bearing
3- Prop. speed gear 11 - Roller bearing 19 - Sensor
4- Drive shaft 12 - Ball bearing 20 - Protection
5- Prop. speed engaging sleeve 13 - Cover 21 - Cover
6- Prop. speed shaft 14 - 540 speed gear 22 - PTO output shaft
7- Ball bearing 15 - 750 speed gear
8- Spring ring 16 - 540 / 750 engaging sleeve
Fig.6-7

Mechanical power take-off

The mechanical PTO is controlled by levers located
on the operator's left and can be equipped with 540 /
1000 RPM or 540 / 750 RPM speed ratings.
The speeds are obtained with the following ratios:

speed 540 RPM 16/70

speed 750 RPM 21/68
speed 1000 RPM 25/62

The proportional PTO is driven by the 4 WD clutch

(4). This power is transmitted to the gear (3) and, con-
sequently, to the PTO output shaft (22 Fig. 6-7) by
means of the sleeve (5) and shaft (6).

7-8
 POWER TAKE-OFF

CHAP. 7

Technical specifications

INDEX

Sect.2 Technical specifications. ......................................................... 7-10

7-9
 POWER TAKE-OFF

General description
Sect.2 Technical specifications

Type: Independent

Type of clutch: Mechanical with two speeds

540/750 or 540/1000 RPM

Electro-hydraulic with 2 or 4 speeds

engaged by hydraulic clutch
and with electro-hydraulic control

PTO output shaft In compliance with standard Asae 13/8

(34.9 mm) with 6 splines

PTO speed - 540 RPM with 2418 RPM engine rate

- 750 RPM with 1697 RPM engine rate (optional).
- 1000 RPM with 2385 RPM engine rate (optional instead
of 750 RPM).
- PTO proportional to ground speed: 9.888 PTO shaft
turns for each wheel turn.
- 540 RPM reversing PTO with 2570 RPM engine rate
(on request).

7 - 10
 POWER TAKE-OFF

CHAP. 7

Demounting, inspection and remounting

INDEX

Sect. 3 demounting, inspection and remounting

3.1 Access to the PTO unit ................................................. 7-12

3.2 Removal from the tractor .............................................. 7-12
3.3 Dismantling ................................................................... 7-17
3.4 Inspection ...................................................................... 7-17
3.5 Remounting ................................................................... 7-18

7 - 11
* POWER TAKE-OFF

Sect.3 - Demounting, inspection and remounting

3.1 Access to the PTO unit
The cab need not be demounted in order to access
the PTO unit, but remove the lift unit as described in
chap.8 on page 87.
o\
ZTo
3.2 Removal from the tractor s
<s
_
n ru
f

A - Hydraulic PTO

1 - Demount the PTO clutch cover (Fig.8-7).

The brake plate will remain in the cover along
with the three pistons.
Fig.7-7
2 - Remove the clutch assembly (21) along with the
shaft (18 Fig.9-7).

1 IH
o
c ' c
©'
~---ji
y fW
D1
0 0

0
c

Cl
Y_ Fig.8-7

0 6
o

. 1- 0 4
5) ®,
o
f
L fo v>
=ÿL H o ©
@ ®
o £ p
0
Fig.9-7

7 - 12
*
POWER TAKE-OFF

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3 -Demount the rod (33) and the fork (34) of the up-
per and central shaft (1000/540eco) (Fig.11-7). 31 I32) 30
4 - Demount the rod and fork of the side shaft (540/ M
reverse).
The rod should to be moved to the front and re- ro,
mains housed in the casing. To demount it, re-
move the plug that shuts the hole on the casing \
and take it out from the rear. crp
i ■Mi

5 - Unscrew and remove the ring nut (31 Fig.11-7).

6 - Demount the shaft (30) along with the gears

mounted on it (Fig.12-7).

7 - Unscrew the ring nut (38) and remove the spring Fig.10-7
ring (35 Fig.13/14-7).

1 to
'34
\<=>
cs
0
11
QJ S

(f o
o
0/
31

/>
c
o
0 /
30,
32 0 tf
o 4 Fig.11-7 Fig.12-7
/

o
Q
PP
n in

—
\J \J
-—.-y-i

</
)

i
o
o
( X 'l £
l- o
38, 2s; 36 25) @ (35)
Fig.13-7 Fig.14-7
j_ A M.
7 - 13
*
POWER TAKE-OFF

Demounting, inspection and remounting

8 - Using an aluminium or bronze punch, push the
shaft (28) inwards a few millimeters (Fig.15-7).

9 - Lever on the front part of the shaft (28) and push

it back so that the inner ring (36) can be taken Q
out with a universal puller (Fig.16-7).
0
10 - Remove the outer bearing ring (26) from its seat
in the housing (Fig.17-7). 6S)
@
0
11 - Remove the sping ring (25) from its seat in the
housing (fig.18-7).
0
12 - Take out the shaft (28) along with all the gears
mounted on it (Fig.19-7). 0
Fig.15-7
n

)
i O 26 O

% 0
/0
a o
0

o
C § t?
0 0.
0 o
0
0
Vf k
o
0 1J
X Fig.16-7 o Fig.17-7

TT
Cl
0
V-
5#
m 0

o o
o
(j

25 0 a It ,28) Z'
o
c
© £
SK i)
)
0
eg
V X' 6
o
A o

o o ffeX]
Fig.18-7 Fig.19-7
"
7 - 14
 POWER TAKE-OFF

Demounting, inspection and remounting

3 4 5 6 (8 9) (24) (23) (22

\
l\l
E! a
a
i 5!
SE
3F
3
39
sgfp
37 7) 34
o ]

Fig.20-7

13 - Remove the spring ring (8) mounted on the shaft

(22 Fig. 20-7).
c->

14 - Remove the shaft (22 Fig. 21-7) using tool 94 PTO Q

22) 94PT0GL
GL. 0 0
0
15 - After having removed the cover (39), demount 0
the spring ring (34), remembering to turn it to set p
the two meshing holes towards the lower part of \ t 0
the housing. )
0
'0/7 o\
16 - Remove the lower cover (37) and, levering on the u_\
sleeve (5), demount the shaft (6) allowing it to n
slip out from the rear (Fig.20-7). Fig.21a-7

(23) ,22; 94 PTO GL

x r

7
y

y v
Fig.21b-7

7 - 15
* POWER TAKE-OFF

Demounting, inspection and remounting

1 10) 11 @ 13) 14
540 750
■€E
2 15

W7 V
0EL H
32TV
1. 16

0
8 __ -m- 1
0‘
w
t
0"
f
17) (22) (20

0 18
19
0 m ;-€TÿZ:
010T0 H-

4 5 6 7 21
Fig.22-7

B - Mechanical PTO
1 - After having removed the cover (13), take the
upper shaft (1 Fig. 22-7) out from the rear with
the aid of a lever.

2 - Remove the spring ring (8) and the gear (3) moun-
ted on the output shaft (22).

3 - Remove the shaft (22) with the aid of tool 94 PTO

GL.

4 - Remove the proportional PTO shaft (6) as de-

scribed in point 16 on page 7-15.

7 - 16
 POWER TAKE-OFF

Demounting, inspection and remounting

21) (18) (45) (44) (43) (16) (15

A-
Q ■©
X<&>
u XT
B— Tf
rf X
n n
=518
••••
api
1
(50)

(48)

=3 IN
12
- @ @) (3) (?§) Fig.23-7

3.3 - Dismantling the clutch

2 - Replace all the retention rings.
1 - Demount the steel brake disk (43 Fig. 23-7) after
having removed the spring ring (48) and taken 3 - Check the friction disks and replace them if the
out the shaft (1). depth of the grooving is too shallow.

2 - Remove the spring ring (44) and demount the
steel disk (45 Fig.24-7) and the five sintered disks
(17a) along with the five steel disks (17b).
3 - Demount the spring ring (42) and the spring (12
Fig. 25/26-7) with the aid of tool 95 PTO GL.
4 - Push the piston from the housing (21) with the
aid of compressed air.
3.4 Inspection
1 - Clean and check all the components.
4 - Make sure that there is no scoring, signs of strong
overheating or deformation on the steel disks.
5 - Make sure that there is no marked scoring on the
piston (18) and housing (21).
6 - Check the rolling tracks of the bearings and that
there are no irregularities during rotation.
7 - Using a jet of compressed air, check the oil ducts
and make sure that there are no obstructions.
8 - Replace all defective or worn components.

7 - 17
 POWER TAKE-OFF
Demounting, inspection and remounting
3.5 Remounting
v°\
After having thoroughly cleaned all components, re-
mount the parts by complying with the demounting
instructions in reverse, along with the following indi-
cations:
tglgr
1 - Thoroughly lubricate all parts.
<@>
2 - Remount the piston (18), the spring (12) and the
spring ring (42) using tool 95 PTO GL.
3 - Finish assembling the clutch pack by first inser-
ting a steel disk (17b) right on to the piston, then /
alternately mount a friction disk and one in steel.
Fig.24-7
10 Old Q6
2*) SI
ts
a
Uei
rf8
/
Fig.25-7 Fig.26-7
81- IZ !qzk (>zi) (fr«
o IP
I
21
S3
L
Fig.27-7

©
7 - 18
 i
*

POWER TAKE-OFF
Demounting, inspection and remounting
5>
)

U1
.pVto

=i
CO
o

CD
CO
co
to

CD

d)(§)©(£
HL
I

§J©H7
0 p [
to

mr

-J.

OJ
“Tfl hi r,
8 trfN

coy yco / Uo,

/cop /to
I 111lilt

',
Ol

CD
O)

Oi
ro

CO
CO

V51
00

/NOÿ /C0ÿ /CO

to

:
00,' V

vÿy
CO

v3/ vOy
CO
to

4 - Mount the proportional speed shaft (6) after ha-
ving inserted the engaging sleeve (5).
5 - Mount the shaft (22) with the relative gears (23
and 24).
To facilitate shaft assembly, use tool 96 PTO GL
to retain ball bearing (9) in its housing, thus
making the shaft easier to insert (22 Fig.29-7).
6 - Mount the 1000/540 Eco speed activating fork
and rod.
7 - Mount the 540/Rev. (28) speed shaft along with
7 - 19
Po'l
Fig.28-7
all its components, torquing the ring nut (38) to
215-250 Nm.
Use tool 86 PTO GL (Fig. 30-7) to mount the in-
ner ring (35).
8 - Mount the upper shaft (30), inserting all its com-
ponents and torquing the ring nut (31) to 215-
250 Nm.
9 - After having mounted the shaft (1) on to the clu-
tch pack, fit the assembly into its housing, taking
care to position the thrust bearing (40) in its re-
taining pin.
 POWER TAKE-OFF
Demounting, inspection and remounting
19 Old 96
y4>m
RttS
J v zz
xx
o -Is
n-Zr:
m
4
PZ
_
“ÿ1
Fig.29-7
10 - Remount the 1000/540 Eco speed engaging fork. 82 9E se 19 Old 98
11 - Remount the cap of the PTO (14), making sure
that the three brake plungers (15) and the sup-
porting plate (50 Fig. 24-7) have been well hou-
sed and lubricated with grease.
wg*m
12 - After assembly, make sure that the various PTO
speeds correctly engage and that each shaft in
question turns perfectly.
Check and replace any defective components if
this is not the case.
Fig.30-7
7 - 20
 POWER TAKE-OFF

CHAP. 7

Special tools

INDEX

Sect. 4 Special tools.............................................................................. 7-22

7 - 21
 POWER TAKE-OFF

Sect.4 - Special tools

Special tools

86 PTO GL
Tool to insert the inner ring of the parallel roller bearing supporting the 540/Rev speed shaft (part 35 Fig.1-7)

87 PTO GL
Plug to mount the ball bearing for the hydraulic clutch hub (part 41 Fig.1-7)

88 PTO GL
Wrench for the 540/Rev speed shaft (part 38 Fig.1-7)

89 PTO GL
Plug to insert the front retention ring (part 11b Fig. 1-7) mounted on the PTO housing (part 14 Fig.1-7)

7 - 22
 POWER TAKE-OFF

Special tools
Special tools

90 PTO GL
Plug to insert the rear retention ring (part. 11a Fig. 1-7) mounted on the PTO housing (part 14 Fig.1-7)

91 PTO GL
Block to use with the universal puller (part 41 Fig. 1-7)

93 PTO GL
Plug to insert the piston (part 18 Fig. 1-7) on the PTO clutch housing (21 Fig.23-7)

94 PTO GL
Puller for the PTO output shaft (part 22 Fig.1-7)

7 - 23
 POWER TAKE-OFF

Special tools
Special tools

95 e 95b PTO GL
Puller and inserter for the clutch pack spring (part 12 Fig. 1-7)

96 PTO GL
Holding fork (part 9 Fig.1-7) for the ball bearing that supports the PTO output shaft (part 22 Fig.1-7)

7 - 24
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

INDEX

Sect.1 General description.................................................................... 8-3

Sect.2 Technical specifications. ......................................................... 8-13

Sect.3 Main components of the low pressure circuit. ..................... 8-17

A - Hydraulic pump ............................................................ 8-17
B - Filters ........................................................................... 8-21
C - Power steering ............................................................. 8-23
D - Hydraulic power pack .................................................. 8-37
D1 - Comatrol hydraulic power pack ................................... 8-38
D2 - Oleodinamica Slanzi hydraulic power pack ................ 8-52
E - PTO clutch modulating governor valve ....................... 8-55
F - Front and rear diff lock fluid supply ............................. 8-57
G - PTO and PTO brake fluid supply ................................. 8-59
H - 4 WD and Fast Run fluid supply .................................. 8-61
I - Spring-on fluid supply .................................................. 8-63
L - Hydraulic Hi-Lo fluid supply ......................................... 8-65

Sect.4 Main components of the high pressure circuit. ................... 8-67

A - Trailer brake control valve. ............................................ 8-68
B - Auxiliary control valves .................................................. 8-83
C - Hydraulic mechanical power lift .................................... 8-95

Sect. 5 Checking the operating pressure values.............................8-135

8-1
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

8-2
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

General description

INDEX

Sect.1 General description.

1.1 - General outline of the circuit ................................................. 8-5

1.2 - Description of the low pressure circuit .................................. 8-7
1.3 - Description of the high pressure circuit ................................ 8-9
1.4 - Description of the cooling and lubricating circuit.............................. 8-10

8-3
 8-4

Fig.1-8

p J I— t —1 i

C1
4-- 4-
1
if' I-1J

5
I

7
T

2B
2A
A

o<3 o
3
£ t-* 1
£
4

l
V.
o
G

i.

6
I

— [-
1 :
Oip
8A

! I
f i !
1

4- 3~I
1
So r
11

E-
o
F

:
B

I
12

I
-t-
jf or iill
C2

4
~H— i i
8B

O-ÿ
10

m r" m
AR
ng
s go 0
13

15
14

3-1 TT1
D
E

Bp

General hydraulic circuit

Sect.1 - General description

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

General description
1.1 - General outline
of the circuit
The hydraulic circuit of Massey Ferguson tractors con-
sists of two distinct circuits fed by a two-stage gear
pump (2A/2B fig 1-8) fixed to the engine valve system
which supplies it with rotational drive.
The two pump stages are supplied by a common sour-
ce from whence the oil is drawn through a 40 micron
filtre (1 fig.1-8) installed inside the gearbox housing
which acts as a reservoir for the hydraulic oil.
The two pump stages, of different sections, have dif-
ferent flow rates with two separate tubes for high and
low flow rates.
The following diagram depicts all the components
supplied by the hydraulic circuit. The closed centre
low pressure circuit (2A) is shown separate from the
open centre high pressure one (2B).

Hydraulic circuit

1 - FILTER ON THE INTAKE

2A - LOW PRESSURE PUMP 2 - DOUBLE GEAR PUMP 2B - HIGH PRESSURE PUMP MAX.
MAX. FLOW RATE AT MAX. MOUNTED ON THE LH SIDE FLOW RATE AT MAX. ENGINE
ENGINE RPM RATE 27.3 l/min. OF THE ENGINE RPM RATE 35 l/min.

3 - FILTER ON DELIVERY

HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS SUPPLIED

HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS SUPPLIED

9 - TRAILER BRAKE VALVE

4 - POWER STEERING CIRCUIT
max. operating pressure 155 ± 5 bar 10 - MAX 3 AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVES
MAX. OPERATING PRESSURE 180 bar
5 - STEERING CYLINDER "SALAMI" convertible SA/DA valves,
standard supply
6 - HYDRAULIC POWER PACK (Low Pressure Circuit) With automatic release and float position
for hydraulic engines
A - FAST-RUN HYDRAULIC CLUTCH
B - 4 WD HYDRAULIC CLUTCH 11 - POWER LIFT CONTROL VALVE
C - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK (FRONT C1 - REAR C2) Max. operating pressure 180 bar
D - HYDRAULIC PTO
E - HYDRAULIC PTO BRAKE 12 - LIFTING CYLINDER
F - PTO CLUTCH MODULATING VALVE
G - HYDRAULIC HI-LO 13 - LH EXTERNAL CYLINDER

7 - OIL COOLING CIRCUIT 14 - RH EXTERNAL CYLINDER

R - 5 bar COOLING CIRCUIT VALVE
15 - RH HYDRAULIC LEVELLING
8 - GEARBOX LUBRICATING VALVE (1.4 BAR) VALVE SYSTEM
8A - GEARBOX LUBRICATION (OPTIONAL)
8B - REVERSING PTO LUBRICATION

8-5
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Low pressure circuit

Low pressure circuit

IÿI

D
E
3-i rE-

14
0
15

C£

13
9
(•)

D V TXTCTW M>
j

10

8B
ill. Jo iAi T ►

C2
-I-
0B
12
4i A*
l I 4
B

Ol
F

oB k
A

11

J
L
■i
r
1

!l-ni
i E
I
1
4. 4
rjo I
8A

J
1
O t
6

7* i
5 i
4

H
O 33
3

JjTL
2A

6
2B

?
1
7

+— gtrriÿr'tl
5

n j
i
t
fiir -r
C1

i j
\F= i— + r L1i
Fig. 2-8

8-6
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Low pressure circuit

1.2 - Description of the low
pressure circuit
The transmission oil is intaken through a single tube
from the internal stage of the pump (2A Fig. 2/3-8)
and is conveyed to the Orbitrol unit (4) as priority sup-
ply after having passed through the filtre (3).
Having been supplied, the Orbitrol unit can then ei-
ther use the oil to supply the steering cylinder (5),
under the control of the maximum pressure valve (155
bar), or direct it towards the outlet, as power pack
supply line (6). The power pack (6) is always kept sup-
plied since oil from the pump always reaches the ou-
tlet of the Orbitrol unit, either because it has not been
used or because it is in excess. The closed centre
circuit is actuated within the power pack (6), where
the oil is constantly maintained at a low pressure of
18 bar, controlled by the calibrating valve (V).
Thus pressurized, the circuit guarantees the correct
pressure required to activate the users, i.e.:
- front and rear differential locks (C1-C2).
- PTO engaging clutch (D).
- PTO brake (E).
- DTi engaging clutch (B).
- STr engaging clutch (A).
- hydraulic Hi-Lo
Each user can be activated by the separate electro-
hydraulic controls installed both individually and join-
tly inside the cab.
The oil outlet by the users can flow straight back to
the gearbox housing by means of the relative tube
(T1).
The oil outlet by the calibrating valve (18 bar) flows
into a cooling circuit controlled by a 5 bar valve (R)
and, after the radiator (7), proceeds towards the tran-
smission lubricating circuit (8a-8b-8c), controlled by
a valve with a 1.5 bar setting.
The 18 bar (V) and 5 bar (R) valves are housed in the
power pack while the 1.5 bar valve is housed in a block
(8) outside the power pack.

Low pressure circuit (with Comatrol power pack)

©. rL
©
1,5 ba r fe }
T \
P
© 1ÿ?

T
L T T
J 'vul CDV
\\v©J
» ©J @
'rÿ5' fi— ®
© PQaÿfg)
u,
(cz
© M
a 5
© v~=~ -
Hg ©
ig (Bjif

■ T7

H-1! Fig. 3-8

M1 J

8-7
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

High pressure circuit

High pressure circuit

fÿl fÿl

D
E
l I-E

14
0
15

oj

13
9
J ,
l
j4 m
m_x
--
—1-1-ÿ'

10
—ON 1 / l

8B
!!
! 4
ioUi
C2
r
+

12
rl*
4
03
B

4
-o
O —
F

4 ■o
A

11

I
4 4—4 5
t
1

i
i
Li ci
I
zÿn
o-
o-
4 4r -ee I
rfio -V
8A

'ÿ

O
O

M J
7ÿ'i
6

eat
5r I
4

£ H 5
-6
-6-e 4

-e-4 rt
-t H
a-J
3

4 4
V
2A

O
2B

?
i
f
7

5$
5

n =L ni
t -r
C1

i I
\F= i— +— r L1i
Fig. 4-8

8-8
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

High pressure circuit

1.3 - Description of the high
pressure circuit
After having taken in the filtered oil from the transmis-
sion, the pump (2B) delivers it in absolute priority mode
to the trailer brake valve (9) and then to the auxiliary
control valves (10) and to the control valve of the
hydraulic power lift (11).
The trailer brake valve, which includes a maximum
valve with a 140 bar setting, uses a very small part of
the oil for the braking action. The unused part is deli-
vered to the inlet plate of the auxiliary control valves
where the maximum valve with the 180 bar setting is
installed. The auxiliary control valves can use the en-
tire pump oil flow for the external users to which they
are connected, absolute priority being given to the
hydraulic power lift.
Outlet from the auxiliary control valves supplies the
hydraulic power lift by means of the valve system,
which has a maximum valve with a 180 bar setting
and a safety valve with a 200 bar setting.

3
11
.0

: 2
&
14
10
v/.V,

m c
S3 P
'c 0,

&

2B
o
O,

9
Fig.5-8

8-9
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Cooling and lubricating circuit

1.4 - Description of the cooling and
lubricating circuit (Fig.6-8)
The low pressure circuit also cools the oil, achieves
forced lubrication, flushes and cools the transmission.
The oil outlet by the 18 bar valve (V) is conveyed to
the cooling radiator (7) by means of tubes (R1) and is
controlled by the 5 bar valve (R), also mounted in the
hydraulic power pack (6).
Thus cooled, the oil is conveyed to the 1.5 bar valve
(8) by means of tube (R2) after which it proceeds
towards the transmission where it carries out the fol-
lowing functions:
1) Forced lubrication inside the upper and lower tran-
smission shafts of the axle and gearbox (8a).
2) Spray lubrication of the gears and reverse shuttle
synchronizing units, 1st-2nd-3rd-4th speeds and re-
duction range clutches (8c).
3) Spray lubrication of the gears and PTO speed clu-
tches (8b).
Block (8) is connected to the power pack outlet tube
and the return tube (T) towards the gearbox housing

mini

/
X

(
X - N
\ N
I

li
\ \
/
/'1 )
/
/
'1
II
~S?

© 'o
R2
: :£
rrm J
7/

R1
(T) (T) -:;
n.

<• BLc
s=
/ IB
A 9 PTO / FRn
(8a-8c) ffi
I
T fA
<ÿ
STr
P
-c DTi

J
R1

?8rs© M
(R2)

0
o

Fig.6-8

8 - 10
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Cooling and lubricating circuit

As an alternative to the lubricating valve block (8), a
new valve unit (A Fig. 7/8-8) has been directly applied 5 4
to the gearbox housing. It includes the flushing and
lubricating pressure monitoring valve with a 1.4 bar
setting.
Oil from the exchanger of union (1) comes into con-
tact with the valve (10) ball which is pressed by the D
spring (11) that limits the maximum flushing and lu- ©
bricating pressure (1.4 bar) exercised on the gearbox
(2), the Hi-Lo (3) and the PTO (4). <D 1
The union (5) collects the oil discharged by the power A
pack (T1) users while union (9) collects the dischar- I
ged oil (T) which also comes from the power pack,
9
a
along with the oil from the pump (Fig.7/8-8). 3
2 Fig.7-8

5 4
A
3
E o '7
2

Y/
1

o o
12
11
10 9 Fig.8-8

8 - 11
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 12
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Technical specifications

INDEX

Sect.2 Technical specifications. ....................................................................... 8-14

8 - 13
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Sect.2 - Technical specifications

PUMP
Type Doppia ad ingranaggi (in tandem)
Manufacturer Bosch.
Model A - 510 - 845 - 262
Engine / pump RPM ratio 1: 1,25
5
Max. operating pressure 180 ± bar
0

Max. flow rate at 2600 RPM engine rate 30 l. / min. (high pressure circuit)
Flow rate on each pump rev. 10.8 cc.
Max. flow rate at 2600 RPM engine rate 23.6 l. /min. (low pressure circuit)
Flow rate on each pump rev. 8.4 cc.
Positioning front side to left of engine
Drive Valve system gears
Transmission / hydraulic oil quantity 35 l.
Type of oil transfluid AS/B.

FILTERS
Type (on intake) With single washable metal cartridge
filtering degree 40 micron
Type (on delivery) with single replaceable paper cartridge
filtering degree 15/20 micron

STEERING SYSTEM
System Hydrostatic distribution
Manufacturer Danfoss
Type Orbitrol ospc 70 4 W.D. Orbitrol ospc 50 2 W.D.
4 WD nominal cylinder 70 cc. per rev.
2 WD nominal cylinder 50 cc. per rev.

5
Calibrating valve 175 ± (built into the valve system)
0

Antishock valve calibration 240 bar (built into the valve system)

Steering cylinder Quantity 1

Type balanced double-acting
Manufacturer Massey Ferguson
dimensions 32 x 48 x 242 /2 mm.
pump delivery 23.6 l. at max. engine rate
steering wheel turns 2 turns to the right
steering wheel turns 1.75 turns to the left
steering wheel diameter 360 mm.

HYDRAULIC POWER PACK

Make Comatrol
Type Elettroidraulica
Low pressure calibrating valve 18 bar
Cooling circuit calibrating valve 5 bar
Compensating valve Modular compensating
Forced lubrication valve 1.5 bar
Oil outlet by the transmission Spray lubrication

Users BLc - PTO/FRn - STr - DTi

Type of engagement Electro-hydraulic

8 - 14
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Technical specifications
SUPPLEMENTARY CONTROL VALVES
Make Salami
Operation Standard-Single / double acting, floating for hydraulic
engines, with "Kick out" automatic release
Type Open centre type with quick "Push Pull" couplings

5
Valve calibration 180 ± bar
0

Max. flow rate 35 l. / min.

Max. quantity 3 elements
Connection to circuit in series
Positioning at the rear

HYDRAULIC MECHANICAL LIFT

Make Mita / Massey Ferguson
Operating mode position / draft control
intermix - floating descent control

Hydraulic circuit with open centre

Standard cylinder single-acting
Dimension ø 90 x 116 stroke
Supplementary cylinders 2 single-acting
dimensions ø 40 x 220 stroke
5
Calibrating valve 180 ± bar
0

5
Antishock valve 200 ± bar
0

LIFTING CAPACITY
Standard 2100 Kg.
With 2 supplementary cylinders 3400 Kg.
lower links 1st and 2nd category
third point with hydraulic ram (on request)

8 - 15
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 16
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the low pressure circuit

INDEX

Sect.3 Main components of the low pressure circuit

A - Hydraulic pump. ........................................................................... 8-18

A 1 - Main components ............................................................... 8-19
A 2 - Description of operation...................................................... 8-19
A 3 - Dismantling ......................................................................... 8-19
A 4 - Inspection............................................................................ 8-19
A 5 - Remounting and adjustment .............................................. 8-19
A 6 - Special tools ....................................................................... 8-20

8 - 17
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Sect.3 - Main components of low pressure circuit

A - Hydraulic pump

A1 Main components 1- Duplex pump

2 - Retention kit
3 - OR for flange
4 - Pump driving gear
;2A) ;2B; 1 6 - Pump shaft
7 - Flange coupling to engine
8 - Common intake hole
4 7 9 - Low pressure delivery hole 2A
10 - High pressure delivery hole 2B

e c
e
'C
10
I $
6 i

9 ©
© © 2B)
0
O'
V
y ' rMb 0,
0/
p a
VJ
3

0 70 <D
0 Op 0
10. ■# O'
0 '2, r\ .0
o< 0
0 VJ
©
© P
o
0 6 %)
p /o 3
0
3 o,

7 ®
B

o (&<
%

Fig.9-8

8 - 18
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic pump
A 2 - Description of operation
The hydraulic pump consists of a single block with
two separate stages, equipped with an intake duct but
with two separate deliveries and two different flow ra-
tes.
The common oil intake hole (8) is on the widest sec-
tion stage installed at the rear, while the front stage
just has the delivery hole and is fixed to the flange
that couples to the engine valve system housing.
Since it is directly connected to the engine, the pump
activates whenever the engine is running, drawing fil-
tered oil from the transmission and delivering it to both
the low pressure circuit and high pressure circuit at
the same time.
A 3 - Dismantling the Bosch
pump
To remove the pump from the engine, first disconnect
the delivery and intake pipes, unscrew the relative
fixing boltrs ansd slip it out of the connection of the
valve system driving gear.
In the first case, it is essential to replace all the seals
using the kit supplied as a spare part.
In the second case, the complete pump will need to
be replaced if the internal components are worn to a
great extent.
This is because the individual internal parts are not
supplied by the manufacturer as spares since opera-
tions of this type are considered anti-economical.
A 5 - Remounting and adjustment
After having thoroughly cleaned and lubricated all
parts, proceed by remounting complying with the de-
mounting operations in reverse and making sure that
each part is placed in its original position.
After assembly, make sure that the transmission shaft
turns evenly with no play or jamming.
If this is not the case, demount the parts, inspect them,
remount them and carefully check the internal com-
ponents.

1 - Place the pump in a vice with protective jaws.

2 - Mark the positions of the stages of the flanges
and closing plates.
3 - Unscrew the four bolts (Bosch pump) and sepa-
rate the two pump sections, high and low pres-
sure rates, keeping the internal parts separate
so that they can be correctly fitted when the pump
is remounted.

Notes: In the Bosch pump, the individual gear sup-

ports are in two pieces and are connected by a cente-
ring pin. They also have small channels for axial load
compensation. This allows the pump to always give
an optimum performance.

A 4 - Inspection
Hydraulic pump
The hydraulic pump needs to be inspected and ove-
rhauled when:
1) There are external leaks from the seals,
2) The state of wear on the internal components must
be checked.

8 - 19
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic pump
A 6 - Special tools
114 IDR GL
Plug to insert the retention ring (Fig.9-8)

8 - 20
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the low pressure circuit

INDEX

B - Filters

B 1 - Description, operation and maintenance............................ 8-22

8 - 21
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Filters
B 1- Description, operation and
maintenance n \
The hydraulic circuit has two filters, one on the intake
and one on the delivery.
The filter on the intake, which is installed in the gear-
raBS? r B
box housing, has a 40 micron filtering degree and con-
sists of a washable metal gauze cartridge (2 Fig.10-
8). It is provided with a vacuum gauge mounted on Cl p, «1
the intake pipe which indicates clogging on the instru-
ment panel. > .| .v
The filter must be cleaned after every 250 hours ser- //
vice or whenever the clogging indicator on the instru-
ment panel comes on. /
A) (1
T cl
© @
The filter on the delivery is mounted in a cylindrical Fig.10-8
container (1 Fig.11-8) flanged on to the left-hand side
of the engine. It consists of a paper cartridge (3) with
a 15/20 micron filtering degree. This cartridge cannot
be washed.
Its clogging indicator is installed on the top of the filter
2
housing (2). When the filter becomes clogged, the in-
dicator lifts and becomes visible owing to its red co-
3
lour. The red indicator may also appear when the oil is 5
cold. In this case, press the indicator downwards and .iWT
make sure that it remains in this position when the oil 1 4

wwm
is hot. >

s'® >:
—HE I

o' v?
O'''
Fig.11-8

8 - 22
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the low pressure circuit

INDEX

C - Power steering

C 1-Power steering circuit ........................................................... 8-24

C 2-Drawing of assembly and components ................................. 8-26
C 3-Description of operation ........................................................ 8-28
C 4-Removal from the tractor ...................................................... 8-31
C 5-Dismantling ........................................................................... 8-32
C 6-Inspection .............................................................................. 8-32
C 7-Remounting and adjustment ................................................. 8-34
C 8-Special tools .......................................................................... 8-36

8 - 23
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

C - Power steering
C1-Power steering circuit

A A

m_3

D
E
-3-i r-E

14
0 ci
15

13
9
(•)

@i
IgJ
J4 ssafc 4
X

10
1-1-ÿ'

8B
!!
\ 4 0ÿ
4;
lo
C2
M* t >
4-

12
.)•
I I
B

4
o 4-6—
-E»
F

-c=* I
A

11

4 4 —
|!-ÿj'
1

CT-
<— U-J i
<3-

«-
4 4 4-4 I
rfp-1—
8A

Ul -V J
o 7ÿ'I
6

(5 I
4

4-4
5
rt
■

•i H
o-j
3

4
V
2A

o
2B

i
1
f
7
5

n J JI
i
t -r
C1

i I
\F= — +— r L1i
' Fig.12-8

8 - 24
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Power steering
C1 - Power steering circuit
The low pressure circuit consists of a first high pres-
sure section to operate the power steering system.
Oil from the low pressure stage of the pump (2a Fig.18-
8) passes through filter (3) and supplies the Orbitrol
steering valve system (4) after which it supplies the
relative steering cylinder (5).
The oil outlet from the Orbitrol unit supplies the hydrau-
lic power pack (6) and flows towards the various users
through a low pressure circuit.
The steering system mounted on Massey Ferguson
tractors is the hydrostatic type and there is no mecha-
nical connection between the steering wheel and the
steering cylinder.
Each minimum rotation of the steering wheel corre-
sponds to an equivalent movement of the wheels.
If the engine breaks down or the hydraulic pump fails
to operate, Orbitrol acts like a manual pump operated
by the steering wheel allowing the steering action to
be accomplished.

S\

0 TO)
i
/
t

© t 4
©
5
i
r' o
K s
s ■>

O m ‘-p
' <
t -
•
i
V 2a 3
V l

r l> ,k
K 3
CD 9 r r
l* 3

2b

Fig.13-8

8 - 25
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Power steering

C2 - Drawing of assembly and main parts of the "Orbitrol" valve system

( 27 77 6 Q
7/ 2
7
v/Mk
/
/

/ /
21 \
/
/
rr
19
* 10
13 • X AY'/ / / /
rtf £3
53 w
SIS >
15
K \

17 w
«•4
7" 7
LS S\
<
16 \
7
/ ; u /l-r-J/ 1
14 h
_Z
20
12 24 ® (2 28 X 29 )( 8 5 4 3

23

X
—
■7 r

tLZB
' 1

ZS2
□
\ /
\ 7
N

]
-7 ffi

m
>77 Fig.14-8

8 - 26
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Power steering

3
4
5
1
6 o
o \
8 / o
9

10
11 DK *£>:* *» 29
■
L

"J 28
0)
7
27

©l 1
i— @ |jS)
/
12 24

© /<sÿ
o
16
S3 <fcSyx
15 'S’«V\; ,/n
=ÿx

17 o
o ■Q §>N
s i<">
®3 o
O
o

18 21 o /
o 22
J?x
0 19
s
20 23

1 - Screw 11 - Connecting shaft 21 - "Orbitrol" valve system

2 - Screw 12 - Washer 22 - Unidirectional valve
3 - Seal 13 - Centering springs 23 - Anticavitation valve
4 - Closing plate 14 - Needle bearing 24 - Ring
5 - O-Ring 15 - Ring 25 - Drum
6 - Stator 16 - Washer 26 - Check valve
7 - Pin 17 - O-Ring 27 - Sleeve
8 - O-Ring 18 - Safety valve 28 - O-Ring
9 - Rotor 19 - Retention ring 29 - Distribution plate
10 - Spacer 20 - Antishock valve
Fig.15-8

8 - 27
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Power steering
C 3 - Description of operation
A - Neutral position (Engine running)
In this position, drum (25) is centered in relation to the
sleeve (27) by means of the springs (13 Fig.14-8).
Ducts P1-L-R are not supplied.
Oil from duct P passes straight towards duct T to sup-
ply the hydraulic power pack. The circuit is the open
centre type. Two antishock valves (20) and two anti-
cavitation valves (23) are set in holes L and R of the
valve system. The antishock valves (20) protect the
circuit between the steering cylinder and the valve
system from impact on the wheels.
The anticavitation valves (23) allow the oil from the
antishock valves (20) to pass from the right-hand duct
to the left-hand one and vice versa, depending on the
movement of the piston in the steering cylinder.

A
2

\\V\Vv.\ LWwV,ÿ
£ 4*
4ÿi

r 1
20
k> *J

B 25 27 i ! | 23 9

R
J“T « c
fc- 5ÿ3
1
CL ® t>
A' c
c

TtiS\ \
o
C

18 6

26
22
— I
T P
A - Steering cylinder
B - Steering column position
L - Supply towards the left-hand union of the steering cylinder
P - Low pressure supply from the hydraulic pump
P1 - Supply towards the metering device (Stator (6) and Rotor (9))
R - Supply towards the right-hand union of the steering cylinder
T - Discharge towards the hydraulic power pack Fig.16-8

8 - 28
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Power steering
The rotor will cease to be supplied with oil and will
Steering position block. This reasoning can be extended to wider an-
(engine running) gles. The quantity of oil discharged by the power ste-
ering unit towards cylinder A is therefore proportional
Steering wheel operation (to the right or left) causes to the angle of rotation of the steering wheel. The drum
an angular rotation of the drum (25) in relation to the (25) allows the oil delivered by the metering device
sleeve (27). The oil flowing from the pump is directed (stator (6) and rotor (9)) to be conveyed towards hole
towards the metering device (Statore (6) and Rotor L or R, depending on whether the driver steers towar-
(9) ). The rotor (9) is turned and returns a quantity of ds the left or right. During rotation, the sleeve (27)
oil proportional to the rotation angle towards the cylin- ensures synchronous communication of the cavities
der. The rotor (9) rotates to the same extent as the of the metering device with the circuit from the pump
steering wheel. on the one hand, and the circuit towards cylinder A on
the other. A check valve (26) is screwed into the sup-
Example: ply hole of the valve system. This is a unidirectional
Supposing that the steering wheel is turned a 5° an- valve that prevents excessive pressures exercised on
gle. This will cause a 5° angular rotation of the drum the wheels from being transmitted to the pump when
(25) in relation to the sleeve (27). The rotor (9) is tur- the wheels are not turned. If the pressure in the stee-
ned for as long as it is supplied with oil. It, in turn, ring circuit is too high, the safety valve (18) in the val-
turns the connecting shaft (11) and sleeve (27). When ve system is activated and the excess pressure is di-
these have turned through 5°, the drum (25) and sle- rected towards duct T.
eve (27) will be newly centered by the springs (13).
V
M?/ tfl
fv.VWN.WN
!_
! LZ
9Z) |[*ÿc=:=ÿ>a 6
I!
n HS
S* lit j/
5 ° (a)i g rS o.
E e
m
If S 1 t1
9 \
'/ li Si
l
-J
=31
9 ni| 5 9
!ÿ
d Fig.17-8
8 - 29
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Power steering
Manual steering (engine at a stand-
still)
tor (9) is mechanically turned. The valve system thus
When the pump does not deliver oil or when the avai-
operates like a hand pump.
lable pressure is too weak, the rotator (9) will no lon-
The oil that returns from cylinder A passes through
ger be hydraulically turned. In this case, there is no
the non-return valve (22) and supplies the metering
assistance.
device. The pressure generated is proportional to the
When the steering wheel is operated, the centering
torque exercised on the steering wheel. In that case,
springs (13) are compressed, the angular play betwe-
the strain on the steering wheel is high.
en the pin (7) and sleeve (27) is annulled and the ro

S\
eh
y\ A
i k'i
&\ i :SJ
kB

( 25 ) ( 27 :=0=a:=ÿ* j 9

£ it
SR c
c
i(R) D f|
E
t>
&;;
c ,0 c
,
B I T
♦9 ♦:! /' t
!“-> &l
ic=

G :.Tr 6
♦I
T =<<
22
_i

T P

Fig.18-8

8 - 30
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Power steering
Mechanical connection

SFIH §
■

ioTr
i

El
w
>r
T <>4 2>
4
AVO-J-?
L
L - Lh steering cylinder supply line © © ©
® ®
P - Low pressure circuit supply
R - Rh steering cylinder supply line 0-— - ®
T - Discharge towards hydraulic power pack
Fig.19-8

C 4 - Removing the Orbitrol unit

from the tractor
Proceed in the following way to access the "Orbitrol" unit:
A - Remove the central cover from the steering whe-
el to access and unscrew the relative fixing nut
(7).
o
B - Set down the steering wheel (8). <D
C - Unscrew the fixing bolts and set down the com-
plete indicator light control assembly.
D - Demount the dashboard instrument panel.
E - Set down the rh and lh dashboard side guard.
F - Set down the upper and lower central protection.
n1ÿ- ffi\M
&
G - Set down the engine bonnet side panels.
H - Disconnect the 2 hose pipes that supply the ste-
ering cylinder on the front lh side.
I - Disconnect the hose pipe that supplies "Orbitrol"
U>\
on the lh side on a level with the starter motor.
L - Disconnect the hose pipe that drains oil from the
Orbitrol on the rh side. J 3
M - Set down the plate that closes the compartment
of the "Orbitrol" valve system (6).
N - Unscrew the 4 screws that fix "Orbitrol" (1) to the 'W 4
cab support.
V / V \v
O - Remove the valve system (4) from the shaft to
which it is connected and pull it out sufficiently to
/7
disconnect the 4 tubes fixed to it.
P - Remove the valve system, leaving the discon- Fig.20-8
nected pipes in their positions.

8 - 31
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Power steering
C 5 - Demounting
1 - Remove the valve system from the tractor.
2 - Place the valve system in a vice with plastic jaws.
3 - Remove the screws (1). Mark the position of
screw (2) and remove it (Fig. 21-8).
4 - Remove the closing plate (4), the O-Ring (5), the
stator (6) and the O-Ring (8).
5 - Remove the spacer (10), the valve system plate
(29) and the O-Ring (28).
6 - Take out the splined connecting shaft (11).
7 - Unscrew the threaded sleeve and recover the ball
of the non-return valve (22).
8 - Take out the two plugs with spring pin and the
two balls of the anticavitation valves (23) of the
valve system.
9 - Push to remove the sleeve unit (27) and drum
(25), checking that the plug (7) is on the horizon-
tal axis.
10 - Remove the washers (12) and (16), the needle
bearing (14) and the bush (24) of the sleeve/drum
unit. Remove the plug (7) and the centering sprin-
gs (13) by pressing on one end. Separate the sle-
eve (27) from the drum (25).
11- Unscrew the cap of the safety valve (18).
Using an 8 mm Allen wrench, demount the threa-
ded sleeve and take out the seal, the spring and
the valve (the recessed housing cannot be de-
mounted)
12 - Unscrew the two caps of the antishock valves
(20), remove the seals. Using a 6 mm Allen wren-
ch, demount the threaded sleeves and remove
the springs, the balls and their housings (the re-
cessed housings cannot be demounted).
13 - Remove the retention ring (19), the bush (15)
and the O-Ring (17).
14 - Demount the check valve (26).
C 6 - Inspection
15 - Carefully examine all parts and replace them if
necessary.
16 - Replace all the retention rings, the washers and
the springs.

Notes
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 32
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Power steering
2

3
4

5
1
6 o
o
8 o
9 o

11
10

2l H
$

7
•
k.

"J
i$d: *>

28
29

2M
27
&
®- <§) IJS)
/
12 24

© 2)
w
16 <&3>
O <ÿ>y
15 V%;
=$ÿi'
<S>
,/ft
■ '
17 o
IO
®3 Wy£ o
O
o

18 21 o
/

o 22
J?A
<3 19
✓
✓
20 23 Fig.21-8

1 - Screw 11- Connecting shaft 21 - “Orbitrol” valve system

2 - Screw 12 - Washer 22 - Unidirectional valve
3 - Seal 13 - Centering springs 23 - Anticavitation valve
4 - Closing plate 14 - Needle bearing 24 - Ring
5 - O-Ring 15 - Ring 25 - Drum
6 - Stator 16 - Washer 26 - Check valve
7 - Pin 17 - O-Ring 27 - Sleeve
8 - O-Ring 18 - Safety valve 28 - O-Ring
9 - Rotor 19 - Retention ring 29 - Distributor plate
10 - Spacer 20 - Antishock valve

8 - 33
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Power steering
C 7- Remounting and adjustment
o
After having thoroughly cleaned and lubricated all the
ll
components, proceed by remounting, following the de-
mounting order in reverse and complying with the be-
£P
L 21
low listed indications: \

17 - Remount the check valve (Fig. 21-8).

18 - Mount the retention ring (18 Fig. 21-8).

19 - Mount the O-Ring (17) and ring (15) on tool (115

DR GL) .

20 - Position the complete tool in the valve system

housing (21) and push it until the retention rings
♦
115 IDR GL
have fitted into their housings.

21 - Set the balls and springs into the antishock val- Fig.22-8
ve housings (20). Tighten the threaded sleeves,
fit on the washers and tighten the caps.

\\//
22 - Fit the valve and washer in the discharge valve
housing (18) and tighten the threaded sleeve. Fit
on the seal and tighten the cap to a 40 - 60 Nm
torque value. 13
23 - Place the drum (25) into the sleeve (27).

24 - Fit tool 113 IDR-GL, used to mount the cente-

ring springs (13), through the slit. Fix the springs

//
on the tool in the order shown in Fig.23-8 and
position the pin (7 Fig. 21-8).

Fig.23-8

113 IDR GL
/
i

13

0
O £*>
0
O

O o a
o
\
Fig.24-8

8 - 34
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Power steering
25 - Position the bush (24) on the sleeve and drum
unit so that the chamfer facilitates assembly in
the valve system.
26 - Position the washers (12) and (16), with the
chamfer of washer (12) pointing towards the cen- 9
tering springs (13), fitting the needle bearing (14)
11
in between (14).
27 - Mount the sleeve and drum unit in the valve sy-
stem, applying a slight oscillating movement. Take
care to keep the pin (7) in a horizontal position.
28 - Place the two balls and the two plugs with spring
pin in the intake valve housing (23).
29- Place the ball in the housing of the non-return
valve (22) and tighten the threaded sleeve.
30 - Position the splined connecting shaft (11).
31 - Position the O-Ring (28) and the distributor pla-
c Fig.25-8
te (29).
32 - Mount the rotor (9) so that the two cavities C are
on the splining axis of the splined shaft (11 Fig.25-
8). Remount the spacer (10).
33 - Place the O-Rings (5) and (8) on the stator (6).
34 - Mount the stator (6) without moving the rotor (9).
Now move its fixing holes so that they correspond
b
to those of the valve system.

Notes:
the rotor (9) and indent C must be in the position indi-
cated in (Fig. 26-8). VV
35 - Remount the closing plate (4).
36 - Fit the screw (2) (in the position marked before
demounting) and screws (1) with their seals (3). V
Tighten in opposition to a 30-35 Nm torque va-
lue. C Fig.26-8
37 - Use an appropriate plug to check the adjustment
and operation of the valve system.
38 - Fit the valve system back on the tractor.

8 - 35
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Power steering
C 8 - Special tools
113 IDR GL
Tool to insert the return springs between the inner and outer sleeves of the Orbitrol valve system (13 Fig.14-
8)

115 IDR GL
Tool to insert the retention ring in the body of the Orbitrol valve system (15/17 Fig.13-8)

Q
116 IDR GL
Plug to insert the retention ring into the Orbitrol valve system (19 Fig.13-8)

8 - 36
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the low pressure circuit

INDEX

D - Hydraulic power pack

D1 - Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

D1.1-Main components ......................................................................... 8-38

D1.2-General description of operation .................................................. 8-39
D1.3-Demounting, inspection, remounting of each
component mounted on the plant ................................................ 8-40
D1.3.a - 18 bar calibrating valve .................................................. 8-44
D1.3.b - 15 bar calibrating valve .................................................. 8-45
D1.3.c - Compensating valve....................................................... 8-46
D1.3.d - Pressure detecting bulb ................................................. 8-46
D1.3.e - Solenoid valve ................................................................ 8-48

D2 - Hydraulic power pack (Oleodinamica Slanzi)

D2.1 -Main components ........................................................................ 8-52

D2.2 -General description of operation ................................................. 8-53
D2.3 -Demounting, inspection and remounting .................................... 8-53
D2.3.a - Removing the power pack from the tractor ................... 8-54
D2.3.b - Removal, inspection, remounting and calibration of the 18 bar valve ..... 8-54
D2.3.c - Removal, inspection, remounting and calibration of the 5 bar valve ........ 8-54

8 - 37
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

D1.1 - Main components DTijCS-

PTO/FRn

BLc
W
<M

\l
R

ii

Igl

6
STr
o
PTO
0
BLc
DTi
T
0. R1

Ps

V1

V - 18 bar valve DTi - Solenoid valve to engage the 4WD

R - 5 bar valve P - Hole to inlet oil from the pump
V1 - Compensating valve T - Oil discharge hole
BLc - Solenoid valve to engage the R1 - Hole through to cooling section
differential lock Ps - Hole for oil pressure detection bulb
PTO/FRn - Solenoid valve to engage the PTO, T1 - User oil discharge hole
brake
STr - Solenoid valve to engage the Fast Run
Fig.27-8

8 - 38
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

D1.2 - General description of
P T
operation (Fig.27/28/29-8)
o o
The power pack is divided into three separate sec- V
tions: V
1 - Section with oil at a pressure of 18 bar to supply
the users. Si
2 - Section with oil for cooling purposes, monitored
by a 5 bar valve.
3 - Section where excess oil is freely discharged and R
returned to the users. R1 -•
Oil from Orbitrol enters the first section of the power
pack through hole (P), then comes into contact with TUT

the calibrating valve (V) and the four solenoid valves R1

(BLc - PTO/FRn - STr - DTi ).
Having reached the pressure of 18 bar, the oil opens Psÿ UJ

F
calibrating valve (V) and flows into the second sec-
tion through channel (R1), entering into communica-
tion with the 5 bar valve (R). It then flows towards the
J k>
cooling radiator and proceeds towards the lubricating
circuit. This forms a closed center circuit with a con- V1
stant pressure of 18 bar which can always supply one Fir ’ll
or more users at the same time.
Oil discharged by valve (R) at a pressure of 5 bar, 2 feoVÿQÿQ~U ■Vo rVyO
6oUrfebn0>| BLc
flows through duct (T) and collects in the gearbox per
nofoom
housing.
T1 in-: m
O: p) Lpod
Similarly, oil returning from the users through hole (T1)
and a tube, also collects in the gearbox housing. Each PTO
solenoid valve turns the supply on or off and dischar- 3 wggssssssssSissroi AJ-\ FRn
ges the oil from the respective user following electric
energizing (or de-energizing), allowing it to pass throu- HrICQ
— . P—
't r omul
gh the respective and single hole. Only solenoid valve
!
HI I
m i
—
rr i m pz,**~
D
4 tfoWo?
PTO/FRn has the double function of turning the sup-
ply on or off and discharging the oil of two users throu-
gh separate holes. TUT — fr"T STr
-
3D
A
o
2 3 . 4 5 6
J»
i
05 05 05 5

T1 5\
**
(V ii 6 r.:aaai

b gT=PTn‘H-rmr!nÿ
m J=U j5[tl
i
DTi

P » 04 05
18 bar. L
X --
“+•
PS
l
HHEl
I
03
>< ”1
& t

---
--. 5 bar
Arancio = bassa pressione
K*(1
I 1
02 Azzurro = raffreddamento
01

Fig.28-8 R T Giallo = scarico libero Fig.29-8

8 - 39
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)
D 3 - Demounting, inspecting and re-
mounting each component of the
power pack
The hydraulic power pack (6 Fig.30/31-8) consists of
a parallelpiped shaped aluminium unit housing the
following parts:
a - 18 bar calibrating valve (V)
b - 5 bar calibrating valve (R)
c - Compensating valve (V1)
d - Pressure detecting bulb (Ps)
e - Four solenoid valves (BLc- PTO/FRn - STr - DTi)
Hydraulic power pack
Removal from the tractor
The power pack is removed from the tractor in the
following way:
1 - Disconnect all tubes, both rigid and flexible.
2 - Disconnect the electric wire connectors from the
solenoid valves and bulb.
3 - Unscrew the screws that fix the power pack to
the relative support, near to the cab support on
the right front side and keep them ready to hand.
8 - 40
Demounting, inspecting and remounting
Separate all the above listed parts from the hydraulic
power pack and set them down (a-b-c-d-e-f).
Inspect the power pack assembly, checkling the tight-
ness of the fixed machined plugs, that the threaded
holes are in a perfect condition, the housings of the
OR retention pads for the solenoid valve unions and
the removable closing plugs.
Thoroughly flush and clean the internal ducting, threa-
ding, valve housings, etc.
Now fit all the previously demounted parts back on to
the pack, making sure that they have been thorou-
ghly washed, cleaned, lubricated and fitted with new
seals.
Correctly tighten all the components on to the pack,
remembering that the unit is made of aluminimum.
The solenoid valves must be tightened to a slightly
greater extent than that achieved by hand, thus pre-
venting deformations and allowing the mobile internal
stem to slide correctly.
Fit the remounted power pack back into the tractor
and connect all the previously disconnected tubes and
electric harness.
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

DTi
PTO/FRn

BLc Co.

<M
A> u

V
R

I
i»

=e{

6
STr
PTO
0
BLC m f/[
DTI
T
6) R1
FRn
T1

5§) 0 KM V1
Fig.30-8

V - 18 bar valve R - 5 bar valve V1 - compensating valve

I I I

i
1 1 1
t }- t.Lj
>< _
) Q O >< I

T OOO i

Plug Solenoid valve

E
s
u
a w [c

coo
ID

O ol
s
El
1-

ff Fig.31-8
13

8 - 41
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

Section views of the hydraulic power pack

BLc PTO/FRn DTi

l_ _L_ STr

E G H Z M N

ccvrrj

w
7ÿ
2 5,
O
© 3

_o
ps(e T1
E F G H Z M N

c A B

----
1
M
(5-

£ <g|)°
C A B

Sez. C-C Sez. B-B

mm ill u_-
6
m
Fig.32-8

8 - 42
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

Sect. A-A

w
'M,
4l3E53i

Sect. E-E Sect. G-G Sect. H-H

m
1-
. wm
BUI mma0,

Sect. Z-Z Sect. M-M Sect. N-N

rmm
O
M
iI ■
rtiH=i
m i
V//////////,

Fig.33-8

8 - 43
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

D1.3.a - 18 bar calibrating valve (V)
(Fig.34/35-8)
4 ) (T1) (1 ) (3)(7) (2) (6
This valve pressurizes the oil supplied by the pump,
maintaining a constant pressure of 18 bar.
The valve (V) consists of a plunger (1) and a spring Vj

(2) plus calibrating shims (3) if necessary. All these

parts are installed within a cylindrical liner (4). iM
The liner (4) is screwed on to the hexagonal closing
P
plug (6) and is equipped with through holes (T1) that
connect the central inner part with the outer one.
It is also fitted with 2 sets of seals on the outer part.
These divide the oil supplied by the pump (P), from .. TO
[5%£}i2 T2
outlet (T) towards the cooling circuit.
-H ]
Having reached a pressure of 18 bar, the oil supplied
by the pump moves the plunger (1), compressing the TP Fig.34-8
spring (2) and allowing the excess oil to flow through
the cross holes (T1) to the user outlet, maintaining
the pressure at a continuous and constant level.

Demounting, inspection and remounting

Unscrew the hexagonal plug (6), removing the entire

valve casing from the power pack, then unscrew and
take out the liner (4), the plunger (1), the spring (2), P
fit
shims (3) and the liner stop washer (7). *
Check all the parts. Make sure that the valve (1) sli-
P L'J

des perfectly in its liner (4) and that the drainage hole
(T2) is free. Thoroughly wash, clean and lubricate the
3 7
components, replacing all retention seals and assem- T
ble the valve again, remounting it on the power pack.
Correct calibration will be ascertained when the com-
Fig.35-8
ponents are subjected to pressure tests.

8 - 44
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

D1.3.b - 5 bar calibrating valve (R)
(Fig.36/37-8) 11
T
This valve monitors a max. 5 bar pressure in the cir- P 10
cuit towards the cooling radiator, ensuring that this is
tZ
continuously supplied right up to the lubricating valve
£ /
block (1.5 bar). \ <

mwm.
The valve consists of a plunger (8), a spring (9) and a \
hexagonal threaded Allen plug (10) all mounted on
the outer casing (11) that acts as the valve liner.
mm
---___
The threaded outer casing terminates with a hexago-
nal head and is equipped with a central hole (P) and a
few cross holes that connect the inner and outer par- Ti 8 9 i 1
ts. P — K>H- TI P
Fig.36-8
There is also a set of retainers on the outer part that
divide the cooling section (P) from the general excess
oil discharging section (T), directing it towards the
gearbox housing.
The crosswise and longitudinal hole (T1) on the valve
plunger (8) prevents a hydraulic block in the zone
9 10
behind and dampens any vibrations.
The oil supplied by the calibrating valve (V) enters
into contact with valve (R) in the front part (P) and £
flows towards the cooling radiator.
If the pressure rises above 5 bar, the plunger (8), which
1
Iff
was previously held closed by the spring (9), is mo-
ved from its housing, thus opening the discharge lea-
ding to the gearbox housing (T).
P T T1

Demounting, inspection and remounting.

Unscrew the valve casing (11) from the power pack Fig.37-8
and set it down, then unscrew the hexagonal Allen
plug (10) and set the spring (9) and inner plunger (8)
down.
Make sure that all parts are in a good condition and
that the plunger (8) slides perfectly in its housing within
the valve casing (11).
Wash, clean and lubricate the parts, then fit them back
in place after having replaced all the retention seals.
Fit the valve back on to the body of the hydraulic power
pack.

8 - 45
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

D1.3.c - Compensating valve (V1)
(Fig.38/39-8) 3 2
This valve dampens and absorbs the oscillations and
vibrations caused by the passage of oil. It consists of
an outer casing (1) with a calibrated hole at the top
1
mm,
and several cross holes. It houses a plunger (2), also T
with a calibrated hole and a spring (3).
The valve is screwed into the hydraulic power pack
under a hexagonal Allen plug.
The lower part of the valve (P) is in contact with oil at
a pressure of 18 bar, while the tapered head of the r~ — i
T
casing (1) is in contact with the main duct that dischar- TA
ges oil towards the housing (T). The pressurized oil
oscillations are dampened by the inner plunger (2)
P
A
V a
L_JT Fig.38-8
and relative calibrated escape holes. Correct valve
operation depends on the ability of the plunger to sli-
de and on the calibrated holes which must never be
clogged.

Demounting, inspection and remounting

Remove the closing plug from the power pack. Unscrew

the valve casing from its housing with a screwdriver
and set it down.
Remove the locking spring ring. Remove the plunger >
;)ii
(2) and spring (3), check the condition of the compo-
nents and make sure that the plunger is free to slide. 0
Clean, wash, lubricate and remount the valve in its
housing, then close the plug after having fitted it with
new seals. Valve calibration cannot be checked. T
Fig.39-8
D 3.4 - Pressure detector
bulb (PS) (Fig.40-8)

This bulb indicates whether the pressure of the oil in

the hydraulic power pack is correct. This is done by
means of a warning light on the control panel. The
bulb cannot be demounted or repaired. An attempt
can be made to re-calibrate it by means of the adju-
ster screw installed centrally, in the outer end part.
Incorrect operation of the bulb can impair the correct
operation of the users and shorten their life. If in dou-
bt, it is essential to replace the part with a new genu-
ine spare. The bulb is mounted on the hydraulic power
pack in direct contact with the pressurized oil in the
18 bar closed centre circuit.
If the pressure is low, an electric contact will illumina-
te a red warning light on the instrument panel and a Fig.40-8
warning buzzer will activate. In this specific case, the
causes must be checked out by qualified personnel.
8 - 46
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 47
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

D1.3.e - Solenoid valve (Fig.41/42/43/44-8)
As previously mentioned, the solenoid valve opens or
closes the oil flow and oil discharge towards the rela-
tive user.
This occurs by making or breaking an electric impul-
se transmitted to the solenoid valve to energize or de-
energize it, thus opening or closing the oil duct. The
solenoid valve consists of a magnet (4 Fig.42-8), a
liner (1), a sliding stem (2) with relative spring (5), a
mobile fastener (8), a hexagonal threaded unit (3) and
a plastic check nut (9). The liner (1) has a set of cross
holes divided by 3 sets of retention rings that delimit 3
distinct sections, i.e.:
P = Pressurized oil from the pump
A = User supply
B = User supply
T = Discharged oil from the user
The sliding stem (2) is equipped with a longitudinal
hole and (6) with 4 cross holes (7). The stem can as-
sume two distinct positions determined by electrical
energizing or de-energizing of the magnet (4) thanks
to the mobile fastener (8) to which it is fixed.
A first position of the stem (2) "with the solenoid valve
energized", allows the oil supplied by the pump (P) to
pass into section (A) and to supply the user, while
section (B) enters into communication with freely di-
scharging section (T).
The second position of the stem (2) "with the solenoid
valve not energized", allows the oil supplied by the
pump (P) to pass into section (B) and supply the user,
while section (A) enters into communication with fre-
ely discharging section (T) by means of cross holes
(7) and longitudinal hole (6).

9 10 3 5 12 2 7 1 15 16 17
14
77
(Z ME
\ \ \ \ VW m //

\ T
/ / /
[//
/// /
'2
/ AMSl
/' 71
9 y_
A P \
B

8 11 6

A B
1 - Liner 10 - Retention rings

N
X
2 - Stem 11 - Connecting plug
3 - Casing 12 - Retention rings
4 - Magnet 13 - Ring
5 - Spring 14 - Retention rings
6 - Discharge duct 15 - Retention rings
7 - Connecting hole 16 - Retention rings
8 - Fastener 17 - Ring P T
9 - Nut 18 - Spring
Fig.41-8

8 - 48
 8 - 49

Fig.44-8

g d v
rncn o non
rrm T=T n aorj=

1 O 3D
LOOLr
T_r
TJ=0-r
7Q
XJCLS
m DOTJIL
energized
Solenoid valve e
Fig.43-8

g d
rrm
v
Tm TT _Q. =r
n I
IbSaoTh
1 o
~&x i— Li _J. I ~~ L 1>
LDOLT T-1 TJ YY

not energized
Solenoid valve I. (Z) U e

Fig.42-8
fw// a
a d
"•nr
v in
i!
*
0 © ©
i o o o
e © © \
JD*L>

I- e fr) (6
Solenoid valve

Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Comatrol)

Demounting - inspection (Fig.45-8)
Disconnect the connector from the electric power ca-
ble, unscrew the plastic nut (9) and take the magnet
(4) from its plug along with the 2 retaining ORs (10).
Unscrew the hexagonal valve casing (3) from the
hydraulic power pack. Place the hexagonal casing (3)
in a vice, remove the liner (1) with a box wrench using
the two milled side surfaces and set down the liner
and distributor stem connected to the spring (5) and
fastener (8).
Remove the plug (11) and separate the components
to which it is connected, i.e. the stem (1), the spring
(5), the two spring guides, the fastener (8). Make sure
that all parts are in a good condition. Particularly make
sure that the stem (2) slides perfectly in the liner (1).
Use the relative instrument to check the efficiency of
the magnet, the cable and connector of the solenoid
valve.
Remounting
Clean all parts, wash and lubricate all mobile compo-
nents and replace all the seals.
Assemble all the parts by complying with the demoun-
ting procedure in reverse. Position and screw the val-
ve casing on the power pack "to a little more than
hand tightened extent". After tightening, make sure
that the stem (2) slides correctly, electrically energi-
zing the solenoid valve by means of the connector of
the electric wire of the magnet.

3
8

2
5
m
6

k0 1
0

T$
0
A M
B
P 3

Fig.45-8

8 - 50
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 51
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Slanzi)

D2.1- Main components

R V Hi-Lo Blc

S 4 T1
2
T
6
Q 5 1

6 CM§)
M
o
PS -® o
\o Spring-on
3
P DT /Fast-run

Pto/FR DT/Fast-run

1 - Fast-Run and Spring-on fluid supplier

2 - 4WD clutch fluid supplier
3 - PTO fluid supplier
4 - PTO brake fluid supplier
5 - Diff lock fluid supplier
6 - Power pack casing
7 - Hi-lo fluid supplier
8 - Cooling radiator supply
Blc - Diff lock engagement solenoid valve
Hi-lo - Hydraulic Hi-lo engagement solenoid valve
DT-F.Run - 4WD and Fast-Run engagement solenoid valve
PTO-FR - PTO and PTO brake engagement solenoid valve
J - To exchanger
M - Pressure gauge hole
P - Pump oil inlet
PS - Hole for pressure switch
R - 5 bar valve
S - To exchanger
T - Main discharge
Fig.46-8
T1 - User discharge
V - 18 bar valve

8 - 52
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Slanzi)

12 13 R 15 V 16 14
7 G
o
o o
o
o T1
o o
o o
X|0 O o
O I 0
o o o o
F xjy o o
I y o o
oi
t
o
A I
10 a
I f-
N\
11 o \

r
\

X
P
D
B C Fig.47-8

D2.2 - General description of

operation (Fig.47/48-8) c
3 4 l
Oil from the pump (P) enters via channel (A) which is
in communication with the 18 bar valve (V).
The oil passes through the calibrated hole (B) and
d I LA d. m d. i
x
M
dl

Ti
reaches the chamber (C). On reaching a pressure of
P
18 bar, it pushes the plunger (10) upwards and com-
presses the spring (14). PS
— -j

)l( 18 BAR
4jj
Plunger (10) lifting sets the oil from the pump in com-
munication with the channel (F), which supplies the
M
T
5BAR r
+<M-— i

cooling radiator through the hole (S Fig.46-8). L. .J

R T
This oil is always in communication with valve (R)
which, when a pressure of 5 bar is reached, opens
the route to the discharge part (T Fig.46-8). Fig.48-8
Channel D maintains the oil at a pressure of 18 bar,
ready to supply the users controlled by the five sole-
noid valves. User discharge occurs through channel
(G) which communicates with the outlet (T1).

D2.3 - Demounting, inspection and

adjustment (Fig.49-8)
- An 18 bar calibrating valve (V)
The hydraulic power pack consists of a parallelepi- - A 5 bar calibrating valve (R)
ped shaped aluminium block which houses: - A pressure detecting bulb (PS)
- Five solenoid valves (in the full optional version)

8 - 53
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Hydraulic power pack (Slanzi)

D2.3.a - Power pack removal from
the tractor. 12 13
w* i ; h
17
1 - Disconnect all the electric connectors from the t-
TJF
t't
J._C h Q
W
Q Q O
solenoid valve and bulb. 11 It J I

2 - Disconnect all the hydraulic pipes from the power

pack. B
10 !
jj 1 | 10 -i
J-
15

3 - Remove the power pack after having unscrewed

19
0=ÿ----ÿ-+
— -'i vJ-_ •
OOP

6 o o o o x)
OOP c
c r
16
the four bolts that fix it to the bracket.

®SL
18
1 1
I 1
I: i
14
D2.3.b - Removal, inspection, re- I* 10
mounting and calibration i
±y.

y©i»[r:i
of the 18 bar valve (Fig.49a/b-8) Fig.49a-8

Unscrew the plug (18) and remove the shims (16),

the spring (14) and the plunger (10).
Remove the plug (19) with the relative sleeve.
Carefully check all the components. Make sure that
the plunger (10) slides perfectly in the sleeve and that
the calibrated hole (B) is not clogged.
o 10 14 16 18

Wash, clean and replace all the seals, then lubricate

and remount them in the reverse order to which they
o
were demounted. © cm=tB
18 bar valve calibration must be checked with the unit o
mounted on the tractor and with tool 171 IDR GL con- o
nected to union (M) which is in communication with
the fluid supply lines of all the users (see page 8-136).
ffl
The valve is calibrated by means of the shims (16).
o m
D2.3.c - Removal, inspection, re- o Fig.49b-8
mounting and calibration
of the 5 bar valve (Fig.49a/c-8)
Unscrew the plug (17) and remove the adjuster shims
(15), the spring (13) and the plunger (12). 12 13 15 17
Carefully check all the components. Make sure that
the plunger (12) slides perfectly in its housing. Also
make sure that there is no scoring, then wash, clean
and lubricate the parts, replace the seals and remount
the parts in reverse order to the way in which they
CUT
were demounted.
The 5 bar valve calibration must be checked with the
assembly mounted on the tractor and with the pres-
©
sure gauge inserted into the channel that supplies the O
cooling radiator.
O
The valve is calibrated by means of the shims (15).
m Fig.49c-8

8 - 54
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

PTO clutch engagement modulating governor valve

INDEX

E - PTO engagement modulating governor valve

E1 - Description of operation ....................................................... 8-56

E2 - Demounting, inspection and remounting ............................. 8-56

8 - 55
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Modulating governor valve
E - PTO clutch engagement modulating
governor valve (Fig.50/51-8)
E1 - Description of operation
This valve regulates the modularity of the oil delivery
flow to the users.
It consists of a hollow hexagonal casing (4), a spring
(3) and a hollow plunger with tapered housing (2) and
two cross holes (E) plus 1 calibrated hole at the top
(F). The valve is screwed on to the hydraulic power
pack by means of the union (1), while oil proceeds to
the hydraulic clutch of the PTO through the union on
the casing (4). The oil supplied by the pump is con-
veyed to the PTO clutch by means of the relative so-
lenoid valve. It enters the governor valve through hole
(P) and comes into contact with the plunger (2) in the
maximum opening position under the thrust of spring
(3). The pressure increase to which the oil is subjected
moves the plunger (2) towards the left, notably dimi-
nishing the flow of oil towards the user. The quantity
of oil supplying the user first passes through calibra-
Pi
F E
P1
8 - 56
ted hole (F) alone and determines a gradual and mo-
dulated pressure increase downstream, which again
causes a partial movement of the plunger (2) towards
the right. In these conditions, by moving away from its
taper housing, the plunger (2) allows the oil from chan-
nel (P) to also proceed through the cross holes (E)
and the taper housing itself., thus increasing the sup-
ply section in a gradual and modulated way.
E2 - Demounting, inspection and remounting
Disconnect the tube prior to the valve.
Unscrew the valve from the power pack and set it
down. Unscrew the union (1) from the casing (4) and
remove the plunger (2) and spring (3). Make sure that
the plunger (2) is free to slide in the casing (4), that
the calibrated hole (F) is not clogged and that all parts
are fit for use.
Clean, wash and lubricate all parts. Replace the se-
als, then re-assemble the valve, fit it back in its hou-
sing on the hydraulic power pack, tighten and con-
nect the supply duct. This valve does not need to be
calibrated.
P
Fig.50-8
Fig.51-8
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the low pressure circuit

INDEX

F - Front and rear diff lock fluid supply

F1 - Description of operation........................................................ 8-58

8 - 57
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

F - Front and rear diff lock fluid supply

1
3
fS< P<t
® <9 5 d
°oOo° ®o
QO o@o
\<Q>

Fig.52-8

F 1 - Description of operation
(Fig.52-8)

The front and rear differential locks are engaged

thanks to the movement of two mechanical clutches
operated by a piston supplied with oil at a pressure of
18 bar.
This occurs when the driver uses the control button
(1) and energizes the relative solenoid valve (BLc)
mounted on the power pack (2).
Energizing allows the solenoid valve to turn on the oil
supply to the rear (3) and front (4) locks at the same
time.
The lock is released when the brake pedals (5) are
used to de-energize the solenoid valve (BLc), shut-
ting off the oil supply and opening the communication
with the outlet.
The internal return springs set the two locking mecha-
nisms back to the hold position, deactivating the ac-
tion of the two respective differentials.

8 - 58
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the low pressure circuit

INDEX

G - PTO and PTO brake fluid supply

G1-Description of operation ......................................................... 8-60

8 - 59
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

G - PTO and PTO brake fluid supply

-r"
1 m
6 o ©o
°o o1ÿ0 O @0
t*0 \g=s>
O C3>

>7 .::j

f"
* |._A

7
2 <35
0
0 JD— I

liT
! ±

fg5) m
\
\
i

i
N
1 \

s
14

i
10
tgs

11 12

Fig.53-8

G1 - Description of operation
(Fig.53-8)

The PTO is engaged when pressurized oil at 18 bar
supplies the hydraulic piston, packing the oil-cooled
hydraulic clutch (1) plates and inter-plates together,
thus transmitting engine drive to the rear PTO shaft of
the tractor (2).
When the PTO / FRn solenoid valve is energized by
the transmitted electricity, the oil outlet by the power
pack (6) through the tube (5), passes through the go-
vernor valve (4) and enters in communication with the
accumulator (3), thus engaging the power take-off.
The PTO clutch is disengaged when the solenoid val-
ve is de-energized by its control knob.
To prevent the PTO shaft from being turned by the oil-
cooled disks, there is a braking system with a disk
and 3 hydraulic pistons.
These are supplied with oil at the same pressure of
18 bar by means of the "same solenoid valve " (PTO/
FRn) but with a "distinct outlet hole (FRn)" and a "se-
parate duct", alternating with the oil supply conveyed
to the clutch (PTO).
When it is not energized by the transmitted electricity
(i.e. with the PTO clutch not powered), the solenoid
valve (PTO/FRn) allows oil to be conveyed towards
the 3 pistons of the PTO brake.
Thus, when energized, the solenoid valve (PTO/FRn)
activates the PTO clutch releasing the PTO brake
while when it is not energized, it supplies the PTO
brake pistons and releases the PTO clutch.
The accumulator (3) consists of a hollow cylinder (8),
a piston (9), a spring (10) and a cover (11) with a stop
ring (12). The hole (13) is connected to the feed pipe
of the PTO and allows oil to enter the cylinder in con-
tact with the piston (9), creating a pressure accumu-
lation.

8 - 60
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the low pressure circuit

INDEX

H - 4 WD and Fast Run fluid supply

H1 - Description of operation ....................................................... 8-62

8 - 61
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

H - 4WD and Fast Run fluid supply

r a
- r
*-L
u

n t
TX

— in
\
»J I

n
-J LJ i-1 i-J"

n n

liuUULJ L-l s
x n
T ■W /"] K XTÿ-

«a
o o°o° O ©<
r~i JZL
I O QO O ©<

2 1
B A
Fig.54-8

H1- Description of operation

(Fig.54-8)

The 4WD and Fast Run are engaged by a switch whi-

ch energizes a solenoid valve to allow oil at a pressu-
re of 18 bar to supply the two different clutch assem-
blies.
When solenoid valve (A) is energized in the 4WD fun-
ction (1), the four driving wheels are engaged with a
3% speed advance in relation to the rear wheels.
Solenoid valve (A) is automatically energized in the
Fast Run phase when the selector switch is set to the
Fast Run position and the steering angle exceeds 35°.
In this case, the oil supplies the lh clutch (2), allowing
a ratio to be engaged for the 4 driving wheels with a
78% increase in relation to the rear wheels.
In these conditions, the steering speed increases and
the steering radius is sensibly reduced.
When the steering angle returns below 35°, solenoid
valve (A) energizing switches from the Fast Run func-
tion to the 4WD function and clutch (1) is activated.
When neither of the two functions, 4WD and Fast Run,
are energizes, solenoid valve (B) is automatically ener-
gized allowing oil to flow to the outlet part through duct
(T1).

8 - 62
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the low pressure circuit

INDEX

I - Spring-on fluid supply

I1 - Description of operation ................................................ 8-64

8 - 63
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

I - Spring - on fluid supply

<L -i mSJI
J
i y )
_t'3S
JSÿ

BF°E
10
4ÿ1;
HII a
Y
T'
fa 3y£ sfi
i id!
H±j±r TE±r I

11
/TTÿ

o 0°0 o OQ
o QO
° o oc

A Fig.55-8

I 1 - Description of operation
(Fig.55-8)

The 2Spring-on" 4WD disengaging system is supplied

as an alternative to 4WD engagement with the hydrau-
lic clutch.
Spring-on is a device that mechanically engages the
four driving wheels. Disengagement is controlled
hydraulically.
When the tractor engine is at a standstill, the 4WD is
always engaged, thus guaranteeing a safe braking
action.
Solenoid valve (A) energizing allows oil at a pressure
of 18 bar to disengage the 4WD thanks to the axial
movement of the sleeve (11), from position (X) to po-
sition (Y).

8 - 64
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the low pressure circuit

INDEX

L - Hydraulic Hi-Lo fluid supply

L 1-Description of operation ................................................ 8-66

8 - 65
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

L - Hydraulic Hi-Lo fluid supply

X

nDM)

i— -Kh a

1
II J
t xr
A

— a_o o0
a
/Tlx.

B
o 0°0
o QO o o°
><Q> gX-S
Fig.56-8

L1 - Description of operation
(Fig.56-8)

The electro-hydraulic half-gear that allows a 20%

ground speed reduction is controlled by means of a
button on the gearshift lever.
When the solenoid valve (A) is energized, the oil sup-
plies the Hi-Lo assembly (B), thus engaging the Hi
(fast) speeds since the pressure of the oil blocks the
hydraulic clutch and releases the brake, achieving a
direct drive function.
When the solenoid valve is de-energized, the pressu-
re of the oil drops to 0 bar, allowing the epicyclic final
drive to operate. This reduces the speed by 20% and
obtains the Lo (slow) speeds.

8 - 66
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the high pressure circuit

INDEX

Sect.4 Main components of the high pressure circuit

A - Trailer brake valve

A1 - General description ............................................................ 8-68

A2 - Main components............................................................... 8-69

A3 - Trailer brake valve (Italy) .................................................... 8-70

A3.1 - Phase with trailer hitched and brakes disengaged............ 8-70
A3.2 - Phase with trailer hitched and brakes engaged.... 8-71
A3.3 - Phase with parking brake engaged and brakes diseng ..... 8-72

A4 - Trailer brake valve (Export) ............................................... 8-73

A4.1 - Phase with trailer hitched and brakes disengaged............ 8-73
A4.2 - Phase with trailer hitched and brakes engaged.... 8-74

A5 - Inspecting and regulating the operating pressure values ............ 8-76

A5.1 - Trailer brake valve (Italy) ......................................... 8-76
A5.2 - Trailer brake valve (Export) ..................................... 8-80

A6 - Special tools ....................................................................... 8-82

8 - 67
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

A- Trailer brake valve

A1 - General description
(Fig.59-8)

The Trailer brake valve (A Fig.57/58-8) is installed in

the rear part of the tractor. It supplies fluid to the trai-
ler by means of the oil union (1).
Oil reaches the valve via the high pressure circuit with 'a r © L
2
absolute priority.
Oil that is not used by the braking action of the trailer, :C
7i
is sent towards the auxiliary control valves.
The trailer brake engages at the same time as the
tractor brakes and when this happens, an indicator
light (2) on the dashboard comes on.
The tractor can be equipped with two types of valve:
1 – Trailer valve (Italy) (Fig.57/60-8) Fig.57-8
2 – Trailer valve (Export) (Fig.58/61-8)
As compared to the "Export" valve, the "Italy" type
trailer valve has an additional device in the lower part
with a rod connected to the parking brake.
Italian regulations require trailers to be equipped with
a self-braking device. It must allow the trailer to brake
the moment in which this is detached from the tractor.
Moreover, this braking mechanism must operate when
o
a
the tractor stops and the parking brake is applied. To
tow the trailer, oil must therefore be delivered to the
"trailer braking" device at a constant pressure betwe-
en 10 and 15 bar even when the brakes are disenga-
ged in order to keep the mechanical brake in the di-
sengaged status.
C@ kg]
Comply with the instructions below to correctly con-
nect and disconnect the flexible trailer brake hose from IsJ
the union at the rear of the tractor with trailer valves of
the "Italy" type (1 Fig.58-8) and to operate in condi- Fig.58-8 ® ®
tions of the utmost safety.
The trailer-tractor connection tube can be connected
and disconnected with the engine either running or at
a standstill:

With the engine at a standstill: there are no difficul-

ties in either engaging or disengaging since there is
no oil pressure in the circuit.

With the engine running: it is absolutely essential to
always engage the hand brake since it ensures that
no pressure remains in the circuit.
A
WARNING: this is an extremely important
operation and must always be carried out
before the trailer is unhitched from the
tractor each time, since it ensures immediate ac-
tivation of the the automatic safety braking system
with which this trailer braking system is obligato-
rily equipped.

8 - 68
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Trailer brake valve

3X
11
.0
;*
/
.OK
f
14
10

c
82 0
c o,

2b
o
O,

A
Fig.59-8

A2 - Main components

$-
i
$- 4 i
m

Fig.60-8 Fig.61-8

8 - 69
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Trailer brake valve

E1 E2 P N T
K2 C G Q G2 K
G1

H
A

v\
W
%
n B

Y7777777}
Y///sfry///s
-.\\\\i
VZ7/ZZ6
L\\\H iR
/
3
? m
V K1 Y
O AV

• O
v
J X\v
M
G3 T
L R F D S Fig.62-8

A - Quick coupling to connect the trailer brake A3 - Trailer brake valve (Italy)
B - Control valve activating plunger (Fig.62-8)
C - Pump - power lift connecting race
D - Chamber
E1 / E2 - Pressure switch A3.1 - Phase with trailer hitched and main brakes
F - Chamber disengaged (Fig.62-8)
G - 140 bar pressure upkeep spring
G1 - 10-15 bar pressure upkeep spring Oil delivered by the pump passes through duct "P"
G2 - Sleeve return spring (W) until is reaches race "C" after which it proceeds on
G3 - Spring for plunger (L) one side in channel "R" in order to supply the trailer
H - Trailer brake output chamber via chamber "H", de-activating the above mentioned
K - 10-15 bar pressure adjuster shims self-braking device. The same oil delivered by the
K1 - Plunger stroke adjuster springs (Q) pump passes through race "C" and is also in commu-
K2 - 140 bar pressure adjuster shims nication with duct "N" which supplies the power lift.
L - Trailer brake fluid supply control plunger This communication is ensured by the position assu-
M - Rod connecting to parking brake med by the main plunger “Q”.
N - Power lift fluid supply By acting on this latter, spring "G1" ensures that a
O - Return plunger constant pressure value of around 10-15 bar is main-
P - Pump fluid supply tained on the delivery part, a necessary condition to
Q - Main plunger disengage the trailer brake.
R - Trailer brake fluid supply channel
S - Internal brake rod channel
T - Discharge channel
Y - Fluid supply from trailer brakes
W - Sleeve

8 - 70
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Trailer brake valve

E1 E2 P N T
K2 C G Q G2 K

W
t G1

m
/ /'
/'
A /
B
H /
/
/0
of /
/y
X
\

(/v/ÿÿitoÿ Tvpfc[fl ft ~o
'0
/
KS
0 0 Q 0 0

T
QjO I
gÿsimÿm
\
z
O V "V
>r
/
K1 IY
g
jpg /
i
X.
.\\v

M
G3 \
L R F D S
Fig.63-8

A - Quick coupling to connect the trailer brake A3.2 - Phase with trailer hitched and main brakes
B - Control valve activating plunger engaged (Fig.63-8)
C - Pump - power lift connecting race
D - Chamber Oil supplied by the engaged brakes shifts plunger "B"
E1 / E2 - Pressure switch which thus compresses spring "G" and moves main
F - Chamber plunger "Q". This latter movement allows all the oil
G - 140 bar pressure upkeep spring delivered by the pump to flow into channel "R" and to
G1 - 10-15 bar pressure upkeep spring then reach chamber "H" via race "F", thus supplying
G2 - Sleeve return spring (W) the trailer brake until a max. pressure of 140 bar is
G3 - Spring for plunger (L) reached. Once the braking action has been obtained,
H - Trailer brake output chamber the pressure increase shifts plunger "O" which mo-
K - 10-15 bar pressure adjuster shims ves main plunger "Q" to the neutral position, thus ope-
K1 - Plunger stroke adjuster springs (Q) ning the passage to channel "N" in order to supply the
K2 - 140 bar pressure adjuster shims power lift.
L - Trailer brake fluid supply control plunger
M - Rod connecting to parking brake
N - Power lift fluid supply
O - Return plunger
P - Pump fluid supply
Q - Main plunger
R - Trailer brake fluid supply channel
S - Internal brake rod channel
T - Discharge channel
Y - Fluid supply from trailer brakes
W - Sleeve

8 - 71
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Trailer brake valve

E1 E2 P N T
K2 C G Q G2 K
G1
W I ft I I I
>>
n
■

A /
B
H /-ÿ
/
zzk %
j
// ///
z
3 \\M k
tZzny/Z/'/M/, °.TT7T L
V77777777

r
ISII§Sÿ\':
W/

\\
v\
.//
(///A7 K1
X/ yj
Y

miHHs
O V
.,\
i-L/ ■■
VM

t-1 oDr*
k\\\\\W xyvooii > > i> N.\

V/ XI
/
x M
G3
L R F D S
Fig.64-8

A - Quick coupling to connect the trailer brake A3.3 - Phase with parking brake engaged and main
B - Control valve activating plunger brakes disengaged (Fig.64-8)
C - Pump - power lift connecting race
D - Chamber When the parking brake is engaged by means of rod
E1 / E2 - Pressure switch "M", discharge outlet "T" is set in communication with
F - Chamber chamber "S" inside the rod. This this latter is connected
G - 140 bar pressure upkeep spring to chamber "H" which supplies the trailer, there will be
G1 - 10-15 bar pressure upkeep spring almost null pressure in it. This releases the automatic
G2 - Sleeve return spring (W) trailer braking device. Oil delivered by the pump is
G3 - Spring for plunger (L) conveyed into chamber "D" and also supplies the
H - Trailer brake output chamber hydraulic power lift via duct "N" which is in communi-
K - 10-15 bar pressure adjuster shims cation with race "C".
K1 - Plunger stroke adjuster springs (Q)
K2 - 140 bar pressure adjuster shims
L - Trailer brake fluid supply control plunger
M - Rod connecting to parking brake
N - Power lift fluid supply
O - Return plunger
P - Pump fluid supply
Q - Main plunger
R - Trailer brake fluid supply channel
S - Internal brake rod channel
T - Discharge channel
Y - Fluid supply from trailer brakes
W - Sleeve

8 - 72
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Trailer brake valve

C P N T
Q
I t f G

H
A zz m B
::
XWÿVwwwÿ o-ÿ-a-, h -vT [\\\N
Z
p P p Pp

spi
O
yyirÿ
iZZZZz
nwh LISZJ Y////////S
sills \\\\ \ \ \\'\? LXWJ
VA Y//////7}
\ \ \ \ \
Iv

O // I
Y
R J
Fig.65-8

A - Quick coupling to connect the trailer brake A4 - Trailer brake valve (Export)
B - Control valve activating plunger
C - Pump - power lift connecting race
A4.1 - Phase with trailer hitched and main brakes
G - 140 bar pressure upkeep spring
disengaged (Fig.65-8)
H - Trailer brake outlet
N - To power lift
Oil delivered by the pump passes through duct "P"
O - Return plunger
and, via race "C", proceeds through duct "N", thus
P - From pump
supplying the hydraulic power lift.
Q - Main control valve plunger
Oil in chamber "H", which communicates with the trai-
R - Trailer brake fluid supply race
ler, has almost null pressure since it is in communica-
T - To outlet
tion with outlet "T" via race "R" and the chamber of
Y - From tractor brakes
spring "G". In this phase, the trailer is therefore free
J - Plug
from all braking devices.

8 - 73
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Trailer brake valve
P N T
C Q
G
f I (
A B
z ■
H z
w\
z
P\ ,
i
X"
I
Y
O
R
Fig.66-8
A - Quick coupling to connect the trailer brake A4.2 - Phase with tractor hitched and main
B - Control valve activating plunger brakes engaged (Fig.66-8)
C - Power lift pump connecting races
G - 140 bar pressure upkeep spring Oil from the engaged main brakes shifts plunger "B"
H - Trailer brake outlet which thus compresses spring "G" and shifts main
N - To power lift plunger "Q". This movement allows the oil delivered
O - Return plunger by the pump to flow straight into race "R" via duct
P - From pump "P", thus reaching chamber "H" and supplying the
Q - Main control valve plunger trailer brake until a max. pressure of 140 bar is rea-
R - Trailer brake fluid supply race ched. Once the braking action has been obtained,
T - To outlet the pressure increase shifts plunger "O" which mo-
Y - From tractor brakes ves main plunger "Q" back to the neutral position,
thus opening the passage to channel "N" which sup-
plies the hydraulic power lift.
8 - 74
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 75
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking and regulating the operating pressure values

A5 - Checking and regulating the
operating pressure values

A
The trailer brake valves are strictly tested when they are Each operation involving the trailer brake
assembled after which their functionality and operating pres- valve must be carried out with the utmost care
sure values are also checked. They therefore do not need to and in conditions of the maximum cleanli-
be regulated in any way. Only if the operating pressure va- ness.
lues differ from those prescribed should the valves be adju-
sted. Make sure you access the shims to change without
modifying the positions of the other shims and carry out the
operation in conditions of the utmost cleanliness.

A5.1 - Trailer brake valve (Italy) U

A
(Fig.68- 8)
o O j
O O O
A - Mechanical trailer brake disengaging
pressure: 10-15 bar (shims K)
o o / V
If a pressure gauge applied to the quick coupling (A)
detects a mechanical trailer brake disengaging pres- o o
BD
0
sure value differing from 10 to 15 bar, adjust as indi-
cated below:

1- Remove the complete valve from the tractor, di-

sconnecting all the pipes and protecting their ends
Fig.67-8
with plugs to prevent dust from infiltrating;

2 - Remove the four bolts that fix the piston cover (U

Fig.67-8);

3 - Remove the assembly formed by the stem (Z),

thrust plate (V), main plunger (Q), springs (G2 and
G4) and the relative internal components from the
valve body (Fig.69/70-8);

Keep the plunger (Q) horizontal during this operation

to prevent the return plunger (O) from dropping into
one of the many holes in the sleeve (W);

4 - Remove the spring (G1) after having demounted

the thrust plate (V) from the assembly;

5 - Add or remove shims (K), remembering that 1 mm

of thickness varies the pressure by about 1.5 bar
with the engine at a 900-1000 RPM rate;

8 - 76
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking and regulating the operating pressure values

Trailer brake valve

E1 E2 P N T
K2 G Q G2 K J G4
G1
W
A Z B
H V 4
V\

K1 Y
O

V
M-

y r X\v
M
G3
Fig.68-8

6 - Remount the valve in the reverse order to the way 7 - Apply the pressure gauge again and make sure
it was demounted. Remember to wash and blow that the operating pressure is between 10 and 15
all the parts with compressed air and to adequa- bar. Repeat the previously described operations
tely oil them; if this is not the case.

G2 U G4 G2 Q V G1 Z

oO
n \
oO O
/y
7
/
o o
S
(77
Q O
v
7ÿ K
/

M
Fig.69-8 Fig.70-8

8 - 77
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking and regulating the operating pressure values

B - 140 bar pressure setting for the trailer brake
(shims k2) 171 IDR GL

If a pressure gauge applied to the quick coupling (A)

with the main tractor brakes engaged detects a mecha-
nical trailer brake disengaging pressure value of more
or less than 140 bar, adjust as indicated below (Fig.72/
73-8):

1 - Strictly comply with the instructions given in the

first four points on page 8-76 for the 10-15 bar
pressure setting; J

2 - To access the shims (K2), unscrew plug (J) with a

10 mm wrench. Since spring (G) is fairly preloa-
ded, it is advisable to mount plunger (Q) on tool
171 IDR GL to allow the spring to be further com Q
pressed, thus making plug (J) easier to unscrew
(J);

3 - Add or remove shims (K), remembering that 1 mm

of thickness varies the pressure by about 1.5 bar
with the engine at a 900-1000 RPM rate;

4 - Remount the valve in the reverse order to the way

it was demounted. Remember to wash and blow
all the parts with compressed air and to adequa-
tely oil them;

5 - Always use tool 171 IDR GL to remount the plug

(J);

6 - Apply the pressure gauge again and make sure Fig.71-8

that the operating pressure is 140 bar. Repeat the
previously described operations if this is not
the case.

8 - 78
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking and regulating the operating pressure values

Trailer brake valve
E1 E2 P N T
K2 K
G Q G2 J G1 G4
W
A /
z Z B
H x V
X
7
4
v
v\ - /
/
/

WWl
■T////K
(A
.U-ÿ-
P 7
Y//////////
7?777/.
-WWl L\\\ i
>5
r K1 Y
V
O
r o
v
r
V/ V/ ,\v

ss
M
G3
Fig.72-8

prÿpri D .

Q K2 G K1 J Z

Fig.73-8

8 - 79
* HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking and regulating the operating pressure values

A5.2 - Trailer brake valve (Export)
If a pressure gauge applied to the quick coupling (A) A
with the main tractor brakes engaged detects a mecha-
nical trailer brake disengaging pressure value of more
or less than 140 bar, adjust as indicated below: 11 o@
1 - Thoroughly wash the valve and leave it mounted
l'
o@ © fj)
on the tractor;
\
2 - Unscrew and demount the quick coupling (A
Fig.74-8);
u \

3 - Remove the assembly from the sleeve (W) and

from the plunger (Q Fig.77-8); Fig.74-8
4 - To access the shims (K2), unscrew plug (J) with a
10 mm wrench. Since spring (G) is fairly preloa-
ded, it is advisable to mount plunger (Q) on tool
171 IDR GL to allow the spring to be further com
pressed, thus making plug (J) easier to unscrew 171 IDR GL
(J);

5 - Add or remove shims (K), remembering that 1 mm

of thickness varies the pressure by about 1.5 bar I

with the engine at a 900-1000 RPM rate;

6 - Remount the valve in the reverse order to the way L /J

it was demounted. Remember to wash and blow
all the parts with compressed air and to adequa- ]
tely oil them; J

7 - Always use tool 171 IDR GL to remount the plug I

(J);

8 - Apply the pressure gauge again and make sure Q

I
that the operating pressure is 140 bar. Repeat the
previously described operations if this is not
the case.
[
I I]
I
I ± I1

I Fig.75-8

8 - 80
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking and regulating the operating pressure values

Trailer brake valve

C P N T
Q
I t t G

H
A /
/ ■ B

/ \

'
rÿ— J-T [X VT r.wi

u ,0ÿ00

777777777,
&
OTin*
WW

=ÿ~7> -•ÿ
7

O Y
R J

Fig.76-8

W Q J A

o o n*i o0
\ /
o@ @ fj
\v k)
0}\
fc 0 I
\

Fig.77-8

8 - 81
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

A6 - Special tools
171 IDR GL
Compressor to demount and remount the 140 bar calibrating spring for the trailer brake valve

8 - 82
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the high pressure circuit

INDEX

B - Supplementary control valves

B 1 - Description of operation ............................................. 8-84

B 2 - Main components ....................................................... 8-85
B 3 - Inlet unit ...................................................................... 8-86
B 4 - Std S/DA control valve ............................................... 8-89
B 5 - Floating control valve ................................................. 8-90
B 6 - Control valve with automatic release ......................... 8-91
B 7 - Control valve for hydraulic engines ............................ 8-92
B 8 - Closing component .................................................... 8-93

8 - 83
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Sect.4 - Main high pressure circuit components

B - Supplementary control valves
B 1 - Description of operation
(Fig. 78-8)
The supplementary control valves are mounted on the
central rear side of the tractor, fixed to the body of the
hydraulic lift and are used to control the external rams.
They are part of the hydraulic lift circuit and therefore
use the same oil as the transmission, in the open cen-
tre circuit.
The control levers of the supplementary control val-
ves are installed on the console to the driver's right
and activate the stems of the control valves themsel-
ves by means of a flexible harness.
They consist of an inlet unit (E) where oil from the
pump flows in by priority, encountering the 180 bar
calibrating valve (1), one or more elements (up to a
maximum of 3), and an outlet unit (U) fitted with the
tube (b) that supplies the hydraulic lift.
The control valves are supplied at the same time but
activation of one of them blocks oil supply to the suc-
cessive control valves and the lift, preventing contem-
poraneous operation.
If, on the other hand, the flow divider (supplied on re-
quest) (E) is mounted on the inlet unit, this regulates
the flow of oil conveyed to the first control valve, lea-
ving the remaining oil from the pump to a second con-
trol valve or to the hydraulic lift.
The control valves are supplied in the following ver-
sions:
1) Standard single and double acting control
valve.
2) Single and double acting control valve with
automatic release.
3) Single and double acting control valve with floa-
ting position.
4) Control valve for hydraulic engines.

r
j
,o

C &

IE
x

o
O!
Q
q
Fig.78-8

8 - 84
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Supplementary control valves

B 2 - Main components

Front view
c tfii JjB. JfS
{&i Rear view

m m
0
p 4JH
mrÿrni n,
W)
2) "
\* V: (c *.
1 \

E 2 U Fig.79-8

1 - 180 bar calibrating valve

2 - Control valve stem 1
3 - Adjuster screw S/DA
7 - Closing plug
E - Inlet unit <> <> <j>

U - Closing unit
T - Outlet
C - Lift supply
3-\ X ai
+ 1
DF - Flow divider HO
y y y

T1 c K D rm XT'

u
Pc 0 0
© Tb
S B A Ta P
0
c
ts
T P T35 L
Lc
y J/
Oil supply holes A
0
A/B - External cylinder supply
P - Inlet from pump o, 4L
Pc - Supply to successive control Pc P 7'~~ E DF
valves or lift
Ta - Outlet
Tb - Outlet
Fig.80-8

8 - 85
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Supplementary control valves

B.3 - Inlet unit with flow divider
(D/F) (Fig.81/82-8)
This consists of a casing that delimits the initial part
of a group of supplementary control valves into which
oil is conveyed straight from the pump. This plate can
be supplied with or without flow divider. In this latter
version, the plate will be equipped with the calibrating
valve alone.
The oil is thus conveyed to the inlet duct (P) where it
comes into immediate contact with the calibrating val-
ve (1) which determines the maximum limit of the pres-
sure for the operating outlets (A or B) of the control
valves themselves. Once the maximum pressure of
180 bar has been reached, the valve (2) opens, mo-
ving towards the right and overcoming the force of the
spring (3), thus allowing the excess oil to freely di-
scharge into the tube (T). The calibrating valve (1) has
an adjuster screw and relativce check nut to regulate
the maximum setting from the outside. When the flow
rate adjuster knob (9) keeps the stem (6) completely
shifted towards the left, oil arriving from the pump
through duct (H) will be unable to communicate with
chamber (I) which communicates with the first control
valve through hole (P1).
Thus the oil passes through holes (F), enters the
chamber (G), moves the plunger (5) towards the ri-
ght, opening the communication with duct (Pc) which
supplies the other control valves and the hydraulic lift.
When the adjuster knob (9) is turned again, it moves
the stem (6) towards the right, opening the communi-
cation between duct (H) and the chamber (I).
In these conditions, the pressure created in chamber
(I) helps the spring (7) to oppose the pressure in cham-
ber (G), causing the plunger (5) to move and allowing
oil to supply hole (P1), delivering an oil flow proportio-
nal to the position assumed by the stem (6) by means
of the knob (9). Maximum knob (9) rotation is one turn
with an axial movement of the stem (6) of 1.5 mm.

E 1 4

/ÿ

3
F 9
T
l T
-y- fTj
■-fes

/
/
_ /

G Z2I
5 I ) ( PI ) ( H 7 6 DF 8
Fig.81-8

8 - 86
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Supplementary control valves

1
<§>
<*>

0
% ((
0
0
0
I (c
10 Bo
v0 c)
,0

0 0

,0
w
E - Inlet unit.
DF - Flow divider governor unit.
1 - Maximum pressure adjuster valve (180 bar). 11 DF
10 - Closing plug.
11 - Closing plug (mounted in the absence of the flow governor).
Fig.-82-8

8 - 87
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Supplementary control valves

A © (3 ©
<g)
© vl (

0 A

0
0 0

5 3 4
B

(j
K r;

0 A

OVVV
0
0 0

A - Exploded drawing of standard single and double-acting control valve components

B - Exploded drawing of single and double-acting control valve with automatic release

3 - Screw to switch from double to single-acting mode

4 - Ball
5 - Stem
17 - Return spring assembly
18 - Control valve assembly
Fig.83-8

8 - 88
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Supplementary control valves

3 4 B A 18 5

YT

7\

J r<2,
TT
t" >
wyy M

17 8) (Pc) (Pb) (Tb) (Pa) (P)(6 Ta

Fig.84-8

B.4 - Standard single and double

acting control valve (Fig.83/84-8)
Oil from the pump contemporaneously reaches cham-
ber Pa and continues on to chamber Pb.
When the stem is in the hold position, oil from the
pump in chamber Pa moves the non-return valve (6)
towards the right and reaches chamber (P) where the-
re is no outlet. The race of stem (5) allows oil from
chamber Pb to pass into chamber Pc, ensuring a con-
tinuous flow to the next control valves or to the hydrau-
lic lift.
If the stem is moved towards the left, oil from cham-
ber P can proceed through hole A, supplying the ex-
ternal cylinder. Oil returning from hole B passes throu-
gh duct Tb towards the outlet.
If the stem is moved towards the right, oil from cham-
ber P can proceed through hole B in order to supply
the other side of the external cylinder.
Oil returning from hole A passes through duct Ta to
the outlet.
Once lever action terminates, the stem is always set
back to the neutral position by spring (8).
Unscrew the converter screw (3) and plug hole B to
obtain single-acting operation.
The slackened off screw (3) allows the ball (4) to open
the communication between chamber B and Pc.
When the stem is moved towards the right in these
conditions, oil from the pump is forced to drain towar-
ds continuity channel PC, annulling its previous dou-
ble-acting function.

8 - 89
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Supplementary control valves

11) 3 4 B A 5

ITfn

jwyy
/ /

9) (d Pc Pb) (Pa) (Tb)(P)(6 Ta

Fig.85-8

B.5 - Single and double-acting control

valve with floating position
(Fig.85-8)

As compared to the standard single and double-ac-

ting version, this control valve has a further stem set-
ting towards the left in which the floating position is
obtained. In this position, the stem (5) is mechanically
blocked thanks to the balls (9) that set in the race of
stem (d) owing to the pushing action of the tapered
ring (11).
In these conditions, oil from the pump passes throu-
gh continuity duct Pc and proceeds towards the next
control valves of the hydraulic lift, while the two sup-
ply holes A and B are both in communication with
outlets Ta and Tb.
Single or double-acting operation occurs normally as
described for the standard control valve.

8 - 90
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Supplementary control valves

9 E B A 5

F
8 AV\M
N

i
>-ÿ<
S
— A -4- SOT

17) 16) (15 14 Z 13 Y 12) (Tb) ( X ) P) Ta

Fig.86-8

B.6 - Single or double-acting control

valve with automatic release
(Fig.86-8)

As compared to standard single and double-acting to flow into chamber (y).

operation, the control lever of this control valve can
lock to supply outlets A and B with automatic return to
the neutral position when the external cylinder rea-
ches end of travel.
The stem (5) is locked thanks to the action of the plun-
ger (15) which, thanks to its external taper, presses
on the balls (9) so that they remain housed in cavities
E or F, causing the stem to block (5).
When the external cylinder reaches end of travel, the
very fast pressure increase causes pin (12) move-
ment by means of holes (X), allowing pressurized oil
Since it has a fair amount of play within the internal
hole of the stem (5), the spring guide (13) allows pres-
surized oil to reach chamber (Z), moving the plunger
(15) towards the left and., consequently, relieving the
pressure of the taper on the balls (9), allowing the
spring (18) to set the stem (5) back in a neutral posi-
tion.
The maximum opening pressure of the pin (12) can
be adjusted by means of the screw (16) after the nut
(17) has been slackened off.

8 - 91
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Supplementary control valves

11 3 4 B A 5

, 1

©
>ÿÿÿ<-
"A J
z.
y} s

9 d Pc Pb) (Pa)(Tb)(P) (Ta

Fig.87-8

B.7 - Control valve for hydraulic

engines (Fig.87-8)
The control valve that supplies a hydraulic engine dif-
fers in two ways in relation to the standard single and
double-acting type:
1- with the stem (5) in neutral position, the two cham-
bers A and B are always in communication with out-
lets Ta and Tb so that the pressure can always be set
to 0, allowing the motor to spin by inertia. 2- blocking
of the stem when this latter is moved to both the right
and left thanks to the action of the balls (9) pushed by
the tapered ring (11). The stem must be set back to
the neutral position by the operator.
Consult the description about the standard control
valve for the operation of this model.

8 - 92
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Supplementary control valves

B 8 - Closing unit

0 V 0
0

0
0

E Pc P Tb Ta
C - Communication with the power lift
P - Communication with the oil from the pump
Pc - Communication with continuous oil flow
Ta & Tb - Communication with the outlet
7 - Closing plugs Fig.88-8

8 - 93
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 94
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Main components of the high pressure circuit

INDEX

C - Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 1 - Drawing of the assembly and main lift components ........................ 8-96

C 2 - Description of power lift operation ...................................... 8-98
C 2.1 - Position control mode ............................................... 8-98
C 2.2 - Draft control mode.................................................... 8-99
C 2.3 - Mixed position and draft control mode ................... 8-101
C 2.4 - Floating mode ........................................................ 8-101
C 3 - Drawing of the assembly and main control valve components .... 8-102
C 4 - Description of control valve operation and phases ...................... 8-104
C 4.1 - Neutral phase ......................................................... 8-104
C 4.2 - Delivery phase ....................................................... 8-105
C 4.3 - Discharge phase .................................................... 8-106
C 5 - Power lift removal from the tractor.................................... 8-107
C 6 - Dismantling, inspection and pre-adjustment .................... 8-108
C 7 - Remounting and re-positioning in the tractor ................... 8-112
C 8 - Valve system removal from the tractor ............................. 8-115
C 9 - Dismantling and inspecting the valve system .................. 8-116
C 10 - Remounting, hydraulic inspections and adjustments..... 8-118
C 11 - Hydraulic inspections and adjustments.......................... 8-120
C 11.1 - Checking and adjusting the antishock valve (5) ............. 8-120
C 11.2 - Checking for leaks from the discharge valve (4) ............ 8-121
C 11.3 - Checking for leaks from the check valve (3) ................... 8-122
C 11.4 - Checking and calibrating the max. pressure valve (7).... 8-124
C 11.5 - Checking for leaks from the delivery duct (P)................. 8-124
C 12 - Power lift adjustment on the tractor ................................ 8-126
C 12.1 - Sensitivity adjustment .......................................... 8-127
C 12.2 - Position control adjustment. ................................. 8-128
C 12.3 - Draft control adjustment. ...................................... 8-129
C 13 - Troubleshooting .............................................................. 8-130
C 14 - Special tools ................................................................... 8-132

8 - 95
A HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 1 - Drawing of the assembly

p s

o
%c,
f. cC

1 2 4
8
O \P
O

IFuaV o 4 I i
y
—— >yift
1
— —'
—
U 1 '1ÿ 1
Ll1-ÿ1

9 7
Fig.89-8

1 - Lift housing 10 - Group of internal levers

2 - Lift link P - Position control lever mounted on the
3 - Oscillating support control sector
4 - Link shaft P1 - Position control lever mounted
5 - Link control crank on the lift
6 - Piston S - Draft control lever mounted on the
7 - Cylinder control sector
8 - Control valve S1 - Draft control lever mounted on the lift
9 - Draft control lever

8 - 96
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

Main components

3 1 2

0
ko &
s
2 n
0 0
ess ■ x,

'WXPL
t$
5 (6 cy 8
«3 I
o

10 kL

7
[«a§ÿWÿ A
5C
ifl

(9) @ (SI

Fig.90-8

8 - 97
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 2 -Description of lift The links are lifted by moving the position control le-
ver (P) upwards. In this case, the levers will behave in
operation the following way.
Enbloc with the shaft (G), the crank will turn in a
The hydraulic lift is that part of the tractor connected clockwise direction, allowing the roller (b) to slide on
by rods to the external implements which it lifts and the position cam (42), turning the tappet (15) in a
lowers. clockwise direction. This latter transmits anticlockwise
It consists of a lift unit, one or more single-acting cylin- rotation to the transmission lever (14 and 21) by me-
ders, two external levers that command a control val- ans of the damper (20, thus setting the spool valve
ve which directs the oil where the operator desires. shaft (1) in the delivery position (c) and consequently
There are four lift operating modes: lifting the links.
a) Position control mode. During the link lifting movement, the crank (38) with
b) Draft control mode. pin (27) turns in an anticlockwise direction and, by
c) Mixed position and draft mode. means of the shackle (25), turns the position cam (42)
d) Floating mode. clockwise.
Two control levers determine three distinct phases in When the roller (b) encounters the tilted surface of
the control valve: the cam (15) which, by means of the damper (20),
Delivery or lifting phase, neutral phase and exhaust enables anticlockwise rotation of the tappet (15), this,
or lowering phase. by means of the damper (20), turns the transmission
lever (14-21) clockwise, pushed by the spring of the
C 2.1 - Position control mode control valve shaft (1) which moves to the neutral po-
sition (n), stopping the movement of the links. During
(Fig.91-8)
the link lowering phase, movement of the above men-
Position the draft control lever (S) against the lower tioned levers occurs in the opposite direction. Both in
stop on the sector to completely further the roller (a) the lifting and lowering phases, the position of the links
that slides on the tappet (15) and on the draft cam corresponds to a determined position of the position
(28). control lever (P) on the sector.
This prevents the draft levers from influencing posi-
tion control mode operation.

® (p (G) (40) (b 42) (15) (27) (25) (38,

n
c<t=6=C>s
V 21 \ yvvwwyww'
N
\
\ \
\ \
> \ \
\\\\ /
\ /
x- \ \ /
\ \
\ /
x l: o
\
v
/
/ -Q- x
A \
\
\
]//», V '
'W
A O '

ro
\ u
/ M3) 1
\
\
—
— x?
xi a
s /

1 @@(20) (41 @(a)(28) (32) 0

Fig.91-8

8 - 98
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 2.2 -Draft control mode
(Fig.92-8)
When the position control lever (P) is set against the
lower stop on the sector, the crank (40) reaches its
extreme anticlockwise rotation position.
In this position, the roller (b) lowers completely from
the tilted surface of the position cam (42), allowing
the tappet (15) to turn in an anticlockwise direction
and the transmission lever (14-21) to turn clockwise,
pushed by the spring of the shaft (1) which is in the
small outlet (s) position.
The position levers will therefore be unable to influen-
ce controlled draft mode operation.
When the control lever (S) is set against the upper
stop on the sector, the draft shaft (H) is made to turn
in a clockwise direction.
Enbloc with the shaft (H), the crank (26) reaches its
extreme clockwise rotation position and, by means of
the rod (30), moves the roller (a) which reacts on the
draft cam (28), turning the tappet (15) in a clockwise
direction. This latter turns the transmission lever (14-
21) in an anticlockwise direction, thus setting the con-
trol valve shaft (1) to the loading position (c) and con-
sequently lifting the links.
The links only stop when the piston comes into con-
tact with the end of travel pin (16).
This, by means of the rod (17), turns the lever (14-21)
in a clockwise direction, compressing the spring of
the damper (20) and thus allowing the shaft (1) to shift
to the neutral position (n), pushed outwards by its
spring.
When the control lever (S) is pushed down, the levers
behave in the following way.
Enbloc with the draft shaft (H), the crank (26) turns in
an anticlockwise direction and, by means of the rod
(30), allows the roller (a) to slide on the tappet (15).
When it encounters the tilted surface of the draft cam
(28), the roller (a) allows the tappet (15) to turn in an
anticlockwise direction and this latter, with the dam-
per (20), turns the transmission lever (14-21)
clockwise, thus allowing the control valve shaft (1) to
move to the neutral position (n).
By continuing to move downwards to the exhaust po-
sition (s), the lever (S) lowers the links.

© @ o
p© © ® /®
n
c<={\=£> s
\\v ASWWWWWY
/
/
xxxxzztx X
\
X
\
\
Mb< O
V/°; O
o_7
r0'
o f©V --H=T7
o
o E©
Rp<0=9=£> RN
1
©© @©@ @®@ 0

©
Fig.92-8

8 - 99
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

Infatti nella parte iniziale della corsa in basso della
leva di comando sforzo (S) non si manifesta ancora il
corrispondente abbassamento dei bracci.
Lo sforzo di trazione sul terzo punto (6) sollecita il
tirante (4) nel senso indicato dalla freccia (RP) facen-
do ruotare in senso orario la manovella (32) e la cam-
ma sforzo (28) fissa sullo stesso perno.
Quando il piano inclinato della camma sforzo (28) in-
contra il rullo (a) si ottiene la rotazione oraria del bi-
lanciere (15) che, tramite l’ammortizzatore (20) fa ruo-
tare in senso antiorario la leva di rinvio (14-21) spo-
stando così lo stelo del distributore (1) in posizione di
neutro (n) e arrestando il movimento dei bracci.
Con l’aumentare dello sforzo di trazione la camma
sforzo (28) sposta maggiormente il rullo (a) incremen-
tando il movimento sopra descritto.
Lo stelo del distributore (1) si sposta dalla posizione
di neutro (n) a quella di carico (c) con conseguente
sollevamento dei bracci.
Quando lo sforzo di trazione diminuisce, lo stelo (1),
ritorna in posizione di neutro oppure di abbassamen-
to con azione dei leveraggi inversa a quella sopra
descritta.

G (26)
21 H) /(g)
P© n
c<=(S=c> s
\wmwwwwv
/
/
WWNÿTS X
X
X
X
X
WP XI
o
v/°)
JO (©\
"__“5 o
r0"
oroi
--H=T7
7ÿ_ o
°/ l

Rp<0=9=> RN
1 20)(l6) @@© ®@® ©
Fig.92-8

8 - 100
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Mechanical hydraulic power lift
C 2.3 - Mixed position and draft
mode (Intermix)
Proceed in the following way to use the lift in this con-
dition:
Set the position control lever (P) on the lower stop on
the sector until the maximum work depth is obtained.
Establish the minimum desired width by means of the
draft control lever, raising it from the anulling position
so that, by reacting on the draft cam (28), the roller
(a) sets the shaft of the control valve (1) to the lifting
position and achieves a further upward movement of
the lift links.
Owing to the position previously established by the
control lever (P), the tappet (15), the roller (b) and the
position cam (42) prevent the shaft (1) from setting to
the lowering position (s). Thus the links will be unable
to lower even when draft on the third point (6) tends to
diminish, influencing the rod (4) in the direction of the
arrox (RN).
This condition will not prevent the lift from operating in
draft control mode when, if the soil becomes more
8 - 101
consistent, the draft on the third point (6) tends to in-
crease, influencing the rod (4) in the direction of the
arrow (RP).
Mixed position and draft control therefore limits, in a
downward direction, the depth variations that occur
when draft control mode is used, ensuring the maxi-
mum work depth desired.
C 2.4 - Float mode
In the floating position, the lift links are free to move
up or down, following the irregularities in the soil on
which the implement rests.
Proceed in the following way to use the lift in this fun-
ction:
a) Set the position control lever (P) down in its sector
against the lower stop.
b) Set the draft control lever (S) downwards on its
sector until float mode is obtained, allowing the imple-
ment to float over the profile of the soil.
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 3 - Drawing of assembly

8 T1 ) H E 2

L.
_ I

\
N M
7
/
c /7
L

'\
v'
m p

P
/’izSizfe:
/AV
jj

T
H i.
HB
/ X
27 1E37: 5
T
/
t /
arc®
_/ arc®
arc®
/
arc® /
/
\V
/
IS
HE Ld
7 I i[ SfxCi1 rG~M~
4?
G 1 B F A 9 Fig.93-8
I
T

A - Chamber with spring for plunger 5 - Antishock valve ball 24 - Nut

B - Duct through to discharge 6 - Throttle screw with hole 25 - Calibrating valve spring
C - Cylinder 7 - Calibrating valve ball 26 - Spring for control stem
D - Connecting duct 8 - Block and descent reg. valve 27 - Check valve spring
E - Plunger regulating chamber 9 - Retention plate 28 - Exhaust valve spring
F - Discharge holes 11 - Upper cover 29 - Reg. plunger spring
G - Oil duct from pump 12 - Complete exhaust valve 31 - Rubber protection
H - Oil duct from pump 14 - Compl. reg. valve casing 32 - Spring guide plate
P - Oil from pump 15 - Control valve casing 33 - Bearing shim
P1 - Oil to and from cylinders 16 - Valve housing 34 - Bearing shim
T - Pump oil discharge 17 - Screw 37 - Spring plug
T1 - Cylinder and secondary discharge 18 - Plug 38 - Plug
1 - Control stem 19 - Plug 40 - Needle
2 - Regulator plunger 20 - Screw 41 - Antishock valve spring
3 - Check valve 21 - Plug
4 - Exhaust valve 23 - Nut

8 - 102
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

31

24

19

17
i

11 b-£*V-
7
RD,
32
14
40 25

8 10

16
2
27
r 5
3 32 29
■Pcb l
15 41r 37
i
P1 6
32r-
7ÿ
P 33,
18
T 20
23
21
23
26

6ÿ
Fig.94-8

8 - 103
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

8 T1 H (E) 2

—
m
i t

\ \ \3?
7 7
/|/H\
/
C
w
/7
it
VAimzv m
m yxMhÿ
//
Z2PT*
I71
p

m
i
3 i
I In i
i

/AV T
P
Z_
l
Wi 7
IB
5
T / / / tXJ
/ /

\ mÿrntiw Ld
i i / /
/ z
7 I T E ]
L

K-

G 1 B F A 9
1
T
Oil in static pressure
Oil from the pump
Fig.95-8
Discharged oil (pressure 0 bar)

C 4 - Description of the three C 4.1 - Neutral phase (Fig.95-8)

control valve phases
In this phase, the third control valve maintains the oil
The hydraulic valve system is the most important part in the cylinder under pressure, allowing oil from the
of the lifting plant and handles oil delivered by the pump to freely flow into the transmission housing. In
pump. This is then distributed to the various compo- this phase, the position of the control stem (1) allows
nents depending on the received commands and is the chamber (A) to directly connect to the outlet by
then able to accomplish certain basic functions and means of hole (B). Oil from the pump is thus able to
phases on the lift links, i.e.: move the regulator plunger (2) downwards, supplying
chamber (E), opening holes (F) and entering ring duct
C 4.1 - Links stopped, (T), after which it flows into the transmission housing.
"neutral phase" The oil in the chamber cylinder (C) remains pressuri-
zed since it is retained by the check valve (3), the
C 4.2 - Links up, exhaust valve (4) and by the safety valve (5) which
"delivery phase" are connected to the cylinder by ring duct (P1) and
therefore bear the load applied to the lift links. The
C 4.3 - Links down, antishock safety valve (5) protects the cylinder from
"discharge phase". overpressures.

8 - 104
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

E
N P1
/7 5
P

P
y
i

/
/. /
-i-4
t© T
/
-• &fiU
6

T /
m? .5. / ar£3 /
«zr3 /
7
C 22
z 7WA/
z hem
i
m 3£ _z)
L

LJ

21 1
t® F A

Pressurized oil
Fig.96-8
Discharged oil (pressure 0 bar)

C 4.2 - Delivery phase (Fig.96-8)

In this phase, the control valve conveys pressurized
oil to the cylinder, consequently lifting the links. The
position of the control stem (1) allows the chamber
(A) to connect with the oil from the pump by means of
ring duct (P) and holes (G) and (H).
This means that chambers (A) and (E) are influenced
by the same pressure and the regulator plunger (2)
closes the discharge holes (F) owing to the upward
thrust of the return spring.
Thus pressurized oil flows towards the cylinder pas-
sing through the ring duct (P) and entering hole (G)
through the fixed throttle (6) and variable throttle cre-
ated by the control shaft (1), opening the check valve
(3) with hole (H), entering the ring duct (P1) and sup-
plying the cylinder chamber (C). The regulator plung-
er (2) regulates the oil flow to the cylinder since cham-
bers (A) and (E) are influenced by the pressure diffe-
rence created by the passage of oil through the fixed
throttle (6) and the variable throttle created by the
control shaft (1) owing to its upward movement cau-
sed by the internal lift levers. The excess flow is
rejected by the upward pressure from holes (F), thus
regulating the maximum ascent speed and allowing
the lift links to slowly start and reach their position.
In this phase, the maximum ascent pressure is con-
trolled by the calibrating valve (7) which is connected
to the ring duct (P) by means of holes (G) and (H).

8 - 105
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

RD
S
cij&g \ \
4 2

\r
c PI
W
PI

IEI7 I
±aj
! l I
1 +

m?/ /

/i
X
T

T
i I i
i. /

/
WM mz /
mu /
L
[
IFUTH&H 4? T1 B A
]

1 F

Fig.97-8
Oil from the pump
Discharged oil (pressure 0 bar)

C 4.3 - Discharge phase (Fig.97-8)

During this phase, the control valve allows both the oil lowering the lift links. In this phase, the down speed of
from the pump and oil from the cylinder to flow towar- the implement can be regulated with the manual lever
ds the outlet at the same time, consequently lowering (RD). tighten this to lower the down speed. When dri-
the lift links. The position of the control stem (1) al- ving on the road, the control levers of the lift are safe-
lows the chamber (A) to directly connect to the outlet guarded against accidental manoeuvres by fully tighte-
by means of hole (B). ning lever (RD) so as to hold the valve (8) against its
Similarly to the neutral phase, the pump oil moves the housing.
regulator plunger (2) down and discharges the oil
through holes (F).
Meanwhile, the oil of the chamber cylinder (C) pas-
ses from ring duct (P1) to the down speed monitoring
valve (8) and, by means of hole (D), enters the exhaust
valve chamber (4), discharging through hole (1) and

8 - 106
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 5 -Power lift removal from the
tractor 3
5
i,
8
The lift assembly can also be removed from the tractor w
with the cab still on it. Proceed in the following way: ((d
a) Widen the rear track to its maximum value so as £ — fc-
1 _
to have as much space to work in as possible.
Ol
E!)
b) Disconnect the vertical rods (1) and (2) that join
the top lift links to the lower ones and set down the 2
third-point rod (3).
©
c) Disconnect the two external cylinders (4) from the
4 <&
top lift links after having drained the oil from them.
d) Remove the bonnet and exhaust pipe.
e) To obtain enough space to remove the lift, slac-
uO 6 iWflK \0'
ken the front cab fixing bolts from the silent blocks
Fig.98-8
as far as possible and completely take out the two
rear bolts.
f) Completely remove the rear right-hand support
from the differential housing.
g) Disconnect all the hydraulic pipes from the sup-
plementary control valves along with the relative M°V
control wires. ! m
h) Unscrew the fixing bolts of the supplementary con-
trol valve supports (5) from the lift casing and set
them down.
i) Disconnect and set down the two hydraulic pipes
that supply the PTO and PTO brake (6 and 7
Fig.98-8).
l) Disconnect and set down the remaining hydraulic & (
pipes connected to the lift casing along with the
relative rods linking to the control levers (9 and 10
Fig.99-8).
m) Demount the extension tube for fast lift descent
o
control after having removed the panel from un- Fig.99-8
der the driver's seat inside the cab.
n) Disconnect the electric harness, clamps and
anything else that may prevent the lift assembly
from being removed from the tractor.
117 SOL-GL
o) Unscrew the bolts and the two nuts* that fix the lift
to the differential housing and set them down.
p) Fix the coupling tool 117 SOL GL (Fig.100-8) to
the body of the lift and pull it out of the tractor using
an adequate lifting means.
I <DJ
Z7o
(y
c f gin_
* If the two nuts are removed along with the two
stud bolts (8 Fig. 100-8), the lift will be much ea- I
sier to take out.
C©
c: 8

IH Fig.100-8

8 - 107
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 6 - Dismantling
1
With tool 117 SOL-GL fixed to the body of the lift, S1) (P1
overturn the assembly and lock it in a vice, disman-
tling it as indicated in the following instructions: see
(Fig. 101-8). I® 0 K,
M>n pyj'w
1) Set down the cylinder (2) by unscrewing the ei- C

ght fixing bolts (Fig.102-8).

(
2) Unscrew the two fixing bolts and remove the com- © 26 (25
@@(3<
plete valve system (0 Fig.103-8).
117SOL GL
3) Disconnect the draft transmission rod (4) by un-
screwing the bolt (5), the self-locking nut (7) and
set down the swinging support (6), demounting Fig.101-8
the hinge pin (9) and setting down the spring ring
(8 Fig.104-8).

4) Set down the reaction spring assembly (10) along

with its cover by unscrewing the two fixing bolts
(11 Fig.105-8).
© 1
S

n
o

P c~
<r-
c-

33 T?ÿr

A
©-'HJ
tv
Fig.102-8

-zr P°
o o
~ÿ7 7 %/ o'
cz=
J
3
O Q O Ff © %gi4g
0
y '0
O 0

6) (7

Fig.103-8 Fig.104-8

8 - 108
 i
%

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Mechanical hydraulic power lift
5) Remove the two spring rings (12) and (13) from
o'
©

their respective plugs bearing the inner levers

4
o

°\W
P

(Fig.106-8).
6) Unscrew and set down the two bearing hex plugs
)

P)

(17) and (19) after having demounted a second

0
■

spring ring on plug (19) from against the tappet

'a

J_

(15 Fig.106-8).
7

7) Set down the lever assembly along with the tap-

v
u

pet (15) of the end of travel plug (16), the rod

(17), the transmission lever (14), the spring gui-
V

de pin (20) and the spacer with screw (21) that

P

operates the hydraulic valve system (Fig.107-8).

8) Unscrew the threaded plugs (22) and (23) then
\

set down the cam (42) and the position connec-

ting rod (24) along with the transmission rod (25)
centered on the plug (27 Fig.109-8). Fig.105-8
P©
u

IO

■0.
no
o
ff fcp

00
fi
%

Q\
a

(eg ,
'a
ffl

Pp
n
/

c
o

0
/
7

:o

0'
o
o.

0
0

0
@ 0

y/t
0 0

V,
o~\

0
!
TT

0,

t lo °|
0,

0
0
o

0
o

0
Fig.106-8 Fig.107-8

[Q
s>Np

ro

(pjVpNin\ho
IO
C>

\-£J// vjo/ / ACO

c
(/>

]_
/
; /0/
T5

//
0/ V.
UM

<o
7~

0
O

/7
0
0

-if

0®
N3
c

/
0
f IO\_i
\sJ/

/-ÿ7
0)
IO
C

0
\
o

90
cni
CO'
Fig.108-8 Fig.109-8
8 - 109
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

9) Remove the spring pin that fixes the draft cam
(28) and take it from its plug (32 Fig.110/111-8). o v28jrp(29>43d [s' 'u
24
10) Set down the draft lever (26) along with the rod
(30) and guiding plate (29 Fig.111-8). 32 Q
11) Remove the spring ring (31), then take out the o o
plug (32) along with the draft transmission rod (4 O

Fig.111-8). $ gp/i- /<=, /

12) Unscrew the two fixing screws (24) of the control
lever supports (P1) and (S1), then take everything
II//.
v 27 25
out along with the two position (G) and draft (H)
control shafts installed one inside the other and O O
o o o
separate them (Fig.112-8).
13) Remove the two spring rings (40) that hold the o
links and take them out, applying a reference mark
so that they can be correctly positioned on the
shaft splines (35 Fig.113-8). Fig.110-8
14) Take out the threaded stop plug (36), then de-
mount the shaft (35) from the left-hand part of
the lift assembly, which will necessarily carry the
left-hand retention ring along with it (37 Fig.113-
v;
8). 31 <28) (29) 26
15) Remove the set down the thrust arm (38) along
with the relative connecting rod.
<6
7
OJ
NOTE. This type of demounting sequence disassem-
bles the lowest possible number of internal parts and
£
sscp H
o o

makes them subsequently easier to remount and cor-

rectly position.
32, ©
U
G
O
o o o
o
o
Fig.111-8

o
®<s
24 i
v _£n 38)— f »s» 40
o
P1
s o

9
,0
Vi g) @ (35) ■\
4 ©
34

,i ,0
ii
Fig.112-8 r Fig.113-8

8 - 110
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

X = 15 - 15,5 mm 21

i > i-®
T
20
.\\\.
ivXV
/
//
Tw
«s>

Fig.114-8

Inspection and pre-adjustment

(Fig.114/115-8)
e) Replace all the shaft bushes (35) along with the
a) Make sure that all the demounted components are retention rings (37), copper seals, spring rings,
in a perfect condition and that all rods, stops and spring pins, etc. (Fig.113-8).
relative centre pins are perfectly mobile.
f) Thoroughly wash and clean the lift and all its in-
b) Make sure that the spring guide pin (20) is cor- ternal components to be fitted back on the body
rectly regulated. It must be 59.9 mm from centre to of the lift itself.
centre.

c) Check the distance between the head of bolt T and

the rod (21). Dimension X must be between 15
and 15.5 mm.

d) Comply with the following instructions to correctly Q

mount the reaction spring (10):

1 - The spring pressure plate (PM) must not pre-

load the spring but must be tightened so that
the spring can turn around its axis without float. fefiflQSQS
L
0
2 - Dimension (L) that forms the cover (Q) moun-
ted on the body of the lift, must equal the di-
IW¥¥W¥
mension measured on the spring pack. R PM
If this fails to occur, replace the washer (R) with
one of an adequate thickness.
Fig.115-8

8 - 111
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 7 - Remounting and re-positio-
LU
ning on the tractor o
o
o
y?
(
After having thoroughly cleaned the lift assembly and all its
parts, proceed with the remounting operations by complying
with the demounting instructions in reverse order along with
<&>
o
<s. Lit 34
the following indications: o o
Itj
1) Set the lift shaft (35) in its housing on the lift as- O
sembly. Insert the thrust link (38) and correctly ali-
gn the hole with the seat of the fixing plug, using a P
little Loctite 212. Tighten and torque the plug itself
37
o
(Fig.116-8).
@ (38) o
2) Mount the two retention rings (37) of the lift shaft
in their relative housings using tool 119a SOL-GL.
3) Insert the lift links (34) into the splines on the shaft Fig.116-8
(35), aligning them with the reference marks made
when they were demounted. Now mount the two
spring rings.
4) Lubricate the mobile parts, centered and demoun-
ted, so that the rod assembly is perfectly mobile
and free to slide.
5) Using appropriate supports, temporarily position
(38) @ 6

the entire rod assembly on a bench along with the Q

lift components, setting them in their real opera- O
O
ting positions as far as possible, in order to beco- o
me more greatly familiar with them (vedi Fig.117- r& o
8).
6) Place the first components of the control rod as-
V
’
\
o ■0 ,0 9

c>
u\V' Lr
sembly (draft control) on the lift, setting them in
their real and correct positions (Fig.118-8). 0 .21) (18) (SI) (Pi) 19) (30) (15) (28)
Now definitively position the lift assembly (Fig. 119/
120-8) and mount and pin the draft cam (28
Fig.120-8)
Fig.117-8

®) (TO)
(§>
(ST) @ (28) cÿ
O'
c*

S1
3 A,
If r
If
A
A 32 aj Q.

A)

0 .11
©
Fig.118-8 Fig.119-8

8 - 112
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

A
Mechanical hydraulic power lift
7) Proceed in an identical way with the position con-
\
/>
trol rod assembly (Fig. 121-8), then definitively in-
stall the parts on the lift assembly (Fig.122-8).

00
CM
8) Prepare the complete rod assembly of the rocker
05
CM
CM
<oX

,0
d>

arm (15) together with the rods, levers and driving

tri

pins of the hydraulic valve system, correctly in-stal-

\
—

led (Fig.123-8). Now position them on the cover,

n
'

(J

taking care to insert the adjustable rod (21) in its

n(9
10 0 j

circular housing on the lift assembly. Meanwhile,

n
"J

place the lower link of the rocker arm (15) under-

neath, on a level with the contact rollers mounted
rm

0
ri

0
o

on the cam of the position connecting rod (24) (as

0

shown in Fig.124-8), not forgetting to first position

0,

the spring ring on the plug (19) in contact w i t h

the rocker arm (15).
9) Place the hydraulic valve system (0) in its housing Fig.120-8
on the lift assembly and fix it in place with the 2
relative bolts.
(«i

o
/O
(D
co; VCM
to

/
i

9ÿ
0

CL

;
'1
d>
j;

'll
o
l\P*
//in

coy

0.
/
i 05

o'

D ®
o
lira
O'

=
to
in
CO
00

U
(D
0ÿ

'

Fig.121-8 Fig.122-8
CM

in
r-

oVÿ
0
0

©J
°)

<£>
o
m

o
frier
0
0

o
o

CM

CM
in
0
0

o
CM

in
©,
\

Fig.123-8
Fig.124-8

8 - 113
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

10) After each operation, make sure that the rods
are free to move without obstructions.
11) Position all the spring rods, pins and threaded
stop plugs, tightening all the various fixing bolts.
12) Position the cylinder (2) along with the relative
piston (2A) equipped with new retention ring (2B)
and tighten the fixing bolts to a 120 Nm torque
o,
using Loctite 242 (Fig.125-8).
o,
o
Re-positioning on the tractor

Invert the sequence of operations described for re-

moval as listed in the text (5), remembering to thorou-
ghly clean the contact surfaces, using flange sealing
Loctite 510. Also remember to clean the connecting 2b) (2a Fig.125-8
unions of the hydraulic pipes. Tighten and torque the
bolts that fix the lift assembly to the differential hou-
sing. Connect and tighten the hydraulic pipe unions.
Check the adjustment of the lift control levers to make
sure they operate smoothly.

8 - 114
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 8 - Control valve removal from the
tractor (S
s
Proceed in the following way to access the hydraulic X'
valve system:
3\®pg
/
o o
1 - Set down the driver's seat. o ov c.
©
Uj
2 - Raise the rubber protection for access to the com- c;

partment underneath. £>

C:
N
3 - Unscrew the bolts and set down the compartment
for access to the lift.

4 - Set down any pipes or cables that could obstruct

0 9
the operations. Jri 26;
1
5 - Set the levers (P and S) in position in order to free
the valve system. u 0
RDj Ci B
6 - Demount the 2 fixing bolts and take the valve sy- 18
stem from the lift (Fig.126-8).
ejlÿa 3)0 21

Fig.126-8

8 - 115
 i
%

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Mechanical hydraulic power lift
C 9 - Dismantling and inspecting the
control valve
For this operation, it is advisable to place the unma-
IO
oo

(S j (S

chined part of the valve in a vice (O), setting it first in

©

an overturned position in order to carry out the fol-

S)©©@ (1

lowing operations:
0
main

1 - Slacken off the stop nuts and unscrew the 2 adju-

feMi) @

ster plugs (21) and (18) for the calibrating valve

5j) © (i) (a) (

and the the antishock valve respectively. This les-

r

sens the outward thrust of the relative springs.

2 - Set down the retention plate (9) by unscrewing
H) (O>) ("DIM"?

the 3 fixing bolts (20) along with the control stem

(1) and relative return spring (26 Fig.127/128-8).
3 - Take the plug (37), the spring (29) and the gover-
VOW VV
, , (Oÿ (U

nor plunger (or servovalve) from their housings (2

Fig.129-8).
(00
°J
«

)
i t Ol
®

OI

to
w
o
(§)(8)(®

i°

ro O)
p) (a

IO
O

GO
Iff

Fig.127-8
CD

Fig.128-8
/

to

ro
oi
O
u
ru
■o

wiV
K3\

fO
ID

w
to

t o

-J
01
/ÿ

0
O'

r~:
w
Fig.129-8 Fig.130-8
8 - 116
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

4 - Remove the calibrating valve components from
their housing, i.e. the spring guide (10), the spring
(25), the spring plate (32) and the ball (7 Fig.130-
8).
31 a
5 - Remove the antishock valve components from V

their housing, i.e. the lower and upper plate (32), <g)
the spring (41) and the ball valve (5 Fig.130-8).
6 - Turn the hydraulic control valve back in the erect
position and tighten it into the vice again.
7 - Remove the rubber protection (31), unscrew the
fixing bolts (17) and set the cover down (11
Fig.131-8).
TirCi
\
8 - Take out the valve regulating unit (RD), then the
locking valve (8), the roller (40), the valve housing
(16), the spring (27) and the check valve (3
K
Fig.132-8). Fig.131-8
9 - Remove the exhaust valve with the plug (38), the
liner (12), the stem (4) and the spring (28) (Fig.
133-8).

Inspection 0- \

1 - Wash all components with solvents and dry them \

with a jet of air so that all parts are perfectly visi- (40 (16
ble.
2 - Make sure that the valve stem (1) and relative sli-
ding housing have not seized as this would pre- 3
vent smooth coupling and sliding. dcÿC
3 - Check the coupling of the exhaust valve (4) with
its housing (12) in the same way. ,0 •
4 - Make sure that the governor plunger (2) and its c,
housing are also free to slide. u
5 - To eliminate small defects and slight interferen- Fig.132-8
ces, the parts can be lapped with very fine abrasi- i
ve paste until they are perfectly able to slide, after
which they should be thoroughly washed and cle-
aned.
6 - Prepare the fixed housings for the calibrating and
antishock ball valves along with that of the check 38
valve since they cannot be replaced unless they
have been seriously damages.
7 - It is important to replace all the retention seals in-
®
\
side and outside the valve housing and to per- 28
fectly clean and lubricate all the components be- -N

fore they are definitively assembled.

Fig.133-8

8 - 117
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 10 - Remounting 12

1 - The perfectly cleaned and lubricated parts should

be remounted by fixing the valve system in a vice
and proceeding with the demounting operations
in reverse.
2 - Take great care to correctly fit the exhaust valve
4
(4) in its housing (12) with the crosswise drainage -7
hole (22 Fig.134-8) towards the inside of the val- ■e
ve system.
3 - Make sure that all components are correctly posi-
tioned. particularly that the control stem (1) and 22;
governor plunger (2) are perfectly free to fully sli- X
de in their housings (Fig. 135-8). IS
Fig.134-8

Si
K.® © (2
ct
\
7
\
\
\
> 7/
v
c
/ /
/ / 'MM. //
/

P1 7% WA fra PI
E

3
l
1
.OF/
\/v
I I
2 P
/
1
l.
II
i
'1 1 1

J
/
I
~y
I.

7/
IT
T
5
T 4/
/ cc®
X
lc
\V
pU-S
/7zmnÿA
A /
[
4LP LL ifWj—... tv
1 B )(T1 A (18

Fig.135-8

8 - 118
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 119
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 11 - Hydraulic tests and of 3 - 3.5 degrees Enghel.
It is also necessary to use a high pressure pump (g.g.
adjustments a hand pump for injector tests) and the relative tool
120 IDR GL, which simulates the housing of the valve
The valve system is hydraulically tested by setting the system on the lift.
unit in the different conditions in which it works when
the lift operates on the tractor. During the test, the val-
ves are calibrated and inspections are made to make
sure that there are no leaks, thus to previously deter- C 11.1 - Checking and adjusting the
mine whether the unit functions within the established
limits.
antishock valve (5)
The tests can be divided in the following way: (Fig.136/137-8)

C 11.1 -Inspection and adjustment of the anti-
shock valve (5)
C 11.2 -Check for leaks from the exhaust valve (4)
C 11.3 -Check for leaks from the check valve (3)
C 11.4 -Maximum valve inspection and calibra-
tion (7)
C 11.5 - Check for leaks from the delivery duct (P)
To correctly carry out the hydraulic tests with the val-
ve system on a bench, use the transmission oil at a
temperature of about 50°, corresponding to a density
1 - Position and fix the valve systeml in tool 120 IDR
GL (Fig.114-8).
2 - Connect the tube of the high pressure pump to
the upper fitting (D) of the tool (lift cylinder tube)
(P1 Fig.114-8).
3 - Place tool 121 IDR GL or a bolt with nut that
carries out the same function, between the foot
of tool 120 IDR GLa and the stem of the valve
system (1). Unscrew the bolt in order to push the
stem of the valve inwards, so that it switches from
the exhaust phase to the neutral phase. Operate
the hand pump in order to catch the exhaust val-
ve the moment it begins to close, making sure
that oil stops flowibng from the discharge duct (T1).

120IDRGL
0
c.
O' ©
D
C
-y
S- -r
&
a
1
©
ro*

r-
121 IDR GL
7

Fig.136-8

8 - 120
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

Lengthen the tool a further 1 mm so as to cover
the discharge gaps of the exhaust valve (4).
4 - Operate the pump until the antishock valve (5)
opens.
This opening must occur at 200 bar.
Failing this, adjust the valve by means of the spring
adjuster screw (18 Fig.115-8).
Tighten the adjuster screw to increase the set
value, unscrew it to diminish the value.
5 - Adjust the valve, maintaining the pressure in the
circuit at a value of 120 bar for 2 or 3 minutes.
There must be no oil leaks from the valve (5). If
there are, lap its housing with fine emery paper in
order to re-create a perfect housing and seal.
C 11.2 -Checking for leaks from the
discharge valve (4) (Fig.136/137-8)
1 - Maintain the pump connection on the same fitting
(D) and with tool 121 IDR GL mounted in the same
position as the previous test.
2 - Operate the hand pump until the pressure in the
circuit has been brought to 100 bar. In these con-
ditions, the pressure must remain at the same le-
vel or drop very slowly. Oil flowing from the duct
(T1) will denote any leaks. The maximum tolera-
ted leak between the plunger (4) and its housing
(12) is 4 cm3 per minute at a pressure of 100 bar
and with oil at about 50°C.
If this value is exceeded, demount the valve and
replace all the retention rings, then repeat the test
and, if the leak remains, replace the exhaust val-
ve (4) and its housing (12).

i.
T T

rfÿp
0 (2

\
7ÿ
/
m
v\
\
IN
>
/ /
\
7/
V
/ / ZM y y
vy, V
/

@y-

3
-*d$f
m- fe

1
v;
i
i
w
c=\

i
I
i
l
2&
PI
E

p
1
i
\
\

1
y,
1 I.
IT
T

5
T /
X
/ /

1
k-
1 B) T1 A 18
Fig.137-8

8 - 121
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 11.3 - Checking for leaks from the
check valve (3)
(Fig.138-8)

Another cause for leaks may be the check valve (3).

To make the entity and location of the leak easier to
identify, remove the maximum valve (7) which is di-
rectly in communication with the duct that supplies
the check valve (3) itself. This will allow oil to flow strai-
ght from the relative tube.
If this occurs, it will be necessary to lap the housing
with fine emery paper in order to re-create the actual
housing.

Note: Do not attempt to re-create the housings by

tapping on the balls or valves since this would only
enlarge them and maybe even increase the oil leak.

w
© (I
l !

Xt-D
\
\
7 ft 7 7 77
7 7 //
7 7
c 77 /
7

PI / s
I
/\H>»
is. ml
/a i
TO
7
A
\/\i
z5
E
AJE I I
p
3 I
i
I l I

7
I
T
1 L
It

T
7 5
7 7 cn®
7

7
77 1 M
7 7

HI
LD hF is ]

b.
1 B )(T1 A 18
Fig.138-8

8 - 122
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 123
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 11.4 - Checking and calibrating
the maximum valve (7)
(Fig.139/140-8)
This test must also be carried out with tool (120 IDR-
GL). It is essential to move the delivery pipe of the
pump to the lower union (C) and to screw the closing
plug on to union (D) used for the previous test.
1 - Mount the previously removed maximum valve (7)
on to the valve system.
2 - Lengthen tool 121 IDR GL, allowing it to make
one and a half turns more than the previous con-
dition in order to set the valve system to the deli-
very phase.
3 - Operate the pump to open the maximum valve (7).
This opening must take place at 180 bar.
If necessary, adjust the valve by means of the
adjuster screw (21), tightening to increase the
pressure and loosening it to diminish the
pressure.
C 11.5 - Checking for leaks from the
delivery duct (P)
1 - Maintaining the valve system in the previous con-
ditions, operate the pump and bring the pressure
in the circuit to 120 bar.
2 - Check valve retention (7): there must be no oil le-
aks. If there are, lap the housing with fine emery
paper to achieve a perfect seal.
3 - Check the seal of the regulator pluinger (2). The
maximum tolerated leak is 15 cc. every 3 minu-
tes. If oil leaks from duct (T1), this will be due to
play between the upper part of the stem (1) and
the body of the valve system (it will not be due to
the discharge valve (4) since this will have already
been checked). The leak must not exceed approx.
10 cc. per minute.
NotE: Neither of the leaks described in point 3 are of
importance when it comes to the operation of the
power lift since the pump delivers over 30 l/min during
this phase and a few drops of oil will not reduce the
speed with which the implement raises.

120IDRGL

c.
o
o D
C

1
s>
A
a
121 IDRGL
K
/

Fig.139-8

8 - 124
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

■nrr
L_tJ

JT \
7
/
\

/
§
E
P1
P1 z p

/
/

to
i,

3
V///V/M I

m
i
p V T

T C2a
tmv — T
i
Hi
/SEE*
§§B S3
/ arc® /
/

7
/ /TTTZ
f Tfl /
l

C
EJ
3S KS[ /
iFaE
21 1
t® F A
Fig.140-8

8 - 125
*
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 12 - Power lift adjustments on the
tractor SfiPV
/ i
Adjustments to the lift on the tractor must be made
when the assembly is demounted for an overhaul or
to make sure that it operates correctly. Before proce-
eding with the adjustments, it is advisable to make
sure that the two control levers (position and draft) on
the sector are perfectly coupled to the two levers on
the lift (9 and 10) so that there is the same travel on 04
the lift and on the control sector. Any differences should
be adjusted (9-10 Fig.141-8).

These adjustments must be made with the engine

running and with the oil at a temperature of 50°- 60°C. Fig.141-8
The valve system is accessed through the opening
situated under the driver's seat (as described on page
115).
The following adjustments are required:
19
C 12.1 - Sensitivity adjustment.
©
C 12.2 - Position control adjustment.

C 12.3 - Draft control adjustment.

0 jr

24
RD

Fig.142-8

A©
C\
m ts
© VJ 0 Q.
©fg#

L-i
\

24) (19) (RD) Fig.143-8

8 - 126
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

8
i

2 E
£B

7 Z
/ ki\i

PI
/

i / rw
/5:
Z/k j/y// :S/ 4 i i
'
fÿp)
3 7
Ztlkrk
■*[ I I

P
n i.

7 C23»
T

5
T /
C3=®
/ = /ÿ«=£»
/ 21 /fflZEgppSI LZ

7 i ii/i sllllferi i
]
L
4? b»-

G 1 I
B F A 9
T Fig.144-8

C 12.1 - Sensitivity adjustment

The purpose of this adjustment is to give the maxi- 6 - Tighten the screw (19) one quarter of a turn more
mum sensitivity to the lift by correctly positioning the until the valve is covered about 0.3 mm.
exhaust valve. The valve is at its maximum sensitivity in these
Proceed in the following way: conditions.
1 - Apply a weight of at least 100 Kg to the lift links. 7 - Fully tighten the nut (24).
2 - Start the engine and bring it to the 1000-1500 rpm
rate.
3 - Set the links to about half travel with the position
control lever.
4 - Slacken off the nut (24) and unscrew the adjuster
screw (4 mm Allen wrench) of the exhaust valve
(19) so as to find its opening point. Its opening is
identified by a rhythmic oscillation of the lift links.
5 - Slowly tighten the screw (19) until the rhythmic
oscillation of the links disappears: the exhaust
valve will be closed in this position.

8 - 127
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 12.2 - Position control internal hydraulic stop.
A safety margin must be allowed since the maxi-
adjustment mum upward angular travel of the links must not
(Fig.145-8) allow the hydraulic stop to activate.
5 - Turn the shaft (G) clockwise to lower the ball ends
of the links by 2-3 cm.
Position control must be adjusted to ensure the lever 6 - Having terminated this operation, join the tran-
system activates the link limit switch, leaving the sa- smission lever (P1), held against the stop (F), to
fety function to the hydraulic end of travel limit esta- the shaft (G) by fully tightening the screw (L). To
blished by the cylinder piston. check this operation, lift and lower the lift links two
Proceed in the following way: or three times, making sure that in the maximum
1 - Apply a load of at least 100 Kg to the lift links. lift position, they always stop in the same point.
2 - Slacken off the screw (L) that joins the lever (P1)
to the position control shaft (G).
3 - Completely lift the position control lever (P) towar-
ds the stop (C) so that the transmission lever (P1)
goes against the stop (F).
The draft control lever (S) must remain fully down
in the annulling position (lever S1 against stop E).
4 - Maintaining levers (P) and (S) in this position, turn
the position control shaft (G) in an anticlockwise
direction with the aid of a 13 mm box wrench so
that the links cease to lift owing to activation of the

\
V>
\ ©
V- E G y (F) ®
A N\
\\X rr ©
©
©
+
o
©
ifesfj N®I <'/* 7 \0

mr (°)

Fig.145-8

8 - 128
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C 12.3 - Draft control
adjustment (Fig.146-8)
Draft control is finely adjusted to ensure that the lift
links lift just before the draft lever reaches end of tra-
vel on the control sector, when the oscillating support
is pulled as far back as it will go (negative drafts).
Proceed in the following way:
1 - Set the oscillating support in the fully retracted
position (maximum negative drafts) using tool 127
IDR GL or a long lever.
2 - Start the engine and set it to about 1000 rpm.
3 - Move the position control lever (P) fully down
against the stop (D) and slowly lift the draft con-
trol lever (S) towards the stop (C) on the sector.
Stop moving the lever as soon as the lift links are
raised.
4 - Use a gauge to check the distance between the
levers and the limit stop (C): the correct measure-
ment is 15-20 mm. If the measured dimension is
more than 15-20 mm (3.5-4.5 mm between lever
S1 and stop F) shorten the rod (4) by tightening
the adjuster plate (N) or lengthen it as the case
may be.
Before varying the length of the rod (4), stop
the engine and always release the bolt (5) and
check nut (M).
5 - After adjusting, check at least two or three times
to make sure that the 15-20 mm remains unchan-
ged when the links begin to lift. Adjust the rod (4)
if this is not the case.
Note: End of travel in draft control mode is guarante-
ed by the internal safety stop.

,1~T ■©
154-20
0
127 IDR GL E
P © OB
;
/ i/
2Tÿ I I
m- i/ if
*
+ O'

©
7; \ -ljU
1 2§ \ei
yj ®

5) (N) (M) (4 PI) (si

Fig.146-8

8 - 129

Mechanical hydraulic power lift
C 13 - Troubleshooting
FAULTS
The lift jerks during the lifting
movement.
The lift fails to function.
The lift begins to lift, but stops
as soon as it senses the load
without the overpressure valve
activating.
The lift fails to fully lower.
The lift fails to lower.
The lifting capacity fails to cor-
respond to the declared value.
The lift is unable to bear the load.
There is a rhythmic swing when
the engine is running. The load
lowers when the engine is at a
standstill.
There is a rhythmic swing with
the links at end of upward travel
when the engine is running. The
load fails to lower with the engi-
ne at a standstill.
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
CAUSES REMEDIES
LInsufficient oil level in the tank. Top up the level. Clean or replace
Pump suction filtre clogged. Air in- the filtre. Check the intake pipe and
filtrations in the pump intake pipe. any unions and seals.
Regulator piston jammed (2 Fig.72- Remove the control valve and re-
8). lease the pilot valve.
Draft rod (4) badly adjusted. Adjust the draft control.
Badly adjusted position control le- Adjust the position control lever.
ver. Incorrect sensitivity valve adju- Adjust the sensitivity page 8-95.
stment.
BHydraulic lock engaged. Unscrew adjuster (RD) page 8-86
Control valve stem retention rings Remove the valve stem and repla-
worn. Badly regulated safety and ce the external retention rings. Ca-
overpressure valves. librate the valves. Replace the
Poor pump efficiency. pump. Overhaul the valve stem.
Poor valve stem efficiency.
Check the lowering entity by moun- Change the seal. Adjust the sensi-
ting an implement that needs from tivity or replace valve (4), overhaul
75 to 80 bar to lift if the lift unit has valve (5), overhaul valve (3).
no supplementary cylinders and
from 45 to 50 bar if the lift is fitted
with two supplementary cylinders.
With oil at about 50°C, check at the
ends of the two articulated rods to
see whether lowering is less or more
than 2 mm in 1 minute. If it is less,
lowering is physiological. if it is more,
check: • worn piston seal. • Dischar-
ge valve (L).
• Cylinder overpressure valve defec-
tive (5) • Check valve defective (3
Fig.72-8).
Position control lever end of travel Adjust the position control, limiting
position incorrectly regulated. the upward travel of the links.
8 - 130
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

When operating in draft control Badly regulated valve system sen- Adjust the sensitivity.
mode, the implement digs in too sitivity.
deeply or leaves the furrow.

Draft control fails to function. Badly regulated draft control lever. Adjust the draft control.
The lift only lifts and lowers with
the position lever.

Position control fails to function. Position control lever completely Adjust the position control. Ove-
The lift only lifts and lowers with out-of-adjustment. Faulty internal rhaul the lift.
the draft control lever. lever mechanisms.

8 - 131
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Mechanical hydraulic power lift

C14 - Special tools

111 SOL GL
Plug to mount the retention ring for the lift link shaft (37 Fig.102-8)

0
112 SOL GL
Plug to mount the retention ring for the lift link shaft (37 Fig.102-8)

117 SOL GL
Plates to remove the lift from the tractor (Fig 79-8)

o
o
rs
G
O

118 SOL GL
Plug to insert the piston retention ring (2b Fig.103-8)

8 - 132
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Special tools
119 a-b-c SOL GL
Plug to insert the retention rings and bushes on the lift assembly (1 Fig.68-8)

c
120 IDR GL
Valve system valve calibrating test (Fig.114-8)

9
& 9

c A B

121 IDR GL
Valve stem positioning screw (Fig.114-8)

127 IDR GL
Oscillating support spring compressor to obtain the maximum negative efforts (Fig.146-8)

8 - 133
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 134
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

CHAP. 8

Checking the operating pressure values

INDEX

Sect.5 Checking the operating pressure values

5.1 - Introduction ...............................................................8-136

5.2 - Low pressure circuit pressure checks. .....................8-136
5.3 - High pressure circuit pressure checks. .................... 8-140
5.4 - Special tools. ............................................................8-142

8 - 135
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Sect.5 - Checking the operating pressure values

5.1 - Introduction
122 IDR GL
The operating pressure values must be checked whe-
never the various users are faulty or when the tractor
is generally overhauled. (5
Remember that a low setting of the maximum valves ■sCfe
-cy;
in the circuit can cause the hydraulic clutch units to
slip or prevent the steering system, the supplemen-
tary control valves or the lift from being fully efficient.
If the setting value of the valves is too high, this will
stress all the components in question and, in the case
of the valve that monitors the lubricating pressure, will
break all the retention rings of the transmission unit.
After checking, reset the correct setting value of the 124 IDR GL
valves by means of the relative adjusters.
Fig.147-8
The hydraulic tests must be carried out with the engi-
ne running at a rate of about 1200 RPM, with oil at a
temperature of between 30 and 40°C and using the
special tools required plus a set of pressure gauges
Fast Run

5.2 - Checking the pressure in the

low pressure circuit
X MM ex
122 IDR GL

'©
A -Checking the steering cylinder pressure M
(Fig.147-8).

Mount tool 124 IDR GL in the connection point

a
a
between the rubber tube and the rigid tube, along DT i
with union 122 IDR GL, and apply a pressure gau- 126 IDR GL
ge with a 0 to 500 bar scale.
When the steering cylinder reaches end of stroke, Fig.148-8
the pressure gauge must indicate a value betwe-
en 155 and 160 bar.

B - Checking the calibrating pressure of the 18 bar val-

ve (Fig.148-8).

Fit tool 122 IDR GL in place of plug (M) on the

Comatrol plant along with a pressure gauge with
a 0 to 50 bar scale. When the engine is running, 0
DT
the pressure gauge must indicate a value betwe- ©
0 0
en 16 and 19 bar. F. Run
<D

m\i
\
Spring-on

M
Fig.149-8

8 - 136
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking the operating pressure values

OOP
I G H
■»=l|KS)

F 1
B E
O
15
C3
D C OHill I|IFÿ
\
3 {14) &

_--
cn ■p
i
2B 2A
3"
i <3

ar
I

rJ
o C1
j! r5jj|
o
ffof
rT’-n
I
13
C2
9 L

Ii Mcro
11
5 7
-o
4 —
i
r
I
— L 1 +
w
,1 W:t/' »J§-o-
i !r_yj_ ;i
u
'0
I
Hrtr
A
HL v u -j-

\ L
_i n
tt
10

l V
cij-'S
o A
.
13— 4i

Fig.150-8

C - Checking the 4WD hydraulic clutch engaging

pressure (Fig.148-8 Comatrol plant)
(Fig.149-8 Slanzi plant) t=?
Fit tool 126 IDR GL with union 122 IDR GL on the
7
outlet of the Comatrol plant and union 123 IDR GL 1
with fitting 122 IDR GL on the outlet of the Slanzi plant /
/
with a 0 to 60 bar pressure gauge applied. 125 IDR GL

k£ 122 IDR GL

D - Checking the engaging pressure of the Fast Run

L
hydraulic clutch (Fig.148-8 Comatrol pèlant) and Fast
Run or Spring-on (Fig.149-8 Slanzi plant)

Fit tool 126 IDR GL with union 122 IDR GL on the

outlet of the Comatrol plant and union 123 IDR GL
&
Fig.151-8
with fitting 122 IDR GL on the outlet of the Slanzi plant
with a 0 to 60 bar pressure gauge applied.

Run the engine and engage the differential lock.

E - Checking the engaging pressure of the front and A value of between 16 and 19 bar should be read on
rear differential lock (Fig.151-8) the pressure gauge.

Fit tool 125 IDR GL with union 122 IDR GL between

the rigid pipe and the rubber one that supplies the
front lock, with a 0 to 60 bar pressure gauge applied.

8 - 137
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking the operating pressure values

F - Checking the PTO clutch engaging pressure FRN
(Fig.153-8)
123 IDR GL
Fit tool 123 IDR GL in place of the PTO oil inlet union
along with union 122 IDR GL and apply a 0 to 60 bar
pressure gauge. Start the engine and engage the PTO
clutch. The pressure reading should be 16 and 19
bar. PTO

G - Checking the PTO clutch brake engaging

pressure (Fig.153-8) f

Fit tool 123 IDR GL instead of the brake oil inlet union
on the PTO cover along with union 122 IDR GL and
mount a 0 to 60 bar pressure gauge. Start the engine. 122 IDR GL Fig.153-8
The pressure gauge reading must be between 16 and
19 bar with the PTO clutch disengaged.

H - Checking the Hi-Lo ebgaging pressure

(Fig.154-8)

Fit tool 123 IDR GL instead of the Hi-Lo outlet union,

along with union 122 IDR GL and mount a 0 to 60 bar
pressure gauge.
y iL 0

0 o
With the engine running and the solenoid valve ener-
gized, the pressure gauge reading must be between 7 0
16 and 19 bar. ©
V

I - Checking the 5 bar valve pressure setting on the

plant (Fig. 155/156-8)
123 IDR GL HI-LO
Fit tool 128 IDR GL with union 122 IDR GL in hole R1 122 IDR GL Fig.154-8
of the Comatrol/ Slanzi plant (radiator supply) along
with a 0 to 10 bar pressure gauge. With the engine
running, the pressure gauge must indicate a value
between 4 and 6 bar.

L - Checking the 1.5 bar valve pressure setting

(Fig.156-8 on Comatrol plant) s/ O
o
(Fig.157-8 on Slanzi plant) D
o
Fit tool 129 IDR GL with union 122 IDR GL on the 0 $
2 RXH
aluminium block with the 1.5 valve near the lubri- P
cation outlet leading to the gearbox (8a-8c). With the
engine running, the pressure gauge must indicate a /

value between 1.4 and 1.6 bar.

122 IDR GL
128 IDR GL R
Fig.155-8

8 - 138
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking the operating pressure values

Sir ~

\ 129 IDR GL
N N
122 IDR GL
i
' i
€ (g)
! "
n .
/

1
1 ® m
.vvÿvj

IT R2
pr
≤
3
1
Ri ./
CO I (T)
r
ffi BLc

V/, (8a-8c) k PTO / FRn

■ STr
I
I
r P
T

DTI
R1 0.

Jf
M
a
T1 1
0

122 IDR GL, 128 IDR GL Fig.156-8

D
o
©

v— a
Fig.157-8

8 - 139
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking the operating pressure values

OOP
I G H
-t-SMrf :ÿE~

F 1
B D
C

E
o 15
OH ill I|IFÿ
0:3
C
\
3 14 &

_--
-cr 2B 2A
cp_P
1 <3

rJ
i

o
ar tf rT’-n
rO® 13
C2
9 L
C1 L
— r1 —
r+m 1
\ I
o 11
<gO
tff
1
V rO
5

u
7
-O
4
I
HL
L 1 +
,1
!r_yj_ ;i w V
V;
C!f.- p-o-

1
1
VT
+\
}•
V U-r-
-01tt L 10

6A g- — (13F &

Fig.158-8

5.3 - Checking the pressure values

in the high pressure circuit
M - Checking the trailer brake disengaging pres- N - Checking the 140 bar pressure setting of the
sure (10-15 bar) in the (Italy) brake valve. (Italy) and (Export) trailer brake valve.

Fit tool 128 IDR GL on to the quick coupling (fe- Fit tool 128 IDR GL on to the quick coupling (fe-

_
male) along with union 122 IDR GL and install a male) along with union 122 IDR GL and install a
0 to 60 bar pressure gauge. With the engine run- 0 to 500 bar pressure gauge.
ning and without operating the main brakes, the With the engine running and when the main
pressure gauge reading must be between 10 and brakes are used, the pressure gauge must indi-
15 bar (Fig.159-8). cate 140 bar (Fig.160-8).

•A v. m Nr:
o
)
<m it o
fei (o /
V
1

a i (0 Si l©i
LVP ll
j_

% 0%

Fig.159-8 Fig.160-8

8 - 140
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking the operating pressure values

O - Checking the supplementary control valve
calibrating pressure (Fig.161-8).
P\
Fit tool 122 IDR GL instead of the plug on the sup- §
plementary control valve inlet unit and mount a
pressure gauge with a 0 to 500 bar scale. Activate
122 IDR GL T4«i
the lever of a supplementary control valve whilst p_
the engine is running: the pressure gauge must •SY1

indicate a value between 170 and 190 bar.

gj %
0
P - Checking the implement lifting pressure
(Fig.161-8).
<115
A-

Maintaining the same test conditions (L), lift the

C 22

implement and read the pressure indicated on the

gauge. Fig.161-8
The maximum tolerated pressure is 180 bar.

8 - 141
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking the operating pressure values

5.4 - Special tools
122 IDR GL
Union for pressure tests on the supplementary control valve and lift circuit to use along with tools 123/124/125/
126/128/129 IDR GL (Fig.125/126/127/128/129-8)

fif
123 IDR GL
Union for PTO clutch and brake pressure and Hi-Lo brake tests to use with union 122 IDR GL (Fig.128-8)

0
124 IDR GL
Union for Orbitrol steering circuit pressure tests and to use with union 122 IDR GL (Fig.125-8)

125 IDR GL
Union for differential lock pressure test and to use with union 122 IDR GL (Fig.127-8)

8 - 142
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Checking the operating pressure values

126 IDR GL
Union for 4WD and Fast Run clutch pressure tests and to use with union 122 IDR GL (Fig.126-8)

128 IDR GL
Union to check the setting of the 5 bar valve mounted on the Comatrol plant, to check the 10-15 bar and 140
bar value settings of the trailer brake valve and to use with union 122 IDR GL(Fig.129-8)

.0

129 IDR GL
Union to check the setting of the 1.5 bar valve and to use with union 122 IDR GL (Fig.129-8)

8 - 143
 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

8 - 144
 CAB

CHAP. 10

INDEX

Sect. 1 General description.................................................................. 10-3

1-1 General view of cab ...................................................... 10-4
1-2 Main controls................................................................. 10-5

Sect. 2 Technical specifications. ......................................................... 10-7

Sect. 3 Air conditioning system. ......................................................... 10-9

3-1 General operating principle ........................................10-10
3-2 Main components .......................................................10-12
3-3 Safety notes ................................................................10-14
3-4 Maintenance ...............................................................10-15
3-5 Wiring diagram ............................................................10-18

Sect. 4 Special tools............................................................................10-21

10 - 1
CAB

10 - 2
 CAB

CHAP. 10

General description

INDEX

Sect. 1 General description.

1-1 General view of cab ...................................................... 10-4

1-2 Main controls................................................................. 10-5

10 - 3
 CAB

Sect.1 - General description

General description
The cab is made from steel section metal and is se- It is equipped with a ventilating, heating and air condi-
cured to the tractor by silent-block rubber dampers. tioning system with a flow of air that circulates around
These insulate the cab from engine noise and reduce the cab from below.
vibrations inside. This special damping system redu-
ces operating noise to excellent levels, thus signifi-
cantly improving driver comfort.

1-1 General view of cab

© 8
3ÿ1 \

3 5

4 2
G
mm1 hr m
6
Vs
fa 1
m.
a /<
VI
to;

Fig.1-10

1 - Completely openable doors 5 - Cab lifting couplings.

with safety lock. 6 - Openable side windows.
2 - Rear window. 7 - Front work lights.
3 - Rear view mirrors. 8 - Rear work lights.
4 - Openable side windows.

10 - 4
 CAB

General description
1-2 Main controls

11
©
7) \(8 9 10
s\
/
m aa

Fig.2-10

6 - Fuse box for the electrical compo- 9 - Windscreen wiper switch

nents of the cab roof.
7 - Front field light switch
0- Front field lights OFF
1- Front field lights ON
8 - Rear field light switch
0- Rear field lights OFF
1- Rear field lights ON
0- OFF
1- Windscreen wiper ON
2- Windscreen wiper ON
10- Rear window wiper switch
0- OFF
1- Rear window wiper ON
2- Front window wiper ON

10 - 5
 CAB

General description
Seat adjustment Distance adjustment
Release the lever (1-Fig.3) to move the seat forwar-
ds or backwards.

1 ~J§)_ Adjusting the suspensions

The seat suspension can be regulated according to
the driver's weight. Adjust the suspension by means
of the lever (2-Fig.3), easily accessible from the seat.
2 Rigid suspension:
turn the lever clockwise (+)
3 Soft suspension:
turn the lever anticlockwise (-)
5 4 6 Seat height adjustment
Turn the knob (3-Fig.3) to raise or lower the seat.

Fig.3-10

B - Fan switch.
j 0 - OFF
\ 1 - Slow

D B 2 - Medium
3 - Fast

C - Temperature control knob.

Red zone - Hot air
<§> Blue zone - Cold air

D- Switch to select re-circulation of air in cab or

fresh air from outside.
Down:
fresh air enters from outside.

iTf©
Up:
re-circulation of air in cab.

Fig.4-10 E- Red indicator showing faulty air conditioner

operation.
Turn off the air conditioning system if the indi-
A - Air conditioning switch. cator comes on and have the system checked
Press to turn on the air conditioning system. by specialized technicians.

10 - 6
 CAB

CHAP. 10

Technical specifications

INDEX

Sect.2 Technical specifications. ................................................................... 10-8

10 - 7
 CAB

Sect.2 - Technical specifications

MANUFACTURER Massey Ferguson
Type CS29
Approval N° 2051/5/1996
OECD N° CSS0385
Driver's seat Grammar DS 83H/8
MT GT 60
Vertical seat adjustment 65 mm (Grammar)
80 mm (MT)
Distance adjustment 150 mm

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Compressor
Make Harrison
Type Harrison SP 10
Number of cylinders 10
Oil capacity 110 cc
Weight 4.25 Kg
Max RPM 8400/m

Electromagnetic coupling
Voltage rating 12 V
Current intensity 3.8/4.2 A

Driving torque
Coupling fixing nut 30 Nm
Top screw 34 Nm
Fill plug with toroidal seal 15 Nm

Air conditioning
Type of coolant R134

Operating pressure and temperature

Ambient temperature 30-40° C at sea level
Low pressure value 0.3-0.65 bar
High pressure value 12-18.5 bar

Safety pressure gauge meter for high/low pressure

Minimum pressure 2 bar
Maximum pressure 27 bar

Temperature control
Range 1-20° C
Temperature difference 4° C

10 - 8
 CAB

CHAP. 10

Air conditioning system

INDEX

Sect. 3 Air conditioning system.

3-1 General operating principle ........................................10-10
3-2 Main components .......................................................10-12
3-3 Maintenance ...............................................................10-14
3-4 Safety notes ................................................................10-15
3-5 Wiring diagram ............................................................10-18

10 - 9
 CAB
Sect.3 - Air conditioning system
3-1 Operating principle
To control the environment inside the cab of a farming
tractor, it is necessary to:
- ensure that the temperature and humidity in the
driving compartment are at the correct levels for
human comfort.
- ensure that a sufficient volume of filtered air enters
in order to pressurize the cab and prevent impuri-
ties from penetrating.
- ensure that the windows are efficiently demisted to
guarantee visibility in all directions.
Air distribution must not create an excessive tempe-
rature difference inside the cab, particularly on the
driver's body.
Moreover, the air conditioning system must be desi-
gned to withstand the mechanical stress caused by
the numerous impacts and vibrations typical of far-
ming work.
It is of fundamental importance to ensure that the sy-
stem operates correctly in the muddy and dusty envi-
ronments that characterize work in the farming sector.
Air conditioning systems must also be able to operate
when the tractor works on slopes of up to 16°.
The refrigeration principle
There is no known procedure that produces cold. The
effect is merely created by heat absorption. Air condi-
tioning is a procedure during which calories are taken
from the air. The temperature is measured according
to the quantity of heat in any material. Thus, as water
always flows downwards, heat is always transmitted
from a hot body to a cold one. To condition air or ab-
sorb the heat of the air inside a cab, the hot air must
come into contact with a cold surface.
According to a physical property of liquids, a given
pressure corresponds to a specific boiling temperatu-
re or to specific evaporation.
Liquid can absorb a notable quantity of heat during
the evaporation process produced at a constant tem-
perature. It has been demonstrated that at a normal
atmospheric pressure, water boils or evaporates at
100°C. Water is able to absorb a high quantity of heat
without any temperature increase being produced.
These principles also apply to heat removal: steam
returns to the liquid state or liquids become solids.
10 - 10
Thus, by checking the pressure values in a closed
circuit, a liquid at low pressure and a low boiling tem-
perature can be obtained in a point of the circuit. When
it evaporates, the liquid can absorb the heat from its
environment.
The chilling cycle
Air conditioning in the cab is guaranteed by a ventila-
ting system that, in the cold season, allows a determi-
ned quantity of duly filtered air, heated by the hot wa-
ter pipes of the engine to be obtained. During the hot
season, when an excessively high ambient tempera-
ture makes tractor driving less comfortable, a com-
pressor-driven cooling system lowers the temperatu-
re inside the cab by several degrees. A chilling gas
(HFC), R134, circulates under pressure in a closed
circuit in an air conditioner and is subjected to pres-
sure and temperature modifications in certain points
of the system.
A compressor driven by the engine through a belt in-
takes the vapours, keeping the pressure low prior to
the evaporator and compresses the resulting gase-
ous coolant, directing it towards a cooling system cal-
led condenser. The passage of air through the con-
denser in front of the water radiator of the engine co-
ols the gaseous coolant and condenses it. Having
become liquid, the coolant is then filtered. The humi-
dity and impurities are retained by a filter which also
acts as a reservoir, known as dehydrator.
R134 liquid coolant at high pressure is conveyed towar-
ds a valve that regulates the flow rate of the fluid and
expands it, causing a sensible drop in temperature
and pressure. The low pressure liquid starts to boil
and evaporates in an exchanger or evaporator. Hot
and damp air from the cab is blown through the eva-
porator by the fan blades, is cooled in contact with the
evaporator and is conveyed back to the cab. The hu-
midity in the air condenses in the evaporator and is
disposed of outside through pipes. The cycle conclu-
des when the gas is sent back to the compressor.
Depending on the temperature required in the cab, a
thermostat with "STOP" position automatically acti-
vates or disactivates the compressor by means of an
electro-magnetic connection.
 CAB

Air conditioning system

COMPRESSOR Points of the State of the Pressure Temperature Observations
M circuit fluid

4 Compressor vapour passes from low

to high
passes from low
to high
Produces vapour at high pressure and
temperature

Compressor ou- vapour high high __

CONDENSER (3)

temperature

tlet - condenser
Ambient
Heat freed towards

o inlet
the outside

vapour + fluid high passes from high Owing to the effect of the outside air,
Condenser to medium the vapour liquifies and the heat is
<> <=ÿ pushed outside. This exchange is fa-
cilitated by fans

Condenser outlet. fluid high medium Allows the humidity to be eliminated

DEHYDRATOR (5) I Dehydrator and the charge level of the circuit to
ppr Governor valve
inlet
be evaluated

t 4 Governor
valve
fluid + vapour
(=20%)
passes from high passes from me-
to low dium to low
Expansion of the fluid lowers the pres-
sure and temperature and consequen-
tly evaporates part of the liquid (=20%)

Governor valve fluid + vapour low low __

GOVERNOR
VALVE (9) & outlet. Evaporator
inlet

fluid + vapour low low The liquid passes to the vapour sta-
tus by absorbing the heat of the air in
EVAPORATOR (10)

the cab. This results in "cold produc-

Fresh air

Evaporator
tion", a phenomenon activated by the
Ambient air

n fan

=0
Evaporator outlet. vapour low low __
Compressor inlet

Fig.5-10

10 - 11
 CAB

Air conditioning system

3-2 Main components
1) Compressor (1 Fig.6-10) 2
The compressor compresses the coolant to a low pres- £
sure to obtain a high pressure gas to circulate around
the system. li

2) Condenser (5 Fig.7-10)
d
© ?ÿ (1
The condenser receives the high pressure and high N ©
A
temperature gaseous coolant from the compressor G 1
and converts it into high pressure pre-cooled liquid. G
The condenser is designed to withstand the tempera-
ture variations of the hot gaseous coolant and cold r /
outside air. When cooled, the coolant converts the gas
into a liquid. This cooling is obtained by allowing a
fresh air current to pass through the coolant (speed Fig.6-10
of the vehicle and engine fan capacity). The tempera-
tures of the coolant in the condenser vary from 49°C
to 77°C with pressure values between 10.5 Kg/cm2
and 21 Kg/cm2.

If the condenser must be replaced:

5
- avoid damaging the cooling fins in order to gua-
rantee the maximum performance from the equi-
pment.

3) Dehydrator (2 Fig.6-10)
The dehydrator is an important part of the air condi-
tioning system. The dehydrator receives the liquid
coolant from the condenser, retaining the moisture and
the "particles" that could infiltrate into the system.
The receptacle temporarily stores the coolant which k
is delivered according to the demands of the delivery
[ n / /

valve. Fig.7-10
The dehydrator also acts as a filtre (in a similar way to
the engine filtre) and should be replaced at least after
every 1000 hours or 3 years service, or after an inter-
vention during which the circuit is recharged.

When assembling or replacing the dehydrator:

- make sure that the tubes are correctly connected
on the inlet side (IN) towards the condenser.
- only remove the rubber protection caps from the
unions at the last minute to prevent moisture from
penetrating.
- all seals should be replaced after disassembling
and be lubricated before assembly.

10 - 12
 CAB

Air conditioning system

4) Governor valve (4 Fig. 8-10)
Installed on the evaporator inlet, the governor valve
monitors the quanity of inlet coolant. This valve auto-
matically regulates the coolant flow according to the r
heat load supplied by the evaporator.
The governor valve reacts to the temperature of its
sensitive element and to the pressure of the liquid. 0
To avoid the consequences of an excessive pressure
drop in the evaporator, the governor valve has a com-
pensating system with bulb that takes the temperatu-
re of the gas leaving the evaporator into account. The
bulb is also connected to the diaphragm of the valve. 3
When replacing the governor valve:
- always slightly lubricate the unions using coolant
oil. Fig.8-10
- make sure that the pin operates correctly before
assembling. To do this, spray the liquid coolant on
to the bulb and waitch the pin movement.
- make sure that the governor valve is connected !
©
correctly. 6
- handle the capillary tubes with care. 1
- before fixing the heat-sensitive element (bulb) to !! '

the pipe, thoroughly clean the element to ensure

! © m
© ©
a good contact.
Fix the element to the tube by means of the relati- \
i
ve clip and cover it with an insulating cloth.
<D
5) Evaporator (3 Fig. 8-10) 7
0
The evaporator is installed in front of the fan and co-
ols and dehumidifies the ambient air. In the evapora- OH r1) '0
/
tor, liquid coolant reduced to a low pressure and low
temperature after having passed through the gover-
w N
nor valve, boils and immediately begins to evaporate. Fig.9-10
This process allows the heat in the air exhausted from
the cab to be absorbed.

6) Fan unit (6 Fig. 9-10)

A motor with permanent magnetizing controls two fans,
each of which is protected by an air diffuser. The unit
is mounted on an insulated support. Three rotation
speeds for the motor are supplied thanks to the resi-
stance connected to the central switch.

10 - 13
 CAB
Air conditioning system
3-3 Safety notes
It is extremely important to work in a clean place to
prevent dust or dirt from penetrating into the circuit.
Thoroughly clean the unions and slightly lubricate them
with compressor oil before making the connections.
Do not blow compressed air into the pipes to remove
residuals.
Only take the protections from the pipes at the last
moment.
Carefully plug any pipes to be stored.
The oil in the air conditioning circuit is a refrigerating
oil that can be mixed with the coolant.
A Precautions to take
The air conditioning system can be dangerous: it can
be compared to a high pressure steam boiler. The pres-
sure of the coolant is always higher than its normal
boiling point. If a tube breaks, the coolant will very
quickly evaporate or boil.
The forces produced by expanding coolant can be
extremely dangerous. Refrigerating technicians must
always act with care to prevent coolant from escaping
in an uncontrolled way.
R134 is nonflammable, non-toxic (unless brought
into contact with a flame) and non-corrosive (un-
less brought into contact with water).
When handling R134, take great care to avoid direct
contact and freezing of the skin and eyes.
R134 decomposes into phosgene, a lethal gas, when
brought into contact with a flame or when the tempe-
rature is high.
Never ever handle coolant without having first put on
protective gloves and goggles.
Never attempt to empty the system by unscrewing a
union. To slowly empty without danger, it is essential
to use the specific bleeding/charging unit for R134
coolant (see sect.4).
Never empty the system in places where there are
flames nearby. These precautions must also be taken
when searching for leaks.
If a union must be tightened, use two wrenches to
prevent deformations that could give rise to leaks.
Never ever carry out welding or cleaning operations
10 - 14
near systems charged with coolant: such action could
lead to overpressures and consequent leaks of coo-
lant.
Never store R134 coolant in places exposed to the
sun, near heat sources or in damp places. Always fit
the protections back on to unused bottles and pre-
vent them from being subjected to impact. Never car-
ry the bottles in the passenger compartment of a vehi-
cle.
If R134 is sprayed outside the circuit:
If it splashes into the eyes, thoroughly wash the af-
fected part under running water and immediately con-
sult a physician.
Note: in the case of freezing caused by liquid coolant,
progressively warm the affected zone with cold water
and apply a greasy creme. Immediately contact a phy-
sician.
3-4 Maintenance
Foreword
Before starting an air conditioning system, make sure
that the windows and doors are tightly shut. The cab
interior should be kept as clean as possible. If the cab
cannot be completely closed for any reason, it is es-
sential to stop the air re-circulation system. Failure to
comply with these regulations could cause the eva-
porator to become clogged which would consequen-
tly stop the air conditioning system and risk dama-
ging the compressor.
Standard air filtre
1 - Clean the cab air filtre after every 100 hours ser-
vice or more frequently if necessary.
a- Remove the left side panel of the engine bon-
net to access the filtre.
b- Release the latch and remove the filtre (1 Fig.
10-10).
c- Clean the filtre by blowing it with compressed
air.
d- Before remounting the filtre, clean the connect-
ing system with a clean cloth to remove all dirt
residues.
 CAB

Air conditioning system

2 - Replace the cab air filtre after every 1000 hours
service or once a year.
3 m
Ml
A Standard filtres do not offer protection
against chemical products. Consult your
Dealer for information about the special activated
(A
iflV;
carbon filtres. 2 1
r
> aa V
Activated carbon filtre

3 - Replace the activated carbon filtre after every 250 1

4 <P
'L m
hours service with chemical products. Activated
carbon filtres cannot be repaired. B
©
>Z
ATTENTION: never clean activated carbon filtres
with compressed air or wash them with water.
When tractors equipped with activated carbon fil- 1 - Cab air filter; 3 - Charge indicator;
tres are washed, prevent the jet of water from being 2 - Dehydrator reservoir; 4 - Condenser.
directed on to the filtre. It is better to actually re-
move the filtre. A - Compressor belt tension adjuster;
B & C - Alternator and fan belt tension adjuster.
4 - Periodically inspect the filtre installed in the rear Fig.10-10
of the cab, the condenser, the fan blades and the
evaporator to ensure that the system operates cor- T
rectly. Any accumulation of dirt can increase the
high and low pressure values and reduce the effi-
ciency of the cooling system. It is advisable to D E B
check the tension and alignment of the transmis-
sion belt. 7
y
5 - Check the conditions of the cooling water outlet
tubes beginning with the evaporator. Any accu-
mulation of water in the drip tray can freeze the
©
evaporator and prevent the coolant from circula-
ting, reducing the efficiency of the system.
To maintain the entire circuit in a good condition,
it is advisable to operate the system each week
for a few minutes in order to lubricate all the se-
als, since the oil in the compressor can mix with
the coolant.

6 - When the red indicator on the right-hand side of

TO Fig.11-10

NOTE: to keep the system in good order, remem-

ber to turn on the A/C system for a few minutes
the control panel (E Fig.11-10) comes on, this each week in order to keep all the components
means that the circuit has discharged or needs lubricated.
servicing. Turn off the system and have it chec-
ked by specialists. R134 gas is used in the sy-
stem.

7 - Have the system checked once a year at the be-

A DANGER: wear protective clothing and
goggles in the case of leaks. Liquid coo-
lant can injure the eyes. R134 coolant liquid pro-
duces a toxic gas if brought into contact with a
ginning of summer. flame.

10 - 15
 CAB

Air conditioning system

A ATTENTION: never disconnect any part or

tube from the air conditioning system. Con-
sult your Dealer if there are any problems.

8 - Periodically check the pressure of the A/C com-

pressor belt in the middle of its longer side. The
deflection should be 13 to 15 mm.
To adjust the belt tension, slacken off the fixing
screws and check nut (A Fig.10-10) on the idler
under the bearing plate and move the compres-
sor until the correct tension is obtained. Tighten
all the screws and check nuts.

10 - 16
 CAB

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

10 - 17
 3-5 Wiring diagram
2J1L9.
&
19 %
E
l \ <r 1
V
<>
%
r
r-ÿn
1

Air conditioning system

w ■#

I
Si 3 4
>15 6 6
5

57-58 56tT?~56i?
■©- 7.5 AMI
0
1
Hiiv
10 - 18

!2

CAB
0 \ *r

-VS '/ /
o
\ &
30

10L.
DEVI00UI0A
v 9
2-ÿ-4 30AMP) Vo
1 7
6
1
Si 2
14
16AMP
8
% A
B'
C
A
c

f r <y

I
c
18
Y :
i
H
M
B

11 13 17
y

12 y7T€ÿ
15
Fig.12-10

A
16
 CAB

Air conditioning system

1 - A/C temperature regulator
2 - Relay switch
3 - Temperature potentiometer
4 - Cab air re-circulation switch
5 - Cab air re-circulation actuator
6 - Switch
7 - Air conditioning compressor clutch
8 - Cab air re-circulation
9 - Relay
10 - Light switch
11 - Battery power source
12 - Power supply from ignition key
13 - Resistance
14 - Fan
15 - A/C no-ice thermostat
16 - A/C warning light
17 - Fan switch
18 - A/C two pressure level switch
19 - A/C temperature governor

10 - 19
 CAB

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

10 - 20
 CAB

CHAP. 10

Air conditioning system

INDEX

Sect. 4 Special tools............................................................................10-22

10 - 21
 CAB

Sect.4 - Special tools

Special tools
To recover, empty, recharge, check for leaks and the
pressures in the air conditioning circuit, it is neces-
sary to contact a specialized centre or to use an ap-
pliance able to carry out all the required functions.
Various brands are available on the market and each
comes with its own instruction manual which should
be carefully read and complied with.
The place where work is carried out on the air condi-
tioning system must be well ventilated. It is forbidden
to smoke or use naked flames.
Prepare the system for emptying after having opera-
ted the engine at a 1000 rpm rate for a few minutes
with the air conditioner at "maximum cold" position.
Now turn off the air conditioner, turn off the engine
and connect the emptying appliance to the compres-
sor valves (1-2 Fig.14-10).

10 - 22
 CAB

Special tools

c?
C
o,

i' xv
V \
)
1

Fig.13-10

•>N

}t
l5> 1 2

:c
?>' (( C n
\ y/m
<> ;(
1/ ri
Fig.14-10
era K

10 - 23
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CHAP. 11

INDEX

Sect. 1 General description and technical specifications. ............... 11-3

1-1 General description ............................................................. 11-4
1-2 Technical specifications ....................................................... 11-5

Sect. 2 Wiring diagram. .............................................................................. 11-7

2-1 Main wiring diagram ............................................................ 11-8
2-2 Cab wiring diagram ........................................................... 11-10
2-3 Control panel wiring diagram ............................................ 11-12
2-4 Sensor locations ................................................................ 11-13

Sect. 3 Fuses to protect the system and relays. ............................... 11-17

3-1 Fuse boxes ........................................................................ 11-18
3-2 Relays................................................................................ 11-19

11 - 1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

11 - 2
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CHAP. 11

General description and technical specifications

INDEX

Sect. 1 General description and technical specifications.

1-1 General description .............................................................. 11-4

1-2 Technical specifications ........................................................ 11-4

11 - 3
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

General description and technical specifications

1-1 General description
The electrical circuit mounted in the tractors is the 12
Volt type with negative ground powered by an alter-
nator mounted on the left-hand side of the tractor. The
alternator has a max power rating of 500 W at an en-
gine rate of 2600 rpm and has a built-in automatic
voltage regulator. The starter motor is mounted on the
left-hand side of the tractor, has a continuous power
delivery of 2.9 kW and features automatic pinion en-
gagement by means of an electromagnet.
The electric circuit is protected against short-circuits
or excessive power draws by fuses enclosed in boxes
and installed in three separate points of the tractor,
i.e.:
1- on the left-hand side of the panel
2- on the cab roof
3- in the battery compartment
Seventeen indicator lights on the control panel moni-
tor the operation of all components in the circuit.

11 - 4
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

General description and technical specifications

1-2 Technical specifications
BATTERY
Type “Maintenance free” (in compliance with SAE J 537)
Voltage rating 12 V
Starting pick-up when cold at -18° C in 30 sec 750 A
Capacity for 20 hours 95 Ah
Capacity reserve 170 Minutes

ALTERNATOR
Make Iskra or Marelli
Type 55 Ah
Max power at 2600 rpm engine rate 500 W
Regulator built-in

STARTER MOTOR
Make Nippondenso / Iskra
Model 6281-100-010 / 11130520
Voltage rating 12 V
Continuous power 2.9 kW(3 HP)

LIGHTS
Front
Headlights 45/50 W double light bulb
Side lights 5 W bulb
Turn indicators 21 W bulb
Work phases 55 W halogen bulb

Rear
Side lights 5 W bulb
Turn indicators 21 W bulb
Brake lights 21 W bulb
License plate light 5 W bulb
Work phases 55 W halogen bulb

Instrument panel
Indicator lights (17) 3 W bulb
Control panel lighting 2 W bulb

11 - 5
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Notes

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

11 - 6
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CHAP. 11

Wiring diagram

INDEX

Sect. 2 Wiring diagram.

2-1 Main wiring diagram for version with electronic power lift ................ 11-8
2-2 Main wiring diagram with mechanical power lift .............................11-10
2-3 Cab wiring diagram ............................................................ 11-12
2-4 Control panel wiring diagram ............................................. 11-14
2-5 Sensor locations ................................................................. 11-13

11 - 7
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Wiring diagram
2-1 Main wiring diagram for version with electronic power lift

Fig.1-11
CO
CO
o> o
s[S]_ slÿUgS s
J
Ds lf[f £ N
XL I
Sisijsi
5 -
$> 53*
gfe:
[ «-T T
44
OJ
as&i n
r'~
I
—'.J

CO

S' 6
co
(O

5ÿ
5C§ÿ
& &
®«Q/
f: 1

J® sÿfci
$

I
3E3— PE
I
S ‘-1 © NS*
©
2
HI J

---
7ÿ arf
9
L®
£ o>
(O
o
r- ?“ÿ IS
vÿ/co
“3 ©l
T
5
i (• r<H ®l
!
s
—Jr £
£

1
l fens
jpg f
!
-|<Q> rijgD
l§5tlffi
r

an 1

!1
6l§ÿ
3E CO -©-
5
■*5,
ISP*
jCn>
UC°> +
!
!
o»2
2
3D®
8DCKr
O—
warn— COu.
o
<c=5M—; -ÿ

K-€4
J”
55-
fp5£c Wts l"#' CD
r*

3 StTÿ 2A *
»-—

-*<&3>
8“*
t£ tÿnn
0
n @] CB
£
„6ÿ1 A
v-v]>
s 8-ÿ3 leg so S]s
©

JW3 1
>8
iC=?»iÿ

site <n> VWÿI

1-2
Co>
6=3
©
CN
~fvWHr
—KA/S/Hÿ
-VvVH
-SnPsi **. cr

O
£=?>
CO
£
V_ I D

11 - 8
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Main wiring diagram for version with electronic power lift

1 - 12V battery 62 - Rear window wiper motor
2 - Cigarette lighter 63 - Rear window wiper switch
3 - LH main beam 64 - Windscreen wiper motor
4 - RH main beam 65 - Windscreen wiper switch
5 - License plate light 66 - Window washer kit
6 - Rotating beacon 67 - 4WD and Fast-Run switch
7 - Rotating beacon switch 68 - Relay K6 for 4WD and Fast-Run
8 - Clock (on request, only on certain markets) 69 - Basic solenoid for 4WD and Fast-Run
9 - Interior cab light 70 - Solenoid for 4WD and Fast-Run
10 - RH loudspeaker 71 - Fast-Run off/on switch
11 - LH loudspeaker 72 - Safety relay K5 for 4WD and Fast-Run
12 - Radio 73 - Front axle steering angle switch
13 - Antenna 74 - Switch for PTO proportional to ground speed
14 - LH rear side light 75 - PTO engaging switch
15 - RH rear side light 76 - PTO solenoid and PTO brake
16 - LH front side light 77 - Air conditioning/ventilating relay
17 - RH front side light 78 - Air conditioning temperature regulator
18 - LH rear turn indicator 79 - A/C compressor electromagnetic coupling
19 - RH rear turn indicator 80 - Air conditioning relay
20 - LH front turn indicator 81 - Electronic temperature governor
21 - RH front turn indicator 82 - Temperature potentiometer
22 - Hazard light switch 83 - Fan
23 - 7-pin trailer power socket 84 - Resistance
24 - PTO hazard light 85 - Switch for cab air re-circulation
25 - Horn 86 - Actuator for cab air re-circulation
26 - Light switch 87 - Re-circulation commutator
27 - Glow plugs 88 - Air conditioning switch
28 - Ignition switch 89 - Fan speed switch
29 - K3 starting safety relay 90 - Demisting thermostat
30 - K4 starting enabling relay 91 - Faulty air conditioner indicator LED
31 - Safety switch 92 - Two-level pressure switch
32 - Motor stop solenoid valve 93 - BOSCH electronic power lift plant
33 - Starter motor 94 - Electronic power lift control panel
34 - Parking brake switch 95 - Electronic power lift solenoid valve
35 - Buzzer to indicate low pressure in hydraulic circuit 96 - Shock absorber
36 - Low pressure circuit pressure sensor 97 - Draft sensor
37 - Brake fluid sensor (in certain markets) 98 - Position sensor
38 - Trailer brake oil pressure sensor (only on certain markets) 99 - Lh external lift button
39 - Alternator 100 - Lh external lowering button
40 - Engine rpm sensor 101 - Rh external lift button
41 - Instrument panel 102 - Rh external lowering button
42 - Engine oil pressure sensor
43 - Engine air filtre clogging sensor Cable colours
44 - Blockage sensor for filtre on intake A - Orange
45 - PTO shaft RPM sensor B - White
46 - Forward speed sensor C - Pink
47 - Fuel level probe D - Grey
48 - Engine water temperature sensor E - Green
49 - Ignition key operated light relay F - Blue
50 - LH brake switch G - Yellow
51 - RH brake switch H - Light blue
52 - LH brake light M - Brown
53 - RH brake light N - Black
54 - Diff lock solenoid valve R - Red
55 - Diff lock switch V - Purple
56 - K4 diff lock relay
57 - K1 field light relay 7-pin trailer electrics socket
58 - Front field light switch 1- LH turn indicator; 2 - Not used; 3 - Ground; 4 - RH turn
59 - Front field lights indicator; 5 - RH rear side light; 6 - Brake lights; 7 - LH rear
60 - Rear field light switch side light
61 - Rear field lights

11 - 9
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Wiring diagram

2.2 Main wiring diagram for version with mechanical power lift

$© szSF
28
"fffT
J lM3
1
A
29iMp 32 33 S 38 39
Wd®
Si
30
if#
is 36
!J

_ 40

23 i

J
D.( B

r:
4W
#—
34
G>

fi 11 1

]n

w M4 ■
_«• Jl
*
( =&<
35
Ep|fl41
21 46*-r l ■<» »»

jdsjiss
___ÿ_

'm C—3 5A

$F7 feUffp | HCT

22
20 I 48

+ ;
49 iP 50
_ ? F5I 18
T1 ft!
[6®
1Z
3i I F1

jF16 IFI5
'S' 'S' 1
J 1
F17 F18

w
VS/'ÿ'VS'
tMp
A F19

Fl/J Flÿ 13 14

W\f& TiÿTÿ12 3C
'“fpa I
T - 54

3 4 9 ! r S3
P;
10
F1ÿjlÿ11c T

6
ia M mM
7 53 55

IP* # !*'? -1
8

Fig.2-11

11 - 10
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Main wiring diagram for version with mechanical power lift

1 - 12V battery Cable colours
2 - Cigarette lighter A - Orange
3 - LH main beam B - White
4 - RH main beam C - Pink
5 - License plate light D - Grey
6 - Rotating beacon E - Green
7 - Rotating beacon switch F - Blue
8 - Interior cab light G - Yellow
9 - LH rear side light H - Light blue
10 - RH rear side light M - Brown
11 - LH front side light N - Black
12 - RH front side light R - Red
13 - LH rear turn indicator V - Purple
14 - RH rear turn indicator
15 - LH front turn indicator
16 - RH front turn indicator 7-pin trailer electrics socket
17 - Hazard light switch 1- LH turn indicator; 2 - Not used; 3 - Ground; 4 - RH turn
18 - 7-pin trailer power socket indicator; 5 - RH rear side light; 6 - Brake lights; 7 - LH rear
19 - PTO hazard light side light
20 - Horn
21 - Light switch
22 - Glow plugs
23 - Ignition switch
24 - K3 starting safety relay
25 - K4 starting enabling relay
26 - Safety switch
27 - Motor stop solenoid valve
28 - Starter motor
29 - Parking brake switch
30 - Buzzer to indicate low pressure in hydraulic circuit
31 - Low pressure circuit pressure sensor
32 - Brake fluid sensor (in certain markets)
33 - Trailer brake fluid pressure sensor (in certain markets)
34 - Alternator
35 - Engine rpm sensor
36 - Instrument panel
37 - Engine oil pressure sensor
38 - Engine air filter clogging sensor
39 - Blockage sensor for transmission oil filter on intake
40 - Switch for PTO proportional to ground speed
41 - 4WD switch
42 - Independent PTO engagement switch
43 - Independent PTO relay
44 - Fuel level probe
45 - Engine water temperature sensor
46 - K7 light relay
47 - LH brake switch
48 - RH brake switch
49 - LH brake light
50 - RH brake light
51 - K1 field light relay
52 - Front field light switch
53 - Front field lights
54 - Rear field light switch
55 - Rear work lights

11 - 11
 %

2.3 Cab wiring diagram

T 1

2 1 (11C
T
o III it
5 6

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Wiring diagram
3 4 1C
l AN!
O'
rti *
RAUO
?MP

— (H H °
7AM>
(fi
CO
5E
o
LO O 91 <ZL 2C
11 - 12

o
31 53a 31b 53 31
ALT.SX ALT.OX
-6—— o —

frlTOPA.OX ftLTOPA.SX 7
1
oi 1
oi
2 A, 6

9 (QOAM'PT) 3 7? <> 3 7
lf= «=!! = !=4
LJJk'F ell* -4 4 V 8ll
+ 8 o-o

1 >
(ÿQIOAMPÿ) O

i
Fig.3-11
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Wiring diagram

1 - Power supply
2 - Clock
3 - Power supply after ignition key
4 - Radio
5 - Rear window wiper
6 - Front window wiper
7 - Windscreen wiper and washer kit
8 - Light switch
9 - Power supply after ignition key

11 - 13
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Wiring diagram
2-4 Control panel wiring diagram

B7

+i—i (LED 16
35
36 37

-•
B9
\ LED (KW>. ggy <B33-£
RPM
+0S ®
i i

B8 B16
4
r6'
[24 J29 J26 J30 J28 J23 22 ]21 120 Tl9 J8 [17
fo) ©@ r +
•

B5 B3 B13 B14 B12

B1 B19 B11 B10 B4 B20 B28 B29 B21 B30 B22 B31
MO)b oo3 (HP
!5 .31 [27
B

Fig.4-11
B15>

16 - Digital indicator of tractor ground speed and PTO RPM rate, (only digital instrument panel)
17 - Alternator control indicator light
18 - Engine oil pressure indicator light
19 - Air filter control indicator light
20 - Hydraulic oil filtre clogging indicator light
21 - Indicator light for low pressure in hydraulic circuit
22 - Indicator light for hand brake and brake oil reservoir level
23 - Indicator light for trailer brake oil pressure
24 - 4WD engaged indicator light
25 - Main beam indicator light
26 - Synchronized PTO indicator light
27 - PTO engaged indicator light
28 - Diff lock engaged indicator light
29 - Vacant - Not used
30 - Indicator light for Fast-Run and fast steering function engaged
31 - Turn light indicator light
32 - 1st trailer turn indicator light
33 - Tractor side light indicator light
35 - Revolution indicator and hour counter
36 - Fuel level indicator
37 - Engine water temperature indicator and alarm indicator light

11 - 14
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Wiring diagram
2-5 Sensor locations

a a
i Q m 1
2
- PTO RPM sensor
- PTO clutch switch sensor
®g 3 - Hydraulic oil filtre sensor
4 - Reverse shuttle sensor
[

Fig.5-11

4
2
\
%
0 / 50nÿ°JSÿ.
/ >tfF 1
SRP

*
5?
,n . + ■♦ ♦ -¥~ -B-

3 rz \ t =U9

Fig.6-11

11 - 15
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Wiring diagram
Sensor locations
I

t-r±
§ §
/
\

s i 5
6
- Sensor for steering angle exceeding 35°
- Engine oil pressure sensor
7 - Engine RPM sensor
5 8 - 18 bar pressure solenoid sensor

iÿ=
7 9
10
- Tractor speed sensor
- Fast ratio sensor
11 - Engine water temperature sensor
12 - Fuel level sensor
4- ■4-
Fig.7-11

6 7 8
\
I z
12
n
U
H

f He o ! fl
u ►«

\/£J

11/c I
D i
10
TZ

Fig.8-11

11 - 16
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CHAP. 11

Fuses to protect the system and relays

INDEX

Sect. 3 Fuses to protect the system and relays.

3-1 Fuse boxes ........................................................................ 11-18

3-2 Relays................................................................................ 11-19

11 - 17
%

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Fuses to protect the system and relays
3-1 Fuse boxes
L
5
c

The tractor's electrical system is protected against

yi

short circuits and overloads by a set of fuses housed

in boxes and installed in three distinct points of the
•A

tractor
1 - In the battery compartment (one 100 Ah fuse) (Fig.
9-11)
2 - On the lh side of the instrument panel (Fig.11-11)
3 - On cab roof (Fig.10-11)
FUSES CIRCUITS PROTECTED Amp
C
(5)

Fuse box A (Fig. 0-11)

1 Vacant - Fig.9-11
2 Vacant -
3 Vacant -
4 Electronic lift power 5
4m
*

5 Cigarette lighter 15
£
TO
U <10 a

A
°u®r

6 Electronic lift power 10

nWn

7 Brake lights 15
8 Differential locking 5
_l

9 PTO - PTO brake 7.5

<0

s
©

10 4WD and Fast-Run 5

11
12
Rotating beacon
Horn, steering switch
7.5
7.5
B
13 RH main beam 7.5
14 LH main beam 7.5

V
©

U
o>
15 RH lower beam 7.5
16 LH lower beam 7.5
17 Front/rear left side lights 7.5
18 Front/rear right side lights license plate light 7.5 Fig.10-11
19 Clock - radio - air re-circulation
and air conditioning switch 7.5
20 Hazard lights 15
21 Air conditioner controls 7.5

(Id,
22 Air conditioner and fan power 30

unn (700 D00 #

23 Safety relay, ignition switch 5

o
24 7-pin trailer socket 15

ijm

-vKJitnÿCOM-*
25 Instrument panel and line below ignition

sxaSÿStf
35 5 5 5S5
key 7.5
26
27
Fuel cut-out valve
Interior cab light and services
5
10
A

ssgsasB

»3g»<
28 Field light power 30

"II
M1 Ignition switch 80

I Isnsi 1
nflun
5 S 5
M2 Services 60

pi
M3 Alternator B+ 80
M4 Glow plugs 60 Fig.11-11

o
11 - 18
 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Fuses to protect the system and relays

FUSES CIRCUITS PROTECTED Amp

Fuse box B (Fig. 10-11)

1C Windscreen wiper washer 7.5
2C Rear window wiper washer 7.5
3C Windscreen wiper 10
4C Rear window wiper 10
5C Vacant -
6C Vacant -
7C Vacant -
8C Vacant -
9C Front field lights 10
10C Rear field lights 10
11C Interior cab light and radio 7.5

3-2 Relays
MICRORELAY
RELAYS CIRCUITS POWER DRAWS

K1 Field lights 10-20 Amp

K2 Vacant -
K3 PTOP, starting safety relay 10-20 Amp
K4 Differential lock 10-20 Amp
K5 Fast-Run 10-20 Amp
K6 4 WD 10-20 Amp
K7 Lights below ignition key 10-20 Amp
K8 Air conditioning 10-20 Amp
K9 Vacant -
KA Power relay 10-20 Amp
KB Vacant -

11 - 19